Operating Instructions

CHARTPILOT 93xx
CONNINGPILOT 93xx
Software Version 5.45

For systems with ATLAS radars and SAM Electronics radars

(9xxx and 1000 series)

Item No.: ED 3032 G 232 Revision: 11 (2007-05) Order No.: 300004941

 This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, including
those relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be
reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party without
our prior permission in writing.
Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.
querverweis
SAM Electronics GmbH
D - 22763 Hamburg

Service
Customer Support Center

Telephone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Telefax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
e-mail: [email protected]

b_cp_eti.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions General Safety Precautions

General Safety Precautions

when Using the CHARTPILOT

The CHARTPILOT combines nautical data from the planning stage right up to voyage monitoring and, if
necessary, automatic track control, and displays these data in context at various workplaces.
This increases the safety of ship-handling and reduces the workload of the bridge personnel.
However, the use of the CHARTPILOT does not release the operator from the obligation to handle the
ship in accordance with the rules of good seamanship, i.e. to monitor the course, speed and position of
the ship regularly with all other available aids too and to check that the navigation system is working prop-
erly.

Even when this modern navigation equipment is being used, non-

observance of the safety precautions can lead to unnoticed devia-
tion from the planned track, thus causing danger to shipping.

When the CHARTPILOT is being used, the following points must be observed:
1. The CHARTPILOT may be used and operated only by qualified personnel who have been trained to
operate the system.
2. Operators must continually keep themselves informed about the nautical situation of the ship and
about the status of the system.
3. Alarms (visual alarms, acoustic alarms, messages) provide information that is relevant to safety. The
Alarms displayed on the CHARTPILOT relating to the nautical situation and to faults in the system
and in the sensors and/or actuators connected to it must be observed.
When alarms occur, the operator must immediately obtain a clear overview of their causes, the
system status and possible reactions of the system, and - if necessary - must immediately take all
of the necessary actions for avoidance of possible danger.
Only then may alarms be cancelled.
4. Before electronic charts fed into the CHARTPILOT are used, they must be checked by the operator
to make certain that they are in agreement with the official charts.
5. The courses planned or displayed by means of the CHARTPILOT must be continuously checked by
the operator with regard to traffic safety and taking account of the official charts.

Notes about system functions (for further details, see individual documents of the connected items of
equipment):
• Drift compensation by a TRACKPILOT (if there is one connected) takes place in particular modes
only.
• Position data are dependent on the accuracy and proper functioning of the selected position sensor.
• Connected position sensors must fulfil the standard IEC 61162-1.
• ARPA target data are directly dependent upon the accuracy and proper functioning of the selected
speed sensor and the gyro compass.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 3

b_cp_esh.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
General Safety Precautions Operating Instructions

4 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_esh.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Contents

List of Contents

General Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Part I Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 CONNINGPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.1 Switching the CHARTPILOT On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2 Switch-Over of the Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Part II CHARTPILOT as ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.2 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.3.1 Individual Elements and their Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.3.2 Operating Procedure using the Keyboard instead of the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3.3 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.3.3.1 Hierarchical Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.3.3.2 Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.3.4 Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3.5 The Function Overview (Tree) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4 Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.5 The Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.5.1 Division of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.5.2 The Basic Menu Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.5.3 The Navigation Data Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.5.4 The Chart Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5.4.1 Division, Individual Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5.4.2 Graphic Elements and their Setting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.5.5 Data Displays and Pilot Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 5

b_cp_eiv.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
List of Contents Operating Instructions

3.5.6 The Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

3.5.7 The Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.6 Using the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.7 Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.1.1 Switching On the Display of the Chart and Selecting the Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.1.2 Chart Types: Legal Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.1.3 Vector Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.1.4 Raster Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.2.1 Adapting the Display and Illumination to Suit the Room Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.2.2 Adjusting the Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.2.3 Selection and Setting of the Raster Chart to be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.2.4 Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.2.4.1 Monitoring Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.2.4.2 Planning Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.2.5 Setting the Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.3.1 Defining the Objects to be Displayed in the Vector Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.3.2 Defining the Depth Contours to be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.3.3 Switching the display of the User Chart Objects on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.4 ECDIS Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
4.4.1 Track Monitoring: Own Ship against the System Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
4.4.2 Chart Monitoring: Own Ship against Vector Chart and Own Safety Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.4.2.1 Monitoring on the Basis of a Vector Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.4.2.2 Monitoring against User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4.4.3 Chart Monitoring: System Track against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.4.4 Track Monitoring: Depth Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.4.5 Anchor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
4.6 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4.6.2 Treatment of the AIS Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.6.3 Specifying / Viewing Own AIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4.6.4 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4.6.5 Long-Range Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.6.6 AIS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.7 Trial Manoeuvres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.8 Marking an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.9 The Marking of Position Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.10.1 Course Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.10.2 Selection of the Speed Sensor; Input of Own Speed and Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.10.3 Selection of the Position Sensor; Settings to Determine the Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.10.4 Manual Correction of the System Position (Position Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.10.5 Setting the Time Zone and Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5 Voyage Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

6 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eiv.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Contents

5.1.1 General Information about Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.1.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of the Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5.1.3 Preparing the Generation or Modification of the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5.1.4 Setting Up the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5.1.5 Generating Waypoints by Means of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
5.1.6 Generating Waypoints Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.1.6.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.1.6.2 Generation of Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5.1.7 Generating Waypoints with the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5.1.8 Editing Waypoint Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.1.9 Checking of Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.1.9.1 Geometrical Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5.1.9.2 Check against the Electronic Chart and the User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.1.9.3 Computation of Sailing Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.1.10 Completing the Generation of the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.1.11 Printing Out Track Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.1.12 Generating Waypoint Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.2.2 Editing of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5.2.3 Editing of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.2.4 Editing of Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.2.4.1 Editing Danger Highlights and Feature Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.2.4.2 Editing Anchor Watch Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.2.5 Editing of Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
5.4.1 Characteristics of Own Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
5.4.2 Preparation for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
5.4.3 Editing of Own Chart Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5.4.4 Ending the Editing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5.5.1 General Information about Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5.5.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.5.3 Generating Map Lines and Symbols by Means of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
5.5.3.1 Map Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.5.3.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
5.5.4 Generating Map Lines and Symbols with the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
5.5.4.1 Map Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
5.5.4.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.5.5 Generating Map Lines Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.5.6 Generating Symbols Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.5.7 Completing the Generation of the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5.5.8 Printing Out Map Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

6 Voyage Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

6.1 Voyage Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
6.1.1 Defining the System Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
6.1.2 Planning and Achieving the Voyage Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6.1.3 Generating the Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6.1.4 Printing Out Time Schedule Planning Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.1.5 Activating the Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 7

b_cp_eiv.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
List of Contents Operating Instructions

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
7.1.1 Starting, Background Operation and Ending the Chart Maintenance Subroutine . . . . . . . . . 236
7.1.2 The World Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
7.1.3 Switching Over to Planning Display Mode at a Marked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
7.2.1 The Menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
7.2.2 Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
7.2.3 Transferring and Updating the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
7.2.4 Deleting the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
7.2.5 Deleting the Product List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
7.2.6 Selecting the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
7.2.6.1 Selection according to Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
7.2.6.2 Selection according to Navigational Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
7.2.6.3 Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
7.2.7 Displaying Information about a Cell / Chart / Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
7.2.8 Creating a Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7.2.9 Checking the Available Hard-Disk Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7.2.10 Errors Caused by Dirty CDs / CD Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7.3.1 Permits for Licensed ENC cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
7.3.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from CD to Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
7.3.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . . . . 258
7.3.4 Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.3.5 Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
7.3.6 Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
7.3.7 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.3.8 Deleting ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
7.3.9 Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.3.10 Check of the ENC Cells Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.3.11 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of the IHO ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7.3.12 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of C-MAP ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7.4 Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.5 Data Maintenance of Own Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7.6.1 Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.6.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.6.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . . 283
7.6.4 Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7.6.5 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.6.6 Deleting ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
7.6.7 Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7.7.1 Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7.7.1.1 First Procurement of Subscription Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7.7.1.2 First Procurement of Purchase Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7.7.1.3 Subsequent Procurement of Further Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7.7.1.4 Installing the Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7.7.1.5 Useful Information about Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.7.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from CD to Local Database . . . . . . . 297
7.7.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . . 298
7.7.4 Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
7.7.5 Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

8 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eiv.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Contents

7.7.6 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

7.7.7 Deleting CM-93/3Pro Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
7.7.8 Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.7.9 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of C-MAP ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.8.1 Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.8.2 Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7.8.3 Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
7.8.4 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
7.8.5 Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.1.1 Maintaining Order in the Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.1.1.1 Track, Map and Waypoint Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.1.1.2 Files of the User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8.1.2 Data Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8.1.3 Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
8.1.4 Transfer of Track and Waypoint Files by E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.1.5 Reception of Track Files from a Connected Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.1.6 Converting Objects of the Map into User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
8.1.7 Specifying the tracks and maps which can be loaded on the 9xxx radars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.2.1 Generating and Using the Text Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.2.2 Management of the Text Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
8.3 Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.3.1 Performing of Voyage Recording, Management of Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.3.2 Replay of a Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.4 Protocol Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
8.6 Determining the System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
8.7 Making System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

9 Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Part III CHARTPILOT as Conning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

10 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

11.1 The Navigation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.2 The Docking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
11.3 The Keel Clearance Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
11.4 The Data Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 9

b_cp_eiv.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
List of Contents Operating Instructions

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
12.1.1 Performing a Position-Reckoning Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
12.1.2 Calculating the Rendezvous Point of Two Ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
12.1.3 Solving Current-Sailing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
12.1.4 Support for the Measured Mile Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
12.1.5 Determining the Data of Sunrises and Sunsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
12.1.6 Determination of the Data of Fixed Stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
12.2 Generating the Pilot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

A Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

A1 Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
A2 Checking the Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
A3 Check of the Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
A4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

B Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

H Keyboard Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

10 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eiv.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Figures

List of Figures

Fig. 1-1 CHARTPILOT equipment in a system with radar 1000 series (here: a NACOS xx-4) . . . . . . . 26
Fig. 1-2 CHARTPILOT equipment in a system with radar 9xxx series (here: a NACOS xx-3) . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 3-1 The various operating devices for cursor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 3-2 The top menu appearing in the right-hand side strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 3-3 Basic structure of a menu from the menu hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 3-4 Example of a context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 3-5 The tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT in the NACOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 3-6 The Tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT without TRACKPILOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 3-7 Screen division in Chart Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fig. 3-8 The basic menu line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fig. 3-9 The navigation data line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fig. 3-10 The Presentation > Display Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fig. 3-11 The chart area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 3-12 The Presentation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 3-13 The menus Radar/AIS and Radar/AIS > Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 3-14 Recognition of collision course by means of relative vector presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fig. 3-15 Symbols on a map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fig. 3-16 The Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 3-17 Next Leg Data in the Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fig. 3-18 The Track/Schedule Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fig. 3-19 The Conning Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 3-20 The Docking Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fig. 3-21 The Pilot > TRACKPILOT and Pilot > SPEEDPILOT menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 3-22 The alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 3-23 The info box and the data box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 4-1 The Brightness menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 4-2 The Range field with Range List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 4-3 Marking of different and excessively small cell-scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 4-4 Scale field with chart selection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 4-5 The Chart > Raster Chart Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 4-6 Overview display of a raster chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 4-7 Display in the modes True Motion and Centered Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 4-8 Display in the modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 4-9 The Presentation > Display Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 4-10 The Presentation > Coordinate System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 4-11 The Chart menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 4-12 The menus Chart > Visibility Groups and ... > Visibility Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fig. 4-13 Diagram of the depth contour system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 4-14 The menu Chart > Depth Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 4-15 The Alarm Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 4-16 Generating the Chart Alarm with the Guard Sector (example: SAFETY CONTOUR Alarm) . 109
Fig. 4-17 The Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig. 4-18 The elements for determination of position, bearing and range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 4-19 Button and display field of the EBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 4-20 Button and display field of the VRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 4-21 Context menu of the chart area and measurement line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fig. 4-22 The Waypoint Zoom-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 4-23 The menu Radar/AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 4-24 The menu Radar/AIS > Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 4-25 The menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Fig. 4-26 The menu Radar/AIS > Read Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 4-27 The menu Radar/AIS > Send Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 11

b_cp_eav.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
List of Figures Operating Instructions

Fig. 4-28 The menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Fig. 4-29 The menu Radar/AIS > Channel Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fig. 4-30 The Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 4-31 Display of a Trial Manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 4-32 The Chart > Events menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fig. 4-33 The Drop Event menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fig. 4-34 The menus Chart > Position Fixes and ... > Drop Position Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fig. 4-35 The Sensor Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 4-36 The Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fig. 4-37 The Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu (systems with radar 1000 series) . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fig. 4-38 The Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu (systems with radar 9xxx series) . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 4-39 The Sensor Settings > Position Sensor and ... > 2nd Position Sensor menus . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fig. 4-40 The Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fig. 5-1 Shape of the track in the case of course changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fig. 5-2 The menu Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fig. 5-3 The CHARTPILOT display for the editing of tracks in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fig. 5-4 The Tracks > Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Fig. 5-5 Dialog Box for Calibration of the Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fig. 5-6 The Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fig. 5-7 Grids of the digitizable projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 5-8 The waypoint list in the Text Mode menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fig. 5-9 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fig. 5-10 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 5-11 The input area in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fig. 5-12 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Edit Several Waypoints menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 5-13 The Check Track dialog box and the Extreme Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fig. 5-14 The Tracks > Edit > Store menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fig. 5-15 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Print menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Fig. 5-16 The Tracks > Waypoint File > Edit menu with the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fig. 5-17 The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fig. 5-18 The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects after pressing the button Symbols . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fig. 5-19 The menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fig. 5-20 Examples of the Object Feature Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fig. 5-21 The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fig. 5-22 The Select Manual Update Chart Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fig. 5-23 The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fig. 5-24 The Own Chart Editor menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 5-25 The Load (New) Cell box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fig. 5-26 The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fig. 5-27 The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit > Skin of the Earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fig. 5-28 The Maps menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Fig. 5-29 The Maps > Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fig. 5-30 The CHARTPILOT Display for the editing of maps in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fig. 5-31 The line point list in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fig. 5-32 The input area of the line point data in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 5-33 The symbol list in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 5-34 The input area of the symbol data in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 6-1 The Tracks > Set System Track menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Fig. 6-2 The Tracks > Select Next Waypoint menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fig. 6-3 Example of a Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fig. 6-4 The Tracks > Time Schedule > Print menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Fig. 6-5 The Time Schedule menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fig. 6-6 Beginning of a Passage List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fig. 7-1 The Chart Maintenance display with the world chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fig. 7-2 The selection menu in the Chart Maintenance display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

12 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eav.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Figures

Fig. 7-3 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Fig. 7-4 Dialog box for displaying the progress and errors/warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Fig. 7-5 Selection according to navigational purposes in a Transfer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fig. 7-6 Selection menus for the selection by cell / chart numbers and agency codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 7-7 The Info box of the Chart Maintenance subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fig. 7-8 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 7-9 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fig. 7-10 Deletion a Product list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Fig. 7-11 The product list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Fig. 7-12 The dialog box ENC Cell Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fig. 7-13 The dialog box ENC Conversion Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fig. 7-14 The dialog box with detailed information about an ENC cell file of the ENC database . . . . . 275
Fig. 7-15 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Fig. 7-16 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Subscription Licence . . 292
Fig. 7-17 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 7-18 The menu ... > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Install Licences Manually . . 294
Fig. 7-19 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Fig. 7-20 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Fig. 8-1 The Utilities > Backup/Restore menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fig. 8-2 The Data Transfer From Harddisk menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fig. 8-3 The dialog box Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fig. 8-4 The Data Transfer to Harddisk menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fig. 8-5 The Transfer - Overwrite menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fig. 8-6 The menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Fig. 8-7 The CHARTPILOT Display for the Text Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Fig. 8-8 The Utilities > Text Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Fig. 8-9 The Voyage Recording menu and its submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Fig. 8-10 The Voyage Recording menu (replay functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fig. 8-11 Example of a Protocol Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Fig. 8-12 The Peripheral Devices > Printer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Fig. 8-13 The Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu . . . . . . . . 336
Fig. 8-14 The Utilities > System Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fig. 8-15 The Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fig. 8-16 The Status Log Page and the ... > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu . . . 339
Fig. 9-1 The alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fig. 10-1 The Tree in Conning mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Fig. 11-1 The Navigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Fig. 11-2 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part, Open Sea Display Mode . . . . . . . . . 361
Fig. 11-3 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part in Harbour Display Mode . . . . . . . . . 362
Fig. 11-4 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Open Sea Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Fig. 11-5 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Harbour Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Fig. 11-6 Navigation Page, example of a different propulsion combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fig. 11-7 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fig. 11-8 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fig. 11-9 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Fig. 11-10 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Fig. 11-11 The Docking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Fig. 11-12 The Docking Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Fig. 11-13 Keel Clearance Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Fig. 11-14 The Keel Clearance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Fig. 11-15 The Track/Schedule Display in the Conning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Fig. 11-16 The Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fig. 11-17 The NACOS Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Fig. 11-18 Example of an External Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fig. 12-1 The Calculator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 13

b_cp_eav.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
List of Figures Operating Instructions

Fig. 12-2 The Calculator > Reckoning menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Fig. 12-3 The Calculator > Rendezvous menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Fig. 12-4 The Calculator > Current Sailing menu (problem 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Fig. 12-5 The Calculator > Measured Mile menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Fig. 12-6 The Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Fig. 12-7 The Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Fig. 12-8 CHARTPILOT Display for generating the Pilot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Fig. 12-9 The Pilot Card > Nautical Checklist menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fig. 12-10 Example of a pilot card generated on the CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Fig. E-1 Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fig. F-1 Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Fig. G-1 Displays and controls of the UPS (model series DLG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

14 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eav.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Abbreviations

List of Abbreviations

= In this area, a context menu can be opened. 1)

A
AFC automatic frequency control
AIS Universal Shipborne Automatic Identification System
A/N keyboard alphanumeric keyboard
ARCS Admiralty Raster Chart Service
ArSp Arrival Speed

B
BAS Bridge Alarm System
BSH Bundesamt für Seeschifffahrt und Hydrographie
BT bottom track

C
CD centered display
CEN centered
CIRM Comité International Radio-Maritime
CM (Track) Control mode
CMG course made good
COG course over ground
CP CHARTPILOT
CPA closest point of approach
CrsL course limit
CSE course
C-UP Course-Up

D
deg degree
DGPS Differential GPS
Dist distance
DistR distance radius
DNV Det Norske Veritas
DNV NAUT-AW DNV nautical safety all waters
DNV-W1 DNV Watch One
DTG distance to go
DTG R DTG radius

E
EBL electronic bearing line
Ec Economy
ECDIS electronic chart display and information system
ENC electronic navigational chart
ETA estimated time of arrival
ETA P ETA profile
ETD estimated time of departure

F
FIX ABS fixed absolute

1)
To be opened with the MORE key; for context menu, see page 45

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 15

b_cp_e01.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
List of Abbreviations Operating Instructions

FIX REL fixed relative

fm fathom
ft feet

G
GC great circle
GEO geographic coordinate
GK Gauss-Krüger
GPS global positioning system

H
HDG heading
H-UP heading up

I
ID identification
IHO International Hydrographic Organization
Interf. interference rejection
INV invalid

K
kt knot, knots

L
Lat latitude
Lon longitude

M
M Map (file)
m meter
mism. mismatched
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
MP MULTIPILOT

N
NCC Navigation Control Console
NGO Norges Geografiske Oppmåling
N-UP North-Up

O
OSD on screen display

P
PC paper chart
PCI Processor Controlled Interswitch
PD pilot data
PIN personal identification number
PlSp Planned Speed
PrSp Profile Speed

R
RAD, Rad radius
RADAR/STBY radar / standby
RCDS raster chart display systems
REL, Rel relative

16 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e01.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Abbreviations

RL rhumb line
RM relative motion
RNC raster navigation chart
ROT rate of turn
ROT Pl rate of turn, Planned Speed
RPM revolution per minute
RTU real time updating

S
SENC system electronic navigational chart
SI Ship’s Interface
SM sailing mode
SMG speed made good
SOG speed over ground
SP SPEEDPILOT
Src source
SRNC system raster navigational chart database
STBD starboard
STD DISP, Std Disp standard display

T
T track (file)
TCPA time to closest point of approach
TM true motion
To WPT to waypoint
TP TRACKPILOT
T&P NMs temporary and preliminary notices to mariners
TRDSTR track distance radius
TRK track
TrkDst track distance
TRKL track limit
TTG time to go
TTG P TTG profile

U
UKHO United Kingdom Hydrographic Office
UPS uninterruptible power supply
UTC universal time coordinated
UTM universal transversal mercatorprojection

V
VDA variable data area
VDR voyage data recorder
VRM variable range marker

W
W waypoint (file)
WAS Watch Alarm System
WOP wheel over point
WP waypoint
WPB waypoint bearing
WPD waypoint distance
WT water track

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 17

b_cp_e01.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
List of Abbreviations Operating Instructions

XTD cross track distance

Z
ZT zone time

18 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e01.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Part I Basics

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 19

b_cp_e1.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

20 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e1.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 1 Overview
Operating Instructions 1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT

1 Overview

1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT

The CHARTPILOT is an item of navigation equipment for the planning, control and monitoring of nautical
ship-handling on the basis of an electronic chart. It is designed as a central unit in the integrated naviga-
tion system NACOS (i.e. in conjunction with the track control system TRACKPILOT 9401), but is also
used without the TRACKPILOT but together with the radars of the 9xxx series and the 1000 series.
If the CHARTPILOT is used in the NACOS, it is possible to select by simple switch-over whether it is to
act as an ECDIS or as a conning display; when used without a TRACKPILOT, it is used only as an
ECDIS:
■ ECDIS
In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT is
the display medium of the ECDIS,
i.e. the electronic chart can be
displayed on its monitor, together
with present data of own ship (posi-
tion, course etc.), the targets
acquired by an ARPA radar and an
AIS system, a safety contour, and
other parameters which serve to
improve safety.
In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT
meets the „Performance Standards
for ECDIS“ defined by the IMO/IHO
and IHO S-52 („Specification for
Chart Contents and Display Aspects
of ECDIS“) if it is operated with offi-
cial electronic charts according to
IHO S-57. The CHARTPILOT is
compatible to and approved
according to Edition 2 of IEC 61174.
■ Conning-Display
(in the NACOS only)
In Conning mode, the necessary
navigation data can be displayed in
the form of a conning display for
normal sailing (Navigation), for
docking manoeuvres (Docking) or
for sailing in shallow water (Keel
Clearance).
Note for the reader in a hurry:
If you wish to get into the functional
details immediately, begin at page 29
or
- for Chart mode: with Section
3.3.5 at page 46,
- for Conning mode: at page 355.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 21

b_cp_e11.fm / 09.07.07
1 Overview CHARTPILOT
1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT is also an ECDIS-based nautical planning and consulting station.
With it, you can conveniently and very precisely generate the planned voyage routes on the basis of
sequences of waypoints and store them as the pre-planned track 1). For the pre-planned track, you can
input the actual time schedule into the CHARTPILOT. Then, when the ship is travelling along the pre-
planned track, the CHARTPILOT computes the speed (Arrival Speed) with which the ship must sail in
order to arrive at the planned time.
For systems with radar 9xxx series: On the CHARTPILOT, you can also generate simple charts (called
"maps") which can be underlaid as a background to the radar picture. 2)
The chart maintenance for the entire system is also performed at the CHARTPILOT. In addition, indi-
vidual chart objects can be edited (known as “User Chart Objects”). In this way, raster charts can be used
for the ECDIS monitoring. Furthermore, with the aid of the optionally installed Own Chart editor, the
CHARTPILOT enables the operator to generate own vector charts.
If there is an AIS system connected, it can be operated fully from the CHARTPILOT and the AIS displays
are shown on the CHARTPILOT. 3)
In Conning mode 4), the CHARTPILOT also offers consulting functions: with the CHARTPILOT, you can
perform position-reckoning calculations, solve water-current tasks, determine data of sunrises and
sunsets or of the fixed stars, or obtain advice in other nautical matters. For example, you can also
generate the pilot card in a simple manner or - in the form of the Text Page - create lists or make notes
which you can at any time display again and print.
In both modes, the CHARTPILOT is also the platform for the Alarm Management function of the navi-
gation activity.
The CHARTPILOT also represents the central database of the system (e.g. for tracks, maps, charts, User
Chart Objects, Text Pages etc.). It makes these data available to those system components that need
but cannot store the data themselves (radar units, TRACKPILOT, SPEEDPILOT, NCC). If several
CHARTPILOTs are installed, the data are automatically stored redundantly on the CHARTPILOTs. The
automatic redundant storage also takes place on MULTIPILOTs 5), if any are installed. 6)

1)
For this term, which has now been standardised, the term Programmed Track is used on older NACOS documents.
2)
Maps are not processed at CHARTPILOTs that are used in systems with radars of the 1000 series. All statements made in these Operating
Instructions about maps only refer to systems with radars of the 9xxx series. Systems with radar 1000 series / with radar 9xxx series: see
page 25
3)
An AIS system can also be connected in such a way that it can be operated only on the radar indicators of the system. In this case, only
the display of the AIS targets and of the Aids-to-Navigation takes place on the CHARTPILOT.
4)
When used without a TRACKPILOT, these functions are available in Chart mode.
5)
A MULTIPILOT is a system combining the properties of a radar unit with those of a CHARTPILOT.
6)
With regard to the details of data storage and data distribution, there are deviations that depend on the system configuration. These are
noted in the following.

22 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e11.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 1 Overview
Operating Instructions 1.2 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants

1.2 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants

The CHARTPILOT station consists of an industrial-quality computer electronics unit (= CHARTPILOT

electronics unit) and a colour monitor, both approved for use on ships, and an operating unit. Frequently,
one CHARTPILOT is used as a console version integrated in the bridge console together with one
CHARTPILOT installed as a desktop version at the chart table for planning purposes.
The CHARTPILOT electronics unit is equipped with a CD drive and a diskette drive.
Each CHARTPILOT station can be extended with additional components so that several workplaces are
created. For this purpose, there are two variants:
- A CHARTPILOT terminal is connected to the CHARTPILOT electronics unit. This terminal consists
of a special terminal electronics unit provided with its own monitor and an operating unit.
Although the CHARTPILOT terminal uses the program running on the CHARTPILOT station, it can
be operated absolutely independently (as long as the station is switched on). CHARTPILOT termi-
nals do not have a CD drive and diskette drive, and can thus be recognized from the outside as
being terminals.
- One or more slave monitors, on which the same display is shown as on the CHARTPILOT station
or terminal, are connected via a video buffer to the CHARTPILOT electronics unit or to the terminal
electronics unit.
- On or more slave monitors are connected to the CHARTPILOT electronics unit via a video buffer,
together with one slave operating unit for each slave monitor. The combination of slave monitor
and slave operating unit is called CHARTPILOT slave terminal in these Operating Instructions.
Each slave terminal has the same functionality as the CHARTPILOT station and can be operated as
an alternative.
Each CHARTPILOT should be supplied with electric power by means of an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS), which keeps the CHARTPILOT running in the event of a ship's mains failure of limited
duration and - in the case of a longer failure of the ship's mains - ensures that the CHARTPILOT is shut
down in the proper way.
The CHARTPILOT can be equipped with a printer for the output of voyage records, waypoint lists etc.
and with a digitizer for the graphic input of coordinates from a (paper) chart.
The CHARTPILOT needs various items of navigation data. Operation of the CHARTPILOT requires the
connection of a position sensor which supplies the ship's position in the form of geographical coordinates
in the chart datum WGS 84, as well as the course and speed; a gyro compass must be connected too.
The connection of the navigation sensors and hence also their operability at the CHARTPILOT depends
on the type of radars installed within the system:
For systems with radar 1000 series: 1) The data of the navigation sensors are passed into the system
(redundantly to a certain degree) via the radar units or the Interface Expander. This process is coordi-
nated by the radar switched as the Sensor Master (see Operating Instructions for the radar) and distrib-
uted via a data bus to all units of the system, and thus also to the CHARTPILOTs. Depending on the
system configuration and operational state, the Sensor Master can be influenced by the CHARTPILOTs
through this data bus, so that the selection and, in part, the adjustment of the navigation sensors can also
be performed for the entire system at the CHARTPILOT.
For systems with radar 9xxx series: 1) The navigation sensors are connected to the Ship’s Interface,
an assembly which is located in one of the radar electronics units. The Ship’s Interface is connected via
the CAN Bus to the radar indicators, from where the operating of the Ship’s Interface and therefore the
selection and, to a certain degree, the adjustment of the navigation sensors is performed for the entire
system, and thus also for the CHARTPILOTs. These operating actions can also be performed at a
CHARTPILOT if it is connected to the Ship’s Interface via a serial interface. Through the use of a sensor
selector switch, this operating possibility can also be assigned to a different CHARTPILOT.

1)
Systems with radar 1000 series / with radar 9xxx series: see page 25

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 23

b_cp_e11.fm / 09.07.07
1 Overview CHARTPILOT
1.3 CONNINGPILOT Operating Instructions

Some of the data needed for the conning displays of the system pass into the system through the
route described above, but most of them enter via the TRACKPILOT electronics unit. For this reason,
many conning displays are only available at the CHARTPILOT when there is a TRACKPILOT in the
system.

1.3 CONNINGPILOT

The CONNINGPILOT is a CHARTPILOT which is used mainly to display conning data. It is often installed
in the central console and is equipped only with a trackball as the operating unit. Apart from the absence
of the keyboard, it has all the characteristics of the CHARTPILOT. Therefore, all statements about the
CHARTPILOT that are made in these Operating Instructions are also applicable for the CONNINGPILOT.
In systems with radar 9xxx series, the CONNINGPILOT often is realized as a CHARTPILOT terminal. It
will normally start in the Conning mode after start-up, but can also be operated in Chart mode.

1.4 Using this Manual

The CHARTPILOT was already developed in 1994 during the emergence of the electronic chart and the
ECDIS standardization as a central element of the Navigation and Command System (NACOS) 1). At the
time, it already fulfilled the same tasks as described in Section 1.1 (insofar as they already existed; for
example, there was no AIS yet).
In the course of the rapid progress in computer technology, the changes in the approval regulations and
the development of new radar generations used in NACOS, the CHARTPILOT was constantly adapted
and kept up to the state of the art. As a result, modifications in operating sequences became necessary
for some functions.
Although not only different hardware platforms but also various operating systems have come into use,
the latest software can run on all existing CHARTPILOTs. These Operating Instructions describe the
operating sequences for all versions of the CHARTPILOT 93xx 2), insofar as they are installed in a
NACOS or together with SAM Electronics radar systems or ATLAS radar systems. 3) They are valid to the
software version stated on the title page. 4)
The CHARTPILOT has a number of functions that either can be suppressed on the service level (for
adaptation to the overall system that is installed) or cannot be realized in all hardware versions or oper-
ating systems. These Operating Instructions describe all possible functions and variants. The fact that
a described function is not available at a certain CHARTPILOT can, as a rule, be recognized through the
lack of the corresponding display/operating elements.
For information about the operating procedures and maintenance functions that are necessary on the
optional printer and the settings on the monitors, please see the manufacturer's documents which are
also supplied. For operating of the UPS, see page 32.
There are a number of special features for ships approved by the BSH and also for those classified by
DNV as being configured for DNV-W1 (from 2001 for DNV NAUT-AW). In the following, these are indi-
cated by the remark "For ships with BSH approval" or "For ships with DNV approval" respectively.

1)
The core component of the NACOS is the track control system TRACKPILOT 9401, which is operated via the radar units of the NACOS.
2)
The xx in the type designation stands for the various existing versions (CHARTPILOT 9300, 9320, 9330).
3)
For CHARTPILOTs that are not installed together with SAM Electronics or ATLAS radar systems, see the Operating Instructions
ED3032G312.
4)
On page 340, there is a description of how to display the software version currently installed in the CHARTPILOT.

24 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e11.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 1 Overview
Operating Instructions 1.4 Using this Manual

Some properties of the CHARTPILOT depend on which radar systems 1) are installed. Wherever there are
any differences, they are indicated as follows:
For systems with radar 9xxx series means all cases in which the CHARTPILOT is installed together
with radars of the series 9xxx (RADAR 9xxx, RADARPILOT 9xxx, MULTIPILOT 9xxx 2)). This also refers
to cases in which, besides series 9xxx radars, radars of the series 1000 are also installed and also to
systems including a TRACKPILOT, thus constituting a NACOS xx-2 or NACOS xx-3.
For systems with radar 1000 series means all cases in which the CHARTPILOT is installed together
with radars of the 1000 series (RADARPILOT 1000, CHARTRADAR 1000, MULTIPILOT 1000) and there
is no radar of the series 9xxx. This also includes systems with a TRACKPILOT, thus constituting a
NACOS xx-4.

1)
The various types of radar and thus the diverse NACOS versions can be recognized at the operating units of the radar indicators; the
arrangement of the trackball is the most striking feature:

or

Radar 9xxx (also MULTIPILOT 9x22) Radar 9xxx (also MULTIPILOT 91xx) Radar 1000
(NACOS xx-2) (NACOS xx-3) (NACOS xx-4)

2)
MULTIPILOT 9xxx stands for all MULTIPILOTs used in NACOS xx-2 and NACOS xx-3. Where necessary, a distinction is made between
MULTIPILOT 9x22 (= MULTIPILOT in NACOS xx-2) and MULTIPILOT 91xx (= MULTIPILOT in NACOS xx-3).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 25

b_cp_e11.fm / 09.07.07
1 Overview CHARTPILOT
1.4 Using this Manual Operating Instructions

Radar indicator 1 CONNINGPILOT Radar indicator 2 CHARTPILOT 1

1)

1)

Display 1) Display
electronics unit CHARTPILOT electronics unit CHARTPILOT
Radar electronics unit Radar electronics unit
interconnection box interconnection box
CAN Bus

Ethernet LAN

Navigation
sensors
(Example)
CHARTPILOT 2
Gyro UAIS
Log 1 Digitizer
DEBEG
Position 1 3400
Wind/weather sensor

Gyro
Log 2
Position 2 Printer
Echosounder
Interface
other sensors, Expander
with standardised or CHARTPILOT
non-standardised
interfaces electronics unit

Alarm system

1)
CHARTPILOT 1 TRACKPILOT
CHARTPILOT 2 electronics unit

Engine Interface

Engine SPEEDPILOT
Propeller
Thruster
etc. TRACKPILOT
UPS 1 UPS 2 electronics
Uninterruptible Steering gear
power supply Rudder feedback unit
Steering mode selector switch

1) equipment present in NACOS only

Fig. 1-1 CHARTPILOT equipment in a system with radar 1000 series (here: a NACOS xx-4)

26 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e11.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 1 Overview
Operating Instructions 1.4 Using this Manual

Radar indicator 1 CONNINGPILOT Radar indicator 2 CHARTPILOT 1

1)

1)

1)
Radar CHARTPILOT Radar CHARTPILOT
electronics unit terminal electronics unit
electronics unit electronics unit

CAN Bus

Ethernet LAN

UAIS
DEBEG
3400 CHARTPILOT 2
Digitizer

Navigation
sensors
(Example)

Gyro
Ship’s Printer
Log 1
Log 2 Interface
Sensor
Position 1
selector switch
Position 2
Echosounder (contained
in one of the
Wind sensor radar CHARTPILOT
Alarm system electronics electronics unit
Radar units)
Weather station

1)
TRACKPILOT
CHARTPILOT 1 electronics unit
CHARTPILOT 2
Engine Interface

Engine SPEEDPILOT
Propeller
Thruster
etc. TRACKPILOT
UPS 1 UPS 2 electronics 1) Equipment present
Steering gear
Uninterruptible in NACOS only
Rudder feedback unit
power supply
Steering mode selector switch

Fig. 1-2 CHARTPILOT equipment in a system with radar 9xxx series (here: a NACOS xx-3)

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 27

b_cp_e11.fm / 09.07.07
1 Overview CHARTPILOT
1.4 Using this Manual Operating Instructions

28 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e11.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off
Operating Instructions 2.1 Switching the CHARTPILOT On

2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off

2.1 Switching the CHARTPILOT On

Regarding the power ON/OFF switching, the console versions and the desktop versions are different 1).
For the console versions, the following is applicable:
If you wish to switch the CHARTPILOT on, first check on the monitor of the CHARTPILOT with the
aid of the POWER or ON/OFF switch setting and the POWER lamp (if this exists) to see whether
the CHARTPILOT is already switched on and the screen has simply been set to the dark state. If
the CHARTPILOT is already switched on, you must adapt the screen display to suit the brightness
of the room (see below). However, you must never operate the POWER or ON/OFF switch for the
purpose of „trial and error“.
NOTICE:
When the POWER or ON/OFF switch on the on the monitor of the
console version of the CHARTPILOT is operated, the CHARTPILOT is
switched off again. However, this should only be done after shutting
down the operating system in the proper manner (see Section 2.3).
Otherwise, in a few cases, renewed installation of the program and of the
data might be necessary.
For the desktop versions, the following is applicable:
Depending on the particular installation, switching the CHARTPILOT on is done by operating the
mains power switch on the monitor and/or on the computer, or by switching the supply voltage on in
the ship's electrical supply system. In this case too, once a computer has been switched on it must
not be switched off again until the operating system has been shut down - see the above warning.
When the Log-On display appears after starting of the operating system press the Enter key if Go! is
displayed in the Login: input field. If the Login: input field is empty, enter the letters pcs and press the
Enter key twice. 2) The main program of the CHARTPILOT starts up, and the electronic chart that is suit-
able for the present position appears in the chart area (see Figure 3-11 on page 55). 3)
If a CHARTPILOT terminal is installed: An additionally installed terminal must not be switched on until
the CHARTPILOT station has been switched on in the manner described above. The same procedure is
then used to switch on the terminal.
If slave terminals are installed: The above description applies for the CHARTPILOT station. Slave
terminals can be switched on at any time independently of the CHARTPILOT station.
Switching the other components on: Slave monitors, printer and digitizer can be switched on at any
time independently of the CHARTPILOT.

1) If the CHARTPILOT electronics unit is exposed to very low temperatures (around -15°C), it can happen that the computer does not start
up. The screen then remains dark, or becomes dark after a short time. In this case, the CHARTPILOT must remain switched on for about
30 minutes (in spite of the dark screen) so that the CHARTPILOT will warm up. If the computer is then switched off and is switched on
again after waiting time of a few seconds, it will start up in the normal way.
2)
The CHARTPILOT can also be configured in such a way that its main program starts up without any further inputs.
3)
This also applies for older CONNINGPILOTs. From software version 5.01 onwards, after switch-on of the CONNINGPILOT it starts up in
Conning mode.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 29

b_cp_e12.fm / 09.07.07
2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off CHARTPILOT
2.2 Switch-Over of the Modes Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION

Adaptation to Room Brightness

The basic brightness and, if applicable, the contrast of the screen display can be adjusted directly on
the monitor. An additional differentiated adaptation, including the switch-over of day and night colours, is
described on page 84.
On the membrane keyboard of the console version, the illumination of the keyboard can be adjusted by
means of the keys DIM - and DIM +.

Colour Faults in the Display on Monitors with Cathode Ray Tubes; Degaussing Function
As are result of changes in the magnetic field at the location of the monitor, colour faults might occur in
some areas of the display. To correct them, the Degauss key should be pressed on the monitor.
☞ If this does not lead to success, the reason might be that there are magnetic components or magnet-
ised casings nearby, which will have to be removed from the vicinity or demagnetised.
Depending on the version of the monitor, an automatic time-controlled degaussing function is also
provided.

Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors)

If the display on a TFT monitor has remained unchanged for a long period of time and is then replaced
by a different display, an effect can occur which is known as "ion spotting" in the case of cathode ray
tubes: the previous display is still faintly visible in the form of discoloration. In the case of TFT monitors,
in contrast to monitors with cathode ray tubes, this effect is reversible and therefore cannot be regarded
as a defect. If the monitor is operated for a long time (several hours or days) with a different display, the
discoloration disappears.

2.2 Switch-Over of the Modes

Switching Over to Chart Mode

When Conning mode is switched on, it is possible to switch over to Chart mode at any time by pressing
the function key F1. 1)

Switching Over to Conning Mode

Switching over to Conning mode is done by pressing the function key F2. 1)

☞ In the case of switch-over, the settings of the mode that is not switched on remain stored in the back-
ground. They are available in unchanged form when the mode is called up again.
☞ In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, the CHARTPILOT can be operated in Chart mode only,
and so a switch-over function is unnecessary and is omitted.

1)
Alternatively, the switch-over is performed by means of the function overview (Tree); see page 46.

30 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e12.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off
Operating Instructions 2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off

2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off

Usually, it is not necessary to switch the CHARTPILOT off. If the CHARTPILOT is going to remain
unused for a long time, it is advisable to protect the monitor by reducing the brightness and contrast on
the monitor.
If the CHARTPILOT has to be switched off completely, e.g. because the relevant part of the ship's elec-
trical supply system is going to be switched off, the operating system of the CHARTPILOT computer must
be shut down properly.
NOTICE:
If the CHARTPILOT is switched off without first shutting down the oper-
ating system, the program or data might be destroyed. In such cases, it
might be necessary to re-install the program. Furthermore, the CHART-
PILOT must not be switched off while track, map or waypoint files are
being copied or while files of the electronic chart are being transferred.
Shutting down the operating system: Press Tree button or function key F10; in the display which then
appears, click the button POWER DOWN. A dialog box appears, containing the question Are you sure
you want to shut down the system?
If you really do want to switch off the CHARTPILOT, you now have to press the OK button. As a
result, the program of the CHARTPILOT is stopped and the operating system is shut down. The computer
must not be switched off until the message System halted is shown or the characters >>> appear in the
bottom line at bottom left.
If you do not want to end the program after all, you must press the Cancel button instead of OK.
Switching the CHARTPILOT off: When the message System halted is shown, switch off the monitor
of the CHARTPILOT by operating the POWER or ON/OFF switch on the CHARTPILOT monitor 1). In the
case of the console version, this also causes switch-off of the computer; in the case of the desktop
version, the computer has to be switched off separately, using the computer’s power switch.
If a CHARTPILOT terminal is installed: It does not matter whether the shutting-down procedure
described above is performed at the CHARTPILOT station or at the CHARTPILOT terminal. In both
cases, neither the CHARTPILOT station nor the CHARTPILOT terminal can be used after shutdown has
taken place. However, there are distinctions as regards switching off the mains: The CHARTPILOT
station may only be switched off after the operating system has been shut down, whilst the CHARTPILOT
terminal may be switched off by operating the POWER or ON/OFF switches without any other action.
☞ After the CHARTPILOT station has been switched off, the CHARTPILOT terminal must be switched
off also.
If slave terminals are installed: The above description applies for the CHARTPILOT station. Slave
terminals can be switched off at any time independently of the CHARTPILOT station.
Switching off the uninterruptible power supply: If the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is to be
switched off too (which can really only be necessary in the case of service work), the UPS must not be
switched off until the CHARTPILOT has been switched off.
Switching the other components off: Slave monitors, printer and digitizer can be switched off at any
time independently of the CHARTPILOT.

1)
With some types of monitor which are switched on and off by means of a pushbutton switch, this pushbutton has to be pressed for slightly
longer in order to switch the monitor off.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 31

b_cp_e12.fm / 09.07.07
2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off CHARTPILOT
2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION

Behaviour in the Event of Ship's Mains Failure

If power failure occurs in the ship's mains, the most important components of the CHARTPILOT System
are supplied with power by the UPS. If the type recommended by SAM Electronics is installed, the oper-
ating system of the CHARTPILOT computer is automatically shut down in the proper way before the
voltage of the UPS collapses (in the case of a ship's mains failure lasting for at least five minutes).
☞ The UPS is switched on continuously, and normally needs no operating actions. Appendix E to G
describe which displays appear on the UPS types DPL 100, DPL150 and DLG during proper oper-
ation, and which displays appear there in the case of a fault. For other UPS types delivered by SAM
Electronics, this is described in the corresponding Technical Manuals.
☞ Newer types of UPS are connected via an interconnection box; this has a change-over switch with
which the UPS can be bypassed. If UPS should develop a fault, this change-over possibility can be
used to power the CHARTPILOT directly from the ship’s mains, by setting the switch to position I.

Behaviour in the Case of a Malfunction in the Chart or Conning Mode

If a malfunction occurs in the CHARTPILOT in the modes mentioned, and if this malfunction cannot be
corrected by means of the operating actions described in this document, an attempt can be made to
correct the fault by aborting and restarting the CHARTPILOT program:
If you press the Tree button 1) on the CHARTPILOT station, click the EXIT button in the display which
then appears, and answer the question which then appears by clicking the OK button,
- the main program of the CHARTPILOT and all running programs are stopped,
- the log-on display appears after a short time and the program has to be restarted - see page 29, 2)
- after the start program has started up completely, the standard display appears in Chart mode 3).

1)
Operating of the buttons see page 38
2)
The program is restarted automatically after a waiting time of 30 seconds if the configuration is appropriate for that purpose.
3)
or in Conning mode in the case of the CONNINGPILOT.

32 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e12.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Part II CHARTPILOT as ECDIS

In this part, the functions offered by the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode are described.

In the following instructions for the operating procedure of these func-

tions, it is assumed that the CHARTPILOT is switched to Chart mode.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 33

b_cp_e3.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

34 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e3.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.1 Overview

3 General

3.1 Overview

When the CHARTPILOT is switched to Chart mode, it performs the functions of an ECDIS. If it is being
operated with an official electronic chart as per IHO S-57, it fulfils the „Performance Standards for ECDIS“
defined by IMO/IHO, as well as „IHO S-52 (Specifications for Chart Contents and Display Aspects of
ECDIS)“.
In addition to the functions stipulated for an ECDIS by these documents, namely:
- Transfer and conversion of the files of the Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) to the databases 1)
of the system
- Display of the ENC data 2) contained in the database as an electronic chart, including display and
monitoring of the safety contour.
- Input of the official updates of the electronic charts
- Editing of update files for the existing ENC files (manual ENC update)
- Editing of objects which supplement the electronic charts (User Chart Objects)
- Display of own ship's position
- Voyage planning (generation of pre-planned tracks)
- Voyage monitoring
- Recording of voyage data (voyage recording)
- Alarm messages
- The setting of event markers and position fixes
the following functions too are available in Chart mode 3):
- Transfer and conversion of the files of the ARCS charts 4), issued by the UKHO / Admiralty Raster
Chart Service to the databases 1) of the system
- Transfer and conversion of the files of other vector chart types to the databases 1) of the system
- Alternative display of the ARCS charts and the other vector chart types
- Anchor watch
- Display of the targets of a connected ARPA radar
- Operating procedure for the connected AIS system and display of the AIS information
- Trial manoeuvres on the basis of the own ship symbol and of the targets
- Selection and setting of the navigation sensors
- Voyage planning (generation of the passage plan and the maps)
- Management of the files created in the voyage planning process
- Generation, display and management of lists and notes (Text Pages)
- Making print-outs
- Management of the recorded voyage data (voyage recording)
- Replay of the recorded voyage data
- Storage of TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT parameterisation
- Determination and saving of system parameterisations

1) In the relevant standards and regulations, the database of the ENC is also called SENC (System Electronic Navigational Chart), and the
database of the ARCS charts is called SRNC (System Raster Navigational Chart Database). Throughout these Operating Instructions, the
entire set of data contained in a hard disk drive and relating to a chart type is called a database. A local database means the database
of the equipment that is being operated.
2)
The electronic chart formed by these files is a vector chart (see Section 4.1 from page 79 onwards). In the following, this vector chart is
also included under the term vector chart together with the other vector chart types.
3)
In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, only Chart mode exists, in which a number of the functions described in Sections 11 and 12
are then available additionally - see page 357.
4)
The electronic chart formed by the ARCS charts is a raster chart (see Section 4.1 from page 79 onwards). In the following, this electronic
chart is in fact called a raster chart.
☞ Where both vector charts and raster charts are meant, the term electronic chart is used in the following.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 35

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.2 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard Operating Instructions

- Determination of system version

- Making system settings.

3.2 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard

The desktop version of the CHARTPILOT has an ordinary commercial computer-keyboard supple-
mented by a mouse or by a separate trackball. The console version of the CHARTPILOT is either
equipped with a trackball or with a membrane keyboard containing an integrated trackball.
The operating procedure can be performed entirely by means of the operating elements appearing on the
screen. These mainly consist of buttons grouped in the form of menus according to subjects. The input
unit used to operate these operating elements is the trackball or mouse 1); the cursor, which appears on
the screen and can be moved by means of the trackball, serves as a pointer.
This cursor control by means of the trackball is used not only for the menu operating procedure but also
(for example) for the graphic editing of tracks or for the marking of elements of the vector chart.
The trackball in its various forms, and the mouse, each have three keys (see Figure 3-1):
- The key on the left has the main function and is called the DO key throughout this Operating
Instructions.
- With the key in the middle, information about the element marked with the cursor can be called up.
This key is called the INFO key throughout this Operating Instructions.
- The key on the right has further functions which depend on the position of the cursor („context-
sensitive“ functions). It is called the MORE key throughout this Operating Instructions.
☞ In the case of the trackball which is also used for the radar 1000 series (the illustration on the right),
the middle key is the DO key so that this configuration is the same for the CHARTPILOT and the
radar indicators. 2)

DO key INFO key DO key

MORE key 2)
INFO key DO key MORE key
MORE key
INFO key MORE key
INFO key INFO key

DO key MORE key

DO key

Trackball on the Mouse (examples) Separate trackball (examples)

membrane keyboard

Fig. 3-1 The various operating devices for cursor control

1)
The functionalities of the trackball and mouse are identical. Wherever the trackball is mentioned in these Operating Instructions, the mouse
can be used in the same way for the desktop version.
2)
The key is labelled with Cancel. In these Operating Instructions, it is referred to as the MORE key, because its function is identical to the
MORE keys of the other operating devices.

36 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.2 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard

The function keys of the keyboard are mostly assigned to functions of the basic menu line and have the
following meanings:
Further
Operating element Function information
F1 (= CHART) Switches to the Chart mode page 30
F2 (= CONNING) Switches to the Conning mode page 30
F3 None
F4 None
F5 (= Event marker) Sets an event marker and opens the Drop Event box page 131
F6 (= Range) Calls up the Range field to set the range page 86
F7 (= Set Center) Specifying the centre of the chart excerpt displayed page 95 and 96
F8 (= Std Disp) Switches the chart area to its standard display page 56
F9 (= Brightness) Calls up the Brightness field for adapting the display to suit page 84
the room brightness
F10 (= Tree) Calls up the tree page 46
F11 (= Menu) Switches the Menu display on and off page 42
F12 None
Print Screen or Prt SC Prints out the screen content on the connected printer page 77

☞ In Appendix H, you will find a template for the function keys F1 to F12 of the keyboard for the
desktop version; you can fix this template to the keyboard until you have become familiar with the
function of the keys.

Switch-Over between CHARTPILOT Terminal and Slave Terminals

If there are slave terminals (monitors including operating units, see page 23) installed, at any time only
one of the terminals is active.
An inactive unit is activated when, on that trackball or mouse, the DO key is pressed for three seconds.
As a result, the operating unit that has been active up until that time is de-activated.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 37

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen Operating Instructions

3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

☞ If you are already familiar with graphic man/machine interfaces, you can skip Sections 3.3.1 to 3.3.4.

3.3.1 Individual Elements and their Operation

Cursor
The cursor generally indicates the screen position on which the pressing of a key has its effect, especially
the keys DO, INFO and MORE.
The cursor is moved by means of the trackball 1).
Depending on its position and its current function, the cursor can have various forms:
Cursor outside the chart area, and in the case of context menus that have been opened; in this
form, it is used to operate operating elements and to open input fields.
Cursor inside the chart area; in this form, it is used to mark a displayed object or a position.
☞ The geographical position occupied by the cursor in the chart area is displayed in the
Cursor display - see page 53.
This form indicates that the CHARTPILOT computer is busy with a task which permits a limited
operating procedure only.
In the case of special functions, the cursor can also have other forms, e.g. when a dialog box is being
moved or when the size of a dialog box is being changed - see page 46.

Buttons
The most important operating elements are the virtual keys („buttons“) which appear on the screen.
To operate buttons, the cursor is moved onto the button by means of the trackball and the DO key is then
pressed for a short time. In the following, this procedure is called „clicking the button“ or „pressing the
button“.
Buttons whose names are displayed with weaker contrast (= insensitive display) cannot be pressed.
Buttons can have various logical switching functions. Depending on the switching function, they have
different appearances:
Corresponds to a button which does not engage in the
pressed position. The relevant function is triggered by clicking.

Corresponds to a switch with the settings on and off. The

function displayed is „on“ when the square is red. Switching
over is done by clicking.

1)
You can change the transmission ratio between the trackball movement and cursor movement - see page 340.

38 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

Corresponds to a selector switch with several settings. Under

the name of the switch, all possible settings of the switch are
shown. The selected setting of the switch is indicated by a red
diamond. Switching over is done by clicking the desired
setting of the switch. In some cases, the switch settings that
can be selected alternatively are spatially separate, e.g.
Monitoring and Planning in the Presentation > Display
Mode menu - see Figure 4-9 on page 95.

This too corresponds to a selector switch with several

settings. However, under the name of the switch, only the
selected setting of the switch is displayed on the button.
Switching over is done by making the other settings of the
switch visible by clicking the button, and by then clicking the
appropriate setting of the switch.

By clicking of these arrow keys, the value displayed in the

data display field between them can be increased or
decreased in steps.

Sliding Controller
With a sliding controller, the value of a parameter can be
changed by moving the cursor onto the „handle“ of the
controller, pressing the DO key, and moving the handle to the
desired value by means of the trackball while keeping the DO
key pressed. The set value is displayed above the handle.
Fine adjustment can be carried out with the aid of the arrow
keys after the sliding controller has been provided with the
red focus frame by clicking.

Input Fields

Editing cursor These fields, in which data are entered or texts are input
(edited), can be recognised from the editing cursor.
For editing, the field must be clicked. The editing process is
described in Section 3.4.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 39

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen Operating Instructions

Lists
Particular items of data are displayed in the form of lists. The
data displayed cannot be changed in the list. However, they
can be manipulated line by line (e.g. transferred, copied,
deleted). Which of the manipulations are possible depends
on the list and is described in the relevant section of these
Operating Instructions. The first step of such a manipulation
is always the marking of the lines concerned:
Marking a single line: Click the line.
Marking several consecutive lines: Position the cursor on
the uppermost line that is to be marked, press the DO key,
and - while keeping the DO key pressed - move the cursor to
the last line that is to be marked. Release the DO key.
Most lists have a defined height on the screen. If the list contains more lines than can be displayed, oper-
ating elements appear to the right of the list, by means of which all lines are made visible by scrolling:
- With the triangles, clicking causes the list to be scrolled down or up by one line (or continuously to
the end or beginning in the case of prolonged pressing).
- After positioning of the cursor on the bar, the list can be shifted (scrolled) by any desired amount by
means of the trackball, with the DO key kept pressed.
- By clicking of the gap situated between the triangle and the bar, the list is scrolled down or up by a
distance equal to the height of the window.
Almost all lists are wide enough to allow the longest line contained in them to be displayed. If the width
of a list is not sufficient for this, the list can be scrolled sideways by means of the operating elements
described. The operating elements for this then appear below the list. The operating procedure is the
same as for the scrolling of lines.

40 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

3.3.2 Operating Procedure using the Keyboard instead of the Trackball

Operating elements can also be operated with the keys of the keyboard. The trackball operating proce-
dure described in Section 3.3.1 is the method most quickly learned and provides rapid operation, but in
some cases, operation by means of the keys is very useful.
☞ In contrast to the use of the trackball, operation by means of keys is impossible in some cases. In
the case concerned, try out the effect of the keys.
Basically, operation takes place in two steps:
- First of all, the operating element or the input field must be marked.
- After that, the operation takes place on the marked operating element, or the input takes place in
the input field.

Marking the Operating Element and the Input Field

The marked element is the one with a red frame, called the focus frame. The focus frame can be set
on a different element of the group with the aid of the arrow keys.
☞ The following is generally true: Only when an operating element is provided with the focus frame can
that element be operated or used. (Incidentally: This applies also to operation by means of the track-
ball. When clicking occurs, the focus frame is set automatically, and then - if it is a button - this
button if pressed.)
It is possible to change over between the groups by means of the Tab key or by simultaneous pressing
of the keys Shift + Tab. In lists and in large input fields, the focus frame can be moved in even larger
steps by means of the keys Pg Up (or Page up), Pg Dn (or Page down), Home, End, Ctrl + Home,
Ctrl + End.
If an operating element or an input field cannot be marked in this way, the trackball must be used.
Marking of List Lines
A desired line can be marked by means of the arrow keys. Several lines can be marked simultaneously
by keeping the Shift key pressed while operating the arrow keys. Exit from the list by pressing the Tab
key.

Operation of Operating Elements

Buttons
A button provided with a focus frame can be operated by means of the space bar.
A button marked with a default frame is operated by means of the Enter key.
☞ The default frame is displayed as an additional, grey-shaded, recessed frame. The program specifies
which button is given a default frame.
Sliding Controllers
These are moved by means of the arrow keys. They can be moved in larger steps by simultaneous
pressing of the keys Ctrl + arrow keys or by means of the keys Home and End.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 41

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen Operating Instructions

3.3.3 Menus

A menu is a summary of the functions which can be selected as alternatives depending on the operating
situation.
There are two different menu systems:
- The hierarchical menus form a consistent system for the operation of (almost) all functions. The
complete set of hierarchical menus has a systematic structure. They are therefore particularly suit-
able for learning the operating procedure. For these reasons, these Operating Instructions are based
throughout on the use of the hierarchical menus.
- For some functions, context menus exist. They permit very fast operating procedures but only offer
a very limited overview of all available functions of the set of functions being operated.

3.3.3.1 Hierarchical Menus

In the case of the hierarchical menus, while in a menu you can call up a lower-order menu, and so on
until the desired function or display is obtained.
The menu at the top of this hierarchy of menus if the basic menu line (see page 51, which is always
present and from which other menus can be called up.
All other hierarchical menus appear on the right-hand side of the screen after being called up from the
basic menu line, and cover each other completely except for the name of the higher-order menu. Thus,
of the entire menu hierarchy, only one menu (in addition to the basic menu line) is visible, together with
the names of all higher-order menus. Figure 3-3 shows the basic structure of such a menu by means of
an example.
In particular operating sequences, in addition to the hierarchically structured menus a further menu is
displayed at the same time, and disappears when the inputs requested in it have been made.

Switching the Menu Display On and Off

In the CHARTPILOT main program (see page 78), the display of the (hierarchically structured) menus
can be switched on and off by pressing the function key F11 (or the Menu button situated in the basic
menu line) The switched-on menus completely cover the switched-on data display (if any) on the strip at
the right-hand side.

Operating Procedure for the Menus

Every setting which you want to make (input of data, changing of the display etc.) basically takes place
in the following steps:
1. Necessary in the CHARTPILOT main program only: If you have not already done so, switch the
Menu display on by pressing the function key F11 or the Menu button. After switch-on of the Menu
display, the menu that was operated last is always displayed at first.
2. Call up the menu from which the desired setting can be made. This is done by changing to lower-
order or higher-order menus:
Changing to a lower-order menu: All buttons having three dots after their names call up a lower-
order menu (or a dialog box - see page 46). When such a button is pressed, the corresponding menu
appears.

42 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

Calls up the Presentation menu, see Figure 3-12 on page 57.

Calls up the Radar/AIS menu, see Figure 3-13 on page 61.
Calls up the Chart menu, see Figure 4-11 on page 100.
Calls up the Sensor Settings menu, see Figure 4-35 on page 136 (this is present
only in the stand-alone version)
Calls up the Alarm Settings menu, see Figure 4-15 on page 107.
Calls up the Tracks menu, see Figure 5-2 on page 151.
Calls up the Maps menu, see Figure 5-28 on page 207.

Calls up the Pilot menu, by means of which the submenus TRACKPILOT and
SPEEDPILOT (see Figure 3-21 on page 73) can be called up.

Calls up the Peripheral Devices menu, by means of which the submenus Printer (see
Figure 8-12 on page 334) and Digitizer (see Figure 5-6 on page 159) are called up if
these devices are connected.

Fig. 3-2 The top menu appearing in the right-hand side strip

Changing to a higher-order menu: Above the name of the displayed menu, there are buttons with
the names of all higher-order menus. By pressing one of these buttons, you change over to the
corresponding higher-order menu.
To reach the desired menu, there are three different cases:
- The menu being displayed is of a higher order than the desired menu: Single or multiple
change-over to the lower-order menu.
☞ In these Operating Instructions, the menu names are preceded by the names of all higher-
order menus (separated by >).
- The menu being displayed is of a lower order than the desired menu: Direct change-over
to the desired menu.
- The menu being displayed is neither of a lower order nor of a higher order than desired
menu: First of all, change over to a menu which is of a higher order than the desired menu.
☞ Alternatively in this case, it is also possible to switch the menu on via the function overview
(see page 46).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 43

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen Operating Instructions

All higher-order menus; they can be called up directly by clicking.

Menu name of the current menu

Here, the desired settings can be made.

All types of operating element described in Section 3.3.1 can occur.
Alternatively, the relevant lower-order menu can be called up with a button whose
name ends with ... .

In many menus, the bottom line contains buttons which make valid the data that are
input in this menu, which reset the inputs to the data that were valid previously, or by
means of which the menu is exited (for details, see below).

Fig. 3-3 Basic structure of a menu from the menu hierarchy

3. Make the desired settings.

☞ If there is a Reset button or a Cancel button in the bottom line of the menu, you can retrieve
the data that were valid previously:
Reset button: The values that have been valid since the last take-over are retrieved; the menu is not
exited.
Cancel button: The values that have been valid since the last take-over are retrieved; the menu is
exited.
4. Take over the settings, i.e. make them valid and, if appropriate, leave the menu. For these purposes,
the buttons situated on the left (and in some cases in the middle) in the bottom line of the menu are
used:
☞ If there is no button on the left in the bottom line of the menu, the setting made becomes valid
at the latest when the menu is exited, without any need for further activity.
OK button: The settings are valid; the menu is exited (the higher-order menu appears).
Apply button: The settings are valid; the menu is not exited.
☞ To make the function clearer, the button which makes the setting valid has a special name in
some menus. For example, in the Tracks > Delete menu, the button which makes the settings
valid (i.e. which irretrievably deletes the track files in this case) has the name Delete.
☞ The Exit button which exists in some menus switches off the subroutine which has generated the
menu; see page 78.

44 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

3.3.3.2 Context Menus

1)
Context menus are situated behind particular display fields and areas . They consist of a heading (if
appropriate) and the buttons situated below it:
- Buttons with a triangle on the right: These call up a subordinate menu.
- Buttons without a triangle: These execute the relevant function and close the menu.
You can operate context menus in two ways:
Operation by clicking: By clicking for a short time with the MORE key into the display field or the area,
the menu is opened and remains open. The buttons contained in it are operated by clicking with the DO
key. This method is suitable when the trackball is used.
☞ In lists, the list entry must have been marked previously (by means of the DO key) so that the func-
tions of the context menu have an effect on it.
To close the menu without execution of a function, click at any place outside the menu.
Operation by pulling: Put the cursor onto the display field or into the area, press the MORE key, keep
it pressed, pull the cursor to the desired menu-position, and release the key on the desired function. This
method is particularly fast when the mouse is used.
To close the menu without execution of a function, release the key over the heading or over a button with
a triangle.

1. Clicking of the Chart Status field in the navigation data line with the MORE key opens this menu.

3. Clicking of a button without a triangle by means of

the DO key causes the relevant function to be
performed. The menus are closed.

2. Clicking of a button with a triangle

by means of the DO key opens a
lower-order menu. Clicking outside a context menu closes the menu.

Fig. 3-4 Example of a context menu

1)
These fields and areas are marked with the symbol in the graphics of this document.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 45

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen Operating Instructions

3.3.4 Dialog Boxes

If the program wishes to tell you something, e.g. if it wants to warn you about an operator error, an appro-
priate message or question appears in a dialog box. The bottom line of the dialog box contains one or
more buttons with which you can acknowledge the message or answer the question. The meaning of the
buttons is similar to that of the buttons in the bottom line of a menu. For example, the Cancel button
cancels the operating step which led to the call-up of the dialog box, and makes the dialog box disappear.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Shifting of Dialog Boxes

Some dialog boxes can be shifted on the screen by marking the title of the menu or dialog box with the
cursor and moving the title by means of the trackball while keeping the DO key pressed.

Changing the Size of Dialog Boxes

The size of some dialog boxes can be changed:
Increasing/decreasing the size of the dialog box in one axis: Position the cursor at the edge or at the
corner, press the DO key, and while keeping it pressed pull the box to the desired size.
☞ Most dialog boxes of variable size have a small, square button at top right in the frame (see Figure
3-23 on page 75). With this button, you can set the dialog box to its maximum size. By clicking
again, you can reset the dialog box to the size selected previously.

3.3.5 The Function Overview (Tree)

You can obtain an overview of the top two menu levels and thus of the available main functions. From
this function overview - called tree - you can call up these main functions directly and you can also switch
over to the Conning mode. The Conning mode has a corresponding tree (see Figure 10-1 on page 358).
In the function overview (see Figure 3-5), the following are displayed:
- the buttons of the Chart and Conning modes (top row)
- the buttons of the menu positions of the top menu
and below each of these
- the buttons of the menus of the next lower order.

Switching the Tree On

This is done by pressing the Tree button 1).

Switching to a Different Mode (in the NACOS only)

Press the relevant mode button. As a result, a switch-over to the desired mode takes place. The Tree is
switched off, and the menu used last appears in the new mode.

Directly Calling Up a Menu

Press the button of the desired menu. As a result, the tree is switched off and the desired menu is
switched on.

1)
The function key F10 has the same function.

46 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

Switching Off the Tree

The display of the tree can be exited by pressing the CANCEL button (without switch-over of menu or
mode).

The buttons of the top menus of the current mode and of the
menus of the next lower order.
Clicking switches the mode over. By clicking, the corresponding menu is displayed and the
- Button with red inscription: the current mode display of the function overview is switched off.

Navigation
data line;
see page 51

Tree

Basic menu line;

see page 51

Prepares the switch-off (at the mains) of Switches the tree off without a functional
the CHARTPILOT; see page 31 switch-over taking place.

Stops all programs that are running, and This button switches independent subroutines on.
after presentation of the Log-On display it - Button with red inscription: subroutine is switched on
independently starts the main program of the
CHARTPILOT (see page 32).

Fig. 3-5 The tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT in the NACOS)

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 47

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen Operating Instructions

☞ The tree shown here does not necessarily have to be identical to the one you will find on the
CHARTPILOT, since the tree is adapted to suit the system configuration concerned. Its appearance
when the CHARTPILOT is being used without a TRACKPILOT is illustrated here.

Fig. 3-6 The Tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT without TRACKPILOT)

48 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.4 Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts

3.4 Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts

Input by means of Trackball and Virtual Keyboard

When numbers or texts are to be entered with the aid of the trackball (e.g. because there is no keyboard),
this is done via a keyboard which appears on the screen as soon as an input field is clicked with the
MORE key. The input possibilities of this virtual keyboard correspond to the requirements of the input field
that is clicked.
Example 1: Input of the time zone. When the input field (in the menu Sensor Settings
> Date/Time - see page 145) is clicked with the MORE key, the virtual numeric
keyboard opens up. In its input field, the time zone that is currently entered appears.
Click into this input field behind the number that is to be changed, remove the number
by means of the button , and input the new number. When you then press the OK
button, the entry is taken over. If the original entry is not to be changed after all, click
on the old value and press the OK button, or click into some other input field.

Example 2: Input of the Waypoint Notes: When you click on

the input field Waypoint Notes (see page 152) by means of
the MORE key, the virtual A/N keyboard opens up; it is
designed to look like an ordinary commercial keyboard.
Special feature: When you press the OK button, the entry is
taken over. With the Line button situated above that, another
line (which is still empty) is entered.
By clicking on a virtual keyboard with the MORE key, you
close this keyboard without the entries being taken over.

Input via Membrane Keyboard or Ordinary Commercial Keyboard

An input can take place when the relevant input field is marked. The editing cursor is in insert mode at
first and has the form shown on page 39. The data input or the editing can now be performed with the
aid of the keyboard. By pressing of the keys, the characters are entered additionally at the position of the
editing cursor.
With the Delete key and the Backspace key, the character to the left of the editing cursor is deleted. If
larger passages of text are to be deleted, they can be marked beforehand by moving the trackball while
keeping the DO key pressed. Double clicking of the DO key marks the entire word or number.
By means of the Insert key, the editing cursor can be switched over to the replace mode (and back to
the insert mode):
It is then displayed as an inverted character-field. The new character replaces the character that is being
displayed inverted due to the editing cursor.
The editing cursor is controlled by means of the arrow keys.
In single-line input fields, the data input is completed with the Enter key or the Enter button. If a button
is provided with the default frame, that button too is triggered by this. Some input fields are exited by
means of the arrow keys .
Most input fields can be exited by pressing the Tab key or by simultaneous pressing of the keys Ctrl +
Tab.
When clicking occurs, many one-line input fields appear inverted, i.e. their entire content is marked. In
the case of these input fields, you can
- completely replace the existing entry by inputting a character
- cancel the marking by operating one of the arrow keys , so that you can then change the
existing entry.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 49

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

In multi-line input fields, a new line is generated by means of the Enter key.
Most input fields can be exited by pressing the Esc key; the data not yet stored are not taken over.

3.5 The Screen

☞ So that this section can also be used as a brief reference during work with the CHARTPILOT, details
which you will only understand when you have attended an operator training course, or if you have
already studied all of these Operating Instructions, are stated without further explanation. If you are
currently in the process of getting to know the operating procedures of the CHARTPILOT, you should
at first simply skip the points that are unclear to you.

3.5.1 Division of the Screen

The screen is generally divided into the following areas:

- Navigation data line
- Chart area
- Basic menu line.

When the presentation of a data display is switched on, it covers the right-hand side strip of the chart
area.
When a menu is called up, it likewise covers this side strip.

Navigation data line;

see page 51

Chart area; see Side strip

page 53

Basic menu line;

see page 51

Fig. 3-7 Screen division in Chart Mode

50 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

3.5.2 The Basic Menu Line

The right-hand side of the basic menu line contains buttons which must be accessible at all times and
are therefore displayed continuously.
As long as work is being done with the main program (Chart mode), operating and display functions
appear on the left which should be directly accessible at all times for the work in the chart area.

When raster charts are used:

Scale field
Scale of the displayed raster
chart or plan.
When vector charts are used: For operating procedure, see
page 88 Switches the menus displayed in the chart area
Range field into the background and switches the chart area
Size of the displayed area (if to the standard display; see page 56.
range rings are switched on,
the spacing of the range rings
is additionally displayed on the
right); for operating procedure,
see page 86. Switching the menu
Adaptation to room on and off; see
Is displayed when the main brightness; see page 42
program is being operated page 84.

Operation and display In the Monitoring display modes: Operation and display of
of the bearing line; see Position of own ship's symbol in the VRM; see page 113
page 113 the chart area; see page 95
In Planning display mode: Calling up the tree display;
Selection of the displayed chart- see page 46
excerpt; see page 96

Fig. 3-8 The basic menu line

3.5.3 The Navigation Data Line

The navigation data line displays the most important navigation data and the status data of the electronic
chart displayed in the chart area. It also contains (on the far right) the button displayed as a horn symbol,
with which the alarm list (see page 74) can be called up.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 51

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

Vector charts: Display groups displayed on the chart

- Chart OFF = display of the vector chart is switched off
- Permit warn. (yellow background) = The chart might not be up to date - see page 256
- Non-HO data (yellow background) = Type ENC is selected and a cell is displayed which was not officially issued
by a hydrographic organisation. (The edge of this cell is hatched in orange.)
- Licence (yellow background) = The chart might not be up to date - see page 295;
(red background) = CM-93/3Pro Licence Expiry Date has been reached. Only cells of the navigational purposes
General Background and World can be shown after this time.
Display groups displayed on the chart; see page 99:
- All = all display groups
- Standard = standard selection
- Base = minimum scope
Raster charts:
- Chart OFF = display of the vector chart is switched off
- Datum mism. on yellow background = The position data contained in the chart are not
Red background: Status WGS84 position values.
Licence exp. exists. - Licence exp. = Licence has expired; the chart might not be up to date - see page 281.
- ENC avail. = An electronic chart of type ENC is available for the area displayed.

In the Monitoring display modes: Raster charts: Units of

Selected position sensor; measurement of the
The supplement INV = selected posi- Vector charts:
depth information - No display = ideal purpose of
tion sensor is transmitting invalid data m: = metres
or none at all; position is determined the chart
fm: = fathoms - Overscaled = purpose with too
by dead reckoning ft: = feet
In Planning display mode: small a scale is used
The word Planning appears (See page 86)
Selected electronic chart Raster charts:
Yellow background: - Bad Scale = chart or plan with
A Position adjust has been Display mode: larger scale is available; see
performed - see page 144 Monitoring display modes: page 88
For systems with radar 9xxx H-UP = Head-Up - Zoom x 2 = chart or plan is
series: Red characters: C-UP = Course-Up displayed enlarged
The message CHECK Compass course N-UP = North-Up
POSITION OFFSET has not (present actual CD = Centered Display
been acknowledged. The course from the TM = True Motion
position offset has not been gyro compass)
reset - see page 144 and source Planning display mode:
PLAN Chart Status field

Present rate of turn

computed from the change
in the compass course Display of the course and speed
In the Monitoring display modes: vectors:
Own position Speed (SMG) and course - REL = relative to own ship
In Planning display mode: (COG) over ground (BT) - TRUE = true display
Position of the chart centre or through the water (WT)

Zone time:
Coordinate system on which the position Mode of the log - UTC = zone time is equal to UTC
information is usually based - BT = Bottom Track - ZT = zone time is UTC plus time
Left: geodetic datum - WT = Water Track zone entered in system
Right: projection: This information is absent if a log is
- No information = Mercator not being used as the speed sensor.
- Radar = Radar projection
For coordinate system setting procedure, Clicking switches the alarm list on.
see page 97 Data source of the speed values for the SOG/COG
computation (the selected speed sensor) Horn symbol in red = there is an
For systems with radar 1000 series: Yellow back- alarm (see page 342)
For Monitoring and Planning display ground: SOG is computed, taking account of data
mode, see pages 92 and 96 entered manually (e.g. Set + Drift).

Fig. 3-9 The navigation data line

52 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

3.5.4 The Chart Area

3.5.4.1 Division, Individual Displays

In the chart area, the electronic chart is displayed. In the chart area, various graphic elements can be
displayed additionally, such as the own ship symbol, the targets transmitted by one of the radars, and
the pre-planned tracks, and possibly a map.
The display of most of the graphic elements appearing in the chart area can be switched on and off
individually. Furthermore, some of them can be parameterised. The graphic elements appearing in the
chart area and their operating procedures are described from page 56 onwards.
The following displays cover parts of the chart area - temporarily in some cases (for position and details,
see Figure 3-11):

TRACKPILOT Display (in the NACOS only)

This contains the most important items of the data that are needed specially for steering with the TRACK-
PILOT.
Its display can be switched on and off in the Pilot Display frame in the Presentation > Display Settings
menu by operation of the TRACKPILOT function.

SPEEDPILOT Display (in the NACOS only)

This contains the most important items of the data that are needed specially for sailing with the SPEED-
PILOT.
Its display can be set in the Pilot Display frame in the Presentation > Display Settings menu by
switching the SPEEDPILOT function on.

EBL2 Display
This makes it possible to operate EBL2 via the button, and (if EBL2 is switched on) it contains the data
of EBL2.
Its display can be set in the Presentation > Display Settings menu by switch-on of the EBL2 Display
function.

Digitizer Cursor Display

This contains the geographical position of the crosswires magnifier in the chart digitized on the digitizer.
It appears only if
- the digitizer is connected to the CHARTPILOT,
- the digitizer is set up (see page 157),
- the display of the Digitizer Cursor display is switched on (by switching the Numerical Position func-
tion on in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer Setup menu).

Cursor Display
The Cursor display contains the geographical position of the cursor displayed in the chart area, and the
distance and bearing of the cursor relative to own ship.
It continuously covers the bottom right-hand corner of the chart area.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 53

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

Switches the presentation of the data display on and off in the side strip.

Selection of the data display that is to be shown

Switches the presentation of the TRACKPILOT display on and off. 1)

Switches the presentation of the SPEEDPILOT display on and off. 1)

Switches the presentation of the scale bar on and off - see page 58.
(Scale bar is present only if vector charts are used)

Switches the presentation of the EBL2 display on and off.

1) Is present only in the NACOS.

Fig. 3-10 The Presentation > Display Settings menu

Data Display
By switch-on of a data display, further items of nautical information can be put onto the screen. You have
a choice between
- the Track/Schedule display,
- the Track/Control display,
- the Conning display, and
- the Docking display.
The data displays are described in Section 3.5.5 from page 67 onwards. The selected data display fills
the right-hand strip above the Cursor display.
☞ A data display is shown when the Data Display function is switched on in the Presentation >
Display Settings menu. In this menu, the data display to be shown can also be selected instead of
selection via the title button of the data display being shown.
☞ If the CHARTPILOT is part of a NACOS, it is possible to call up on the CHARTPILOT the menus
Pilot > TRACKPILOT and, if applicable, Pilot > SPEEDPILOT in order to display the currently
existing TRACKPILOT data and SPEEDPILOT data respectively. These menus are briefly explained
in Figure 3-21 on page 73. For details of the parameters displayed, please see the Operating Instruc-
tions of the radar indicator.

54 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

Mode of the TRACKPILOT

TRACKPILOT OFF: TRACKPILOT is not
active
TRACKPILOT FAILURE: TRACKPILOT Mode of the SPEEDPILOT
has failed SPEEDPILOT OFF: SPEEDPILOT is not
TRACKPILOT display
active
Set course specified SP FAILURE: SPEEDPILOT has failed
SPEEDPILOT display
by the TRACKPILOT
Set radius with which the
TRACKPILOT will perform Set speed specified by the
the next manoeuvre SPEEDPILOT

Next data Set speed in the next track segment

PD: Pilot Data are switched on
for the TRACKPILOT

Navigation data
line (see page 51)

Chart area
For graphic elements
displayed, see
Section 3.5.4.2

This data display

can be blanked out
so that the chart
area extends over
the entire width of
the screen (see
page 68)

Basic menu line

(see page 51)

EBL2 display Digitizer Cursor display Cursor display

Data of EBL2 (similar to display of Cursor position Bearing of cursor posi-

EBL1 data - see page 114) Position of the crosswires magni- tion relative to own ship
fier on the digitized (paper) chart Distance of cursor position
from own ship's position

Fig. 3-11 The chart area

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 55

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

Fast Switch-Over to the Standard Display

If you are working with a subroutine or are performing particular tasks (e.g. editing of waypoint data) in
the main program, the chart area too is almost completely covered. To ensure that, in this situation too,
you can obtain a quick overview of the current navigational situation, you can call the display of the chart
area into the foreground by pressing the Std Disp button in the basic menu 1). If Planning display mode
is switched on, a switch-over to the Monitoring display mode last used takes place (see page 92).
☞ The subroutine or the menu of the main program in which you were working when the STD DISP
button was pressed is not switched off but continues to run in the background. When you call it up
again, you will find that the settings made previously are still valid.

3.5.4.2 Graphic Elements and their Setting Procedures

Overview
The graphic elements generated by the CHARTPILOT for the display in the chart area can be switched
on and off individually. Many of them can be parameterised.
For the following elements, the procedure for switching the display on and off, the procedure for param-
eterising them and (if necessary) the symbol used are described in this section:
- Cursor and digitizer cursor
- Range rings
- Chart grid
- Bearing scale
- Scale bar
- Event markers
- Position fix symbols
- Own ship's symbol with:
- Heading line
- Stern line
- Curved Headline (only if a TRACKPILOT is installed)
- Path Prediction
- Course and speed vector
- Past plot with time labels and position-times
- Past plot of the second position-sensor
- ARPA targets and AIS targets
- Pre-planned tracks and waypoints
- Maps (systems with radar 9xxx series only)
- User Chart Objects (user-edited objects which supplement the electronic charts)
- Aids-to-Navigation received via an AIS system which is connected to the radar.
Information about the following elements which are likewise displayable in the chart area is given in other
sections:
- Objects of the vector charts in Section 4.3 from page 99 onwards 2)
- Variable range marker, VRM, in Section 4.5 from page 113 onwards
- Electronic bearing line, EBL, in Section 4.5 from page 113 onwards

1)
The function key F8 of the keyboard has the same function.
2)
All symbols of the electronic chart of type ENC are explained in the info box in the Legend index card.

56 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

Setting of the Monitoring display mode or Planning display mode (see Section 4.2.4
from page 91 onwards; menu see Figure 4-9 on page 95)
Switches on and off the presentation of the individual displays of the chart area
and the display of the scale measurement bar (see Section 3.5.4.1; menu see
Figure 3-10 on page 54).
Setting of the coordinate system (see page 97; menu see Figure 4-10 on page 98)

Switches the display of the stated symbols on and off.

Switches the display of the course and speed vectors on and off (own ship and
targets).

Defines the length of the course and speed vectors.

Switches the display of the stated symbols on and off.

Defines the prediction time for the display of the Path Prediction.
Switches on and off the display of own ship's past plot.

For own ship, this switches on and off the display of the past plot of the
second position sensor.
Defines the length of own ship's past plots.
Switches on and off the display of the time labels on own ship's past plots.
Defines the spacing of the time labels on own ship's past plot.

Fig. 3-12 The Presentation menu

1. Cursor and Digitizer Cursor

The cursor (controlled by the trackball) contains the symbol in the chart area; the digitizer cursor is
symbolised by .
The digitizer cursor shows the present position of the digitizer's crosswires magnifier on the paper chart
which is set up there. It appears in the chart area when
- a digitizer is connected to the CHARTPILOT,
- the digitizer is set up (see page 157),
- the display of the digitizer cursor is switched on (by switching on the Digitizer Cursor function in the
Peripheral Devices > Digitizer Setup menu) and
- the position of the crosswires magnifier on the paper chart is situated within the chart area.

2. Range Rings
☞ Range rings can be displayed only if vector charts are used.
The range rings are at a fixed distance from one another. This distance and the number of rings are spec-
ified by the program in accordance with the selected range setting.
When the display of the range rings is switched on, the distance of the range rings from one another is
displayed in the Range field to the right of the Range display in the basic menu line.
Switching on and off the display: With the Range Rings button in the Presentation menu.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 57

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

3. Grid
☞ The chart grid can be displayed only if vector charts are used.
☞ The number of grid lines displayed is specified by the program in accordance with the selected range
setting.
Switching on and off the display: With the Grid button in the Presentation menu.

4. Bearing Scale
Switching on and off the display: With the Bearing Scale button in the Presentation menu.

5. Scale Bar
The scale bar is displayed at the left-hand edge.
☞ The scale bar has a length of 1 NM and subdivisions of 0.1 NM if the range setting is 3 NM or less.
At the longer range settings, it is 10 NM long and the subdivisions are 2 NM.
Switching on and off the display: With the Scale Bar button in the Presentation > Display Setting menu.

6. Event Markers
Event markers which have been set as described in Section 4.8 or on a radar indicator of the radar 1000
series appear in orange with the symbol .
☞ If the function Text Labels has been selected in the Chart menu, the remark which was entered
when the event was being set appears also beside the event symbol in the chart area.
The display of the event markers generally cannot be switched on and off. If event markers are no longer
to be displayed, they must be deleted as described in Section 4.8.

7. Position Fix Symbols

Position fix symbols which have been set as per Section 4.9 Section 4.8 or on a radar indicator of the
radar 1000 series appear in orange with the symbol .
☞ If, in the Chart menu, the Text Labels function has been selected, then the time of the fix and, in
brief form, the method of position determination also appear at the position fix symbol (see page
134).
The display of the position fix symbol cannot be generally switched on or off. Position fix symbols which
are no longer to be displayed must be deleted as per Section 4.9.

8. Own Ship Display

Own ship's symbol: At small range settings (up to 1.5 NM) or with large chart-scales (greater than
1:25000 1)), own ship can be 2) displayed true to scale by means of the symbol ; otherwise, by

means of the symbol .

Switching on and off the display: With the Symbol button in the Presentation menu.
Own ship's symbol can be supplemented by the following elements:
Heading line: An extension of the ship's longitudinal axis as far as the edge of the screen
Switching on and off the display: With the Heading Line button in the Radar/AIS menu.

1)
Greater than 1:50000 if the raster chart is displayed enlarged.
2)
depending on the length of the ship

58 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

Curved Headline: When the ship is being steered with the TRACKPILOT in Heading mode or Course
mode, the track on which the TRACKPILOT is steering the ship in the planned or initiated course-
manoeuvre can be displayed by means of this line (for details, see Operating Instructions of the radar
indicator). The line ends at the edge of the screen.
Switching on and off the display: With the Curved Headline button in the Presentation menu.
Course and speed vector: The tip of the arrow indicates where own ship will be situated after the set
time (set with the sliding controller under the Vector Length button in the Presentation menu), assuming
that the present course and speed will remain constant.
In systems with radar 1000 series 1), it can be seen from the vector symbol whether the vector is relative
to the water (Water Track, WT = one arrow-head) or relative to the bottom (Bottom Track, BT = two
arrow-heads), as on the radar 1000 indicators. In systems with radar 9xxx series, the course and speed
vector has always one arrow-head, as the course and speed vector on the radar 9xxx indicators.
The set time also applies to the course and speed vectors of the targets being tracked.
Switching on and off the display: With the Vector Length button in the Presentation menu. With this,
the course and speed vectors of the tracked targets are switched on or off at the same time.
If the relative display has been selected for the course and speed vectors
of the tracked targets, own ship's vector is not displayed - see also page Heading line
63.
Path Prediction: At range settings up to 1.5 NM, the symbol
can be used to show where own ship will be
Course and
situated after the set time (set with the sliding controller under the Predic- speed vector
tion button in the Presentation menu), assuming that the present speed
and rate of turn (ROT) will remain constant.
Own ship's
Switching on and off the display: With the Prediction button in the Pres- symbol
0703
entation menu.
Past plot: The path last sailed by the ship (in the period of time set with 0702
the sliding controller under the buttons Past Position and 2nd Past Posi- Past plot
tion in the Presentation menu). The data of the selected position sensor 0701
are used as the basis.
0700
Switching on and off the display: With the Past Position button in the Time labels
Presentation menu. 0659

☞ Even if its display is not switched on, the corresponding data are 0658
Position times
recorded. Therefore, when you switch on its display, the past plot for
the entire period of time selected appears.
The past plot can be provided with time markers, and these can be
provided with position times: Stern line
- Time labels: Marking the positions on the past plots at the intervals
of time selected with the sliding controller under the Time Labels
button in the Presentation menu.
Switching on and off the display: With the Time Labels button in the Presentation menu.
☞ The time labels are recorded only for as long as the Time Labels function is switched on.
Therefore, on the part of the past plot already displayed at the instant of switch-on of this func-
tion, no time labels appear.
- Position times: The present zone time in hours and minutes.
Switching on and off the display: With the Text Labels button in the Chart menu. With this, the text
labels of the vector charts are switched on or off at the same time. Even when switch-on takes place
retrospectively, the position times appear at all time labels.

1)
In these Operating Instructions, the symbol for the systems with series 1000 radars is used in all illustrations.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 59

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

Past plot of the second position sensor: A second past plot which differs from the one already
described only in that the data of the second position sensor are used as the basis.
☞ By switching on both past plots, it is possible to obtain information about the accuracy of the position
sensors.
Switching on and off the display: With the 2nd Past Position button in the Presentation menu.
Stern line: Backward extension of the ship's longitudinal axis as far as the edge of the screen.
Switching on and off the display: With the Stern Line button in the Radar/AIS menu.

9. ARPA Targets and AIS Targets 1)

On the CHARTPILOT, the ARPA targets of one of the radars of the system and the AIS targets 2) can be
displayed.
It is possible to choose which radar the ARPA targets to be displayed are to be taken from. In systems
with radar 1000 series, this is done on the CHARTPILOT in the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, in the frame
ARPA Targets from. In systems with radar 9xxx series, this is done on the radar 9xxx indicator by
means of the function Utilities > ARPA Output. 3)
Switching the display of the ARPA targets on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, by means of the
button ARPA Targets from.
Switching the display of the AIS targets on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets by means of the
buttons AIS Targets and Sleeping Targets. With the button AIS Targets, all target data provided by the
AIS system are also switched off:
☞ In the case of the system configuration without AIS operation on the CHARTPILOT, the display of
the ARPA targets and AIS targets is switched on/off jointly in the menu Radar/AIS > Targets with
the button Targets from - see footnote on next page. Sleeping targets are not displayed.
IMPORTANT:
As long as the display of the AIS targets is switched off, the AIS targets
are not tracked by the CHARTPILOT. For these targets, no collision
computation then takes place.

1)
In the following, the terms ARPA target and AIS target are used only if the statement is limited to this target type only. The term target
is used in the following if the statement applies both to ARPA targets and to AIS targets.
2)
and SAR aircraft (see page 117). SAR aircraft are treated and displayed in the same way as AIS targets, and are therefore not mentioned
again in the following. Their identity can be determined by means of the info box.
3)
If, in systems with the radar 9xxx series, there are also radars of the 1000 series, no ARPA targets from these radars can be displayed at
the CHARTPILOT.

60 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

Switches the display of the

ARPA targets on and off.
Opens the Targets menu

Selection of the radar from which

Simulation of trial manoeuvres; the ARPA targets to be
menu see Figure 4-30 on page 129 displayed are to be taken.

This switches the entire processing of the AIS target data on

and off, and therefore also the display, the collision computa-
tion and the automatic target acquisition of the AIS targets. 1)

For specification of the tracks Switches the display of the

and maps which can be sleeping targets on and off. 1)
loaded on the radars of series
9xxx, see page 322 Handling of AIS targets -
see page 118.
Further AIS functions, see
Section 4.6 1) Switches the display of the
target IDs on and off.
Switches the display of the Aids-
to-Navigation on and off. 1)
Defines whether the call sign
or the ship’s name is
Switches the heading indicator of displayed as the target ID for
the own ship symbol on and off. AIS targets.
Switches the stern line of the Switches the past plots of
own ship symbol on and off. the targets on and off.

Specifies the time length of the

past plots of the targets.

1) Present only if there is an AIS system connected.

Fig. 3-13 The menus Radar/AIS and Radar/AIS > Targets 1)

1) If the AIS system is connected in such a way that it cannot be operated on the CHARTPILOT, the menus have the following form:

Switches the display of the ARPA

targets and AIS targets on/off jointly.

Functions see above

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 61

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

ARPA Target Symbols:

- ARPA targets for which the target tracking function has not yet reached the steady state:
Manually acquired ARPA target
Automatically acquired target 1)

- Targets for which the target tracking function is in the steady state
Moving ARPA target
14
Moving ARPA target with ID
Fixed target (An ARPA target whose true speed is less than 1.5 kn.)
1)
R1 Reference target; it is identified by a serial number preceded by R

- Targets for which the target tracking has been ended

Lost ARPA target

AIS Target Symbols

Sleeping target (non-tracked target received by the AIS system). The sharp end points in
the direction of the target heading, or if that information is missing it points in the direction
of the target's COG.
Sleeping target for which, due to missing data, no collision computation and therefore no
automatic target acquisition take place - see page 120
(Acquired and tracked) AIS target. Triangle: see sleeping target; if the heading information
is available, the heading line is displayed additionally, and if the AIS target is turning a flag
on the heading line points in the direction in which the target is turning.
AIS target for which, due to missing data, no collision computation takes place - see page
120

BXGHE
AIS target with target marker; if available, the call sign of the ship is used, otherwise the
marker AIS with a two-digit number 2).

Dangerous AIS target (flashing): Target which has triggered the DANGEROUS TARGET
or DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm - see page 119

Lost AIS target (flashing): Target which has triggered the LOST TARGET or LOST AIS
TARGET alarm - see page 120

1)
The display appears only if there are SAM Electronics radars connected.
2)
The number is automatically allocated from the number range of the ARPA target markers. Therefore, an AIS target cannot be marked with
the number of an ARPA target.

62 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

Acquired targets can be supplemented by the following Course and speed

elements: vector
AIS target
Course and speed vectors:
Target ID
Switching on and off the display: With the Vector Length button AHTFG
in the Presentation menu. With this, the course and speed 09
ARPA target
vector of the own ship symbol is switched on/off simultaneously.
Past plot
The vectors (together with the past plots) can be displayed as
true vectors or as vectors relative to own ship. Time markers
- Relative display: The vectors (and the past plots) show the
movement relative to own ship.
- True display: The heads of the vectors are always situated at the positions which the radar targets
will reach in the set time if they keep their present speeds and courses.
☞ If you switch the relative display on while Centered Display mode or True Motion mode is switched
on, a target on a collision course can be easily recognised from the fact that its course and speed
vector is pointing towards own ship - see Figure 3-14.
Switching over between true and relative display is performed in the menu Presentation > Display Mode,
in the frame Vector Display.
The time represented by the vectors can be set with the sliding controller under the Vector Length button
in the Presentation menu.
☞ The time also applies to the course and speed vector of the own ship symbol. The tips of all
vectors displayed therefore represent the same point in time.

Target is on collision course

(vector points towards own
ship symbol).

True Motion Mode with true vector presentation The same scenario after switch-over to relative
(basic setting) vector presentation

Fig. 3-14 Recognition of collision course by means of relative vector presentation

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 63

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

Past plots
These (together with the vectors) can be displayed as true plots or as plots relative to own ship:
- Relative display: Starting at the present position of the target, the past plots indicate the movement
made by the target relative to own ship in the set period of time.
- True display: The past plot shows the geographic positions occupied by the ship in the set period
of time.
Switching on and off the display: With the Past Positions button in the Radar/AIS > Targets menu.
The time represented by the past plots can be set with the Past Position Length sliding controller in the
Radar/AIS > Targets menu.
Past plots are provided with time markers: These are set simultaneously for all past plots displayed: for
past plot lengths from 1 to 6 minutes, they are set at 1-minute intervals; for lengths of 7 to 9 minutes,
they are set at 2-minute intervals; and for lengths of 10 to 12 minutes, they are set at intervals of 3
minutes.
Target IDs
The display of the target markers can be switched on and off (for ARPA and AIS targets together) in the
menu Radar/AIS > Targets by means of the button Target IDs.
By means of the buttons Call Sign AIS and Ship’s Name AIS, the type of target marker can be defined
for the AIS targets.

64 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

10. Pre-planned Tracks with their Waypoints

On the CHARTPILOT, the route to be sailed and the travelling
time can be planned for the intended voyage (see Section 5). The
result of this planning is the pre-planned track defined by a 5
sequence of waypoints.
During the planning, pre-planned tracks are provided (among
other things) with data which enable the TRACKPILOT to auto- 192
matically keep the ship on the track and enable the SPEEDPILOT Pre-planned track resulting
to keep to the planned speeds and travelling times. from the waypoint posi-
tions and from the radii
Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load stored for them
menu, select the catalog in which the pre-planned tracks to be
displayed are listed; next, under Tracks, mark the desired
Parameter point
track(s), and press the OK button.
☞ The tracks switched on in this way are displayed in orange. If Planned wheel-over point
a track is displayed in red, it is the System Track (see
Section 6.1.1).
☞ The waypoint numbers and the courses of the tracklines are 6
Waypoint with serial number
displayed only if in the Chart menu Text Labels is not
switched to None.
149 Course to the next
Switching off the display: In the Tracks > Clear menu, mark the waypoint
pre-planned tracks which are no longer to be displayed, and press
Clear.
☞ The display of the System Track (displayed in red) cannot be
switched off. If this track is no longer to be displayed, it must 7
first be deselected as the System Track (see page 225).
9
Tracklines
Display of manoeuvres which cannot be performed: If, during
the programming of the track, the waypoints have been positioned
so unfavourably (small distance between waypoints, acute angles) 211
and/or the radii have been selected so large that the pre-planned 176
M
5N

track probably cannot be sailed, this is clearly indicated by a

special display of the track (see also Section 5.1.9):
- At the waypoint, the tracklines (the straight lines to the last
waypoint and to the present one) are displayed complete in 8
the form of unbroken lines. 53
- On the display, the circular segment defined by the radius is
shifted along the trackline towards the last waypoint until it Behind the curve end of
fits between the two tracklines. waypoint 7, this curve does
not fit into the angle formed
- This shift takes place as far as the last waypoint at the most, by waypoints 7, 8 and 9.
but not further than to a distance of 5 NM between the begin- Therefore, the curve is
ning of the curve and the waypoint. displayed shifted, and the
display of the pre-planned
☞ If the Check Track function is used in the generation or track is interrupted by the
changing of the track and if attention is paid to any error display of the tracklines.
messages that occur during that process (see Section 5.1.9),
the track contains no manoeuvres that cannot be performed.
Display of the System Track in track control mode To
Waypoint: Systems with TRACKPILOT: If the track control mode As the track control mode, To
Waypoint is set; the ship is not
is set to To Waypoint, the route from own ship to the current situated on the pre-planned
waypoint is computed as a temporary track and is displayed addi- track:
- Recomputed current
segment of System Track 232
- Unused segment of
System Track

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 65

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

tionally. This temporary track is recomputed continually (every 60 seconds) for the current own position
until the TRACKPILOT is switched over to Track mode. The current track segment of the pre-planned
track likewise remains displayed, but is not used.
In systems without a TRACKPILOT, the temporary track is calculated and displayed for the waypoint
previously defined with the function Select Next Waypoint; see A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m
T r a c k on page 223.
On ships with DNV approval, the way in which the waypoints were generated is indicated by the track
pattern used:
By means of digitizer as per Section 5.1.7
By means of electronic chart as per Section 5.1.5 or in Text mode as per Section 5.1.6
By means of digitizer, but then changed by means of electronic chart or in Text mode

☞ Above a latitude of 85°, no track curves are displayed.

11. Waypoints from Waypoint Files

Waypoints that are needed frequently for voyage planning can be collected in special waypoint files (see
page 183).
Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, select the catalog
in which the waypoint file is listed, then mark the desired file under Waypoint Files and press the OK
button.
Switching off the display: In the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, press the Clear button.
☞ The waypoints from waypoint files are displayed as small circles (same size as parameter points).
The ID numbers of the waypoints are displayed if Text Labels is switched on in the Chart menu.

12. Maps
Maps can be generated and displayed on the CHARTPILOT (for the generation of maps, see Section 5.5
from page 206 onwards). A map here is a simplified chart which can only contain sequences of straight
segments (map lines) and various symbols. The map lines can have various patterns (of dots and
dashes). The possible symbols are shown in Figure 3-15. Patterns and symbols appear in various
colours.

Light vessel Spar light buoy (starboard)

Radio reporting point Spar light buoy (port)
Pilot station Hazard buoy (N)
Anchorage Hazard buoy (E)
Fishing area Hazard buoy (S)
Cylindrical buoy Hazard buoy (W)
Conical buoy Light
Cylindrical light buoy Radio station

Fig. 3-15 Symbols on a map

The maps are the only charts capable of being handled on the CHARTPILOT which, for the purpose of
better orientation, are also capable of being added as a background to the radar display on any indicator
of the radar 9xxx series in radar mode.

66 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

☞ These maps are not compatible with the maps which can be edited on RADARPILOT 1000's and
which are used there, and they cannot be displayed there.
Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Maps > Load menu, select the catalog in which the
maps to be displayed are listed, then mark the desired map(s) under Maps and press the OK button.
Switching off the display: In the Maps > Clear menu, mark the map(s) that are no longer to be displayed,
and press Clear.

13. User Chart Objects

The User Chart Objects are individual Own MARPOL line (green/
objects which can be edited on the orange)
CHARTPILOT as per Section 5.2 and Anchor watch area (orange)
displayed additionally in Chart mode
Danger highlight (red)
independently of the electronic chart.
Own safety line (orange; the
Switching on and off the display: In the hatching points towards the
Chart menu by means of the User Chart unsafe area)
Objects button.
Feature area (ochre, brown)
For symbols used; for explanations
Names and notes are
relating to the individual User Chart displayed if the display of the
Objects, see Section 5.2. Text Labels is switched on
☞ The names of the feature areas and Feature line (orange)
feature lines, as well as the texts of
the text notes, are displayed if, in Text note, information
the Chart menu, the Text Labels Text note, caution
function is switched on.
Symbols (examples)
14. Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations
Aids-to-Navigation are marks whose data are received by an AIS system.
To display them, the symbols of the ENC are used, supplemented with a blue circle whose centre is
situated at the position of the Aid-to-Navigation.
Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control centre.
Symbol: , surrounded by a blue circle. Base stations are treated in the same way as Aids-to-Naviga-
tion, and are therefore not mentioned again in the following.
Switching the display on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS by means of the button Aids-to-Navigation.
Switch-over of the symbol presentation (Simplified / Paper Chart - see page 102) takes place together
with the vector charts (in the menu Charts > Visibility Options).

3.5.5 Data Displays and Pilot Menus

The presentation of the data display is optional. There is a choice between folowing types of data display:
The Track/Schedule display contains a collection of the most important data needed for track control
and time schedule planning, with the emphasis on time schedule planning. All data displayed there refer
to the System Track (see page 221).
The Track/Control display likewise contains the most important data needed for track-keeping and time
planning, likewise relating to the System Track but with a different set of data.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 67

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

The Conning Data display contains not only the most important data of the System Track for track
control but also the propeller shaft revolution rate and (if applicable) the propeller pitch, as well as infor-
mation about wind, current and depth.
In the Docking display, a number of data items needed for docking manoeuvres can be displayed as
numerical values and also graphically.
A feature shared by all data displays is that the name of the unit and the CHARTPILOT number are
entered beside the company logo in the top line 1). Below that, there is the Title button.
☞ The number of the CHARTPILOT is used in the data maintenance process of the electronic charts
to identify the CHARTPILOT whose data are being processed.
On the CHARTPILOT, the Pilot menus are used only to display the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT
data. Settings of the TRACKPILOT or SPEEDPILOT can only be made on the radar indicators.

Switching the Presentation of the Data Display On and Off

The presentation of the data display can generally be switched on and off with the Data Display function
in the Presentation > Display Settings menu.

Selection of the Data Display to be Presented

Selection is performed either in the Presentation > Display Settings menu or after clicking of the Title
button of the data display shown.

1)
In the following illustrations, the line is not shown.

68 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

The Track/Control-Display

Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays can be switched on

Name and number of the System Track

Last waypoint
Number and name of the present waypoint
Field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by
safety contour, object of interest or own safety line
☞ By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as
far as the last waypoint
Geogr. position of the present waypoint
Left: Sailing mode: GC = Great Circle, RL = Rhumb Line
Centre: Track control mode: To WPT = To Waypoint, To TRK = To Track
Right: Pilot Data Status: PD on = Pilot Data are switched on for the TRACKPILOT
Left: Bearing of the present waypoint
Right: WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1)
WOP: Distance to the WOP

Left: In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line

In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the present
waypoint
Field is red: The course limit is exceeded.
Right: Track deviation from the System Track; R: Ship is situated to the right of the Track
Field is red: The track limit is exceeded.

TTG: Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint 1)

TTG WOP: Probable sailing time up to the WOP
TTG or TTG WOP in red: The APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm is present

Planned time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship
sails to the arrival point at the Arrival Speed.
Actual time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship sails
to the arrival point at the present speed.
Next leg data: See illustration on next page
Switch-over: After clicking

Number of the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 225)

Estimated time of arrival at the arrival point

Planned time of arrival at the arrival point
Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival at the
arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early)

Probable time to go to the arrival point

Remaining distance to go to the arrival point
Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 225)

Arrival Speed of the next track segment

1) At service level, it can be specified that only the distance to go to the WOP is displayed.

Fig. 3-16 The Track/Control Display

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 69

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

Next leg data: The following data occur if the present leg and the next leg
are sailed at the present speed.
Number of the next waypoint (waypoint at the end of the next leg)

Probable time of arrival at the next waypoint

Probable sailing time up to the next waypoint

Sailing distance up to the next waypoint

Probable sailing time on the next leg

Length of the next leg

Present speed (with which the times displayed above are computed)

Fig. 3-17 Next Leg Data in the Track/Control Display

The Track/Schedule Display

Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays can be switched on

Name and number of the System Track

Switching over to the data of the

Number, remark about the waypoint, and next waypoint takes place when the
geogr. position of the waypoint that is present waypoint is lying abeam of
passed last the ship. If the TRACKPILOT is
steering with Pilot Data or in Track
Number1), remark about the waypoint, and mode, the TRACKPILOT decides
geogr. position of the present waypoint when to switch over (usually occurs
at the wheel over point).
Estimated time of arrival at the present
waypoint
Probable time to go to the present waypoint

Number and remark about the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 225)
Estimate time of arrival at the arrival point
Probable time to go to the arrival point
Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 225)
Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival
at the arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early)
Arrival Speed of the next track segment

1) Number field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of
interest or own safety line
☞ By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint

Fig. 3-18 The Track/Schedule Display

70 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

The Conning Data Display

Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays

can be switched on
Last waypoint

Number and name of the present waypoint

Field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by
safety contour, object of interest or own safety line
☞ By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as
far as the last waypoint
Estimated time of arrival at the present waypoint
TTG: Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint 1)
TTG WOP: Probable sailing time up to the WOP
TTG or TTG WOP in red: The APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm is present
Bearing of the present waypoint
WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1)
WOP: Distance to the WOP
- In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line
- In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the
present waypoint
Field is red: The course limit is exceeded.
Expected rate of turn at the present waypoint, resulting from the actual speed
Propeller shaft revolution rate and pitch of the variable-pitch propellers
Bar and number at top right: Deviation from the System Track:
R and bar to the right: Ship is situated to the right of the track
Red strokes: The set track limit
Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded.
Wind direction
Wind speed (switch-over of the unit of measurement by means of
context-sensitive menu)
Wind display (switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu)
Rel: Relative wind; measured by wind sensor
True: True wind; computed by the system

Ship's symbol represents the present gyro heading

Yellow arrow pointing inwards: Wind direction
Blue arrow pointing outwards: Direction of the current
Red line: Present course = gyro heading + drift angle

Present depth measured by the navigation echosounder

If an echosounder with several trans-
ducers is installed, the selected Depth history of the past 10 minutes
transducer is noticed here. Red line: Depth alarm value that was set in the Alarm Settings menu
☞ By means of a context-sensitive menu, the depth range displayed can be
set to a different fixed value or to automatic range-adaptation.

1) At service level, it can be specified that only the distance to go to the WOP is displayed.

Fig. 3-19 The Conning Data Display

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 71

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

The Docking Display

Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays can be switched on
Rate of Turn, computed from the change in the gyro heading
values supplied by the compass system
Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard
Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding of the scale range
Harbour display switched on: The power values of the bow
thrusters are displayed - see Figure 11-3
Gyro heading Harbour display switched off: Track deviation and course
deviation are displayed:

Transverse speed at the bow, computed by the system 1)

Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 3)

Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set
value
Red lines: The set course limit
Bar is red: The course limit is exceeded.

Track deviation: 3)
Bar to the right. The ship is situated to the right of the track
Red lines: The set track limit
Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded.

Longitudinal speed, measured by the selected

speed sensor 1)

Propeller shaft revolution rate 2)

Pitch of variable-pitch propeller 2)

Transverse speed at the stern,

computed by the system 1)

Rudder angle, from the rudder angle sensor

Yellow triangle: The set rudder angle, specified by the TRACKPILOT
Red lines: The rudder limit that is set on the TRACKPILOT

Wind display (switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu)

Rel: Relative wind; measured by wind sensor
True: True wind; computed by the system

Wind speed (switch-over of the unit of measurement by

means of context-sensitive menu)
Water depth under the keel measured
by the navigation echosounder at the
location of the selected transducer Wind direction

1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode,
speed through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode
2) Data from the engines
3) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT.
In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been specified by the input of the set
course. In Track mode, this is the deviation from the System Track.

Fig. 3-20 The Docking Display

72 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

The Pilot Menus

These menus cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT. They only

display the settings, received from TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT.

On the CHARTPILOT, this has no function.

Display of the TRACKPILOT parameters mentioned

Pilot Data is switched on/off for the TRACKPILOT.

Setting of the sailing mode

Setting of the track control mode

Length of time by which the APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm precedes the TP WHEEL
OVER POINT or WHEEL OVER POINT alarm (displayed on the radar indicators)

Manual course-correction of the actual course for the TRACKPILOT is switched on/off.

Correction value being used at present

The automatic course correction of the actual course is switched on/
off for the TRACKPILOT.
On the CHARTPILOT, this has no function.

On the CHARTPILOT, this has no function.

Current speed control values

Settings which influence the control characteristics of the SPEEDPILOT

Upper limit of the set speed

Lower limit of the set speed

Setting which influences the control characteristics of the SPEEDPILOT

On the CHARTPILOT, this has no function.

Fig. 3-21 The Pilot > TRACKPILOT and Pilot > SPEEDPILOT menus

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 73

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

3.5.6 The Alarm List

A special dialog box, the alarm list, appears when an alarm is generated on the CHARTPILOT. The
meanings of the alarms reported in that box and the operating procedure for the alarm list are described
in Section 9.

Alarm messages with time and date of their appearance and with a
statement of the subsystem that has triggered the alarm concerned.

Acknowledges the marked alarm message. Switches off the display of the alarm list.

Fig. 3-22 The alarm list

3.5.7 The Info Box

At any time, you can obtain a display of the following data sorted into index cards and info groups 1),
provided that the data are available in the CHARTPILOT:
- General data relating to the electronic chart displayed,
- information about the objects contained in the displayed vector chart,
- the notes and diagrams printed on the raster chart,
- the Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners issued by the UKHO
(if ARCS charts are used),
- data of the displayed User Chart Objects and Aids-to-Navigation
- data of the displayed Aids-to-Navigation received via AIS
- data of the ARPA and AIS targets being displayed,
- data transmitted by the own AIS system
- data relating to each element of the pre-planned tracks displayed
- data relating to each element of the displayed maps
- data relating to each event marker (see page 131) and relating to each position fix (see page 133)
If there is a printer connected, this information can also be printed.

Display of Data
1. Position the cursor in the chart area, and press the INFO key. In the chart area, a circle appears
round the clicked position, and the info box appears.
It contains:
- all information which the system possesses about the objects situated in the circle (including
those objects that are currently not being displayed),
- all information which the system has about the selected electronic chart,
- if applicable, the Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners
which are mentioned in the data set of the selected raster chart
☞ The position and size of the info box can be changed (see page 46).

1)
The index cards and info groups are different for vector charts and raster charts.

74 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen

2. Click on the desired index card (see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N ). The info groups 1) marked by means
of blue triangles and dealing with the subject of the index card appear.
If only info groups are displayed, you can either obtain a list of the objects or data types of a desired
info group by clicking on this group, or obtain a list of the objects or data types of all groups by
means of Expand.
☞ Repeated clicking on the info group switches the display of the objects or data types off again.
The general expansion resulting from Expand can be cancelled by pressing the same button,
which is meanwhile called Compress.
3. If you click on one of the objects or data types listed, the data box containing the detailed data of
this term opens up.
4. If a Details button appears in the data box, further details (pictures and texts) can be displayed by
clicking on that button.
5. The display of the data box and info box can be switched off by pressing the Cancel button.

Statement of the position for which With this, the box can be set to
the information is displayed. maximum size and back again.

Alternative operating procedure for the box

Index cards with information about the

position clicked with the INFO key; by
clicking on the index card, the content is
displayed

Info groups of the index card; by clicking,

objects or data types of the info group are Info box
displayed

Objects or data types of the info group;

by clicking, the data box is opened

Closes the info box and, if

applicable, the data box
Expand: By pressing, the objects or
data types are displayed for all info
groups Printing all information existing in the
Compress: The display of all objects index card currently being displayed
or data types is switched off.

Detailed data relating to the object Data box

or data type clicked

Printing the detailed data Displays more details

contained in the data box Closes the data box

Fig. 3-23 The info box and the data box

1)
if the content of the index card is divided up into info groups, which is very often the case.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 75

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions

Printing of Data
With the Print button of the data box, the content of the data box can be printed.
With the Print All button of the info box, all data stored in the index card can be printed.

Explanations for the Objects Displayed in the ENC

In a manner similar to that of Chart 1 (INT 1) of the international (paper) chart series, there exists the
ECDIS Chart 1, in which the elements used in the ECDIS are explained. If the display of the electronic
chart of type ENC is switched on, this ECDIS Chart 1 can be opened as follows:
1. Position the cursor in the chart region, press the INFO key, and click on the index card Legend.
2. By clicking on ECDIS Chart 1, list the pages of ECDIS Chart 1.
3. Clicking on one of the pages (Show ....) does not cause a data box to open, which is the usual case;
instead,
- the ENC cell ECDIS Chart 1 is called up,
- a switch-over to Planning display mode takes place,
- a switch-over to the range setting 0.75 NM takes place,
- the chart excerpt is set to the area of ECDIS Chart 1 (≈ 15° N, 5° W, i.e. in the Sahara Desert!),
and
- the Presentation mode specially required for ECDIS Chart 1 is switched on.
4. In ECDIS Chart 1, only the elements are displayed, without any explanations; however, by clicking
with the Info key, all information can now be called up (see above, D i s p l a y o f D a t a ).
☞ ECDIS Chart 1 can now be used like a normal ENC, i.e. the range setting can be changed, the
centre can be shifted, and so on.
5. When ECDIS Chart 1 is being exited, it must be ensured that a switch-over to Presentation mode
takes place again, which is necessary for all other ENC cells. This is done by changing the position
of the chart region in some way or other (but not by means of the Set Center button), for example
by switching over to Monitoring display mode, or by switching to the standard display by means of
the Std Disp button, or – in Planning display mode – by inputting a new position by means of the
menu Presentation > Display Mode.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Contents of the Index Cards

The individual index cards contain the following information:
Targets Data of ARPA and AIS targets being displayed or the AIS data of the own ship
Tracks/Maps Data relating to tracks and maps
User Objects Data relating to objects inserted by the user, e.g. User Chart Objects, event
markers, position fixes and data of the Aids-to-Navigation (navigation marks
which are reported by the AIS system)
Chart Contents For vector charts: Data relating to the chart objects
Legend Legend for the electronic chart
For vector charts: Presentation parameters. Additionally for the ENC and Own
Chart: calling up ECDIS Chart 1, which has explanations of the objects displayed.
Status Status of the electronic chart
Notes&Diagrams Notes and diagrams that are printed out on the raster chart
T&P NMs Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners
issued by the UKHO (for raster charts only)

76 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.6 Using the Printer

3.6 Using the Printer

The (optional) printer can be used with equal priority by all of the system's items of equipment. The data
to be printed out are assembled page-by-page by each computer; the computer then begins the printing
process. Print jobs arriving at the printer from different items of equipment are processed one after
another.
So that the printer can be used at any time, it should continually be in On-Line mode with paper
inserted. 1)
If there is an A3 printer connected, only the screen content is printed out over the entire area. All other
data are formatted for A4 paper format. Therefore, if screen print-outs are not currently being made, the
printer should contain A4 paper.

Printing the Content of the Screen

In the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, by pressing of the button Print Screen, a "photograph" of the
display currently being shown on the CHARTPILOT screen can be printed out.
The same result can be achieved by using the MORE key to click the Menu button and, in the context
menu thus opened, clicking the function Print Screen, or on the keyboard by means of the function key
Prt Sc (or Print Screen).

Stopping the Printing Immediately

If printing is to be stopped as quickly as possible, this can be done in the menu Peripheral Devices >
Printer by the pressing of Remove Printer Files. The print commands that have already been sent up
until that point in time are still processed by the printer.

1)
The operating procedure that is necessary on the printer is described in the Operating Instructions enclosed with the printer.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 77

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.7 Subroutines Operating Instructions

3.7 Subroutines

Some functions that are needed less often are provided by independent subroutines. These subroutines
must be switched on when required, and should be switched off again when they are no longer needed.
Such subroutines capable of being switched on and off are:
- In Chart and Conning modes, the individual functions listed under Utilities
- Additionally in Conning mode, the functions Navigation, Docking, Keel Clearance, Pilot Card and the
Conning mode itself.
☞ Buttons which call up subroutines are framed by a white line in the tree.
All other functions are provided by the CHARTPILOT main program, which is started up automatically
when the CHARTPILOT is switched on and which cannot be switched off separately.
The shifting of functions into subroutines serves the purpose of reducing the workload of the CHART-
PILOT computer during the times when these additional functions are not needed. By the switching off
of subroutines that are not required, the main program can then run more quickly. Thus, if you have the
impression that the graphics (for example) are being formed too slowly, you should check (in the Conning
mode too) whether any subroutines that are not needed are still switched on, and if so, you should switch
them off.

Display of the Switched-On Subroutines

In the function overview (tree) of the mode concerned, the buttons of the switched-on subroutines are
labelled in red.

Switching a Subroutine On
When you press the button of the corresponding function (in the higher-order menu or in the function
overview), this action switches the subroutine on (if it was not switched on already).
The highest-order menu of the subroutine concerned then appears, together with the associated displays.
☞ The highest-order menus of the subroutines can be recognised from the fact that they have an Exit
button at bottom right.

Switching Off a Subroutine

When you press the Exit button in the highest-order menu of the subroutine and give the appropriate
answer to the safeguard question which then appears, this action switches the subroutine off. It also
aborts all of the subroutine's activities that might still be running.

Switching the Operating Procedure Over to Other Programs

You can abort the operation of a program at any time in order to perform an operating action in a different
program. This does not switch off the program that you leave. The menu of the program which you leave
remains preserved in the form that it had at the instant of change-over to the other program, but is
covered by the menu of the program to which you have changed over. When you switch back again, you
will find the menu exactly as you had left it.

78 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

This section describes which functions are provided by the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode for navigation
and collision avoidance, and how these functions are operated.
Furthermore, Section 4.1 contains basic information about the electronic charts that can be used. An
understanding of this basic information is necessary so that these electronic charts can be used properly.

4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects

Regarding the data structure, the electronic charts can basically be divided up into vector charts (see
Section 4.1.3) and raster charts (see Section 4.1.4).
The types ENC, CM-93/3Pro and CM-93/2 and Own Chart which can be handled on the CHARTPILOT
are vector charts; the ARCS type consists of raster charts.
The differences between vector charts and raster charts have consequences for some of the functions
that are available on the CHARTPILOT.
The User Chart Objects are individual elements which are edited on the CHARTPILOT and which
supplement the electronic charts. They are not specific to the type of electronic chart used, and can be
displayed irrespective of the type.

4.1.1 Switching On the Display of the Chart and Selecting the Chart Type

The display of the electronic chart is generally switched on and off in the Chart menu by means of the
Chart Visible button.
The selection of the chart type to be used is done in the Chart menu with the button Type or with the
context menu of the Chart Status field in the navigation data line.
☞ For switching on the display of User Chart Objects, see Section 4.3.3.
☞ The chart types and User Chart Objects mentioned are not all available on all versions of the
CHARTPILOT.

4.1.2 Chart Types: Legal Aspects

The ENC chart type (Electronic Navigational Chart) consists of the vector chart which is used in the elec-
tronic chart and Information Display System (ECDIS) defined by the IMO. It conforms to the international
standard S-57 issued by the IHO, and is published by the IHO or by the responsible national hydrographic
organisations.
☞ ECDIS is designed to fulfil the requirements which SOLAS 74 Regulation V/20 imposes regarding
the keeping of up-to-date charts, so that an ECDIS is a fully valid replacement for the conventional
chart made of paper. A necessary prerequisite for this is that the data used are approved by the IMO
or by the responsible national hydrographic organisations, that these data are always kept up to
date, and that the display system for them is approved by a notified body. The CHARTPILOT is
designed to fulfil these approval conditions.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 79

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects Operating Instructions

The CM-93/3Pro chart type 1) and the CM-93/2 chart type are vector charts published by the company
C-MAP. They too conform to the IHO standard S-57 and therefore have the same functional characteris-
tics as the ENC. However, they differ from the latter in their legal significance, since they are not
approved as part of ECDIS. For all of the important regions, chart data of these chart types are available.
They can be obtained from SAM Electronics or any other authorized distributor; see page 290 or 304.
The ARCS chart type is the electronic form of the well-known British Admiralty Charts. They are
published by the Admiralty Raster Chart Service (ARCS) 2) which also publishes the paper charts. They
do not conform to the IHO standard S-57 and do not fulfil the requirements of SOLAS Regulation V20
concerning the keeping of up-to-date charts. The display of this chart type takes place in the Raster Chart
Display System (RCDS), which, in the CHARTPILOT, is part of ECDIS. A licence for their use can be
obtained from any authorized distributor; see page 279.
The Own Chart chart type consists of the vector chart which is generated by means of the Own Chart
editor. The Own Chart conforms to the IHO standard S-57. It is needed on ships with DNV approval for
areas for which neither approved ENC chart data nor CM-93/3Pro or CM-93/2 chart data are available.
NOTICE:
At the present time, electronic charts are permitted to be used as a
replacement for the official (paper) charts if, and only if, the electronic
charts contain ENC data. If ENC data are not available, they may be
replaced by ARCS data, but only if special permission is obtained from
the flag nations for this.

4.1.3 Vector Charts

In the case of vector charts, the symbols, areas, lines and labelling (collectively called Objects in the
following) are electronically stored individually, together with their geographical positions. Each object is
specified in the file by a number of parameters. The screen display is generated by calling up the indi-
vidual object-data by the use of an associated IHO-standardised display regulation; the display of a
number of object classes can be suppressed individually by the user. Further data can be displayed in
an object-related way in the info box.
For vector charts, the term “chart” covers all of the existing chart material of a certain type. In principle,
each of the above-mentioned vector charts therefore covers the entire surface of the earth. It is subdi-
vided into areas bounded by lines of longitude and latitude or by parts of them. These areas are known
as cells.
However, the chart is not only subdivided into cells, but also into various scale ranges (navigational
purposes). Each cell is assigned to one of these navigational purposes. The cells to be used for ocean
crossings cover a larger area than (for example) the cells intended for coastal sailing. Furthermore, the
selection and precision of the data contained correspond to the purpose intended for the cell size
concerned. Thus, coastal regions are usually charted in several cells of different sizes; the different cells
contain different items of information for the same region (all of this is similar to the case of paper charts).
☞ Detailed data on the cell can be called up by means of the Info box.
Apart from these common features, the geographical structure exhibits the following distinctions:

1)
There are several variants of the CM-93/3 chart with different designations. The variant with the designation CM-93/3Pro that can be used
at the CHARTPILOT 9320 and 9330 and that is described in these Operating Instructions is referred to as CM-93/3 Professional by the
company C-MAP.
2)
ARCS is an organisation of the UK Hydrographic Office.

80 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects

Geographical Structure of the ENC

The cells can overlap with one another. It is true that naviga- Cells of the ENC
tional purposes are defined, but neither the corresponding
Code Navigational Purpose
cell sizes nor the scales of the equivalent paper charts are
defined. 1 Overview

In the cell data which can be called up by means of the Info 2 General
box, the navigational purpose can be identified from the first 3 Coastal
numeral of the cell name (after the two letters which indicate 4 Approach
the country of publication or the producer) – see Code in the
table opposite. 5 Harbour
6 Berthing
Geographical Structure of the CM-93/3Pro Chart
The cells can overlap with one another. For the various navigational purposes, there are different cell
sizes in each case. The scales of the equivalent paper charts are defined.
In the cell data which can be called up by means of the Info box, the navigational purpose can be iden-
tified from the first numeral of the cell name (after the two letters which indicate the producer) – see Code
in the following table.
Cells of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Corresponding scale of a
(paper) chart
Code Navigational Purpose
7 General Background < 1 : 5.000.000
8 World 1 : 1.500.000 to 1 : 5.000.000
1 General Nautical 1 : 500.000 to 1 : 1.500.000
2 Coastal 1 : 200.000 to 1 : 500.000
3 Coastal / Approach 1 : 50.000 to 1 : 200.000
4 Approach 1 : 15.000 to 1 : 50.000
5 Harbour 1 : 5.000 to 1 : 15.000
6 Plan > 1 : 5.000

Geographical Structure of the CM-93/2 Chart

The cells of a navigational purpose do not overlap each other. Both the cell size and the scale range of
the equivalent paper charts are defined for all navigational purposes.
In the cell data which can be called up by means of the Info box, the navigational purpose can be iden-
tified from the first character of the identification (see Code in the following tables).

Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart Corresponding scale of a

(paper) chart
Code Navigational Purpose Size
Z General Background 40 x 40 degrees < 1 : 5.000.000
A World 20 x 20 degrees 1 : 1.500.000 to 1 : 5.000.000
B General Nautical 10 x 10 degrees 1 : 500.000 to 1 : 1.500.000
C Coastal 4 x 4 degrees 1 : 150.000 to 1 : 500.000
D Coastal / Approach 1 x 1 degrees 1 : 50.000 to 1 : 150.000
E Approach 20 x 20 minutes 1 : 15.000 to 1 : 50.000
F Harbour 20 x 20 minutes 1 : 5.000 to 1 : 15.000
G Plan 20 x 20 minutes > 1 : 5.000

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 81

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects Operating Instructions

Geographical Structure of the Own Chart

Own Chart too is subdivided into cells, which can overlap. During editing, the cell size and the scale are
specified. The Own Chart editor does not specify anything particular about this, within wide limits.
However, all cells are automatically assigned to one of the navigational purposes that are defined for the
ENC.

4.1.4 Raster Charts

Raster charts are scanned paper-charts. In these charts, the individual pixels are stored together with
their colour values. Objects are created there only as visual impressions; the program knows only the
colour values of the pixels and not their meanings. However, from the information contained additionally
in the raster chart files, the CHARTPILOT determines the geographical position and the alignment of the
chart, so that the own ship symbol and the other synthetics generated by the CHARTPILOT can be
displayed at the correct positions 1) on the chart.
In contrast to vector charts, raster charts only have a limited functionality, to which attention is expressly
drawn in the proposal "Differences between RCDS and ECDIS" published by the IMO Committee for
Navigation Safety. The most important points of this are reproduced here:
1. Unlike ECDIS where there are no chart boundaries, RCDS is a chart-based system similar to a port-
folio of paper charts.
2. RNC data, itself, will not trigger automatic alarms (e.g. anti-grounding). However, some alarms can
be generated by the RCDS from user-inserted information 2). These can include:
- ship safety contour lines,
- isolated dangers,
- danger areas.
3. Horizontal datums and chart projections may differ between RNCs. Mariners should understand how
the chart horizontal datum relates to the datum of the position fixing system. In some instances, this
may appear as a shift in position. This difference may be most noticeable at grid intersections and
during route monitoring.
4. Chart features cannot be simplified or removed to suit a particular navigational circumstance or task
at hand. This could affect the superimposition of radar/ARPA.
5. Without selecting different scale charts, the look-ahead capability may be somewhat limited. This
may lead to some inconvenience when determining range and bearing or the identity of distant
objects.
6. Orientation of the RCDS display to other than chart-up, may affect the readability of chart text and
symbols (e.g., course-up, route-up). 3)
7. It may not be possible to interrogate RNC features to gain additional information about charted
objects.
8. It is not possible to display a ship’s safety contour or safety depth and highlight it on the display
unless these features are manually entered during route planning.
9. Depending on the source of the RNC, different colours may be used to show similar chart informa-
tion. There may also be differences in colours used during day and nighttime.

1)
The geodetic chart datum of some charts is not known exactly. Consequently, the CHARTPILOT cannot position the synthetics correctly.
In such cases, a position adjust might have to be performed; see page 144.
2)
On the CHARTPILOT, this is done by means of the user-edited User Chart Objects own safety lines, danger highlights, own MARPOL
lines and anchor watch areas – see page 185.
3)
Therefore, these modes are not available when raster charts are used on the CHARTPILOT.

82 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects

10. An RNC should be displayed at the scale of the paper chart. Excessive zooming in or zooming out
can seriously degrade RCDS capability. For example, by degrading the legibility of the chart image.
11. Mariners should be aware that in confined waters, the accuracy of chart data (i.e., paper charts, ENC
or RNC data) may be less than that of the position-fixing system in use. This may be the case when
using differential GNSS. ECDIS provides an indication in the ENC which allows a determination of
the quality of the data.
NOTICE:
Before the beginning of the voyage, the officer of the watch must famil-
iarise himself with the advantages and disadvantages of raster charts.

Geographical Structure of the Raster Charts

The raster charts are exact reproductions of the British Admiralty Charts which are published in paper
form, and like the latter they possess to some extent plans (detailed charts with a larger scale) which can
be displayed separately.
☞ In addition to this conventional subdivision into chart sheets, subdivision into regions has been intro-
duced with the electronic form to make it easier to update the charts; see page 91.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 83

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions

4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

4.2.1 Adapting the Display and Illumination to Suit the Room Brightness

Setting the Brightness and Colour

Approximate adaptation to suit the ambient brightness, including the switch-over of day and night colours,
is done by clicking the Brightness button in the basic menu line (the function key F9 has the same func-
tion) and directly selecting the desired colour palette and thus the brightness value under Palettes in the
Brightness menu which then opens 1). Clicking the arrow button closes the Brightness menu. When a
membrane keyboard is used, the internal illumination of the control panel can be adjusted by means of
the Dim + and Dim - keys.
☞ If the cursor is situated at the upper edge of the screen, simultaneous pressing of the INFO, DO and
MORE keys causes the screen to become bright (Bright Day) 2). This is helpful if, in a bright room,
the screen had been set very dark by means of the Brightness menu (and the cursor can therefore
no longer be recognised).
WARNING:
When the brightness and colour palette are adjusted, the test described
below must be performed in order to ensure that all symbols of the elec-
tronic chart are still clearly visible.

Reproduction of the Factory-Adjusted Black Value Setting for ECDIS Display

The monitor has been calibrated in the factory in such a way that the colours and contrasts specified for
the ECDIS are displayed correctly. On monitors with cathode ray tubes, the brightness and contrast
values used (and therefore the calibration status) can be achieved again by making the markers on the
brightness and contrast knobs coincide with the corresponding markers on the casing.

Fine Adjustment
Because of the aging of the monitor and in order to adapt to the individual lighting conditions on board,
it might be necessary to perform a fine adjustment:
1. Set the brightness to minimum. If the monitor has a contrast control, it should be set to maximum.
2. Open the Brightness menu. It contains a symbol consisting of two concentric squares.
3. If the inner square is not visible, adjust the brightness so that this square can just be seen clearly
and no more.
– or, if there is a contrast control –
If the inner square stands out very strongly, reduce the contrast so that this square can just be seen
clearly and no more.

Checking the Brightness Setting

In the case of the night colours in particular, there is a danger that, to avoid spoiling the night vision, the
display is set so dark that some symbols on the electronic chart are no longer visible. To prevent this,
whenever you have switched the night colours on or have adjusted the brightness and contrast controls
you should check whether, in the Brightness menu, the inner square stands out faintly but clearly against
the outer square.

1)
On the service level, it is possible to define that this setting also has an effect on other indicators of the system and can be also be made
there for this CHARTPILOT.
2)
If there is an keyboard, this is also done by pressing the function key F9 and by then pressing the space bar.

84 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

Choosing between Coloured and Grey Area Display

The areas of the vector charts can be displayed either in colour or in shades of grey. This setting is made
by means of the Grey mode button in the Brightness menu.

List of adjustable brightness values for the screen

Switch-over of the display is done by clicking.

Switches over between grey shade display and colour display.

Checking the brightness and contrast settings: The inner

square must be visible faintly but clearly.
Menu when vector charts Switches off the Brightness menu. Menu when raster charts
are used are used

Fig. 4-1 The Brightness menu

☞ In these Operating Instructions, all colour information is based on the brightness value Bright Day,
with the Grey mode function switched off, or is based on the ARCS colour range Daytime.

Colours on Slave Monitors

If, as the slave monitor, a monitor type is used which is different from the monitor type in the CHART-
PILOT station, it can happen that the display of colours is different on the slave monitors.
WARNING:
As a result of this it is possible that, on such slave monitors, not all
chart objects are clearly identifiable.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 85

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions

4.2.2 Adjusting the Range

☞ This section applies only to the use of vector charts. When raster charts are used, the setting of the
chart scale is done by selection of the chart to be displayed or the scale value; see Section 4.2.3.
The size of the geographical excerpt displayed can be changed by operating the Range field.

List of selectable ranges. Switch-over takes

place after clicking of the range value in
this list Symbol : For this range, data of the vector
chart are available (for details, see text).

Makes the Range list disappear.

Switches on the next smaller range. Switches on the next larger range.

Range value of the present display Distance between the range rings (displayed
only if range rings are switched on)

Clicking of this field makes the list appear.

☞ After switch-over of the range, the data contained in the field are
displayed in red until the new picture has been generated.

Fig. 4-2 The Range field with Range List

The Range field is situated in the basic menu line. By clicking on the symbol or , you can change
the range in steps. The value currently selected is displayed between these symbols. It refers to half the
height of the chart area. Range values from 0.1 NM to 800 NM can be set. When you click the range
value or the function key F6 a list of all selectable ranges appears above this field; in this list, you can
click the desired value directly.
☞ In the case of a switch-over through several range values, direct clicking permits faster generation
of the picture.
☞ The symbols to the right of the range values indicate the display ranges for which a vector chart
is available - see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N .

USEFUL INFORMATION

Automatic Selection of the Purposes to be Displayed

For each range setting, an ideal purpose is defined in the program, depending on the vector chart used
(see also Table on page 88.
For the set range, the program first searches in the selected vector chart to find the cell with the ideal
purpose which (in the Monitoring display modes) covers the position of own ship or (in the Planning
display mode) the centre of the chart area.
- If the cell of the purpose being looked for exists in the local database, this cell is used for the display.

86 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

- If no cell with the next larger scale is available either for the specified position, the program uses the
cell with the next smaller scale (or perhaps also a cell with an even smaller scale) if such a cell exists
for the specified position and contains data. In this case, the message Overscaled appears in the
Chart Status field.
If the cell found in this way does not cover the entire chart region, then for those regions that are not
covered the program likewise looks for cells having the ideal navigational purpose, and displays these
cells. For regions for which the program does not find any cells having the ideal navigational purpose, it
uses cells with a smaller scale.
If a small range is set, then in addition any existing data of the cells having the next larger scale are
displayed.

Markings Used (see Figure 4-3)

The boundary between cells having different scales is marked by a grey line.
If the scale of the cell is considerably smaller than the display scale, the area concerned is marked by a
vertical grey pattern of lines.
Areas for which no data are available are displayed empty and grey in the chart region.

The scale of the cell used here

is considerably smaller than the
display scale.

Boundary between cells having

different scales

Fig. 4-3 Marking of different and excessively small cell-scales

One month after expiry of the permit (see page 253), the cell is marked with a vertical red pattern of lines.
This indicates that it has not been possible to update the cell, i.e. that the cell might contain out-of-date
data.

Display of the Available Data

For the range settings marked in the list, cells of the selected vector chart having an ideal purpose
exist. In the Monitoring display modes (see page 91), this refers to the area around own ship's present
position; in Planning display mode, it refers to the centre of the chart area. Thus, by means of the selec-
tion procedure described above, it is also possible to display chart data for ranges not marked with the
symbol.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 87

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions

Assignment of the Ideal Purposes to the Range Settings

Range ENC CM-93/3Pro Chart CM-93/2 Chart

[NM] Code Ideal Purpose Code Ideal Purpose Code Ideal Purpose
800.0
7 General Background Z General Background
400.0 1 Overview
200.0 8 World A World
96.0
2 General 1 General Nautic B General Nautic
48.0
24.0
3 Coastal 2 Coastal C Coastal
12.0
6.0 4 Approach 3 Coastal/Approach D Coastal/Approach
3.0
5 Harbour 4 Approach E Approach
1.5
0.75
5 Harbour F Harbour
0.5
6 Berthing
0.25
6 Plan G Plan
0.10

4.2.3 Selection and Setting of the Raster Chart to be Displayed

When raster charts are used, setting of the chart scale is performed by selection of the chart to be
displayed or of a plan that exists on the chart.
When this selection has been made, the system attempts to retain the chart scale even beyond the
boundaries of the selected chart: one minute before the ship's position reaches the boundary of the chart
being displayed, the display switches over automatically to a chart which covers a larger area ahead of
the ship. If a chart with the same scale is available, a switch-over to that chart takes place; otherwise, a
switch-over takes place to a chart having a scale (larger or smaller) which differs as little as possible from
the scale currently being used.

Selection of a Raster Chart

When the raster chart with the next smaller scale is to be displayed, all that is needed is to click on the
symbol in the scale field (situated in the basic menu line). The raster chart with the next larger scale
is selected accordingly with the symbol .
☞ In the Chart Status field, the display Bad Scale appears if one or more charts or plans are present
having a scale larger than the scale used for the chart region.
If a particular raster chart is to be displayed, open the Chart Selection menu by clicking on the displayed
scale in the scale field or by pressing the function key F6. Clicking on one of the charts or plans marked
there with selects this for display and closes the Chart Selection menu.

88 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

Explanations for the Chart Selection Menu

In the Chart Selection menu, all existing charts (together with their scales 1)) are listed which (in Moni-
toring display mode) cover own position or (in Planning display mode) the middle of the chart area,
whether this covering is done by the main part of the chart or by a plan situated on the chart.
If this position is covered both by the main part of the chart and by one or more plans, multiple naming
of the chart takes place. From the larger scale, it can then be recognised that the entry stands for a plan.
If a chart is divided into two parts having the same scale, multiple naming again takes place. In this case,
the only way in which you can determine which part is involved is to select one of the two parts.
☞ If you do not know the numbers of the charts, you can extend the menu by addition of the display
of chart names by means of the Maximize button (at top right in the list).
The availability is indicated by the symbol entered on the left:
The chart is stored in the local database and can be displayed by clicking.
For this chart, a licence exists. However, the chart is not situated in the local database. Therefore,
it must be transferred to that place before use (see page 282).
No symbol: For this chart, no licence exists.

Scale of the chart Number of the chart

Availability of the chart: or plan
(Directly) available
Yet to be loaded Additionally displays the names of the charts
No symbol: Licence must be
obtained
Inverted line: The chart or plan displayed

Clicking on a line selects the chart or plan for

display and closes the chart list

Enlarges the display scale by a Closes the chart list without any change
linear factor of 2

Selects the chart or plan with the Selects the chart or plan with the next
next larger scale smaller scale

Scale of the displayed chart

☞ After the switch-over to another chart, the number is
Clicking on this field makes the list appear. displayed in red until the new image is generated.

Fig. 4-4 Scale field with chart selection menu

Displaying the Raster Chart in Enlarged Form

In the Chart Selection menu, you can enlarge the display of the selected chart/plan by a factor of 2 by
pressing the Zoom in button. (The zoom is cancelled by pressing of the same button, which is meanwhile
called Zoom off.)
☞ If the raster chart is to be displayed in enlarged form, the display Zoom x 2 appears in the Chart
Status field of the navigation data line.

1)
The statement of the chart scales always refers to the paper version. The scales of the screen display differ from that.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 89

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions

Marking the Chart Region which is Not the Active One

In all cases, a uniform scale is used as the basis throughout the entire chart region. This applies also to
all objects which the CHARTPILOT inserts in the chart region, e.g. tracks and targets, and it also applies
to the cursor position. If own ship is situated within the area of a plan, the scale of the plan also applies
to the objects that are overlaid on the main part of the chart, and vice versa. Consequently, a track (for
example) is shown throughout the entire chart region without any discontinuities, but in the area which is
not the active area the shape of the track does not correspond to the chart being displayed. One example
of the consequences of this is that, by means of the cursor, the correct position of a target is displayed.
In the menu Chart > Raster Chart Options, all non-active areas can be covered with a white pattern of
dots by switch-on of the function Shade Non-Active Areas, so that these areas can only be seen indis-
tinctly. Therefore if (in Monitoring display mode) own ship is situated within the area of a plan, the
surrounding main part is displayed more faintly, and vice versa.
It is recommended that this function should be switched on.

Displays more faintly those parts of the chart that are currently not being used.

When this function is switched on, the plan contained in the chart is displayed auto-
matically as soon as the ship is situated in the region covered by the plan.

This marks by means of black rectangles those regions of a raster chart in which
updates have been performed.

Fig. 4-5 The Chart > Raster Chart Options menu

Looking at the Entire Chart in the Form of an Overview

To obtain an overview, you can also display completely the chart that has been selected for display, see
Figure 4-6. This is done by means of the Chart Overview function of the context menu of the chart
region.
☞ In this display, the cursor position is correct both in the main part and in the plans.

Specifying Automatic Switch-Over of the Chart Scale

In the menu Chart > Raster Chart Options, it can be ensured by switching on the Auto Scale function
that the area lying ahead is always displayed with the largest scale that is available on the selected chart
in the form of plans. The switch-over takes place in Monitoring display mode as soon as the ship's posi-
tion is situated in the area for which a plan (with a larger scale) exists on the chart.
In Planning display mode, the switch-over takes place when the centre of the chart area is set to such a
position.
In Monitoring display mode, a switch-over takes place automatically back to the main part of the chart or
into a plan with a smaller scale when the limit of the plan displayed is going to be reached in a minute's
time.
If the Auto Scale function is not switched on, no automatic switch-over occurs within a chart.

90 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

Marking Changed ARCS Chart Regions

If you wish to know whether updates have been carried out for the currently displayed region of the raster
chart, you can obtain a display of the changed regions (ARCS term: Tiles) in the form of black, rectan-
gular frames by switching on the function Updated Chart Regions in the menu Chart > Raster Chart
Options.
☞ In the overview display, all changed regions are marked by means of black rectangles if the function
Updated Chart Regions is switched on there. If the Updated Chart Regions button is insensitive,
this means that the chart has not been changed.

Cursor position in
the overview
display

This excerpt is
currently being
displayed in the
chart region

In Planning display
mode, the new
centre of the chart
region is defined by
clicking on a posi-
tion; see page 96.

These regions have

been changed by
updates

Switches off
the overview
display
Switches the marking of the You can find this information in the Notes&Diagrams
changed regions on and off index card of the Info box.

Fig. 4-6 Overview display of a raster chart

4.2.4 Display Modes

Concerning the chart excerpt displayed, you have a choice between the Monitoring display modes, in
which own position is always situated in the chart excerpt displayed, and the Planning display mode, in
which a desired chart excerpt is set regardless of own position.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 91

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions

4.2.4.1 Monitoring Display Modes

Switching On the Monitoring Display Mode

In the Presentation > Display Mode menu, press the Monitoring button. There, by clicking one of the
buttons in the Monitoring frame, it is possible to choose between the various types of display 1). The differ-
ences between the available Monitoring display modes are stated in the following table.
☞ The display mode that is switched on is continuously indicated in the navigation data line.
Monitoring display Chart alignment and Movement of own ship
mode chart movement symbol
True Motion True north upwards; chart remains fixed until True Motion Movement according to
Reset takes place. When the ship symbol reaches the limit course and speed
of the True Motion Reset area, a True Motion Reset occurs
Centered Display 1) True north upwards. The chart moves continuously oppo- Rotation when the course
site to the sailing direction changes; no change of the
position on the screen
North-Up RM 1) True north upwards. The chart moves continuously oppo- Rotation when the course
site to the sailing direction changes; no change of the
position on the screen
Course-Up RM 2) Upon switch-over to Course-Up mode, the chart is rotated Rotation when the course
in such a way that the ship's headmarker points upwards. changes; no change of the
This alignment is maintained. The chart moves continu- position on the screen
ously opposite to the sailing direction 3)
Head-Up RM 2) Ship's headmarker points upwards; chart rotates when None
course changes, and moves continuously opposite to
sailing direction

1)
On the CHARTPILOT, there are no differences between the Centered Display mode and the North-Up RM mode. These terms
were taken over from radar technology, where the modes differ in the treatment of the radar trails.
2)
These modes are not available when the raster charts are used.
3)
If, after a course change, the headmarker is to be made to point upwards again, the Course-Up mode must be reactivated.

Examples
In figures 4-7 and 4-8, screen excerpts from two instants of the same scenario are shown schematically
for the five Monitoring display modes:
Instant 1
- Own ship's course 60°, speed 20 kn
- Two moving targets, courses 60° and 150°, speed 10 kn for both
- Two fixed targets
- Two grid lines showing the alignment of the electronic chart
Instant 2
The same scenario, but after an own ship's course change to 10° (all other data unchanged).
Displays of the following are set: Own ship symbol, course and speed vectors, past plots of the targets.
Except in the case of True Motion, the centre of the screen excerpt shown is the own ship's position that
was set with Set Center.

1)
Alternative: In the Display Mode context menu of the Chart Status field (navigational data line)

92 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

Instant 1 Instant 2

True Motion (with true vectors and past plots)

Instant 1 Instant 2

Centered Display (with true vectors and past plots)

Fig. 4-7 Display in the modes True Motion and Centered Display

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 93

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions

Instant 1 Instant 2

North-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)

Instant 1 Instant 2

Course-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)

Instant 1 Instant 2

Head-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)

Fig. 4-8 Display in the modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RM

94 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

In all Monitoring display modes, you can determine - within particular limits - the position that is to be
occupied by the own ship symbol on the screen:

Specifying the Position of the Own Ship Symbol on the Screen

Operating procedure with key: Position the cursor at the point on the screen that is to be occupied by
the own ship symbol, and press the function key F7
Operating procedure with button: In the basic menu line, press the Set Center button or, with the
MORE key click into the chart area and select Set Center. Click the point on the screen that is to be
occupied by the own ship symbol.
☞ The point clicked should be situated within the True Motion Reset area. If you click a point outside
the True Motion Reset area,
- in the Monitoring display modes Head-Up, Course-Up, North-Up and Centered Display, the own
ship symbol is set at the edge of the True Motion Reset area,
- in the Monitoring display mode True Motion, a True Motion Reset is performed.

Setting the True Motion Reset Area

The size of the True Motion Reset area is set by adjusting the True Motion Reset controller in the Pres-
entation > Display Mode menu. With a small numerical value of True Motion Reset, you define that own
position is situated more at the centre of the screen but that the True Motion Reset occurs more
frequently.

Switches the Monitoring display mode on, i.e. own position is

always situated in the displayed area.

Selection of the Monitoring display mode

For Monitoring display mode only: When the ship reaches

this radius, a True Motion Reset occurs

The vectors and past plots of the targets are displayed relative to own ship; the
vector of own ship's symbol is omitted (see page 63).

The vectors and past plots of the targets and the vector of own ship's
symbol are displayed true (see page 63).
Switches on the Planning display mode, i.e. any desired area can
be displayed, regardless of own position.

For Planning display mode only: Geographic position of the chart area centre
which occurs after pressing of the Apply button or the Enter key.

Takes over the position that has been input; the menu is not exited

Fig. 4-9 The Presentation > Display Mode menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 95

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION

True Motion Reset

A True Motion Reset takes place when (in the Monitoring display mode True Motion) the own ship symbol
reaches the limit of the True Motion Reset area. When the True Motion Reset occurs, the chart is shifted
along the present ship's headmarker in the opposite direction so that the centre of the chart area is once
again situated ahead of the ship.

True Motion Reset Area

This area is circular, is situated at the centre of the chart area, and has the radius that was set by means
of the True Motion Reset controller. The percentage displayed there refers to half the height of the chart
area.

4.2.4.2 Planning Display Mode

The Planning display mode is provided specially for the tasks of planning: any geographical area can be
displayed regardless of the current own position by setting the picture centre at any geographical position.
In Planning display mode, the chart is always aligned with true north upwards. If own position is situated
in the chart area displayed, own ship symbol is displayed unless its display is generally switched off.

Switching On the Planning Display Mode

Press the Planning button in the Presentation > Display Mode menu 1).

Specifying the Centre of the Displayed Chart-Excerpt

To do this, there are two possible methods:
- If the desired centre is not situated in the present display area, the centre coordinates can be input:
Under Planning in the Presentation > Display Mode menu, input the centre coordinates of the new
chart excerpt and press the Apply button.
- If the desired centre is situated in the present display area, the chart excerpt can be moved manu-
ally: Press Set Center in the basic menu line 2), and in the chart area click the position that is to be
the new centre of the chart excerpt. This function can also be executed several times in order to
reach new chart excerpts step-by-step (e.g. along the course being steered or along the pre-planned
track).
Within a raster chart, a new centre can also be defined by clicking on the desired position in the overview
display. The overview display is opened by means of the Overview function of the context menu of the
chart region. See Figure 4-6 on page 91.

Switching On with the Subroutine Chart Maintenance

When you switch back directly from the subroutine Chart Maintenance to the program Navigation by
means of the Set Planning Mode function, the Planning display mode is switched on and the centre of
the displayed chart excerpt corresponds to the position clicked in the (zoomed) world chart - see page
239

1)
Alternative: In the Display Mode context menu of the Chart Status field (navigational data line)
2)
Or the function key F7 on the A/N keyboard

96 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

4.2.5 Setting the Coordinate System

☞ This setting can be made only if vector charts are used.

The coordinate system (projection and geodetic datum) used for the display can be set, e.g. so that the
position data on the screen and on a paper chart are identical to each other or in order to minimise the
distortions in the graphic display and thus errors in range measurement and in the determination of bear-
ings.

Setting the Projection and the Geodetic Datum

1. Under Projection in the Presentation > Coordinate System menu, choose between the Radar
projection (this corresponds to the projection created by the radar measurement) and Mercator.
2. Under Geodetic Datum, select the appropriate geodetic datum.
WARNING:
If the vector chart is being used for navigation, the geodetic datum
WGS 84 must be selected.
3. Press the Apply button in order to put the new settings into effect. You can leave the Coordinate
System menu by means of Presentation, for example.
☞ The setting procedure can also be carried out in the context menu after clicking into the position
display of the navigation data line has been performed by means of the MORE key.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Scope of Validity of the Coordinate System Selected Here

All displays provided by the CHARTPILOT refer to the coordinate system selected here, with the following
exceptions:
- For the period of editing of pre-planned tracks and maps, a different coordinate system (e.g. that of
the paper chart used) can be set for the position values that are to be input; this can be done via
the editing menu concerned. When the editing menu is exited, a return to the coordinate system
selected here takes place automatically.
- The programs for navigational consulting (Consulting) and for maintenance of the chart data (Chart
Maintenance) are based on the Mercator projection and on the geodetic datum WGS 84.

Parameterisations for Special Tasks

At service level, it can be specified that UTM and Gauss-Krueger too can be selected under Projection
in the Presentation > Coordinate System menu. In this case, the Presentation > Coordinate System
menu contains the Hemisphere button, with which the hemisphere must be input if the UTM or Gauss-
Krueger projection is selected.
If UTM and Gauss-Krueger projections are selectable, it can also be specified at service level that, for
these two projections and for the Mercator projection, not only automatic determination of reference data
but also manual input of reference data is to be possible. In this case, the Presentation > Coordinate
System menu is supplemented by the Reference frame. Figure 4-10 shows the menu in this configura-
tion.

Projection at High Latitudes

If the Radar projection is not in the switched-on state, it is switched on automatically as soon as the 85th
parallel of latitude is reached in the chart area. An appropriate message appears.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 97

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions

Exits the menu; only the settings that were input before pressing
of the Apply button are taken over.

Definition of the projection

Definition of the geodetic datum
Manual input of the hemisphere for UTM and
Gauss-Krueger projection

Reference data of the projection:

- Auto: Automatic determination of the reference data
- Manual: Makes it possible to input the reference data
manually (changes the distortion of the display). These functions are
available only when
parameterisation for
Manual input of the reference latitude of special tasks has been
the Mercator projection enabled at service level.
Manual input of the UTM zone
Manual input of the Gauss-Krueger projection

Takes over the data that were input; the menu is not exited.

The data that have been valid since the last take-over are restored
again; the menu is not exited.

Fig. 4-10 The Presentation > Coordinate System menu

98 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

Overview of the Measures for the Display of Electronic Charts:

1. The electronic charts of the type that is to be used must be available with the desired scale for the
necessary geographical area on the hard disk drive of the CHARTPILOT in the data area created
for them. These data must be completely up to date, see also page 79.
2. Select the chart type in the Chart menu with the Type button 1).
If a vector chart is selected:
3. Switch the display of the vector chart on generally in the Chart menu by pressing the Chart Visible
button.
4. In accordance with Section 4.3.1, specify the objects and text labels that are to be generally
displayed.
5. In accordance with Section 4.3.2 (from page 103 onwards), specify the depth contours that are to
be displayed.
6. In accordance with Section 4.3.3 (from page 105 onwards), switch the display of the User Chart
Objects on.
7. If the area to be displayed is not the area around own ship's currently existing position, switch into
Planning display mode and specify the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed; see
Section 4.2.4.2 on page 96.
8. Via the range setting as per Section 4.2.2 (page 86), the vector chart cells to be displayed are
selected.
If raster charts are selected:
9. If the area to be displayed is not the area around own ship's currently existing position, switch into
Planning display mode and specify the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed; see
Section 4.2.4.2 on page 96.
10. In accordance with Section 4.2.3 (from page 88 onwards), select and set the raster chart that is to
be displayed.
11. In accordance with Section 4.3.3 (from page 105 onwards), switch the display of the User Chart
Objects on.
12. Information about the chart can be taken from the info box in accordance with Section 3.5.7 (from
page 74 onwards) (index cards Legend, Status and Notes&Diagrams).
13. Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners can be looked up in the
info box (index card T&P NMs).

4.3.1 Defining the Objects to be Displayed in the Vector Chart

Because the symbols, areas, lines and labellings (collectively called objects in the following) are individ-
ually stored electronically in the vector chart, it is not necessary to display all of the objects all of the time.
Instead, an appropriate and, at the same time, uncluttered display can be achieved by selection of the
display groups required. Furthermore, for a number of objects (e.g. buoys), there is a choice between two
symbol presentations. Irrespective of this, the number of text labels displayed can be influenced.

1)
Or in the Chart Type context menu after clicking into the Chart Status field of the navigation data line has taken place by means of the
MORE key.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 99

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart Operating Instructions

Display Groups to be Displayed

☞ Object classes (complete sets of similar objects) are grouped into display groups; for example, the
object class Restricted Areas together with the object class Military Practice Areas and other similar
object classes forms the display group Cautionary Areas.
IMO has defined two categories for the selection of the display groups that are to be shown:
- Display Standard: Contains the display groups which are normally necessary for voyage planning
and voyage monitoring.
- Display Base: Consists of the display groups which, as a minimum requirement, definitely have to
be displayed. They are normally not sufficient for safe navigation.
In both cases, further display groups can be displayed.
WARNING:
When the vector charts are being used, it must be ensured at regular
intervals (e.g. after a change of watch) that all of the necessary display
groups are being displayed. Not even the Display Standard setting guar-
antees the completeness of the display.

Editing the manual ENC update, see page 192.

Editing the User Chart Objects, see page 185.
Marking of events (see page 131; menu see Figure 4-32 on page 132).
Marking of position fix (see page 133; menu see Figure 4-34 on page 135).
Selection of the chart type
Selection of the display groups to be displayed:
Base: Display of the prescribed minimum scope (+ = plus the display groups
switched on in the Visibility Options > Visibility Groups menu)
Standard: Display of the prescribed standard scope
All: Display of all objects (– = minus the display groups switched off in the
Visibility Groups menu)
Input of the depth contours and safety depth when vector charts are being used,
see page 104
Display options for vector charts, e.g. switching individual display
groups on and off; menu see Figure 4-12
Display options for raster charts; menu see Figure 4-5
Switches the display of the electronic chart on and off.
Switches the display of the User Chart Objects on and off.
Defines whether the User Chart Objects produced by conversion of the maps are to
be displayed also - see page 320.
Specifies the number of texts displayed in the chart area - see page 102.

Fig. 4-11 The Chart menu

Selecting the Display Standard Groups

In the Chart menu, set the Category button to Standard. In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility
Groups menu, you can additionally obtain a display of the display groups listed there by switching on the
corresponding buttons (leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu (and in the Chart Status field
of the navigation data line), a plus sign then appears behind Standard.

100 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

Changing the Selection of the Display Groups

- When, in the Chart menu, you set the Category button to Base, all display groups prescribed by
the IMO as a minimum requirement are displayed. In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility
Groups menu, you can additionally obtain a display of the display groups listed there by switching
on the corresponding buttons (leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu, a plus sign then
appears behind Base.
- When, in the Chart menu, you set the Category button to All, all display groups that exist in the
electronic chart are displayed 1). In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility Groups menu, you can
switch off the display of the display groups listed there by switching off the corresponding buttons
(leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu, a minus sign then appears behind All.

Opens the menu ... > Visibility Groups

Paper Chart: The symbols of the paper charts are used.

Simpified: Symbols optimised for screen display are used.

Symbolized: The symbols of the paper charts are used.

Plain: Symbols optimised for screen display are used.
Marking of the objects changed in the ENC:
None: No marking
Last: Changes made by the last Update are marked.
All: All changes are marked.
Within Effective Dates: Objects are displayed only during the
time periods entered in the electronic chart.
Always Visible: Objects are displayed always.
Objects for which additional text information
exists are marked.
Light sectors are displayed true to scale
Light descriptions are displayed
Non-navigable areas are marked additionally by
means of a diagonal grid.
Isolated dangers situated in shallow water
are displayed
Objects are displayed independently of the
selected chart scale.

Switched-on display groups are displayed additionally in the case of Display

Base and Display Standard .
Switched-off display groups are not displayed in the case of Display All.

Exits the menu without the new settings becoming effective.

Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited.

Fig. 4-12 The menus Chart > Visibility Groups and ... > Visibility Groups

1)
With the exception of the data quality features. When these too are added if necessary, a plus sign appears behind All.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 101

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart Operating Instructions

Defining the Symbol Presentation

For symbols and areas, it is possible to define whether they should be displayed in the same way as on
the paper charts or whether a simplified set of symbols optimised for display on the screen should be
used. These settings are made in the menu Chart > Visibility Options:
Symbols: Paper Chart and Areas: Symbolized = display as on paper charts,
Symbols: Simpified and Areas: Plain = simplified display.

Setting the Display of Text Labels

In the Chart menu, the number of texts displayed can be specified by means of the Text Labels button:
None: No texts
Few: Only the most important text labels are displayed.
Normal: The text labels that are normally adequate for navigation appear.
All: All text labels contained in the chart appear.
☞ In this way, the text labels of the chart, of the User Chart Objects, of event markers and of position
fixes are switched on/off and selected.

Temporary Displays
Marking of Official Changes of the ENC: The ENC lines and
symbols changed by official updates can be marked:
- All changed objects are framed by a large, orange star.
- All changed lines are displayed uniformly by bold, orange
dashes.
This setting is made in the Chart > Visibility Options menu by
means of the Highlight Official Updates button:
None: No marking (standard setting).
Last: All objects changed by the last official update are
marked.
All: All objects changed by official updates in the ENC that is present in the CHARTPILOT are
marked.

Temporary Objects
Temporary Objects: For objects which are not present continuously, e.g. buoys which are deployed
seasonally, it is possible to define whether the display is to take place only at the time entered for it in
the electronic chart.
This setting is made in the menu Chart > Visibility Options by means of the Objects Depending on
Date button:
Within Effective Dates: Objects are displayed only during the time periods entered in the electronic
chart.
Always Visible: Objects are displayed independently of the time periods entered.
Additional information: If the function Extra Info Symbols is switched on, the objects for which addi-
tional information is given in the Data box (of the Info box - see Figure 3-23 on page 75) (behind the label
i
Information: or obtainable by pressing the button Details) are marked with the symbol .

True-to-scale display of the lights: If the function Full Length Light Section is switched on, the length
of the lines of the light sectors corresponds to the nominal range.
Light descriptions: If the text labels are switched on, the display of the light descriptions can be
switched on and off by means of the function Light Descriptions.

102 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

Additional marking of the non-navigable area: If the function Shallow Water Pattern is switched on,
the non-navigable shallow water area and mud flat areas are additionally marked by means of diagonal
grid-lines.
Display of isolated danger situated in shallow water: If the function Shallow Water Dangers is
switched on, the isolated danger symbols which are situated in shallow water are displayed.
Non-suppression of objects in the case of small scale: If the function Ignore Scale Minimum is
switched on, chart objects are displayed even in the case of chart scales that normally cause suppression
of the display of these objects.
☞ For a very large number of chart objects, the smallest chart scale is defined at which the object
should still be displayed - see also page 198.

4.3.2 Defining the Depth Contours to be Displayed

In the display of the vector charts, it is possible to use colour to clearly distinguish the navigable areas
from the non-navigable ones, depending on the draught of the ship. Navigable areas are displayed in
white or grey-white, non-navigable areas in light blue or blue. The boundary between these areas is the
safety contour.
☞ The safety contour is particularly important because it is a basis for the ECDIS Monitoring (see page
108) and for the checking of tracks (see page 175 and 222).
It is also possible both inside the navigable area and inside the non-navigable area to distinguish between
two areas with different depth ranges:
- Within the navigable area, the deep contour differentiates between the adequately deep areas
displayed in grey-white and the deeper areas displayed in white.
- Within the non-navigable area, the shallow contour differentiates between the areas displayed in
light blue which are adjacent to the navigable area, and the even shallower areas displayed in blue.

Disp Chart zero

lay: Safety depth
Shallow contour
Blue

Ligh Safety contour (input value)

t blu Safety contour (value existing in the
e
vector chart)
Grey Deep contour
-whit
e

Whit
e
Non-navigable area Navigable area

Fig. 4-13 Diagram of the depth contour system

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 103

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart Operating Instructions

Spot soundings from individual measurements are displayed more prominently if they project beyond a
particular depth. This depth is set as the Safety Depth.
This situation is shown graphically in Figure 4-13.

Inputting the Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Other Depth Contours
1. In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, input the safety depth (draught plus a reserve of 2 m, for
example).
2. Input the safety contour (value greater than the safety depth).
3. By input of shallow contour (value between 0 and the safety contour), the non-navigable area can
be divided into two areas having different depth ranges.
By input of deep contour (value greater than the safety contour), the navigable area can be divided
into two areas having different depth ranges.
These relationships are illustrated the Chart > Depth Contour menu by a graphic.
☞ The coloured areas set in this way can only be formed from the depth areas contained in the vector
chart, i.e. from areas representing a certain depth range. Since their minimum and maximum values
are normally formed from depth values that are also commonly utilized in paper charts as depth
contours, such values should also be used for the settings. If a value is entered which is not defined
in the vector chart as an area boundary, the displayed contour runs along the next deeper boundary
that is available in the vector chart. In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, the values that are entered
continue to be displayed.
☞ The input of these four values can also be performed on any other CHARTPILOT and on any
MULTIPILOT 1000 of the system. This value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last input
is valid. Exception: A CHARTPILOT configured as a planning station on service level does not
distribute nor receive these settings from other stations.
If, in the menu Chart > Depth Contour, the button Depth Shades is set to Four, each of these four areas
is displayed in a different colour - see also Figure 4-13.

Displaying the Depth Values of the Contours

In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, the depth values for the depth contours being displayed can be
switched on/off by means of the Contour Labels function.
None: No depth values are shown at the depth contours.
Safety: Only the depth values of the safety contour are shown.
All: The depth values of all depth contours up to 100 m that are available in the vector chart are shown. 1)
☞ The boundaries of the chart areas are almost always indicated by means of depth contours. Unlike
what might be expected, these are often not continuous lines. Interruptions in the depth contour
appear as gaps. For the safety contour, these gaps are closed by the program of the ECDIS. This
is done even when depth areas with different boundary depths are used over the range of the safety
depth. In such a case, various depth values are shown along the safety contour. Wherever they are
shown, they correspond to the depth value defined there in the vector chart.

1)
Therefore also of the depth contours that are not at the same time shallow contours, safety contours or deep contours.

104 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

Four: The partial areas defined as shallow contour and deep contour
are displayed in different colours - see page 104.
Two: A colour distinction is made only between navigable and non-navi-
gable areas.

Setting the depth values, see text

Displaying the depth values of the depth contours:

None: No depth values are shown at the depth contours.
Safety: Only the depth values of the safety contour are shown.
All: The depth values of all depth contours up to 100 m that are available in the
vector chart are shown.

Fig. 4-14 The menu Chart > Depth Contour

4.3.3 Switching the display of the User Chart Objects on and off

The display of the User Chart Objects is switched on and off in the Chart menu by means of the function
User Chart Objects.
For systems with radar 9xxx series: With the Converted Map Objects button, it is possible to define
whether the User Chart Objects generated by conversion of the maps (see page 320) are displayed also.
☞ Because User Chart Objects are independent of the electronic chart used, they can be easily iden-
tified by switching off the display of the electronic chart (by means of Chart Visible in the Chart
menu): the chart objects that are then still being displayed are User Chart Objects.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 105

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.4 ECDIS Monitoring Operating Instructions

4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

During the voyage, the ECDIS subsystem of the CHARTPILOT performs a number of nautical checks at
short intervals of time. If defined criteria are infringed, an appropriate alarm is given.
The ECDIS monitoring can be divided into
track monitoring with the checks of own ship against the System Track (for System Track, see page
221) and monitoring of the depth on the basis of the water depth measured by the navigation echo
sounder. Alarms are given via the track alarms, see page 106, and the depth alarm, see page 112.
chart monitoring with the checks of own ship's position, of the ship’s movement and of the System Track
relative to the vector chart and the User Chart Objects own safety line, danger highlight and own
MARPOL line. Alarms are given via the chart alarms - see page 108.

So that this ECDIS Monitoring can serve its purpose, namely increasing the nautical safety, the following
prerequisites must be fulfilled:
- The best possible sensors for position and speed must be selected.
- By means of a comparison between the available position sensors, a check must be performed to
ensure that the selected position sensor is supplying correct position data.
- If a vector chart is used, it must be available for the entire navigated area. Otherwise, own safety
lines and danger highlights must exist for the missing areas.
- If a raster chart is used, own safety lines and danger highlights for all potentially dangerous areas
and objects must exist for the entire navigated area.
- The track used must have been successfully checked as per Section 5.1.9.
- The latest relevant nautical warning information received by radio must be taken into account,
possibly by the editing of own safety lines or danger highlights or by manual ENC update. The check
of the track used should, if necessary, be repeated after incorporation of the warning information.
- The safety contour value must have been set correctly; see page 104.
- The alarm criteria must be correctly set - see the following sections.
- The colour reproduction produced by the monitors must be correct. In the case of doubt and once
per year, the monitor performance must be checked in accordance with Appendix A, Section A 3.

4.4.1 Track Monitoring: Own Ship against the System Track

☞ This monitoring is closely related to equivalent functions of the TRACKPILOT; see U S E F U L I N F O R -

MATION.

Course Monitoring
If the difference between the actual course and the course defined by the System Track is greater than
the set (= displayed) course limit, the alarm message COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED appears. If the ship
is being steered in Track mode, no message appears on the CHARTPILOT.
Settings: The valid course limit is displayed in the Alarm Settings menu.
If a TRACKPILOT is installed, the input of the course limit in the Alarm Settings menu can only be
performed on a radar indicator that is switched to act as the TRACKPILOT Master. If the TRACKPILOT
uses the data of the System Track (PD=On), then on passing a waypoint the course limit that was entered
in the track for this waypoint becomes valid. This value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last
input is valid.
If no TRACKPILOT is installed, no system-wide equalisation takes place for manual input. If a System
Track is defined, then on passing a waypoint the course limit that was entered in the track for this
waypoint becomes valid.

106 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

In the Alarm Settings menu, with the Track Alarms button the output of this alarm jointly with the output
of the alarm TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED can be suppressed for this CHARTPILOT. 1)

Monitoring of the Cross Track Distance

If the deviation of the ship's position from the System Track is greater than the displayed track limit, the
alarm message TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED appears. If steering is being performed in Track mode, no
message appears on the CHARTPILOT.
The settings/displays take place in a manner similar to those of course monitoring.

Alarm on Approaching the present Waypoint

When the probable travelling time needed to reach the wheel over point (WOP) of the next course
manoeuvre defined by the System Track becomes less than the Waypoint Approach value displayed in
the Alarm Settings menu, then in the case of steering with NEXT data the alarm message
APPROACHING WAYPOINT appears. If steering is being performed in Track mode, no message
appears on the CHARTPILOT.
The settings/displays take place in a manner similar to those of course monitoring. In addition, by
switching off the function Waypoint Approach, the output of this alarm can be suppressed for this
CHARTPILOT, even if the other track alarms are not suppressed.

Setting of the chart alarms (if vector charts are used), activating the anchor watch function;
menu see Figure 4-17 on page 110
When this function is switched on, the external Chart alarm (see page 399) is given as
soon as one of those chart alarms occurs for which, according to the ECDIS rules,
transfer (capable of being switched on/off) to the central alarm-panel is required.

Switches the acoustic signal for particular alarms on and off generally - see page 341.

Activates the track alarms for the CHARTPILOT.

Display 1) of the set course limit
Display 1) of the set track limit
When track alarms are activated, this activates the APPROACHING WAYPOINT
alarm for this CHARTPILOT.
Display 1) of the APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm value

Setting of the limit values for the automatic acquisition of AIS targets with output of the
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET or DANGEROUS TARGET alarm (see page 119).
Switching off the automatic acquisition of AIS targets - see page 120
Setting of the depth value for the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED or DEPTH ALARM
Activates the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED or DEPTH ALARM
Exits the menu. Data that are input have an effect only if the Apply button was
pressed beforehand.

Takes over the data that have been input; the menu is not exited.

1) In the case of systems without TRACKPILOT: input also

Fig. 4-15 The Alarm Settings menu

1)
This setting is not possible if the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode - see USEFUL INFORMATION.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 107

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.4 ECDIS Monitoring Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION

The Connection with the TRACKPILOT

The monitoring of own ship against the System Track is performed independently of the CHARTPILOT
by the TRACKPILOT as well (if the TRACKPILOT is switched on). During this process, both programs
operate with identical limit-values. The TRACKPILOT always checks against the track which is valid for it.
This leads to the following conclusions:
- The limit values can be set both via the TRACKPILOT controller and via the track alarms of the
ECDIS Monitoring operating facility. If a limit value is changed on the TRACKPILOT, this causes an
automatic change in the limit value for the ECDIS track alarms and vice versa. The last input is valid.
- Because, with the alarm limit values, the TRACKPILOT also changes its control behaviour, the
setting of the (ECDIS) track alarms also affects the control behaviour of the TRACKPILOT. There-
fore, if there is a TRACKPILOT the setting is possible only on the TRACKPILOT Master.
- If the TRACKPILOT is being controlled with the aid of the Pilot Data contained in the pre-planned
track, then the limit values for the (ECDIS) track alarms are automatically changed as well.
- Both programs generate equivalent alarms. As long as the TRACKPILOT is being operated in
Heading mode or Course mode, the TRACKPILOT performs its checking not against the System
Track but against the track that is set manually (course line on the set course). The tracks against
which checking is being performed simultaneously are therefore different from one another, and both
the alarms generated by the TRACKPILOT and those generated by the ECDIS subsystem appear.
In Track mode, the TRACKPILOT too performs checking against the System Track; in order to avoid
double alarms, only the alarms of the TRACKPILOT are then output. These appear on the TRACK-
PILOT Master only.

4.4.2 Chart Monitoring: Own Ship against Vector Chart and Own Safety Lines

For this ECDIS Monitoring function, the program constructs a monitoring sector (guard sector) with an
included angle of 10° and a length which you can define in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms
under Distance by inputting the distance or under Time by inputting the travelling time. (In the case of
input of the travelling time, the length is computed from the currently existing speed.) The guard sector
opens out from own position in the direction of the ship's movement and is carried along with the ship;
see Figure 4-16.
The monitoring is performed both with the guard sector and with own position.
☞ The monitoring takes place for all of the following objects which are entered in the electronic chart
or are stored as User Chart Objects. The monitoring is therefore independent of whether the display
of these objects is switched on.
It might be an advantage to suppress the guard sector monitoring if the speed is very low. The limit value
for this is entered under Min. Speed for Chart Alarms in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. If
the value 0 kt is entered, no suppression takes place.

4.4.2.1 Monitoring on the Basis of a Vector Chart

Warning against Sailing into an Area of Insufficient Depth

When a safety contour (see page 103) or another area with insufficient depth (less than the set safety
contour value) is touched by the guard sector, e.g. an object belonging to the object class Land Area, the
SAFETY CONTOUR alarm appears, together with a statement of the class of object touched and the
supplement ahead or nearby.

108 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

☞ The safety contour is formed from all objects of the object classes Land Area and Intertidal Area and
from the objects of the object classes Depth Area or Dredged Area whose depths are equal to or
the next size greater than the value entered in the menu Chart > Depth Contour under Safety
Contour.
The setting of the guard sector for this monitoring process is performed in the Safety Contour frame in
the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the SAFETY CONTOUR alarm can be
generally suppressed by means of the Safety Contour button.
As soon as own ship is situated on the safety contour or on one of the other above-mentioned areas, the
SAFETY CONTOUR alarm likewise appears, with the supplement Inside; with some of the above-
mentioned object classes, the supplement nearby also appears in this case.

Safety contour

Guard sector; this moves along

with the ship and its direction is
always the same as the ship's direc-
10° tion of movement (the guard sector
is not displayed on the screen)

Length was input in the Safety

Contour frame in the Alarm Settings
Ship's position when the SAFETY > Chart Alarms menu
CONTOUR alarm occurs

Fig. 4-16 Generating the Chart Alarm with the Guard Sector (example: SAFETY CONTOUR Alarm)

Warning about Running Over a Potentially Dangerous Object

If the guard sector touches an object from a series of object classes specified in the program, such as
Restricted Area, Fishing Ground, Traffic Separation Zone or Buoys, the alarm OBJECT OF INTEREST
appears, with a statement of the class of object that is touched and with the supplement nearby. This
alarm also appears if objects are touched which belong to particular object classes and are provided with
depth information (e.g. Underwater Rocks, Wrecks) and whose depth is less than the value entered under
Safety Contour in the menu Chart > Depth Contour.
The setting of the guard sector for this monitoring process is performed in the Object of Interest frame
in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the OBJECT OF INTEREST alarm can
be generally suppressed by means of the Object of Interest button.
If own ship is situated on one of the above-mentioned objects, the alarm likewise appears.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 109

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.4 ECDIS Monitoring Operating Instructions

4.4.2.2 Monitoring against User Chart Objects

If an own safety line is touched by the guard sector 1), the alarm USER CHART OBJECT appears, with
the supplement Own safety line nearby.
If an own MARPOL line is touched by the guard sector, the alarm USER CHART OBJECT appears, with
the supplement Own MARPOL line nearby.
If an area belonging to the object class danger highlight is touched by the guard sector, the USER
CHART OBJECT alarm appears, with the supplement Danger highlight ahead.
The setting of the guard sector for this monitoring is performed in the User Chart Objects frame in the
menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the USER CHART OBJECT alarm can be
generally suppressed by means of the User Chart Objects button.
☞ Because the own safety lines and danger highlights are available independently of the chart type,
this part of the ECDIS monitoring process can also be performed if raster charts are used. It is
urgently recommended 2) that, if raster charts are used, the dangerous areas and objects and (for
example) traffic separation zones should be marked by means of own safety lines or danger high-
lights.
If own ship is situated on an area belonging to the object class danger highlight, the alarm USER CHART
OBJECT appears, with the supplement Inside danger highlight.

Own speed below which the chart alarms are not given
Sensitises the SAFETY CONTOUR chart alarm
Length of the guard sector used to monitor the safety contour
The length of the guard sector used to monitor the safety contour; it
is computed from Time and the existing speed
Sensitises the OBJECT OF INTEREST chart alarm

Length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over particular objects

The length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over particular
objects; it is computed from Time and from the existing speed.

Sensitises the USER CHART OBJECT chart alarm

Length of the guard sector used for monitoring against own safety lines,
own MARPOL lines and danger highlights
The length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over own safety
lines, own MARPOL lines and danger highlights; it is computed from Time and from
the existing speed.
Activates the anchor watch function, see page 112

Takes over the data that have been input; the menu is not exited.

Exits the menu. Data that are input have an effect only if the Apply
button was pressed beforehand.

Fig. 4-17 The Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms menu

1)
On ships with DNV approval, the alarm appears only if the own safety line is touched from within the safe area. In the case of other ships,
this setting can also be made at service level.
2)
On ships with DNV approval, this is compulsory.

110 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

Repetition of the Alarms

WARNING:
An alarm is repeated only if an object belonging to a different object
class is touched.
If, for example, the ship is sailing along a line of buoys and is too close to them, the alarm OBJECT OF
INTEREST appears only for the first buoy.

4.4.3 Chart Monitoring: System Track against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects

For this ECDIS Monitoring function, a monitoring strip twice as wide as the track limit contained in the
System Track and having a length of 10 to 20 NM is generated by the program around the currently
existing region of the System Track. (For details of this construction, see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N .)
With this monitoring strip, the program performs the same checks as with the guard sector in the moni-
toring of own ship's data as per Section 4.4.2. Here too, the alarms SAFETY CONTOUR, OBJECT OF
INTEREST and USER CHART OBJECT 1) are used, but the supplement has the text On Track.
Thus, a warning is given 10 NM at the latest ahead of a potentially dangerous area or object which could
be run over when the ship is sailing along the System Track.
If, as a result of this monitoring, one of the above-mentioned alarm messages appears for the first time,
then the alarm CHECK LEG or - if the cause of the alarm lies not in the currently existing track segment
but in the next one - the alarm CHECK NEXT LEG is triggered before. Furthermore, the fields of the To
WP number in the data displays Radar/ARPA, Track/Schedule and Conning are given a yellow back-
ground. When these alarms occur, you should definitely initiate a check of the currently existing part of
the System Track and the part lying ahead by clicking with the INFO key into one of the To WP number
fields mentioned. The same checking routine then takes place as the one used at the end of the track
generation process (see Section 5.1.9).

USEFUL INFORMATION

Details of the Monitoring Strip

In all cases, the currently existing track segment is monitored. If this is longer than 10 NM and has there-
fore been automatically divided up into subsegements, the currently existing subsegment and the next
one are monitored. If the currently existing track segment is not longer than 10 NM or if the ship is situ-
ated on the last subsegment, then the next track segment too or its first 10-NM subsegment is monitored.
The monitoring strip is situated centrally over the track and is twice as wide as the track limit contained
in the System Track. If the track has not been completely edited and a track limit has not been entered,
then only the line between the waypoints is therefore monitored.

1)
On ships with DNV approval, a warning about the own safety line is given only if the own safety line is touched from within the safe area.
In the case of other ships, this setting can also be made at service level.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 111

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.4 ECDIS Monitoring Operating Instructions

4.4.4 Track Monitoring: Depth Alarm

If the water depth measured by the connected navigation echo sounder is less than the depth alarm value
displayed in the Alarm Settings menu, the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED or DEPTH ALARM is given.
Settings: The input of the limit value takes place in the Alarm Settings menu. In systems with radar
1000 series, it can also be performed on any other CHARTPILOT and on any radar indicator of the
system, and the value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last input is valid.
With the button that is available in the Alarm Settings menu, it is possible to define whether an
alarm shall be given on this CHARTPILOT.

4.4.5 Anchor Watch

If the ship is located completely within an anchor watch area defined as a User Chart Object 1)
, the
CHARTPILOT can monitor the anchoring position.

Activating the Anchor Watch Function

When the ship is located completely within the anchor watch area, activate the anchor watch function by
means of the button Chart > Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms > Anchor Watch Area.
☞ If the display of the User Chart Objects was not switched on previously, it is now switched on through
the activation of the anchor watch function. The borders of the monitored anchor watch area are
displayed as a thick red line.

Alarms
If the ship touches the borders of the anchor watch area and the anchor watch function is activated, the
alarm EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA is shown.
Special feature: This alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the ship is completly
inside the ANCHOR WATCH area again or when the watch alarm function is switched off.

Deactivating the Anchor Watch Function

Before the ship leaves the anchorage, deactivate the anchor watch function with the button Chart > Alarm
Settings > Chart Alarms > Anchor Watch Area.
If this is not done, the alarm EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA will be shown on leaving the anchorage.
If the anchor watch function is not deactivated after that, the alarm OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA is
shown as soon as the ship is located completely outside of the anchor watch area. When this alarm is
acknowledged, the anchor watch function is then switched off automatically.

1)
For editing the anchor watch area, see page 191.

112 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges

4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges

For the graphic determination of positions, true bearings and ranges in the chart area, the cursor, two
electronic bearing lines (EBL's), the variable range marker (VRM) and the measurement line are avail-
able. When the ship is getting near to the present waypoint of the System Track (for System Track, see
page 221), you can display the situation relative to this waypoint in enlarged form by calling up the
Waypoint Zoom box.

Determining the Position of a Displayed Object

If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the geographical position of the cursor is shown in the Cursor
display.
☞ For many objects, the precise position is also contained in the info box, which you can open by
clicking with the INFO key.

Determining the Bearing from Own Ship to an Object

You can use either the cursor or the EBL:
Bearing Measurement by means of the Cursor
If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the true bearing from own ship to the cursor position is displayed
in the Cursor display.
Bearing Measurement by means of EBL
Set the EBL Mode button to CEN and click it into the display field of EBL1 or EBL2 1). With the cursor,
turn the EBL to the object. In the EBL display field, the true bearing to the object is displayed.

EBL2, here with origin not on

own ship symbol and with
range marker Measurement line with
statement of length and
2.38 NM direction
22.6 °
VRM
Chart Work menu for
EBL1, here with origin on generating/deleting the
own ship symbol measurement line; menu is
opened with Cancel key
EBL2 display and button;
the display is switched on
in the Presentation > Cursor
Display Settings menu.
Cursor display with cursor
position and distance and
EBL1 display and button bearing from own ship to
cursor position
VRM display and button

Fig. 4-18 The elements for determination of position, bearing and range

1) By clicking into the display field, the display of the EBL is switched on automatically. Alternatively, you can also use the EBL1 or EBL2
button beforehand. If EBL2 is to be switched on by means of the button and cursor, the presentation of the EBL2 display must be switched
on in the Presentation > Display Settings menu.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 113

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges Operating Instructions

EBL Mode button with the following possibilities.

EBL button - FIX REL: The EBL moves with own ship; origin of EBL is a distance from
switches the display of the EBL own ship which can be set by means of the cursor after pressing of Set.
on and off. - FIX ABS: The origin of the EBL is a geographical position which can be
(When switch-on occurs, the set by means of the cursor after pressing of Set.
EBL appears with the setting - CEN: The EBL moves with own ship; origin of EBL is own ship.
that it had last.)

After Set has been clicked, the origin of the EBL can be
defined with the cursor (only if the EBL Mode button is
at FIX REL or FIX ABS).

Fig. 4-19 Button and display field of the EBL

Determining the Range from Own Ship to an Object

You can use either the cursor or the VRM:
Range Measurement by means of the Cursor
If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the range between own ship and the cursor position is indicated
in the Cursor display.
Range Measurement by means of VRM
Click into the VRM display field 1) and, by means of the cursor, pull the range marker ring to the desired
size and fix it by clicking. The radius of the range marker ring is continuously displayed in the VRM
display field.

VRM button VRM display

switches the display of the VRM on and off. - Indicates the radius of the VRM. (Value is identical to the
(When switch-on occurs, the VRM appears distance between the EBL origin and the EBL distance
with the setting that it had last.) marker.)
- Must be clicked so that the radius of the VRM can be set by
means of the cursor.

Fig. 4-20 Button and display field of the VRM

Determining the Bearing between Two Objects

You can use either the measurement line or the EBL:
Bearing Measurement by Means of the Measurement Line
1. Position the cursor in the chart area and click with the MORE key. In the context menu Chart Work
which is thus opened, click Set Line (with the DO key).
2. Click the position from which the measurement is to be performed. A line is now drawn between the
clicked point and the cursor position. The bearing and range from the clicked point to the cursor posi-
tion are indicated above the cursor position.
3. By means of a second click, the line (including the numerical values) is fixed.

1)
By clicking into the display field, the display of the VRM is switched on automatically. Alternatively, you can also use the VRM button.

114 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges

Generating a measurement line by Menu appears when cursor is situated in

clicking the positions for origin and chart area and MORE key is pressed
end point of the measurement line Length of measurement line
2.38 NM
Deletes the measurement line 22.6 °

Specifies the position of the own ship symbol Direction of measurement line as seen
on the screen - see page 95 from beginning of measurement line

Manual correction of the system position; see page 144 Measurement line
Cancel the manual correction of the system position

Beginning of measurement line

Opens the Waypoint Zoom box in which, when own ship is
getting near to the present waypoint, its position is displayed
relative to this waypoint in enlarged form - see Figure 4-22.

Only in the case of raster charts: This displays the displayed chart completely; see Figure 4-6 on page 91.

Fig. 4-21 Context menu of the chart area and measurement line

4. The line (including the numerical values) is deleted in the context menu Chart Work by means of
the Clear Line function.
Bearing Measurement by means of EBL
Set the EBL Mode button of the desired EBL to FIX ABS. Then click the corresponding Set button and,
by means of the cursor, click the position from which the bearing measurement is to be performed. Click
the corresponding EBL display field, turn the bearing line to the desired direction by means of the cursor,
and fix it by clicking. In the EBL display field, the true bearing to the object is displayed.
☞ In the procedures described above, the EBL origin is fixed at the set geographical position. If the
EBL origin is to move along with own ship, FIX REL must be used instead of FIX ABS (key or setting
of EBL Mode button).

Determining the Range between Two Objects

You can use either the measurement line or a combination of EBL and VRM:
Range Measurement by means of Measurement Line
If you determine the bearing between two objects by means of the measurement line (see above), the
range between these objects will also be displayed to you.
Range Measurement by means of EBL
If the VRM and EBL are displayed simultaneously, a range marker appears on the EBL. The range
between the EBL origin and the range marker is equal to the set VRM. Thus, if you position the range
marker on the second object by moving the VRM, the range between the first object (EBL origin) and the
second object is indicated in the VRM display field.

Displaying the Situation Relative to the Present Waypoint of the System Track in Enlarged Form 1)
Click into the chart area by means of the MORE key; in the context menu Chart Work which then
appears, click onto the WP Zoom Display function. The Waypoint Zoom box then opens (see Figure
4-22).

1)
This function is provided for survey purposes, and can be activated on other items of equipment at service level.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 115

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges Operating Instructions

Name of the present waypoint Distance and bearing to

the present waypoint

Pressing of the arrow keys Right/Left display;

changes the scale in the distance of the vertical side of the triangle:
Waypoint Zoom box (between deviation from the System Track
5 m and 1000 m per grid line) Apex of the triangle: movement direction
Number: Distance between relative to the System Track
two grid lines (horizontally and
vertically) The north direction in the Waypoint Zoom
box corresponds to the north direction in
the chart area.
The grid displayed serves as a visual
Switches the Waypoint Zoom box distance-reference. It is not related to the
to the optimum scale and posi- chart grid.
tions the space between own
ship's symbol and the present
waypoint to the centre of the box. Closes the Waypoint Zoom box

Fig. 4-22 The Waypoint Zoom-Box

If there is a defined System Track, the present waypoint is named there in the top line and the distance
and bearing to the present waypoint is displayed in metres or kilometres. Below that, the deviation from
the System Track and the movement relative to the System Track are displayed in a Right/Left display.
In the graphics area of the Waypoint Zoom box, own ship's symbol and - if the distance is not too great
- the present waypoint and the (segment of the) System Track are displayed with the scale indicated in
the bottom line of the Waypoint Zoom box. The number between the arrow keys refers to the distance
between two grid lines of the underlying measurement-grid.
The alignment of the Waypoint Zoom box graphics corresponds to the alignment of the chart area. The
scale can be changed by means of the arrow keys, independently of the scale in the chart area. If the
distance from the present waypoint is small enough, the optimum scale is set by pressing of the Auto
button, and the space between own ship and the present waypoint is moved to the centre of the graphics.
If the distance is still too great, the smallest possible scale is set and own ship's symbol appears at the
centre of the box.
☞ The Waypoint Zoom box can be shifted and its size can be changed - see page 46.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Switching Off the Display of EBL and VRM

The display is switched off by clicking the EBL button or VRM button.
When the display is switched off, the data of the EBL or VRM remain in storage: when an EBL or the
VRM is switched on, these elements appear with the values that were set last.

Bearing Measurement Errors at High Latitudes

The EBL is always displayed as a straight line. The numerical value displayed is always the direction at
the EBL origin. In the radar projection, this causes significant measurement errors at high latitudes for
bearings over large distances.

116 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.6 AIS

4.6 AIS

☞ This section deals with the case in which the AIS system can be operated on the CHARTPILOT. If
the AIS system is connected in such a way that it can be operated only on the radar indicators and
- if present - on its own Display and Control Unit, the AIS functions are limited on the CHARTPILOT
to the display of the tracked AIS targets and the Aids-to-Navigation. The operating procedure for this
is described on page 60 and page 67.
In addition to the ARPA electronics, the Universal Shipborne Automatic Identification System (AIS) auto-
matically provides the ship's nautical officers with important information about nearby vessels or other
relevant objects within VHF range.
The AIS system transmits own ship data cyclically via two defined VHF channels and receives the same
data of the other ships and objects that are equipped with AIS systems.

4.6.1 Overview

The AIS system is integrated within the system in such a way that it can be operated on all radar indica-
tors and on all CHARTPILOTs of the system. A special switch-over facility is unnecessary for this
purpose; the most recent operating action is applicable. The operating procedure takes place in the menu
Radar/AIS (see Figure 4-23) and its submenus.

AIS Targets and Other AIS Objects

With regard to the objects that can be detected by the AIS system and transferred to the CHARTPILOT,
a distinction is drawn between the following:
- AIS targets: ships that are equipped with an AIS system,
- SAR aircraft: search-and-rescue aeroplanes or helicopters,
- Aids-to-navigation: navigation marks, e.g. beacons and buoys,
- Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control
centres
The AIS targets and SAR aircraft 1) are handled in the same way as sleeping targets as soon as their
data are received by own AIS system. Sleeping targets can be acquired manually or automatically, so
that they can then be tracked by the system - see Section 4.6.2.
All AIS objects can be displayed in the chart area (see page 67). Their data can be displayed by means
of the Info box.

Safety Messages and Long-Range Interrogation

Via AIS systems, safety messages 2) can be communicated if necessary, which are then passed on by all
receiving systems as a message or an alarm to their display units. The procedures for dealing with the
safety messages received, and for transmitting your own safety messages, are described in Section
4.6.4.
The AIS system can also be interrogated about ship data via different equipment. Details of this long-
range interrogation, as it is called, are described in Section 4.6.5.

1)
SAR aircraft are treated and displayed in the same way as AIS targets, and are therefore not mentioned again in the following. Their identity
can be determined by means of the Info box.
2)
Also called safety related messages in the relevant regulations.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 117

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.6 AIS Operating Instructions

Treatment of the ARPA and AIS targets; for menu, see Figure 4-24 on page 119
Simulation of avoidance manoeuvres (trial manoeuvres); for menu,
see Figure 4-30 on page 129
Switches the transmitter on and off (the reception part remains switched on)
Switches the low power mode on and off - see page 127
Input/display of the own ship data transmitted by own AIS system; for menu, see Figure
4-25 on page 121
Displaying a received safety message - see Figure 4-26
Transmitting a safety message - for menu, see Figure 4-27 on page 123
Long-range interrogation - for menu, see Figure 4-28

Transmitter settings - for menu, see Figure 4-29

Switches the display of the Aids-to-Navigation on and off.

Switches
Switchesthetheheading
headingline
lineofofown
ownship
shipsymbol
symbolononand
andoff.off.

Switches the stern line of own ship symbol on and off.

Fig. 4-23 The menu Radar/AIS

Monitoring/Setting of the Own Ship Data Transmitted

Most of the information transmitted from your own AIS system is generated automatically by the
system. However, some items of information (e.g. ship's draught, hazardous cargo, destination, ETA)
have to be defined by the operator - see Section 4.6.3.
IMPORTANT
Because these data are voyage-dependent, their updating should be
assured by including them in the navigational check list.

Setting of the communication technique (channel selection, bandwidth, transmission power etc.) usually
takes place fully automatically. In very rare cases, however, manual setting procedures too might be
necessary for this channel management process. For details, see Section 4.6.6.

4.6.2 Treatment of the AIS Targets

Manual Target Acquisition

With the on-going introduction of the AIS system, the number of sleeping targets will increase rapidly.
Therefore, the display of the sleeping targets will then normally be switched off. However, targets which
are nautically important should continue to be displayed. This is achieved by acquiring these targets,
which thus become tracked AIS targets. As long as the entire processing of the AIS target data is not
switched off, tracked AIS targets continue to be displayed. Furthermore, with the Info box, a much greater
quantity of data can be requested about tracked AIS targets than about sleeping targets.

118 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.6 AIS

Manual Acquisition of a Sleeping Target

1. Switching on the display of sleeping targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, by means of the
button Sleeping Targets.
2. In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, in the frame AIS Targets click on the button Acquire Target and
then, in the chart area, click on those sleeping targets, one after another, that are to be acquired.
This function of the cursor is switched off as soon as the cursor leaves the chart area.

Display settings of the ARPA targets, see page 60 ff.

Switches the entire processing of the AIS target data on and off, and therefore
switches on and off the display, collision computation and automatic target
acquisition of the AIS targets.

Switches the display of the sleeping targets on and off.

Manual acquisition of the AIS targets

Deletion of individual AIS targets
Deletion of all AIS targets

Display settings of the ARPA targets and AIS targets, see page 64

Fig. 4-24 The menu Radar/AIS > Targets

Automatic Target Acquisition and Collision Computation by the CHARTPILOT

IMPORTANT
Automatic target acquisition cannot take place unless the processing of
the AIS target data is switched on: the function AIS Targets must be
switched on in the menu Radar/AIS > Targets.
Sleeping targets are acquired automatically with the aid of the collision computation: as soon as a
Sleeping target 1) falls below the set CPA and TCPA values, it is automatically acquired, the alarm
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET (on systems with radar 9xxx series: DANGEROUS TARGET) appears, and
the AIS target is displayed as a dangerous target.
☞ The alarm DANGEROUS AIS TARGET or DANGEROUS TARGET also appears if an AIS target
that is already being tracked falls below the set CPA and TCPA values.
☞ If, on falling below the CPA/TCPA values, there are already 40 AIS targets being tracked, the alarm
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET ACQUISITION FAILED appears first of all. In this case, at least one
non-critical AIS target must be deleted. As soon as this has been done, target acquisition and the
output of the DANGEROUS AIS TARGET or DANGEROUS TARGET alarm take place for the new
acquired target.

1)
SAR aircraft are displayed in the same way as AIS targets, but are recognised as SAR aircraft. Automatic acquisition does not take place
for them.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 119

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.6 AIS Operating Instructions

Setting the CPA and TCPA values: In the menu Alarm Settings,
- the largest "closest point of approach" distance that is still to be regarded as dangerous must be
entered behind CPA (Closest Point of Approach), and
- the time between output of the alarm and reaching of the CPA must be entered behind TCPA (Time
to CPA).
In particular cases, it might be required to prevent AIS targets from being acquired by the collision compu-
tation, for example to avoid unnecessary alarms in port or at other berths caused by AIS targets, without
having to change the CPA/TCPA settings. This takes place in the Alarm Settings menu by means of the
Auto AIS Target Acq button.
IMPORTANT
For AIS targets, the collision computation, i.e. also the automatic acqui-
sition and the outputting of the DANGEROUS AIS TARGET or
DANGEROUS TARGET alarm, can be performed only if the following
condition is fulfilled:

The necessary condition for the collision computation is that the relative speed between own ship
and the target is known. This must be determined from the speed vector over ground (SOG, COG) trans-
mitted from the AIS target and from the own speed vector over ground. The own speed vector over
ground is mainly determined from the Bottom Track data of the selected speed sensor; otherwise, it is
determined with the aid of the SOG/COG of the selected position sensor
If an AIS target is not transmitting SOG and COG, no collision avoidance computation takes place for this
target. Therefore, the target cannot be acquired automatically. If it is already being tracked, no
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET or DANGEROUS TARGET alarm occurs in the case of a dangerous
approach. The symbol of this AIS target is dashed.

Deletion of Targets, Loss of Target

An acquired AIS target is tracked by the CHARTPILOT until
- it is deleted or
- it is lost (loss of target).
Deletion of AIS targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, in the frame AIS Targets click on the button
Cancel Target and then, in the chart area, click on those AIS targets one after another that are to be
deleted. This function of the cursor is switched off as soon as the cursor leaves the chart area. By dele-
tion, the AIS targets become sleeping targets again.
Deletion of all AIS targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, click on the button Cancel All Targets.
A safeguard question then appears; answer Yes to that question. As a result, the tracking of all AIS
targets is stopped and the AIS targets become sleeping targets again.
Loss of target: An AIS target is lost when, for a specified length of time, the AIS system does not receive
any data from that target. The alarm LOST AIS TARGET or LOST TARGET then appears and the
symbol changes its form accordingly and flashes until the alarm is acknowledged.

120 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.6 AIS

4.6.3 Specifying / Viewing Own AIS Data

Specifying the Data that are to be Transmitted Depending on Speed

The following data are the data which are transmitted cyclically by own AIS system and have to be spec-
ified by the operator.
IMPORTANT
The following data must be entered at the beginning of every voyage and
(if necessary) must be updated during the voyage to ensure correct and
up-to-date information to be sent to other ships.

Input and display of the own AIS data take place in the menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data - see the illus-
tration. So that the data entered will take effect, the Apply button must be pressed.

Destination
The time of arrival planned for the specified destination (UTC)

The present draught

Ship type or cargo: Depending on the ship type, after clicking of the Set button it is
possible to choose between several possibilities

Navigation status: Depending on the ship type, after clicking of the Set button it is
possible to choose between several possibilities

Number of persons on board

Puts the changes into effect

Causes resetting to the original data

Fig. 4-25 The menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data

Viewing Own AIS Data

The data transmitted by own AIS system can be viewed in the Info box, in the index card Targets. For
this purpose, the operator must click on the own ship symbol (by means of the key).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 121

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.6 AIS Operating Instructions

4.6.4 Safety Messages

Receiving Safety Messages

When the AIS system receives a safety message, the alarm NEW SAFETY MESSAGE appears.
The content of the safety message is contained in the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message, in the lower
list.
Above this list, the identification data of the transmitting AIS object 1) are displayed:
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity, definite identification of the AIS system (and hence of the
target)
ID Target marker (i.e., the call sign, if available)
Lat, Lon Position at the transmission instant
BRG, RNG True bearing and range of the AIS object at the transmission instant
In the upper list of the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message, the 40 safety messages received last are
listed. In the column New, those messages whose contents have not yet been displayed on this indicator
are marked with an asterisk.

List of stored received messages

After clicking of a message, its content and the data of the
transmitting AIS object are displayed.

Data of the transmitting AIS object at the transmission instant; see text

Content of the message which is marked in the upper list

Fig. 4-26 The menu Radar/AIS > Read Message

Sending a Safety Message

If necessary, a safety message can be sent. This can be a standardised distress message or a non-
standardised, individually entered text. The message can be broadcast generally or it can be sent to a
particular AIS object.

1)
An AIS object because not only AIS targets (ships) but also Base stations and Aids-to-Navigation can transmit safety messages.

122 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.6 AIS

Broadcasting a Message
1. Open the menu Radar/AIS > Send Message. If necessary, change the setting of the top button from
Addressed to Broadcast.
2. If a standardised distress message is to be sent, click on the button Message Type and then click
on the desired message type. The content of the message is then displayed.
or:
If an individual message is to be sent, User Defined must be selected as the message type. The
message can then be entered in the input field situated below that.
3. The message is sent via the AIS system by pressing the Send button.

Broadcast: The message is broadcast generally

Addressed: The message goes to the target whose MMSI number is entered.

MMSI of the addressee of the message (input and display field)

Target marker (call sign) of the addressee

This makes it possible to select the addressee by clicking in the PPI

Selection of the message type:

New Message, User Message 1 ... 5: Individual text, which can be edited in the message field

Message field containing the content of the message

This sends the message

Resets all settings and deletes a message that has already been edited

Fig. 4-27 The menu Radar/AIS > Send Message

Sending a Message to a Particular AIS Object

1. Open the menu Radar/AIS > Send Message. If necessary, change the setting of the top button from
Broadcast to Addressed.
2. Either enter the MMSI number of the addressee in the MMSI field
or:
Switch on the function Address to Target, and in the chart area click on the AIS target that is to
receive the message.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 123

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.6 AIS Operating Instructions

3. If a standardised distress message is to be sent, click on the button Message Type and then click
on the desired message type. The content of the message is then displayed.
or:
4. If a freely composed, individual text is to be transmitted, the following possibilities exist:
a) Click on the button Message Type and then click on message type New Message and edit the
new message with the virtual keyboard.) 1)
b) Click on the button Message Type, and by selecting User Message 1 ... 5 call up the message
that was stored last under the selected designation. Each message can be altered with the aid
of the virtual keyboard after clicking. The message is stored during transmission.
5. The message is sent via the AIS system by pressing the Send button.

4.6.5 Long-Range Interrogation

The AIS system can be requested by other equipment, e.g. SatCom equipment, to transmit own ship
data. Because this request can be made over longer distances than the VHF range, it is called long-
range interrogation.
The requesting station specifies the data that are to be requested. 2)

Reply Modes
The reaction of the AIS system to long-range interrogation is defined by the selected Reply mode. The
task of setting the Reply mode is performed in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation by means of the
button Reply Mode:
OFF: The AIS system does not react to the request.
MANUAL: When interrogation occurs, the AIS INTERROGATION alarm appears with the supplement
Reply requested. The reply is sent when, in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation, the Reply button
is pressed 3).
AUTO: When interrogation occurs, the reply is sent automatically. For information, the alarm AIS INTER-
ROGATION appears (without a supplement and without an acoustic signal).

1)
The AIS does not allow the transmission of all characters that are usually present on the alphanumeric keyboard. The characters that
cannot be transmitted cannot be entered.
2)
Such requests can come from shore stations, e.g. from shipping companies, traffic control centres or government offices, but not from the
AIS systems that are normally carried on board.
3)
The Reply button triggers the reply to the interrogation whose data are displayed in the menu. If, after a AIS INTERROGATION alarm, the
menu is opened, the data of this interrogation are displayed.

124 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.6 AIS

For setting the Reply mode - see text

Here, the last 10 incoming interrogations are listed with the MMSI of the interro-
gating station and with the time and date of the interrogation.
R: The interrogation has been answered.
By clicking, the data of the interrogation are shown in the lower display.

MMSI and name of the requesting station

Content of the interrogation, requested data

Triggers the reply for the interrogation whose data are displayed in the
lower list

Fig. 4-28 The menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation

4.6.6 AIS Settings

Automatic Setting Procedure

The AIS system cannot function unless all AIS systems communicate on the same VHF channels and
unless the communication bandwidth and the transmission level are correctly set. The settings needed
for this are normally made automatically as described in the following.
☞ It is also possible to make a setting manually, but this should only be done in exceptional cases after
the ship's command personnel have been informed accordingly, see page 126.
VHF channels 2087 and 2088 are used worldwide for the two AIS channels.
As default values, AIS channel A uses the VHF channel 2087 the AIS channel B uses the VHF channel
2088, and for both channels, the bandwidth setting is Auto, and transmission is performed with power
level High.
In particular geographical regions or situations, it is necessary to deviate from these settings. The neces-
sary values are received via the AIS channels. 1)
These data also contains the information about the region in which these settings are to be used,
including the transition zone surrounding that region.

1)
However, these data can also be transferred by DSC. The AIS electronics unit also has a DSC receiver, so that even AIS electronics units
which do not have their AIS channels set correctly can receive these data.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 125

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.6 AIS Operating Instructions

The switch-over is performed automatically when the ship is

Sees
located in the transition zone. This is done in the following steps:
A, B, D, E, F
- As soon as the ship reaches the boundaries of the transition
zone, one AIS channel is set to the different VHF settings Sees Sees
B, C, D C, D, F
(with the other AIS channel remaining unchanged) and the
alarm Channel management changed is shown. As a result,
the targets situated inside and on either side of the transition
zone are now seen 1) and the ship is also seen by these A C E
targets; see the diagram.
- On leaving the transition zone, the second AIS channel is also
switched over to the different VHF settings. B D F
The general effect is that a ship which is not located in the transi-
tion zone does not see any targets located behind the transition
zone.
Region with Area with
different VHF Transition default VHF
settings zone settings

Viewing of Data Sets for the AIS Settings

The data set currently being used by the AIS system is displayed when the menu Radar/AIS > Channel
Management is opened. In the bottom line, the status of the displayed data (e.g. Data set used) appears
beside the Next button:
Before DATA SET:
- (no entry): Default values
- AIS: Data have been received via one of the VHF transceivers.
- DSC: Data have been received via the DSC transceiver.
- MAN: Data have been entered manually.
After DATA SET:
- USED: The data currently being used by the AIS system
- NOT USED: Data are currently not being used by the AIS system.
- EDITED: The displayed data have been altered manually but have not yet been stored.
In the line SELECT, there is a display for channel A and channel B, indicating whether the transmitter
(TX) and/or the receiver (RX) is switched on.
If there are any more data sets, they can be called up by means of the button Next. 2)

Entering a Data Set Manually

The displayed values can be altered (but do not alter them unless expressly instructed to do so by an
authorised person). A data set with the altered data is stored by pressing the Apply button.
☞ Only data sets for regions up to a distance of a few hundred NM can be entered.

1)
When the channel management is used, this usually changes the VHF channels. This example refers to such a change
2)
In addition to the default values, eight data sets can be managed.

126 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.6 AIS

Settings of a transceiver (channel A):

TX: Defines whether transmission takes place via channel A.
RX: Defines whether reception takes place via channel A.
Channel No.: Number of the VHF channel
Bandwidth: Transmission/reception bandwidth

Settings of the second transceiver (channel B):

Same as channel A

Transmission level

Geographical area in which the settings take effect. It is bounded by lines of longi-
tude and latitude. The north-east and south-west corners must be entered.

Transition zone in which the old setting is still retained

Status of the displayed data (see text)
Switch-over to further stored data sets
Puts the changes into effect
Resets to the original data

Fig. 4-29 The menu Radar/AIS > Channel Management

Switching Off the Transmitter of the AIS Electronics Unit

If necessary, the transmitting of your own AIS data can be completely prevented by switching-off the func-
tion AIS Transmitter On.
CAUTION
The transmitter should not be switched off except in justified exceptional
cases, because when it is switched off, own ship can no longer be
detected as an AIS target by other ships and cannot participate in the
communication between ships, equipped with AIS.

☞ The status TRANSMITTER ON/OFF is stored and can also be called up after an accident at sea.

Reducing the Transmission Power when Loading and Unloading Tankers

During the loading and unloading of tankers, the transmission power of the AIS transmitter must be
reduced for safety reasons. This Low Power mode is only admissible by regulation for this particular situ-
ation. The corresponding button is therefore only provided on tankers, and the Low Power mode can only
be switched on when the navigational state AT ANCHOR or MOORING is entered in the menu Radar/
AIS > VOYAGE DATA and the speed is below 3 Kts.
In the menu Radar/AIS this setting is made by switching-on the function AIS LOW POWER MODE.
On completion of the loading procedure, the Low Power mode must be switched off again by setting the
button LOW POWER MODE to OFF.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 127

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.6 AIS Operating Instructions

☞ If the operator forgets to deactivate the Low Power mode, the transmitter is automatically switched
to normal power when AT ANCHOR or MOORING is no longer entered as the navigational state, or when
the speed exceeds 3 kts.

128 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.7 Trial Manoeuvres

4.7 Trial Manoeuvres

You can obtain a graphic display of the effect of a simulated manoeuvre of own ship relative to the
displayed targets (ARPA and AIS targets) and relative to the safety contour (and to the other elements
displayed in the electronic chart).
During the trial manoeuvre display, the own ship symbol is displayed at the existing position. The target
symbols are moved away from their existing positions in accordance with the simulated manoeuvre
instant. The target vectors too correspond to the simulated situation and not to the existing one.

Switching On the Trial Manoeuvre Display

The trial manoeuvre display is switched on by pressing the Trial Manoeuvre button in the Radar/AIS
menu.
Switching on produces the following settings:
- The course and speed vectors of the targets are displayed.
- The vectors are displayed as relative vectors, independently of the display mode (the display mode
is not changed).
- The past plots of the targets are not displayed.
- The Trial Manoeuvre menu appears.
- In addition, the Trial Course Line appears. This is a black line which initially points in the course
direction, starting from the own ship symbol.
- In addition, the own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre is displayed. This is a thinly drawn own ship
symbol which is initially situated under the own ship symbol, points in the direction of the set course,
and therefore cannot yet be distinguished from the latter (if the drift angle is small).
- In the lower area of the display, a large, flashing is displayed to draw attention to the fact that
the trial manoeuvre display is switched on and that the symbols and vectors of the targets are there-
fore no longer being displayed in accordance with the actual existing situation.

Display of a Trial Manoeuvre

In the Trial Manoeuvre menu, you can now simulate the manoeuvre data:
- with Trial Course, the set course onto which the ship is steered by the manoeuvre,
- with Trial Speed, the speed at which the ship will sail after the manoeuvre,
- with Trial Delay, the time up until the start of the manoeuvre.
☞ Setting of the simulation data is best performed with the arrow keys, because then the display of the
trial manoeuvre changes continually as the set values change.

Simulated set course after the trial manoeuvre

Simulated own speed after the trial manoeuvre

Time up until the trial manoeuvre

Ends the trial manoeuvre

Fig. 4-30 The Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 129

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.7 Trial Manoeuvres Operating Instructions

Targets get
relative vectors

Trial Course Line

Identification of
trial manoeuvre
display

Scenario before switch-on of the trial The same scenario after switch-on of the
manoeuvre display trial manoeuvre display
(True Motion mode with true vector presentation) (The right-hand target is on a collision course.)

The set course that was

set with Trial Course

Trial Course Line

Position of the
trial manoeuvre
No danger of collision
(vector indicates
sufficiently large Distance to the
passing distance trial manoeuvre,
relative to Trial as set with
Manoeuvre position) Trial Delay
The same scenario after setting of a trial
manoeuvre which would prevent a collision

Fig. 4-31 Display of a Trial Manoeuvre

Interpretation of the Display:

The own ship symbol continues to indicate own ship's existing position, and it points ahead.
On the route up to the manoeuvre that was set by means of Trial Delay, the Trial Course Line repre-
sents the existing course; at the position at which the manoeuvre would take place, the Trial Course
Line bends and turns onto the course that was set by means of Trial Course. The line therefore approx-
imately represents the track that the ship would sail along if the manoeuvre were actually performed.
☞ The arc along which the ship would sail in the manoeuvre is not displayed; the manoeuvre charac-
teristics of the ship are not taken into account. If the manoeuvre is actually to be executed, it would
have to be started at a suitably earlier instant.
The own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre is displayed at the position of the simulated manoeuvre.
It points in the direction of the simulated set course.

130 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.8 Marking an Event

The targets are displayed at the positions which they would occupy at the instant of the simulated
manoeuvre if their existing courses and speeds were maintained.
The course and speed vectors of the targets are displayed relative to the own ship symbol of the trial
manoeuvre. They refer to the course that was set by means of Trial Course and to the speed that was
set by means of Trial Speed.
Consequently:
If the vector of a target points towards the own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre, the execu-
tion of the trial manoeuvre would put own ship onto a collision course relative to this target.
For the same scenario, Figure 4-31 shows the display before and after switch-on of the trial manoeuvre
display and after the setting of a trial manoeuvre.

Switching Off the Trial Manoeuvre Display

Switching off is done by pressing the Cancel button situated in the Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu.

4.8 Marking an Event

If necessary, own position or some other position can be marked in the chart area by means of the
(orange) event marker . An event can be provided with a remark. More than one event marker can
be set. The chart area can be adjusted at any time so that one of the events forms the centre.
Event markers can optionally be edited on all CHARTPILOTS and all radars of the 1000 series of the
system. There is only one set of event markers in the system; edited data are automatically distributed
system-wide, i.e. stored on all hard disks and displayed when required.

Marking an Event
1. Press the function key F5, or else press the Drop Event button in the Chart > Events menu. In the
Drop Event menu which then opens up, own position and the time of the set event are displayed.
2. The event position can now be changed by switching on the Pick function in the menu and clicking
the desired position in the chart area. The clicked position is now displayed under Geographic Posi-
tion.
3. If necessary, directly enter a short remark about the event under Remark, or, after pressing of the
Select button, mark the remark in the resulting Event Remark Selection menu and press OK.
4. In the Chart > Events menu, store the event by pressing the OK button and close the menu. The
event marker is now displayed.
☞ If Text Labels is switched on in the Chart menu, the remark entered also appears beside the
event symbol in the chart area.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 131

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.8 Marking an Event Operating Instructions

Sets the event. Opens the Drop Event menu (see Figure 4-33), with
which the event marker is set at another position and a remark
about the event can be entered.

Opens a menu in which it is possible to edit event remarks, which can

then be called up at any time.

List of stored events

(The time statement is the stored time in UTC)

Centres the chart area on the event marked in the list of stored events and
switches to Planning display mode

Deletes the events marked in the list of stored events

Fig. 4-32 The Chart > Events menu

Pick function switched off: own position is

the event position

Event position Pick function switched on: click the event

position in the chart by means of the cursor
Date and time of the event

Enter a remark, e.g. by calling up

remarks which have already been
edited.

Mark the
Stores the event and remark
closes the menu
Closes the menu without an
event being stored.

Closes the menu

Enters the marked
remark and closes the
menu

Fig. 4-33 The Drop Event menu

132 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.9 The Marking of Position Fixes

Adjusting the Chart Area so that an Event Forms the Centre

In the Chart > Events menu, mark the desired event in the list, and press the Show in Chart button. The
Planning display mode is then switched on and the chart excerpt is adjusted so that the event is situated
at the centre.

Editing Event Remarks which can be Called Up

In the menu Chart > Events, press the button Edit Remarks List, edit the remark in the input field, and
add the remark to the list by pressing the Add button.
You can delete remarks in the list by marking them and then pressing the Delete button.
☞ Putting an event remark into the list avoids the need to edit that event remark again, since the
remarks entered in the list can be called up in the menu Event Remark Selection when an event
marker is being set.

Deleting Events
In the Chart > Events menu, mark the desired events in the list, and press the Delete button.

Management of the Event Data

Event markers are not entered in electronic charts but are stored independently of them in a file 1).

4.9 The Marking of Position Fixes

Position fixes can be marked in a manner similar to the entering of positions in the paper chart. They are
marked with the (orange) symbol . Procedures and possibilities are largely the same as for the setting
of event markers.
Position fixes can optionally be edited on all CHARTPILOTS and all radars of the 1000 series of the
system. There is only one set of position fixes in the system; edited data are automatically distributed
system-wide, i.e. stored on all hard disks and displayed when required.

Entering a Position Fix

1. In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, press the button Drop Position Fix. In the Drop Position Fix
menu which then opens up, own position and the time of the set position fix are displayed.
2. The position of the position fix can now be changed by switching on the Pick function in the menu
and clicking on the desired position in the chart region. The clicked position is now displayed under
Geographic Position.
3. By means of the button Position Finding Method, select the method of position-determination.
☞ The objects before the dash are the short form with which the symbol can be provided on the
screen; see step 4.
4. In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, store the position fix by pressing the OK button and close the
menu. The position fix symbol is now displayed.

1)
together with the position fixes and the areas edited as User Chart Objects; for the handling of the file, see Section 8.1.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 133

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.9 The Marking of Position Fixes Operating Instructions

☞ If, in the Chart menu, the Text Labels function is 1342 time of the fix
switched on, the time of the fix (zone time) appears (hours and minutes)
above the position fix symbol in the chart region, and the
method of position-determination appears in the short position-determination
dG (short form)
form under the symbol.

Setting the Chart Region as the Centre by Means of a Position Fix

In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, mark the desired position fix in the list and press the Show in Chart
button. This causes switch-on of the Planning display mode, and the chart excerpt is automatically set in
such a way that the position fix is situated at the centre.

Deleting a Position Fix

In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, mark the desired position fixes in the list and press the Delete
button.

Managing the Position Fix Data

Position fixes are not entered in electronic charts; instead, they are stored independently of them in a
file 1).

1)
together with the Events and the areas edited as User Chart Objects; for handling of the file, see Section 8.1.

134 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.9 The Marking of Position Fixes

Sets the position fix. Opens the Drop Position Fix box, with which the position fix symbol can
be set at another position and the method of position-determination can be entered.

If the Pick function is switched off: Own posi-

tion is the position of the position fix

If the Pick function is switched on: By means

of the cursor, click on the position of the
position fix in the chart region

Position of the position fix

Date and time of the position fix

Select the method of position-determination.

On the left, the short form is entered, which
appears as a text label

Stores the position fix and closes the menu

Closes the menu without any

List of the stored position fixes storing of a position fix.
(the time statement is the stored time in UTC)

Centres the chart region on the position fix which is marked in the list of
stored position fixes, and switches over to the Planning display mode.

Deletes the position fixes which are marked in the list of stored position fixes

Fig. 4-34 The menus Chart > Position Fixes and ... > Drop Position Fix

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 135

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors Operating Instructions

4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

For many important functions, the CHARTPILOT depends upon receiving adequately accurate values for
the navigation data heading, speed and position. Some of the sensors concerned are present redun-
dantly, so that you have to make a choice. Furthermore, some settings have to be made manually, e.g.
during course transfer, which might have to be synchronised, or after status changes of the sensor.
The CHARTPILOT can be configured in such a way that selection and setting of the navigation sensors
- are generally not possible, because these settings are intended to be made on the radar indicators
or on a CHARTPILOT integrated in the bridge console, e.g. because this CHARTPILOT is situated
at the chart table,
- are not possible if the TRACKPILOT is in the active state, or are not possible if the TRACKPILOT is
being operated in Track mode because the settings are then intended to be made on the TRACK-
PILOT Master only, or
- are possible at any time. (This configuration is implemented in special cases only.)
For systems with the radar 9xxx series and two CHARTPILOTs, a sensor selector switch with which the
operating possibilities are assigned to one of the two CHARTPILOTs may be installed in addition.

Setting of the course transfer; menu see Figure 4-36 on page 137

Selection of the speed sensor; manual input of drift and speed values; menu
see Figure 4-37 on page 139
Selection of the position sensor and associated settings; menu
see Figure 4-39 on page 142
Selection of the second position sensor; menu see Figure 4-39 on page 142
Setting of date and time; menu see Figure 4-40 on page 145

Fig. 4-35 The Sensor Settings menu

WARNING:
If the CHARTPILOT is being used together with items of equipment
which are not part of the NACOS or which are not SAM Electronics
radars, you must make certain yourself that all items of equipment use
the same navigation data.
The correct choice of navigation sensors, correct setting of the naviga-
tion data, and a clear overview of the status of the selected navigation
sensors are extremely important for safe navigation.

136 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

4.10.1 Course Transfer Settings

For the transfer of the heading information, a technique can be used which transfers course changes
only, but not the absolute value. In these cases, therefore, the synchronism of the course transfer must
be checked after switch-on of signal transfer, and must be corrected if necessary.

Heading value used in the CHARTPILOT at present

Here, input the heading value obtained by reading the gyro compass.

Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited.

Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.

Fig. 4-36 The Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu

Synchronising of Course Transfer

1. Call up the Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu. The heading value to which the system is currently
synchronised is indicated there under Actual.
2. Under Set, input the heading value obtained by reading the compass.
3. When the values under Actual and Set are identical, press the OK button and check that the same
heading values are now being displayed in the navigation data line of the CHARTPILOT and on the
compass.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 137

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors Operating Instructions

4.10.2 Selection of the Speed Sensor; Input of Own Speed and Drift

Normally, there is more than one speed sensor. One of them has to be selected. In the case of speed
sensors which transfer only the speed ahead, the drift must be input manually. As an alternative to
selecting a speed sensor, the speed can also be input manually if necessary.

Selection of the Speed Sensor

1. In the Select frame in the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, mark the desired sensor.
If the marked sensor is a position sensor, the following applies:
- When the marked sensor reports that the data transferred are valid, the message Valid Value
(or Status Valid) appears instead of the mode (Bottom Track or Water Track) in the menu.
- If the marked sensor reports that the data are not valid, the message Invalid Value (or Status
Invalid) appears.
- If the marked sensor does not transfer any status message about the validity of the values
transferred, Not Available (or No Status) appears there.
2. If a sensor was selected which can simultaneously supply the speed through the water and the
speed over the bottom, the speed that is to be used preferentially must be switched on in the LOG
Priority frame.
☞ If a sensor was selected which does not have this possibility, no input is possible.
3. Pressing of the OK button selects the marked speed sensor.
☞ The speed sensors also include position sensors which transfer not only the position but also the
speed over ground (and course).
IMPORTANT:
GPS receivers and other position receivers generally do not fulfil the
IMO Performance Standards for SDME (Speed and Distance Measuring
Equipment). On ships with BSH or DNV approval, the use of speed
signals from position sensors is usually not permitted
☞ In the Select list, all sensors that are possible as suppliers of the speed signal are listed. If several
sensors of the same type are connected, they are given a serial number in addition to the sensor
type identification.
☞ If a sensor does not transfer a transmitter identifier, the Sensor Master or the Ship’s Interface cannot
assign the received signals to a sensor type. So that the speed data transferred can be used never-
theless, such a sensor appears in the list as None (at systems with radar 9xxx series: as Sensor x,
where x is the number of the channel on which the Ship’s Interface is receiving the signals).

Inputting the Present Drift

In the Manual frame in the Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu, enter the magnitude of the drift under
Drift and enter the direction of the drift under Set. Exit the menu by pressing the OK button.
☞ This input is possible only in the case of single-axis logs.

138 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

In the list, a DOLOG is marked:

Sensor status 1)
Longitudinal and transverse speeds over ground (WT) and
through the water (BT) transferred from the marked sensor
List of the connected speed
sensors; mark the speed sensor Definition of whether speed through the water or speed
that is to be selected. over ground is to be used in the system, if the log delivers
both types of data

In the list, a single-axis

log is marked:

Sensor status 1)

In the list, a position Longitudinal speeds

sensor is marked as the transferred from the
speed sensor: marked sensor

Sensor status 1)

Course and speed over

ground Input fields for the drift
(magnitude and direction)

The display depends on

the speed sensor that is
marked in the list.

In the list, MANUAL is marked:

Longitudinal and transverse speeds obtained from
the values that were entered last under MANUAL

Input field for longitudinal speed and drift (magni-

Exits the menu without the tude and direction) which take effect after pressing
new settings being put into of OK.
effect.

Puts the settings of this menu

into effect; the menu is exited.

1) Bottom Track, Water Track: Present sensor mode

Valid Value: The marked sensor is transferring valid data.
Invalid Value: The marked sensor is reporting the transferred data as invalid.
Not Available: The marked sensor is not supplying a status message.

Fig. 4-37 The Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu (systems with radar 1000 series)

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 139

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors Operating Instructions

List of the connected speed sensors; mark the speed sensor

that is to be selected.

Bottom Track, Water Track: Actual sensor mode

Valid Value: The marked sensor is transferring valid data.
Invalid Value: The marked sensor is reporting the transferred data as invalid.
Not Available: The marked sensor is not supplying a status message.

Longitudinal speed and transverse speed which the marked

sensor is currently transferring.

Specifying whether the speed through the water or the speed over ground is to
be used in the system if the log supplies both types of data

Input field for the longitudinal speed; input is possible only if

Manual is marked instead of a speed sensor.

Input fields for the drift (magnitude and direction)

Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited.

Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.

Fig. 4-38 The Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu (systems with radar 9xxx series)

Inputting Own Speed Manually

In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu, mark Manual Speed instead of a sensor.
In the Manual frame, enter the speed at which the ship is sailing. Enter the present drift and set if appli-
cable, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button.
WARNING:
For safety reasons, an available speed sensor must be selected as soon
as possible.
The modes of the NACOS might be limited by the selection of Manual
Speed.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Determination of the Longitudinal and Transverse Speeds

If a sensor is selected which produces the speed information in the form of course over ground and speed
over ground (e.g. a position sensor), the system uses this information and the heading value from the
gyro compass to compute the longitudinal and transverse components of own speed that are displayed
and used in the system.

Failure of the Speed Sensor

If the selected speed sensor fails, the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, in which some other
sensor is marked, opens up automatically. After checking the sensor data displayed there, select this
sensor by means of OK or select some other sensor.

140 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

4.10.3 Selection of the Position Sensor; Settings to Determine the Position

Of the position sensors that are connected, it is necessary to select the one whose position data are used
generally in the system for determination of the system position. If a DGPS receiver has been selected,
it is necessary to define whether the position received is to be used only if the DGPS receiver is operating
in Differential mode. As an alternative to selecting a position sensor, it is also possible to specify, if neces-
sary, that the system position is to be determined in the Sensor Master or in the Ship’s Interface by dead
reckoning (Estimated Position).
After the position sensor has been selected, the accuracy of the position data must be checked continu-
ously, even although the system continuously performs a check of the position quality.
In addition, a second position sensor can be selected so that its positions can be plotted as a second
past plot for comparison purposes.

Selection of the Position Sensor

Call up the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu and mark the desired sensor in the Select list.
Behind Lat and Lon in the frame below the list, the position currently being transferred from the marked
sensor appears.
If the marked sensor reports that the data transferred are valid, the message Valid Value (or Status
Valid) appears there. If it reports that the data are not valid, the message (or Status Invalid) appears. If
the marked sensor does not transfer any status message about the validity of the values transferred, Not
Available (or No Status) appears there.
The distance from the position currently being used to the position transferred from the marked sensor is
displayed behind Distance, and the corresponding direction is displayed behind Bearing. If the difference
displayed is relevant for the nautical situation, you must first check whether the sensor marked is a suffi-
ciently accurate one.
Selection of the position sensor marked is done by pressing the OK button.
☞ On ships with BSH approval and on ships with DNV approval, the take-over of position values is
permitted only if the sensor, by means of a status signal, declares that these data are valid. Position
sensors which do not transmit this status signal can be displayed but cannot be selected.

Specifying the Use of the GPS Mode in the Case of the DGPS Receiver
Call up the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu, and in the Use of GPS frame switch on the DGPS
and GPS function if the position data generated in GPS mode are to be used too. Otherwise, switch on
the function DGPS only.
☞ For systems with radar 1000 series: If the TRACKPILOT is in the activated state, this setting can
only be made on a radar indicator that is switched to act as the TRACKPILOT Master.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 141

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors Operating Instructions

List of connected position sensors; mark the position sensor

that is to be selected.
Valid Value (or Status Valid): The marked sensor is trans-
ferring valid data.
Invalid Value (or Status Invalid): The marked sensor is
reporting the transferred data as invalid.
Not Available (or No Status): The marked sensor is not
supplying a status message.
Position currently being transferred by the marked sensor

Distance between the position currently being used in

the CHARTPILOT and the position transferred from
the marked sensor

Direction from the position currently being used in the

CHARTPILOT to the position transferred from the
marked sensor
Use of the DGPS receiver data in the case of failure of the
DGPS mode:
DGPS only: GPS receiver is regarded as having failed.
DGPS and GPS: The data determined in GPS mode are used.
Input fields for the starting position of the dead reckoning
For systems with radar 1000 series: Fields appear, when
Estimated is marked.
For systems with radar 9xxx series: Input is possible, when
Estimated is marked.
Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited.
Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.

Fig. 4-39 The Sensor Settings > Position Sensor and ... > 2nd Position Sensor menus

Checking the Accuracy of the Position Data

In the chart area, any inaccuracy of the position data leads to a displacement between
- the own ship symbol and the ARPA targets on the one hand, and
- the electronic chart and User Chart Objects, the AIS targets, the pre-planned tracks, the Aids-to-
Navigation and the maps on the other hand.
The position used is normally sufficiently accurate if, with a small range setting, the fixed targets coincide
with the corresponding symbols on the electronic chart.
☞ To minimize the inaccuracies, the system position can be corrected manually - see Section 4.10.4.
☞ If the entire set of ARPA targets is displayed rotated relative to the electronic chart or User Chart
Objects or map, this indicates that there is a compass error.
☞ The position used by the CHARTPILOT can be checked continuously against a second position
sensor; see below, S e l e c t i n g t h e S e c o n d P o s i t i o n S e n s o r .

Selecting the Second Position Sensor

In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > 2nd Position Sensor menu, mark the desired sensor. Behind
Lat and Lon in the frame below the list, the position currently being transferred from the marked sensor
appears. Furthermore, the distance from the position currently being used to the position transferred from
the marked sensor is displayed behind Distance, and the corresponding direction is displayed behind
Bearing. When the OK button is pressed, the marked position sensor is selected.

142 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

For the plotting of the second past plot, the position determined by dead reckoning can be used instead
of the second position sensor. The inputs for this are made in the Sensor Settings > 2nd Position
Sensor menu as described above.

Determining the Position Used by Means of Dead Reckoning

If there is no position sensor available, the only available method of position determination is that of dead
reckoning from the gyro heading and the data of the selected speed sensor.
1. In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu, select Estimated instead of a
sensor.
2. In the lower Estimated frame, enter the position with which the dead reckoning is to be started.
3. The dead reckoning is started by pressing the OK button.
☞ In the CHARTPILOT, the position determination performed by dead reckoning is called Estimated
Position.
WARNING:
The accuracy of the dead reckoning position must be checked continu-
ally. For safety reasons, an available position sensor must be selected
as soon as possible.
The operation of the system might be limited by the selection of Esti-
mated Position; for example, the modes of the TRACKPILOT are limited,
and after 10 minutes the AIS is switched off.

Correction of the Dead Reckoning Position when Estimated Position is Used

1. Before the known position e.g. determined by means of cross-bearings is reached, enter this position
in the lower Estimated frame in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu.
2. When the position entered has been reached, press the OK button in the Sensor Settings > Position
Sensor menu.

USEFUL INFORMATION

System Position
On every ship, a point on the ship is defined at service level as the system position. Normally, it is the
installation location of the DOLOG transducer. Except for the information in the Sensor Settings menu,
all system displays relative to own position refer to this system position. For use in the system, all position
sensor values are converted to the system position.
☞ In these Operating Instructions, the system position is also called own position.

System Reaction on Failure of a Sensor

If the selected position sensor fails, the system automatically switches over to Estimated Position, and a
message about the failure is given (the alarm POSITION TIMEOUT or POSITION INVALID).
If the course sensor or speed sensor fails while Estimated Position is switched on (the alarm GYRO
FAULT, SPEED TIMEOUT or SPEED INVALID), the value used for the dead reckoning is the last course
or speed value transferred before the failure.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 143

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors Operating Instructions

4.10.4 Manual Correction of the System Position (Position Adjust)

For various reasons, it can happen that the position of the electronic chart or of the self-generated map
on the screen is not in agreement with reality (i.e. with the ship's own position and with the ARPA targets).
In such cases, the Position Adjust function offers the possibility of adding the necessary correction value
(position offset) to the system position used in the NACOS.
WARNING:
Be very careful when using the Position Adjust function: by checking
several objects, make certain which area the position offset can be valid
in. Check regularly whether the position offset is still valid, especially
after a change of positional accuracy from DGPS to GPS and vice versa.

WARNING:
When the watch is changing over, the selected offset must definitely be
pointed out to the new officer of the watch.

Performing the Position Adjust

With the Cancel key (or the right-hand key of the mouse), click a symbol for which an ARPA target exists.
In the menu that is thus opened, press Adjust Position, draw a line to the corresponding ARPA fixed
target symbol, and click this symbol (with the DO key or the left-hand key of the mouse). The distances
displayed on the line are added as the position offset to the system position. The position offset has an
effect throughout the whole system, i.e. on the automatic trackkeeping, on the position of the electronic
chart relative to the track, etc. For this reason, it can happen that, as a result of the position adjust, an
alarm message (e.g. the TRACK LIMIT alarm of the TRACKPILOT) is triggered on connected units.

Display of the Position Offset

The size of the position offset is indicated in the line ADJ ... in the Cursor display.
After the position adjust has been performed, the position field of the navigation data line is given a
yellow background.
For systems with radar 9xxx series: After 15 minutes 1), the background colour becomes normal again,
but the text in the field is now red. With the message CHECK POSITION OFFSET which appears at the
same time, the system draws attention to the fact that the position offset that is still active must be
checked.

Resetting the Position Offset

The position offset is reset automatically (i.e. is set to zero) whenever a change-over to a different posi-
tion sensor occurs.
The resetting occurs manually in the context menu of the chart area with the function Clear Pos. Adjust.

1)
Default setting, can be changed at service level.

144 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

4.10.5 Setting the Time Zone and Date and Time

Setting the Time Zone

If a zone time differing from the UTC is to be processed and displayed in the CHARTPILOT and on all
other SAM Electronics equipment items of the system, the time zone must be entered on one of the
equipment items:
Under Time Zone in the Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu, input the time difference of the desired time
zone relative to UTC. Leave the menu by pressing the OK button. The time zone that is entered takes
effect over the entire system.

For systems with radar 1000 series: The date and time delivered by the position sensor
connected to the Sensor Master (see page 23) are used throughout the entire system.
(Input not possible)
For systems with radar 9xxx series: Only if an incorrect time is being displayed in the
navigation data line: Enter the UTC to which the internal clock is to be set by pressing
of the OK button.

Input field for the time zone (time difference relative to UTC)

Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited.

Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.

Fig. 4-40 The Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu

Setting the Date and Time

For systems with radar 1000 series: Input of date and time is not possible. The date and time delivered
by the position sensor connected to the Sensor Master (see page 23) are used throughout the entire
system.
For systems with radar 9xxx series: This action is necessary (and possible) only if there is an incorrect
date or time being displayed on the system's items of equipment. 1)
In the menu Sensor Settings > Date/Time, enter the UTC under Date and Time. When you press the OK
button, the clock of the Ship's Interface is set to the UTC that is entered.

1) The CHARTPILOT uses the time and date (UTC) transferred from the connected position sensor. With these data, the clock of the Ship's
Interface is set also. If the position sensor fails, the time and date from the clock of the Ship's Interface are used in the system. With the
action described, the clock of the Ship's Interface is set manually. This is necessary only if the Ship's Interface was switched off by mains
disconnection and there is no position sensor delivering the date and time after the Ship's Interface has been switched on again.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 145

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.10 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors Operating Instructions

146 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

5 Voyage Planning

The part of the (long-term and medium-term) voyage planning that can be performed on the CHART-
PILOT consists of
- generating and, if necessary, modifying pre-planned tracks for the planned route - see Section 5.1,
- procuring and updating the electronic chart for the voyage area - see Section 7.3 to 7.8,
- the editing (if necessary) of the Manual Update data of the ENC as per Section 5.3 (if ENC files are
used which do not contain the latest safety-relevant changes),
- if necessary, generating User Chart Objects - see Section 5.2,
- if necessary, generating maps for the voyage area, or making additions to these maps - see Section
5.5.
- generating an Own Chart in special cases (if no chart is available for the region to be navigated, but
navigation is to take place with an electronic chart) – see Section 5.4.

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

The work on the pre-planned tracks can be performed on any radar indicator of the radar 1000 series
and on the MULTIPILOT 91xx or on the CHARTPILOT, whichever is selected. These items of equipment
exchange the entered data with one another, so that (for example) a track that is generated on the
CHARTPILOT can also be altered on any RADARPILOT 1000 or on the MULTIPILOT 91xx.

5.1.1 General Information about Pre-planned Tracks

Pre-planned tracks 1) are planned voyage routes which are generated on the basis of waypoint sequences
and are stored in the form of files. They can then be used by the components of the system as follows:
- Tracks can be displayed in the chart area on the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode.
- On any radar indicator, one or more tracks can be selected and added as a background to the radar
picture. The present part of the track is then displayed automatically on the radar picture.
- On the radar indicator or on the CHARTPILOT, one of the displayed tracks can be defined as the
System Track, which is effective for the entire system. With the aid of the TRACKPILOT, the ship
can be piloted automatically along this track. But even during manual control, the diverse displays at
the system components that refer to the System Track can be most helpful.
- If the planned time of arrival is input at the beginning of the voyage, the CHARTPILOT continuously
performs a speed calculation while the ship is sailing along the track; this calculation is based on the
speed settings contained in the track file, and its purpose is to achieve the required time of arrival.
The result, the Arrival Speed, is displayed in the Track/Schedule display, and can be used by the
operator as the current speed setting.
- If the system is equipped with a SPEEDPILOT, the speed can be controlled automatically while the
ship is sailing along the System Track, in such a way that the Arrival Speed is achieved and the time
schedule planning is thus fulfilled. Alternatively, predefined speeds that are likewise contained in the
track file (Profile Speeds) can be set for the individual track segments by means of the SPEED-
PILOT.

1)
In this document, pre-planned tracks are also simply called tracks if there is no danger of confusion.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 147

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Geographical Position and Shape of a Track

A track is divided by waypoints into track segments. The waypoints are the main construction elements
of the track. Their positions are defined by geographical coordinates.
If it is planned that the ship will change course at a waypoint, the radius of the turn must be specified.
In this case, at the beginning of the manoeuvre computed on the basis of the specified radius, the track
leaves the track line 1) at the wheel over point (WOP), and after completion of the manoeuvre it goes
over to the next track line.
The geographical coordinates of the waypoints, together with the radii assigned to the waypoints, thus
define the geographical position and shape of the track.
Tracks each have a first waypoint and a last one. During editing, all waypoints are automatically
numbered consecutively, beginning at 1 for the first waypoint. All track functions refer to this sequence.
Thus, a track can only be sailed in the direction for which it has been generated.
☞ However, the direction of a track that has already been generated can be reversed by means of a
simple operating step during editing and then processed further - see page 167.

WOP Actual waypoint

(To WP)
n
ire ctio
g d
ilin
Sa
Radiu

Track
s

Last waypoint
(From WP)

Fig. 5-1 Shape of the track in the case of course changes

There is practically no limit to the number of waypoints that a track can consist of, or to the length of a
track. Thus, the entire route between two ports can be defined as one track. It can often be appropriate
to divide the entire distance up into individual tracks. For example, if a port is approached from various
directions along various routes, it might be appropriate to perform separation into the port-related
segment that is identical for all routes and the part that is specific for the route concerned. In this way,
the data relating to the port need to be input once only, and the maintenance of these data only has to
take place in one track. When the voyage begins, a new track covering the entire distance can then be
generated in a simple manner by taking over all waypoints of the individual tracks into this overall track
by means of a special operating function - see page 162 and 167.

1)
Track line = a line joining two consecutive waypoints

148 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

The Data of Which a Track Consists

In addition to the administrative data, which refer to the entire track, a track can contain a series of data
per track segment. These data are assigned in each case to one of the two waypoints which form the
limits of the track section. They are therefore called waypoint data.

Administrative Data (for details, see page 179)

The following parameters refer to the entire track:
- Track Number
- Track Name
- Catalog to which the track is assigned
- Notes (your own notes about the track)
- Last modified date, time (date and time of the last modification; this is generated automatically)
and for use on radar 9xxx series only:
- Extension Map Number
- Extension Map Catalog (catalog to which the extension map is assigned)

Waypoint Data (for details, see page 172)

Parameters for general use of the track:
- Waypoint Number
- Waypoint Position
- Remark about the waypoint
- Parameter Point Attribute
- Waypoint Notes
- Administration ID
- Administration Owner
Parameters that are also used for the automatic parameterisation of the TRACKPILOT (these data are
also called Pilot Data):
- Radius
- Sailing mode
- Track control mode
- Rudder economy
- Course limit
- Track limit
Parameters for time planning and for use of the SPEEDPILOT:
- Profile Speed
- Planned Speed
- Arrival attribute
The following data are computed from the waypoint data by the program and can be displayed (for
details, see page 163),
- Track (= direction of the track line)
- Distance
- Track Distance

USEFUL INFORMATION

Assignment of the Waypoint Data to the Track Segments

Depending on their meaning, the waypoint data have different areas (relative to the waypoint) in which
they act:
- The speeds and the waypoint notes are used during the approach to the waypoint for which they are
entered.
- All other data are valid starting at the waypoint for which they are entered.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 149

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

5.1.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of the Tracks

During the generation of the tracks, you can transfer the waypoint positions graphically, (in Graphic
mode) from the electronic chart, and - if a digitizer is connected - from a (paper) chart. You can also edit
the waypoint positions by alphanumeric input (in Text mode); all other data must be edited in this mode.
In Text mode, the following functions too are possible:
- During the generation of a track, waypoints - including all waypoint data - can be taken over (copied)
from tracks that already exist.
- By means of a special function, all waypoints of an existing track can be appended (copied) onto
the track that is being generated.
- By means of another special function, the direction of the track can be reversed, i.e. the first
waypoint becomes the last one, and so on.
- Waypoints used frequently can also be collected in a waypoint file (see page 183), from which the
waypoint positions can be taken when necessary. This possibility is provided, for example, for using
the CHARTPILOT on survey vessels.
Once the track has been generated, it should definitely be checked with the special checking function.
The track that is checked must be stored in the form of a separate file 1) on the hard disk of the CHART-
PILOT and assigned to a catalog. During the storing process, you have to give the track a track number,
by means of which the system - in conjunction with the catalog name - can clearly identify any track. So
that you too can identify the track later, you should give the track an appropriate track name during the
storing process.
If a track is to be displayed or modified on the CHARTPILOT, you first have to load it. In this process, a
track stored on the hard disk is copied into the main memory.
For modifying a track, you have all of the input possibilities that are also available to you for the initial
generation process. After the modification, the track must be stored. If this is done under the old track
number, the old data set of the modified track is lost. If, during the storing process, you input a new track
number, the modified track is stored additionally as a new track; the original track continues to exist in
unchanged form.
Although it is improbable, hard disk drives can get damaged or the data stored on them can be erased.
So that, in such cases, the stored data are not irretrievably lost, it is absolutely essential to make a back-
up copy on diskette at regular intervals, i.e. before such an event can occur (see page 313). After a
hard disk fault or after the hard disk has been exchanged, the files can then be copied back from the
diskette to the hard disk drive (see page 316). This mechanism can also be used to exchange files
between the systems on different ships.

1)
In the following, no distinction is drawn between the track and the track file.

150 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Loads tracks into the main memory so that they can be displayed, modi-
fied or handled in some other way (see pages 156 and 167).
Defining the System Track (see page 233; menu see Figure 6-1 on page 223).

Deselects the System Track (see page 222).

Opens the menu area for execution of voyage preparation (see page 227 and 232; menu
see Figure 6-5 on page 229).
With this function, any waypoint of the System Track can be defined as the next waypoint
that is to be approached (see page 222 and 233; menu see Figure 6-2 on page 224).

Deletes tracks from the main memory, e.g. to switch off the display of these
tracks in the chart area (see page 65).

Opens the menu area for the generating of tracks; makes it possible to create catalogs (see
page 180; menu see Figure 5-4 on page 156).
Deletes tracks on the hard disk,
and deletes superfluous catalogs (see page 311).

Opens the menu area for the generating of waypoint files (see page 183; see also Figure
5-16 on page 184).

Fig. 5-2 The menu Tracks

Generation of Tracks
A track is generated by inputting (editing) the waypoint positions and the other waypoint data and the
administrative data. If the file is then stored, the track that has been generated is available at any time in
the entire system.

Methods of Data Input

For data input, the following possibilities are available, depending on the equipment of the CHARTPILOT:

Generation of Waypoints and Input of Waypoint Positions

- If an electronic chart of the area is available: by clicking the waypoint position with the aid of the
cursor in the chart area of the CHARTPILOT screen,
- if the CHARTPILOT is equipped with a digitizer: by clicking the waypoint position with the aid of the
digitizer pointer on the (paper) chart aligned on the digitizer,
- if neither an electronic chart nor a digitizer is available: by alphanumeric editing, including the
possibility of taking over waypoints from a waypoint file (see page 183).
After appropriate preparation (see page 155), all three methods can be used interchangeably:
- To switch over between editing with the electronic chart and alphanumerical editing, all that has to
be done is to press the Text Mode button in the Tracks > Edit menu, which is already in the open
state anyway.
- Both during editing with the electronic chart and during alphanumeric editing, the digitizer is in the
active state without any need for further switching.

The administrative data and all other waypoint data must be edited alphanumerically.
Alphanumeric editing takes place in Text mode, for which a large menu covering the entire chart area is
available. An overview of the display in Text mode is shown in Figure 5-3. The individual areas are
explained in detail in the following sections.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 151

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Administrative For systems with At this instant, the Coordinate system which is
data of the track radar 9xxx series last modification used as the basis for the The Tracks > Edit
only, see page 180 of the track was input of the waypoint posi- menu;
See page 179. stored. tions - see page 163 1) see page 156

Input area:
Here, the waypoint data of the waypoint marked in the waypoint list are displayed and edited -
see Section 5.1.6 (page 163) and Section 5.1.8 (page 170).

Waypoint list: 1) If parameterisation of the coordinate system for

- Shows an overview of all edited waypoints together with a special tasks has not been selected at service level, the
selection (defined by you) of waypoint data. Geographic button serves only for the display of the
- Permits alphanumeric generation of waypoints (see page 163). (permanently) selected projection (see page 97).

Fig. 5-3 The CHARTPILOT display for the editing of tracks in Text Mode

The Work Steps for Generating a Track

The generating of tracks is mainly divided into the following steps (the same applies to the modifying of
existing tracks):
- Preparing the generation of the track - see page 155,
- Setting the digitizer up, if it is to be used - see page 157,
- Generation of waypoints - see page 161. 163 and 169,
- Editing of waypoint data - see page 170,
- Checking the track - see page 175,
- Completing the generation of the track - see page 179.

152 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

To minimise the effort needed for the editing and later modification of the waypoint data, the work of
generating the waypoints and editing the waypoint data should be done in a particular order. This order
is based on the following facts:
- The TRACKPILOT, the SPEEDPILOT and the time schedule planning process use the values
contained in the track and the values that are input manually while the ship is sailing along the track,
until a new value is set for these parameters.
To parameterise the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT with the aid of the track, it is thus only neces-
sary to make one entry
. for the waypoint at which the automatic setting process is to take place for the first time,
. for each waypoint at which the value is to change automatically,
. for each waypoint at which a value that may have been input manually while sailing along the
track is to be reset.
Any other entry has the disadvantages
. that a value entered manually during sailing of the track is reset unintentionally,
. and that, in the case of a modification of the track file, an unnecessarily large quantity of data
have to be modified.
- Every waypoint that is generated contains at least the following waypoint data:
. Waypoint number (assigned automatically by the program)
. Waypoint position,
. Sailing mode,
. Track control mode.
- After one waypoint has been generated, generation of the other waypoints is done mainly by copying
and modifying existing waypoints. When waypoints are copied, such copying always includes all of
the waypoint data entered (in the case of generation by means of the electronic chart and digitizer:
using the cursor position as the waypoint position).
If you comply with the sequence of waypoint generation and waypoint data editing described in the
following, you will obtain with minimum effort a track which contains only the necessary waypoint data
and no irritating additional waypoint data:
- Generate the first waypoint of the track. If the waypoint was generated in Text mode, edit the
waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint.
- If you do not want to use the values for the sailing mode, (Rhumb Line) and track control mode, (To
Track) that are entered automatically by the program, correct the value concerned.
- Generate all other waypoints in the order in which they are to appear in the track. If the waypoints
have been generated in Text mode, you should at the same time also edit the waypoint position and
the remarks about the waypoint.
- Edit all other necessary waypoint data. It might be appropriate to do this in several separate runs for
separate subjects, e.g. entering all radii in one run, all speeds in another run, and so on.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Use of Various Coordinate Systems for Position Input

The position data that are input on the CHARTPILOT do not have to refer to any particular coordinate
system. It is possible to choose between various coordinate systems.
Generally, the CHARTPILOT program (and also the connected radar/NACOS components) work inter-
nally with the chart datum WGS 84. If position data referring to a different chart datum are input, a conver-
sion to WGS 84 automatically takes place internally during input. A necessary prerequisite for correct
conversion is that the chart datum used is known to the program!
If a different chart datum for the display is selected on the CHARTPILOT, all positions are converted to
the desired chart datum specifically for this display.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 153

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

If the position input is performed graphically, the program must also know the projection of the chart used.
From the above remarks, the following statements apply to the various methods of position input:
- Graphic editing in the electronic chart:
In the case of all vector charts and most raster charts, the coordinate system is known to the
program and is taken into account by the program. For the position input, no further setting activity
is necessary in this respect.
WARNING:
Raster charts whose coordinate system is not known 1) are permitted to
be used as the basis for editing only in those geographical areas in
which high positional accuracy is not important.

- Alphanumerical editing (in Text mode):

The program cannot know which chart datum is relevant for the position data that are to be input;
therefore:
WARNING:
In Text mode, you must ensure that, for the editing, the chart datum that
is set is the one to which the source of the position data refers (see page
163).

Furthermore, by input of the projection used, you can adapt the input and display areas to suit the
projection-specific position parameters.
- Graphic editing with the digitizer:
The chart datum and projection of the chart used are important, and must be input when the chart
is being set up on the digitizer:
WARNING:
In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection and chart
datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be entered.

1)
These are indicated in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background.

154 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

5.1.3 Preparing the Generation or Modification of the Track

A track can be generated in various ways:

- By generation as a new track
- By copying and modifying an existing track.
A track can also be modified at any time (if it has not been defined as the System Track).

Generating a New Track

1. Check whether the electronic chart being used is officially approved (see also page 79).
If an officially approved electronic chart of the area is available with a suitable scale, you should use
this chart to generate the waypoints; in the case of non-approved electronic charts, please check the
nautical safety of your planning by comparing with official (paper) charts.
WARNING:
Raster charts whose coordinate system is not known 1) are permitted to
be used as the basis for editing only in those geographical areas in
which high positional accuracy is not important.
If a vector chart is used, switch on the display of this (with the Chart Visible button in the Chart
menu).
Switch the chart area to Planning display mode and select the chart excerpt so that at least the posi-
tion of the first waypoint is situated in the chart area and so that the scale permits sufficiently precise
graphic input.
☞ You can also make this setting by marking the position of the first waypoint in the (zoomed)
world chart by means of the Chart Maintenance subroutine and by switching back directly into
the Navigation program - see page 239.
2. If the system is equipped with a digitizer and you want to perform editing graphically on the basis of
a (paper) chart, you must first set up the digitizer in accordance with Section 5.1.4.
3. If you want to use waypoints from a waypoint file (see page 183), you must load that file: under
Waypoint Files in the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, mark the waypoint file, and leave the
menu by pressing the OK button.
4. Call up the Tracks > Edit menu.
If there are one or more tracks loaded, the number and name of one of the loaded tracks are
displayed there under Selected Track. In this case, you must create a new (still empty) track by
pressing the New button. If there is no track loaded, the new track is already created by calling up
the Tracks > Edit menu; there is then no need to press the New button. The program automatically
gives the number 0001 and the title untitled xxx to the new track. The correct number and title are
input upon completion of the track generation process at the latest (see page 179).
You can now begin to generate the waypoints - see page 161, 163 and 169.

1)
These are indicated in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 155

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Track Generation by Copying and Modifying an Existing Track

1. If the modification is to be performed using graphic aids, this should be prepared in the same way
as for generation of a new track as described in steps 1 to 3 above.
2. Loading an existing track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which
the track is assigned; under Tracks, click the track that is to be loaded; then leave the menu by
pressing the OK button.
☞ Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, all loaded tracks are displayed.
3. Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, click the track that is to be used as the
basis, and leave the menu by pressing the OK button. The track selected in this way is stated under
Selected Track in the Tracks > Edit menu which then appears.
You can now begin to generate the waypoints - see page 161, 163 and 169.

Modifying an Existing Track

The preparations for this are the same as for track generation by copying and modifying an existing track.

Number and name of the track that is being edited.

Selection of the track that is to be modified or that is to be used

as the basis for the new track.

Press if a brand new track is to be generated.

This reverses the direction of the selected track - see page 167.
Takes over all waypoints of an existing track and copies them behind the last waypoint -
see pages 162 and 167.
Checks the selected track - see page 175.
Stores the selected track - see page 180; menu see Figure 5-14 on page 181.

Operating elements for graphic editing on the

basis of the electronic chart - see page 161

Switches over between Text mode and Graphic mode.

Fig. 5-4 The Tracks > Edit menu

156 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

5.1.4 Setting Up the Digitizer

Before you can edit waypoints with the digitizer, it has to be set up, i.e.:
- The chart must be fixed to the digitizer.
- The coordinate system and the scale of the chart used must be input.
- The position of the chart on the digitizer must be calibrated.
Criteria for the selection of the suitable chart:
- Largest possible scale in order to achieve maximum accuracy and display of all nautical obstacles,
wrecks etc.,
- the reference latitude and chart datum must be known,
- the chart must be up to date.

Fixing the Chart on the Digitizer

1. Lay the chart on the digitizer and fix it so that it cannot be moved; it does not have to be aligned at
a particular angle. All that has to be done is to ensure that the part of the chart from which position
data are to be digitized is lying within the working area of the digitizer.
☞ On the A0 and A1 boards, the working area is situated within the area formed by four corner-
markers; on the A2 board, it is situated under the transparent sheeting.
☞ These Operating Instructions refer to the DrawingBoard (size A2 to A0) from the CalComp
company. Reading of the operating instructions written by the digitizer manufacturer is unnec-
essary, since the required operating steps are explained in the following. However, if a different
type of digitizer is used, it might be necessary to additionally utilise the digitizer manufacturer's
operating instructions that are supplied along with the digitizer.
2. Put the digitizer pointer down on the working area. Switch the digitizer on now if this has not already
been done; the POWER lamp must be alight.
☞ If the digitizer is in the switched-on state and the digitizer pointer is situated outside the working
area, the POWER lamp flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

Setting the Coordinate System and Calibrating the Chart

You are guided through this work step-by-step by the program after you have pressed the Setup
Assistant button in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu. Therefore, a few remarks about the proce-
dure will be sufficient here:

Paper Chart No.

Under Paper Chart No. in the first dialog box which opens up after pressing of the Setup Assistant
button, input the number of the chart that is lying on the digitizer. You can allocate this number yourself
(max. 18 places; all editable characters are permitted). It is used only for simplification of repeated cali-
bration of the charts. The program stores the coordinate system that was input during first-time calibration
of the chart, and the reference coordinates that were entered, and assigns them to the Paper Chart No.
If you want to use the same chart again later, you do not need to input these data again.
☞ Once a Paper Chart No. has been input, it cannot be erased after successful completion of the cali-
bration process. However, if you want to use the number for a different chart, you can alter in any
desired manner the data that are stored for this number.
☞ If you want to know whether a Paper Chart No. has already been allocated, input the number and
press the Next>> button. If a chart projection is marked (by inverted display) in the list which then
appears, the Paper Chart No. has already been allocated.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 157

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Coordinate System
In the Chart Projections and Chart Datums lists, mark the coordinate system in which the chart exists.
For important notes about this, see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N on page 159.

Calibration Procedure
The chart is calibrated by inputting the coordinate values for each of four reference points one after
another, and by clicking the reference point on the chart in each case.
Clicking on the (paper) chart: Position the digitizer pointer exactly on the point that is to be
clicked, and briefly press the 0 key of the digitizer pointer.
The four reference points must fulfil the following conditions:
- Two reference points situated side by side must be at the same latitude, and two reference points
situated one above the other must be at the same longitude, i.e. in the Mercator projection they must
form a rectangle. As the reference points, coordinate crosses are the most suitable.
- They must be as far apart as possible. The larger the rectangle formed by the reference points, the
smaller the effect of the digitization error of the reference point coordinates on the subsequent digi-
tization.
The sequence of input is important: you must always begin with the south-west reference point and
continue counterclockwise. If the assignment of the coordinate values does not correspond to this instruc-
tion, a request to repeat the calibration appears before completion of the calibration process.
If, during input, errors have been made or the reference points have not been input with the necessary
accuracy, an error message appears, requesting that the calibration be repeated (for possible source of
error, see USEFUL INFORMATION, P r e c i s i o n o f D i g i t i z a t i o n ).

The geographical coordinates of the

reference points that are read on the
chart must be input here.

Number of the
reference point

Coordinates of the
reference points

Resets the coordinate values to the

initial values. Calibration must be
begun again at reference point 1.

Opens the dialog box that was shown previ- Exits from the menu without
ously, and makes it possible to correct the Transition to the next work step activation of the inputs.
values that were input there.

Fig. 5-5 Dialog Box for Calibration of the Chart

158 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Setting the Display of the Digitizer Position on the Radar PPI and in the Chart Area
In the last dialog box, by switching on the Digitizer Cursor function you can specify that the position of
the digitizer pointer will be displayed on the radar PPI and in the Chart Area by the symbol .
With the Numerical Position function, you can switch the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor display on
and off.
☞ Both functions are also available in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu.
☞ The digitizer pointer does not act on the display processes and editing processes until the digitizer
has been set up.

Setting the Desired Chart Excerpt on the Radar PPI and in the Chart Area
When you have successfully set up the chart, you can put the digitizer pointer down on the chart at the
position that is to become the centre of the screen display. When you then press the Set Planning Mode
button in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, the display mode is switched over to the Planning
display mode (i.e. the chart excerpt is independent of the ship's own position) and the screen excerpt is
moved accordingly.

Calibrating the chart.

- Switches the Planning display mode on.

- Sets the display centre to the current position of the digitizer pointer.

Clears the calibration data.

In the chart area, this switches on and off the presentation of the chart position
of the digitizer pointer.

Switches on and off the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor display.

Paper Chart No. of the calibrated chart and its coordinate system

Fig. 5-6 The Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu

USEFUL INFORMATION

Preparing the Charts

During first-time calibration of a chart, it is desirable to label this chart with the Paper Chart No. and to
mark the reference points on it with a transparent text-marker. In this way, the calibration of the chart is
reduced to the input of the Paper Chart No. and to clicking of the four marked reference points.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 159

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

If the whole chart does not fit on the digitizer, separate Paper Chart Nos and reference points can be
defined and marked for the individual areas.

Grids of the Usable Projections

In the vast majority of charts, the Mercator projection is used. With the other projections, not all grid lines
are parallel to one another. On charts having a large scale, this lack of parallelism is not obvious.
Because input of the correct projection is very important for precise digitization, the projection type should
be read off the labelling of the chart.

Mercator Gauss Conformal Cylindrical Cassini Gauss-Krueger

Polyconic Cylindrical Equal Spaced UTM
(This is the transversal
Mercator projection.)

Fig. 5-7 Grids of the digitizable projections

The NGO chart datum

The NGO chart datum exists with three different reference longitudes. In some cases, these are not
marked on the charts.
Allocation of the numbers of the Norwegian charts to the NGO chart datums:
- NGO Ref. 10°43'30.0E: Charts 8, 9, 55, 58, 62 to 65, 73 to 78
- NGO Ref. 10°43'37.5E: Charts 6 and 7
- NGO Ref. 10°43'22.5E: All other charts

Precision of Digitization
The digitizer has a digitization precision of ± 0.25 mm. During calibration, the program performs a check
in which the digitizer coordinates of the four reference points are compared with the geographical coor-
dinates entered, taking account of the entered scale, projection and chart datum (including the reference
latitude if applicable). In this check, the program permits a standard deviation of 1 mm 1).

The Menu Line of the Digitizer

The menu line (coloured key-symbols) is not needed for use of the digitizer with the CHARTPILOT, but
it is capable of being operated.
IMPORTANT:
The menu line of the digitizer must not be operated.
If a menu function is triggered by accident (with the digitizer pointer), this can cause faults in the digitiza-
tion. Such faults can be corrected by
- switching the digitizer off,
- switching it on again after a few seconds at the earliest, and
- setting up the digitizer again.

1)
Default value, can be set at service level.

160 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Ending the Digitizer Work

If you no longer need the digitizer, you can switch it off at the mains. Several seconds after switch-off,
the set-up is cleared.
Alternatively, you can leave the digitizer switched on at the mains and you can clear the set-up by means
of the Clear Setup function in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu.

5.1.5 Generating Waypoints by Means of the Electronic Chart

In the Tracks > Edit menu, the Text mode function must not be switched on; if necessary, press the Text
Mode button in order to switch into Graphic mode.
Generating, inserting, moving and deleting are done with the functions mentioned under Graphic mode.
The function desired is switched on by clicking, as usual. If the cursor is then moved into the chart area,
this function remains switched on until the cursor is moved out of the chart area or until the MORE key
is pressed.

Generation of the First and Subsequent Waypoints

Switch on Set/Continue and click the desired waypoint position; then click the next waypoint position,
and so on. Each click in the chart area generates a waypoint at the end of the track, and enters the cursor
position as the waypoint position. The resulting track is displayed in the chart area.
If necessary, move the displayed chart area after pressing Set Center. It should only be moved by an
amount which still allows the last waypoint to be displayed in the chart area. After that, you can generate
further waypoints behind the last waypoint (see below).
If the waypoint to be generated is so far away that, with the selected scale, it cannot be displayed
together with the last waypoint, the following procedure can be used:
- With Range, increase the range setting sufficiently,
- behind the last waypoint, generate the waypoint (even if the position is initially not precise) - see
below.
- after pressing Set Center, move the displayed chart area to the position of the new waypoint.
- with Range, reduce the range setting sufficiently and
- move the new waypoint to the exact position (see below).
After that, you can generate further waypoints behind the new waypoint (see below).
☞ If you wish to use the sailing mode Great Circle or the track control mode To Waypoint, it is advis-
able to edit these data immediately after generation of the first relevant waypoint.

Generation of Further Waypoints Behind the Last Waypoint or in Front of the First One
Switch on Set/Continue and click the last waypoint or the first one. Click the position of the next waypoint
that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on.
The clicking of the waypoint can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.

Inserting One or More Consecutive Waypoints

Switch on Set/Continue and click the track line between the waypoints between which the waypoint is to
be inserted. Click the position of the waypoint that is to be inserted. Behind this waypoint, further
waypoints can be inserted by clicking.
The clicking of the track line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 161

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Shifting a Waypoint
Switch on Modify, click the waypoint that is to be moved, and then click the desired position.
The clicking of the waypoint can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.

Deleting Waypoints
Switch on Delete and, one after another, click the waypoints that are to be deleted.

Inserting Parameter Points

Switch on Set Parameter Point, and on the track line click the point at which the waypoint data are to
change.
☞ Parameter Points are waypoints at which no course change takes place but at which particular
parameters can be set to different values (see page 173).

Taking Over Waypoints from a Waypoint File

In the input area of the Text Mode menu, switch on Compose. You can now generate and insert
waypoints at the positions of the waypoints that are stored in a waypoint file, as described above for the
Set/Continue function. The only difference compared to the Set/Continue function is that, after selection
of the Compose function, only the position of a waypoint stored in a waypoint file is accepted as a
waypoint position.
☞ The waypoints contained in the loaded waypoint file are indicated in the chart area by small orange
circles.

Taking Over All Waypoints from an Existing Track

1. If the track whose waypoints are to be copied has not yet been loaded: Under Catalogs in the
Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is assigned, under Tracks click the desired
track, load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.
2. Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu, mark the catalog to which the track whose
waypoints are to be copied is assigned. Then, under Tracks, mark the desired track.
3. Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all waypoints (including all waypoint
data) of the track marked in the Merge menu are copied behind the last waypoint.

USEFUL INFORMATION

If a Waypoint Cannot be Modified

In the chart area, although several tracks can be displayed simultaneously, only the selected track can
be modified. If you cannot modify a displayed waypoint, the track to which the waypoint belongs is not
the selected track. It is advisable to switch off the display of all unneeded tracks (in the Tracks > Clear
menu).

Conversion of the Coordinate System of Raster Charts

In most files of the raster charts, the projection and chart datum are entered. In the case of these charts,
the program automatically performs a conversion to the WGS84 chart datum used in the NACOS. The
content of these charts is then displayed in the WGS84 chart datum; if you set the cursor to the symbol
of a buoy, for example, the Cursor display shows the position which the buoy has in the WGS84 chart
datum. Therefore, from the point of view of positional accuracy, this chart is suitable as the basis for
editing.

162 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

☞ If the datum of the chart used here is not WGS84, the grid depicted is not displayed correctly; if you
set the cursor to a coordinate system, the Cursor display shows a position differing from the grid
position.
In the case of some raster charts, there is no chart datum entered in the files. These charts are indicated
in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line on the CHARTPILOT by the entry Datum mism.
(= Datum mismatch) on a yellow background, and cannot be converted to WGS84. With these charts, the
grid is displayed correctly, but the chart contents do not have the WGS84 positions. These charts are
therefore unsuitable as a basis for the generation of tracks and maps except in areas in which high posi-
tional accuracy is not important (e.g. on the open sea).

5.1.6 Generating Waypoints Alphanumerically in Text Mode

In the Tracks > Edit menu, switch on the Text mode function. The Text Mode menu shown on page 152
appears.

5.1.6.1 Preparation

1. Under Coordinate System (see Figure 5-3 on page 152), select the chart datum to which the posi-
tion data to be input refer.
WARNING:
When the Text mode is exited, the coordinate system that is active for
the Text mode is automatically set to the coordinate system that was
selected for the display of the electronic chart in the Navigation > Pres-
entation > Coordinate System menu. Therefore, whenever you call up the
Text Mode menu again, you must repeat step 1 (and 2).
☞ You can avoid the repeated input of the coordinate system that is active for the Text mode as
follows: For the duration of the track generation process, for the display of the electronic chart
you should set the coordinate system to which the position data to be input refer.
2. Under Coordinate System, select the projection in which the position data to be input exist or in
which the display of the position data in the Text Mode menu is to take place.
3. If the waypoint parameters which you need for your work are displayed in the waypoint list, you can
now begin to generate the waypoints 1). Otherwise, you should first configure the waypoint list in a
suitable form.

Configuring the Waypoint List

In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed. In this list, not only the waypoint number but also
all waypoint data can be displayed, but not all at the same time. It is therefore necessary to define which
data are to be displayed:
1. After pressing of Columns, the menu shown in Figure 5-9 appears:

1) If parameterisation of the coordinate system for special tasks has been selected at service level, you must choose beforehand under Coor-
dinate System the projection in which the position data to be input are available or in which the display of the position data is to take place
in the Text Mode menu.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 163

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

There,
- under Configured, the parameters whose data are displayed in the waypoint list are listed in
the order in which they are displayed;
- under Available, all other waypoint parameters whose data can be displayed in the waypoint
list are listed.
In the following, the designations used in the Columns menu are shown on the left, and those used
in the headline of the waypoint list are shown beside them.

Waypoint data whose parameters were selected in the Tracks > Edit > Text
Mode > Columns menu for display in the waypoint list
Starts the printing of the track list
(listing of waypoint data for all
waypoints - see page 182; menu
see Figure 5-15 on page 182).

Calls up the Tracks > Edit >

Text Mode > Columns menu;
(see Figure 5-9 on page 165),
in which it is possible to specify
the parameters whose data are
to be displayed in the waypoint
list and printed out in the track
list.

Stores the marked Deletes the marked Before the waypoint marked last, this
waypoints as waypoints waypoints and stores them inserts the last waypoints that were
that are to be copied. in the copying memory. either deleted or marked with Copy.

Fig. 5-8 The waypoint list in the Text Mode menu.

Control Mode CM Track control mode

Course Limit CrsL Course limit
Date Date Date on which one of the items of waypoint data was modified last
Distance Dist Distance from the last waypoint
Economy Ec Rudder economy
Owner ID Owner ID Administration Owner and Administration ID
Planned Speed PlSp Planned Speed
Position 1) Latitude Waypoint position
Longitude
Profile Speed PrSp Profile Speed
Radius Rad Radius
Remark Remark Remark about the waypoint
ROT (PlSp) ROT Pl The maximum ROT that occurs at the Planned Speed
Sail Mode SM Sailing mode
Track Track Direction of the track segment starting at the last waypoint

1)
If parameterisation of the coordinate system for special tasks has been selected at service level, selection of Position causes a display of
the waypoint position in the coordinates corresponding to the projection that was input under Coordinate System in the Text Mode menu.
In the Columns menu, the following are then available in addition:
Position GEO = waypoint position stated in geographical coordinates
Position GK = waypoint position stated in Gauss-Krueger coordinates
Position UTM = waypoint position stated in UTM coordinates

164 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Track Distance TrkDst Distance from the first waypoint (sum of the distances between the
waypoints)
Track Limit TrkL Track limit
Type Type Arrival attribute and parameter point attribute
2. Under Available, mark the parameters that are to be displayed, and by pressing Add>> enter them
under Configured. If there is no parameter marked under Configured, the entry takes place at the
last position; thus, the parameter concerned is then displayed on the left in the waypoint list. If there
are one or more parameters marked under Configured, the entry takes place before these markers.
3. Under Configured, mark the parameters that are not to be displayed, and by pressing <<Remove
delete them under Configured (and enter them under Available).
4. The configuration which existed when Columns was pressed can be re-established by means of
Reset.
5. Complete the configuration process by pressing the OK button.
☞ Figure 5-9 shows a configuration which can be recommended for the alphanumeric generation of
waypoints. Figure 5-8 shows the corresponding display of the waypoint list.

Transfers the parameters marked Transfers the parameters marked in

in Available to Configured. Configured to Available.

These parameters are contained in

These parameters are not the waypoint list (in the order listed
contained in the waypoint list. and only insofar as there is space
in the waypoint list).

Activates the settings of this Re-establishes the configu- Closes the menu without activa-
menu; the menu is closed. ration that existed when this tion of the new settings.
menu was called up.

Fig. 5-9 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu

5.1.6.2 Generation of Waypoints

In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed line-by-line. As in all lists, the lines (i.e. in this case,
the waypoints) can be marked here too. Waypoints are generated, deleted and copied by performing
marking in the waypoint list and by then pressing the appropriate function button. Editing, i.e. modifying
the waypoint data, is done not in the waypoint list but in the input area situated below it.
☞ If there is a line marked in the waypoint list, you can call up a small menu by pressing the MORE
key. If you then click the menu item Show in Chart, the electronic chart appears with the marked
point as the centre. (Return with Text Mode)
For details of editing of the waypoint data, see page 170.

Generating the First Waypoint in a New Track

There is a blank line marked in the waypoint list. Within the Waypoint-xxxx frame, the number 0001 is
displayed, i.e.:

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 165

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

1. Input the waypoint position.

2. We recommend inputting a remark about the waypoint, e.g. the name of the waypoint. This remark
is intended to help you to identify the waypoint during the subsequent processing. It then not only
appears in this Text Mode menu but for voyage preparation it can also be displayed and printed in
the time planning lists.
3. If you want to use the sailing mode Great Circle, you should input this value now.
4. If you want to use the track control mode To Waypoint, you should input this value now.
5. By pressing of the Enter button (see Figure 5-3 on page 152), the first waypoint is now generated
with the data that were input. It appears in the waypoint list with the waypoint number 0001.
(Waypoint numbers are allocated automatically by the program.)

Generating Another Waypoint behind the Last One

1. In the waypoint list, mark the line below the last waypoint. The data displayed in the input area for
this new waypoint are a copy of the data of the waypoint that was previously marked last.
2. Correct the waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint (see above).
3. Press the Enter button. The new waypoint that is thus generated is displayed in the waypoint list.
The next (blank) line is marked.
By successive repetition of processes 2 and 3, all waypoints of the track can now be generated.

Inserting a New Waypoint before a Waypoint

1. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the additional waypoint is to be inserted. The
data of the waypoint marked are displayed in the input area.
2. Correct the waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint (see above).
3. Press the Insert button (see Figure 5-3 on page 152). The new waypoint that is thus generated is
displayed in the waypoint list. All waypoints situated behind it are automatically renumbered 1).

Deletion of Waypoints
In the waypoint list, mark waypoints that are to be deleted, and press the Delete button. The remaining
waypoints are automatically renumbered.

Inserting Deleted Waypoints

In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the deleted waypoints are to be inserted, and press
the Paste button. The waypoints that were deleted last with the aid of the Delete button or were copied
with the aid of the Copy button are inserted.

Copying of Waypoints
1. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press the Copy button.
2. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be copied are to be inserted,
and press the Paste button. The waypoints to be copied are then inserted.

1)
When you press the Insert button, it gets the default frame. After that, the Enter key acts like the Insert button. If you want to insert further
waypoints at the same place, you can then take the Enter key instead of the Insert button.

166 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Taking Over Waypoints from an Existing Track

1. Under Track in the input field Name (see Figure 5-3 on page 152), note the name of the track which
you are currently processing.
2. If the track from which the waypoints are to be copied is not yet loaded: Under Catalogs in the
Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is allocated, under Tracks click the desired
track, load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.
3. Press Select; under Loaded Tracks click the track from which the waypoints are to be copied; and
leave the menu by pressing the OK button. (If you have just performed step 2, you now have to
press Text Mode again.) In the waypoint list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press
the Copy button.
4. Press Select; under Loaded Tracks click the track into which the waypoints are to be copied (you
noted its name in step 1; and leave the menu by pressing the OK button.
5. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be copied are to be inserted,
and press the Paste button. The waypoints to be copied are then inserted.
☞ When the Copy button (and also the Delete button) is pressed, the waypoints marked in the
waypoint list are written into the waypoint copying memory; the old content of the waypoint copying
memory is overwritten. With the Paste button, the content of the waypoint copying memory is always
inserted at the place marked in the waypoint list. The last content of the waypoint copying memory
is not deleted until the CHARTPILOT is switched off.

Taking Over All Waypoints from an Existing Track

1. If the track whose waypoints are to be copied is not yet loaded: Under Catalogs in the Tracks >
Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is allocated, under Tracks click the desired track,
load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.
2. Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu, mark the catalog to which the track whose
waypoints are to be copied is allocated. Then, under Tracks, mark the desired track.
3. Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all waypoints (including all waypoint
data) of the track marked in the Merge menu are copied behind the last waypoint.

Taking Over Waypoints from a Waypoint File

1. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be taken over are to be
inserted.
2. Press the Compose button (see Figure 5-3 on page 152). In the menu (see Figure 5-10) which then
appears, the waypoints of the loaded waypoint-file are listed. (If the input fields Owner, From ID and
To ID are set differently from the settings shown in Figure 5-10, it might be that not all waypoints are
listed; see page 168.)
3. In the list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press the Copy to Track button. The
waypoints that are to be copied are then inserted in the waypoint list of the track.
☞ In the case of the waypoints of the waypoint file, the waypoint parameter sailing mode is gener-
ally set to Rhumb Line, and cannot be set to Great Circle until after take-over into the track.

Reversing the Direction of the Entire Track

In the Tracks > Edit menu, press the Reverse button. As a result, the first waypoint becomes the last
waypoint, the second one becomes the second-last one, and so on, i.e. the track can now be sailed in
the opposite direction. The assignment of the waypoint data to the waypoints is automatically inter-
changed so that the same values are applicable on the same track segments (see A s s i g n m e n t o f t h e
W a y p o i n t D a t a t o t h e T r a c k S e g m e n t s on page 149):

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 167

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

- Profile Speed, Planned Speed and Waypoint Notes are entered at the next waypoint 1).
- Sailing mode, track control mode, Rudder economy, course limit and track limit are entered at the
preceding waypoint.
All other waypoint data remain unchanged.
WARNING:
After reversal of the track, it is necessary to check carefully whether the
existing data are correct for the new sailing direction as well.

☞ In traffic separation zones, for example, the waypoint positions must be changed, the waypoint notes
might have to be assigned to a different waypoint, speeds during arrival and departure are different,
and so on.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Only the waypoints of the owner entered here are listed Only those waypoints whose ID's lie in the
(after Apply Filter has been pressed). If the waypoints of number range defined here are listed
all owners are to be listed, an asterisk (*) must be input. (after Apply Filter has been pressed).

Press so that the entries made

under Owner, From ID and To ID
have an effect on the list.

After Apply Filter has been pressed, all

waypoints of the loaded waypoint-file
- which are allocated to the owner entered
above under Owner and
- which have an ID lying in the number range
defined by the values entered under From ID
and To ID
are listed here.

Inserts the marked waypoints in the track Leaves the menu without transferring
before the waypoint marked last in the of the marked waypoints to the track.
waypoint list of the Text Mode menu.

Fig. 5-10 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu

Filtering Waypoints of a Waypoint File

All waypoints contained in a waypoint file are allocated to an owner.
Each waypoint is identified by means of a number called an ID, which was allocated per owner during
generation of the waypoint file.
In the Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu, it is possible to input under Filter whether all
waypoints contained in the waypoint file are to be mentioned in the list situated under it, or only those of
a particular owner, and whether, for the selected owner, all waypoints or only those within a particular ID
number range are to appear in the list.

1)
This refers to the situation after reversal.

168 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

All waypoints contained in the waypoint file are listed if an asterisk * is entered under Owner, the number
0000 is entered under From ID, and the number 9999 is entered under To ID. To enable the settings in
these three input fields to have an effect, the Apply Filter button must be pressed.

5.1.7 Generating Waypoints with the Digitizer

With the digitizer, you can generate waypoints regardless of whether the Graphic mode or the Text mode
is switched on in the Tracks > Edit menu. The digitizer cannot be used to move or delete waypoints.
It is not essential but nevertheless usually very useful to set the coordinate system for editing to the one
used in the (paper) chart situated on the digitizer (see pages 97 and 163).
If you are using the Graphic mode, you should switch on the digitizer cursor. In the chart area, the digi-
tizer cursor indicates the current geographical position of the digitizer pointer on the (paper) chart cali-
brated there.
Before you generate the first waypoint of the track by means of the digitizer, you should make certain that
the chart has been calibrated correctly. To do this, position the digitizer pointer on a coordinate cross (if
possible, not one that was used as a reference point) and compare these coordinates with the presenta-
tion on the Digitizer Cursor display.
If the positions are not in agreement with one another, check the set coordinate systems (the coordinate
system of the (paper) chart is marked in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer > Coordinate System menu)
and, if necessary, repeat the setting-up of the chart on the digitizer.

Switching the Display of the Digitizer Cursor On and Off

In the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, the display of the digitizer cursor can be switched on and off
by pressing the Digitizer Cursor button. You thus have the possibility of checking the digitizer-generated
waypoints and other objects at the paper chart in relation to their presence in the electronic chart.
WARNING:
If shoals or hazardous objects are not shown on the electronic chart, the
navigation should only be based on the paper chart.

Switching the Digitizer Cursor Display On and Off

With the Numerical Position function, you can switch on and off the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor
display (contains the numerical indication of the digitizer cursor position).

Generating the First and Subsequent Waypoints

Click the waypoint position on the (paper) chart, then click the next waypoint position, and so on. Each
click generates a waypoint at the end of the track and at the same time enters the cursor position as the
waypoint position. The resulting track is displayed in the chart area if the Graphic mode is switched on.
☞ Clicking on the (paper) chart: Position the digitizer pointer exactly at the point that is to be clicked,
and briefly press the 0 key of the digitizer pointer.
☞ If you want to use the sailing mode Great Circle or the track control mode To Waypoint, it is advis-
able to edit these data immediately after generation of the first waypoint.
Whether you also enter the remark about a waypoint after every generation of a waypoint, or
whether you do so subsequently during editing of the waypoint data, depends (for example) on the
spatial configuration of the or on the CHARTPILOT relative to the digitizer, and is a matter for you to
decide.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 169

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Inserting One or More Consecutive Waypoints

Graphic mode is switched on:
Switch on Set/Continue, and on the screen click the track line between the waypoints between which the
waypoint is to be inserted. Click the waypoint position on the (paper) chart. Behind this waypoint, further
waypoints can be inserted by clicking.
The clicking of the track line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
Text mode is switched on:
In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoint is to be inserted. Click the waypoint
position on the (paper) chart. Behind this waypoint, further waypoints can be inserted by clicking.

Generating Further Waypoints behind the Last Waypoint or before the First Waypoint
Graphic mode is switched on:
Switch on Set/Continue and click the last or first waypoint. On the (paper) chart, click the position of the
waypoint that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on.
The clicking of the waypoint can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
Text mode is switched on:
In the waypoint list, mark the last or first waypoint. On the (paper) chart, click the position of the waypoint
that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Switching Off the Digitizer, Deleting the Reference Points

If you no longer wish to use the digitizer for editing, but at the latest when you remove the paper chart
from the digitizer or when you switch the digitizer off, you have to delete the reference points. This occurs
when, in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, you press the Clear Setup button and appropriately
answer the safeguard question which then appears.

5.1.8 Editing Waypoint Data

In the Tracks > Edit menu, switch on the function Text mode. The Text Mode menu shown in Figure 5-
3 on page 152 appears.
In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed line-by-line. The data of the waypoint marked last
appear in the input area situated under the waypoint list - see Figure 5-11 on page 171. Only there can
the waypoint data be edited (input and modified). In the frame Waypoint-xxxx, the number of the
waypoint whose data are displayed in the input area and can be edited is shown.
After you have generated the waypoints of the track, you can either
- edit the values of one or more thematically interrelated parameters in separate runs for all waypoints,
or
- edit all waypoint data for each waypoint one after another in one run.
Furthermore, in a simple manner, you can simultaneously assign the same values to several waypoints.

Editing the Values of a Parameter for All Waypoints

1. In the waypoint list, mark the first waypoint that is to be processed.
2. In the input area, press the desired button
or
3. mark the input field in which a value is to be entered or modified.

170 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

4. Enter or modify the value in the input field.

☞ In these input fields, only characters which are meaningful for the parameter concerned are
accepted.
Wherever separating characters are prescribed (e.g. the colon, the decimal point and the blank
in the case of Lat and Lon), they are set automatically.
Speeds, limits and the radius can be entered as whole numbers or as decimal fractions.
As the decimal character, a point must be used. Numbers outside the permissible value range
are not accepted.
5. Press the Enter 1) key. As a result, the value that is input is taken over into the track file, and a
switch-over takes place to the data set of the next waypoint.
6. If necessary, mark in the waypoint list the next waypoint at which the parameter is to be modified or
entered.
7. By repeating processes 2 or 3, 4 and (if appropriate) 5, enter the values of the parameter for the
remaining relevant waypoints.

Number of the waypoint whose data are displayed in

the input area and can be edited there. Makes it possible to change the geographical
position by input of the direction and distance by
which the displayed position is to be changed.
For details of the waypoint data, see text.

- Takes over the values displayed Before the waypoint marked last Makes it possible to take over
in the input area into the track in the waypoint list, this inserts a waypoints from the loaded waypoint-
file, and switches over to the waypoint with the data shown in file; menu see Figure 5-10 on page
next waypoint. the input area (see page 166. 168.
- Generates the first waypoint
(see page 165).

Fig. 5-11 The input area in the Text Mode menu

Editing All Parameters One after Another in One Run for All Waypoints
1. Mark the first point in the waypoint list.
2. In the input area, press the desired button
or
3. mark the input field in which a value is to be entered or modified.
4. Enter or modify the value in the input field (for notes, see above).

1)
if the Enter button has the default frame. Otherwise, the first time, you must press the Enter button instead of the Enter key. As a result,
the Enter button gets the default frame and the Enter key then acts like the Enter button.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 171

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

5. One after another, mark the input fields in which a value is to be entered or modified, and enter or
modify the value concerned.
6. Press the Enter key. As a result, all of the values that are input are taken into the track file and
switching forward takes place to the data set of the next waypoint.
7. By repeating the processes 5 and 6, enter the waypoint data of the remaining waypoints.

Assigning the Same Values to Several Waypoints Simultaneously

1. In the waypoint list, mark all waypoints to which you wish to assign the same values in one opera-
tion.
2. In the input area, press the desired button
or
3. mark the input field in which a value is to be entered or modified.
4. Enter or modify the value in the input field (for notes, see above).
5. One after another, mark the other input fields in which a value is to be entered or modified, and enter
or modify the value concerned (for notes, see above).
6. Press the Enter key. As a result, the menu Edit Several Waypoints is opened (see Figure 5-12 on
page 172). There, the parameters which you have just entered or modified are switched on. You can
modify the selection of parameters by clicking.
7. When you press the OK button in the Edit Several Waypoints menu, for all parameters that are
switched on there the values displayed in the input area are entered in all marked waypoints.

Parameters:
(Remark about the waypoint)
(Arrival attribute and parameter attribute)
(Sailing mode)
(Track control mode)

In all marked waypoints, this enters the values that are displayed for the switched-
on parameters in the input area.

Switches on the parameters that were switched on when this menu was called up.
Closes the menu without modification of the waypoint data.

☞ This menu appears only if the same values are to be assigned to several
waypoints at the same time; see page 172.

Fig. 5-12 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Edit Several Waypoints menu

Details of the Waypoint Data

Waypoint Number
Meaning: Serial number within the track; is automatically allocated consecutively by the program, begin-
ning at 1. It clearly identifies the waypoint within the track. It appears as a reference marker in all lists, in
the chart area, and in all other displays of the system which refer to the individual waypoint.
Display in the input area: Behind Waypoint in the Waypoint-xxxx frame

172 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Remark about the Waypoint

Meaning: Helps to identify the waypoint during the subsequent processing. It can be displayed or printed
out in all lists, and can be shown in most displays of the system which refer to the individual waypoint.
Appears under Details in the Info window (together with other waypoint data). As a remark, the name (for
example) of the waypoint can be entered.
☞ For radar 9xxx series: Only the first 13 places of the remark appear in the VDA area on the radar
screen.
Editing: In the input field in the Waypoint-xxxx frame

Arrival Attribute
Meaning: Only waypoints for which the Arrival Attribute is set can be used as arrival point.
The passage plan can be generated in such a way that only waypoints having the Arrival Attribute are
contained in it.
Editing: Under Arrival in the Waypoint-xxxx frame

Parameter Point Attribute

Meaning: With the aid of a waypoint for which the Parameter Point Attribute is set, new values for the
parameters
- Profile Speed
- Planned Speed
- Course limit
- Track limit
- Rudder economy
can be set within a straight track segment.
Editing: Under Change Parameters Only in the Waypoint-xxxx frame
Special features during editing: Parameter points should not be generated until editing of the waypoint
data takes place. If a waypoint that has already been generated is to be converted retrospectively into a
parameter point, all values other than those of the named parameters are deleted after the pressing of
Change Parameters Only, and the position is changed so that it lies on a straight line between the last
waypoint and the next one.

Waypoint Position
Meaning: Geographical position of the waypoint
Editing: In the Geographic Position 1) frame.
Special features during editing: The quadrants are input with N, S, E, W; + and – are accepted too.
A position can be moved, with input of distance and direction. To do this, press Adjust; in the menu
which then opens, input the values by which the waypoint is to move; and leave the menu by pressing
the OK button.

Sailing Mode
Meaning: This specifies whether the track segment between this waypoint and the next waypoint is to be
computed, displayed and used as the basis for steering with the TRACKPILOT and displayed as a Great
Circle or as a Rhumb Line. The default setting defined by the program is the Rhumb Line.
Editing: Under Sail in the Sail Control frame.

1)
The names of the input fields depend on the projection selected under Coordinate System.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 173

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Track Control Mode

Meaning: This parameter is used for automatic parameterisation of the TRACKPILOT. It specifies
whether, in the track segment between this waypoint and the next waypoint if the ship is not situated on
the pre-planned track, the waypoint is to be approached directly (To Waypoint) or whether the pre-
planned track is to be approached first, after which the ship will begin to approach the waypoint (To
Track). The default setting defined by the program is To Track.
Editing: Under To in the Sail Control frame.

Radius
Meaning: Radius with which the manoeuvre is to be performed
Editing: Under Radius in the Sail Control frame

Waypoint Notes
Meaning:
- Here, you can input information and instructions for the nautical personnel, which are displayed in
the Waypoint Data display (radar 9xxx series: in the VDA area) of the radar indicators while the ship
is approaching this waypoint when sailing along the track. The consecutive waypoint notes (radar
9xxx series: VDA text lines 7 to 10) can be used as an automatic notebook.
- In addition, lowest line (radar 9xxx series: VDA text line 10) is printed out in the passage plan.
This text appears under Details in the Info window (together with other waypoint data).
- Waypoint Notes can be printed as a complete list of a track
Editing: In the input field Waypoint Notes
In the Waypoint Notes window you can "cut and paste" the text for the use in the same track for another
waypoint:
1. Select the line which includes the note to be copied.
2. Click with the more key into the Waypoint Notes window (opens the virtual keyboard).
3. Select a new line where the note shall be copied to.
4. Click ok in the virtual keyboard.
5. Click ENTER in the track editor.
6. select the line again for modification of the copied text.
For radar 9xxx series: The text which are edited in the top line of the input field appears in the third line
in the VDA area (under the waypoint number and the remark about the waypoint). The text which are
edited in the other line appears in the 7th to 10th line in the VDA area (below the radius).
☞ Waypoint notes cannot be displayed in the waypoint list.

Planned Speed
Meaning: This is the speed that is planned for the track segment between the last waypoint and this
waypoint. While the ship is sailing along the track, the Arrival Speed is computed on the basis of the
Planned Speed values. The Arrival Speed is the speed with which the ship will have to sail in order to
reach the destination at the planned estimated time of arrival and which is used as the speed setting by
the SPEEDPILOT in Arrival mode - see page 225. Because the Arrival Speed is displayed in the Track/
Schedule display, it can be adopted as the set value for the manual speed setting even without a SPEED-
PILOT.

174 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Because it is possible for you at any time to limit the Arrival Speed, it is recommended that, as the
Planned Speed, the maximum speeds that are permissible and possible should be entered. While the
ship is sailing along the track, you can generally limit the speed to an economical value and can increase
the limit if a delay occurs.
Editing: Under Planned Speed in the To Waypoint Use: frame

Profile Speed
Meaning: The Profile Speed is used by the SPEEDPILOT in Profile mode as the setting for the track
segment between the last waypoint and this waypoint. By input of the Profile Speed, in conjunction with
the SPEEDPILOT you thus have the possibility of sailing along the track with a predefined speed profile.
Editing: Under Profile Speed in the To Waypoint Use: frame

Course Limit
Meaning: Alarm limit of the TRACKPILOT for the difference between set course and actual course. It also
influences the correction performed by the TRACKPILOT if the ship deviates from the track and the
ECDIS monitoring, see Section 4.4.
Editing: Under Course Limit in the At Waypoint Change: frame

Track Limit
Meaning: Alarm limit of the TRACKPILOT for the deviation from the set track. The track limit also influ-
ences
- the possibility of switching the TRACKPILOT over to Track mode,
- the control precision of the TRACKPILOT in Track mode,
- filtering and monitoring of the external position-data,
- the ECDIS monitoring, see Section 4.4
- the checking of the System Track (see page 222),
- and the checking of the edited track (see page 175).
Editing: Under Track Limit in the At Waypoint Change: frame

Rudder Economy
Meaning: Optimization of the TRACKPILOT between precision of control and frequency of rudder move-
ment, depending on the sea state and on the wind. To simplify manual adjustments during use of the
TRACKPILOT, this value should only be entered for the first waypoint and at the boundary between a
protected area (harbour, river, canal) and an unprotected area.
Editing: Under Economy in the At Waypoint Change: frame

5.1.9 Checking of Tracks

A necessary prerequisite for achieving the required safety in the use of the track is that, before being
used, the track is carefully checked. This check should take place immediately after the track has been
created or changed, i.e. before storage.
In this check, the track must be subjected to a geometrical check and a check against the electronic
chart and the User Chart Objects. These checks take place one after another under program control.
☞ If, after the last change, a track was not subjected to these checks or if, in one of the checks, an
error (message: Error) was reported but not corrected, an appropriate note appears as soon as the
track is defined as the System Track.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 175

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Furthermore, the sailing times resulting from the speeds entered can be checked; this check too takes
place under program control.

5.1.9.1 Geometrical Check

This check takes place independently of the electronic chart used. However, because the geometrical
check, if successful, is followed by the check against the electronic chart, without any interruption, then
before the start of the check against the electronic chart it is necessary to create the conditions for the
execution of the check against the electronic chart and the User Chart Objects; see page 177.

Starting the Check

The check is started by pressing the Check button in the menu Tracks > Edit. In the Check Track dialog
box which then opens up, the following messages may appear as results of the geometrical check:
Error: [Waypoint No.]: Short radius.
A radius is too short, i.e. shorter than the limit value that was set for it at service level.
☞ If no radius was input at the first waypoint, the program uses 0.0 NM as the input value, i.e. it reacts
as if too short a radius had been input.
Error: [Waypoint No.]: Long radius.
A radius is too long, i.e. the distance to the next waypoint is so small and the radii are so long that the
curve planned in this way can probably not be executed at this waypoint (see also page 65).
Error: [Waypoint No.]: Max ROT exceeded.
The rate of turn is too high, i.e. the ROT resulting from the radius and from the Planned Speed is larger
than the limit value that was set for it at service level.
Note: [Waypoint No.]: Parameter point within curve.
There is a parameter point situated in the curve area.
☞ To make certain that the changes made by means of the parameter point are indeed effective in the
desired track section, parameter points should basically lie outside the curve area.
During the geometrical check, the track is evaluated statistically. The result appears after pressing of the
Extreme Values button in the Check Track dialog box. In the dialog box which then opens up, the
following extreme values are displayed, together with the waypoint at which they occur:
- Largest radius
- Smallest radius
- Largest course-change
- Largest rate of turn referenced to the Planned Speed (this information covers only the track
sections for which a Planned Speed has been defined).
- Shortest track-section, taking account of the planned radii. (Too small a value leads to the error
message Long radius.)

176 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

No. of checked track Number of errors found Extreme values of the checked track

Result of
check

Status Closes the Closes the

Message dialog box. dialog box.

Fig. 5-13 The Check Track dialog box and the Extreme Values dialog box

Correcting the Track

If a message is marked and then clicked with the MORE key, the following can be performed in the
context menu:
- For the purpose of editing, you can switch directly into Text mode by means of Edit Waypoint. In
Text mode, the waypoint to which the message refers is already marked.
- By means of Show in Chart, you can switch into Graphic mode; the waypoint to which the message
refers is situated at the centre of the chart area.
If appropriate, modify the track and start the check again.

Continuing/Ending the Check

If none of the messages mentioned appears, the check against the electronic chart and the User Chart
Objects starts automatically. If the status message Track checked. No errors found. appears, the track
has been checked successfully.

5.1.9.2 Check against the Electronic Chart and the User Chart Objects

Preparation
1. In the menu Chart > Depth Contour, set the safety contour correctly; see page 104.
2. Set the type of the electronic chart against which the check is to be performed.
3. In the Chart menu, switch on the display of the User Chart Objects.
4. Adjust the range setting so that cells of the electronic chart or raster charts which contain the nauti-
cally relevant information are displayed.
5. If a vector chart is used, check whether cells having the appropriate navigational purpose are
present for the entire track, at least over the width corresponding to the contained track limit:
- Correctly set the display of the objects that are to be displayed; see page 99.
- With the Set Center function, sail along the track.
If the Own Chart is used, it must also be ensured that it contain all nautically relevant information.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 177

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

For the track areas which are not covered by suitable cells, all nautically relevant objects must be
marked by means of own safety lines or danger highlights.
To check this, the raster chart can be used – see step 6. If there is no suitable raster chart available,
the check must be performed manually against the paper chart. For this purpose, the planned track,
including the track limits, must be entered in the paper chart and checked on that chart.
WARNING:
Vector charts which have not been approved or updated might contain
errors. Successful checking of the track on the basis of such vector
charts does not guarantee that the ship can sail safely along the track.
6. If raster charts are used, then 1) all nautically relevant objects must be marked by means of own
safety lines or danger highlights for the entire track, at least over the width corresponding to the track
limit. For this purpose, sail along the track by means of the Set Center function.
WARNING:
The checks mentioned in steps 5 and 6, and the editing of the own chart
and own safety lines and danger highlights, must be performed with
extreme care.
7. If necessary, edit any missing objects as own safety lines or danger highlights, and repeat the prep-
aration procedure.

Performing the Check

The check begins automatically after a successful geometrical check; see page 176.
In this check, the geographical shape of the track 2) is compared with the data of the vector chart and with
the User Chart Objects own safety line and danger highlight.
☞ For the execution of the check, the display settings mentioned under Preparation are not important.
What is important is the selection of the type of electronic chart and the setting of the safety contour.
☞ For the check, the cells with the highest precision are used as the basis. They might therefore differ
from the cells used for the display. Because of this, messages might occur which initially contradict
the presentation of the track in the vector chart 3).
In the Check Track dialog box, the following messages can appear as results:
Error: Leg to [waypoint No.]: [object]
Violation at: [position]
The object mentioned is shallower than the set safety contour (see page 103). The track segment
touches or covers the object before the stated waypoint at the position mentioned.
☞ The objects which lead to this error message are the same objects as those which, in the case of
ECDIS monitoring, trigger the SAFETY CONTOUR alarm or the USER CHART OBJECT alarm; see
page 108.
Error: Leg to [waypoint No.]: No charts of type [type of vector chart]
For the track segment before the waypoint mentioned (or for part of that segment), the program does not
find a cell of the vector chart having the navigational purpose being searched for. The nautical check is
therefore incomplete if, in the area, not all relevant objects exist as own safety lines or danger highlights.
Warning: Leg to [waypoint No.]: [object]
Violation at: [position]
The object mentioned is potentially dangerous. The track segment touches or covers the object before
the stated waypoint at the position mentioned.

1)
This is prescribed for ships with DNV approval.
2)
The track considered here also includes the area with the width corresponding to the track limits contained in the pre-planned track.
3)
To clarify supposed contradictions of this kind, it is helpful to switch to a different range setting and to use the Info box.

178 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

☞ The objects which lead to this message are the same objects as those which, in the case of ECDIS
monitoring, trigger the OBJECT OF INTEREST alarm; see page 108.

Correcting the Track

If a message is marked and then clicked with the MORE key, the following can be performed in the
context menu:
- For the purpose of editing, you can switch directly into Text mode by means of Edit Waypoint. In
Text mode, the waypoint to which the message refers is already marked.
- By means of Show in Chart, you can switch into Graphic mode; the waypoint to which the message
refers is situated at the centre of the chart area.
If the line with the position information is marked, the position of the violation appears at the centre of the
chart area after Show in Chart.
If appropriate, modify the track and start the check again.

5.1.9.3 Computation of Sailing Times

It is possible to compute the sailing times that occur if the track is sailed at Planned Speed or at a
constant speed, and to compute what the effect of a speed limit would be. This is done when you
generate a passage plan without printing it out - see page 227.
You can also have the sailing times computed for the case in which the track is sailed at the Profile
Speed. You obtain these values when you are preparing the printing of the passage plan and passage
list and configure TTG Profile Mode and ETA Profile Mode for the waypoint list - see page 230.

5.1.10 Completing the Generation of the Track

The new or modified track must be stored together with a statement of the necessary administrative data
so that the data that are input will not be lost as soon as the CHARTPILOT (or the CHARTPILOT
program) is switched off. The details of this process depend upon whether the track has merely been
modified, or whether it has been generated as a completely new track, or whether it is generated on the
basis of an existing track.

Ending the Generation of a Completely New Track

In the Tracks > Edit menu, the Text mode must be switched on.
1. In the No. input field in the Track frame of the Text Mode menu, enter a new track number and
press the Enter key.
When specifying the track number, pay attention to the following points:
- Each track is assigned to a catalog. Within the catalog, the track is clearly identified by means
of the track number, i.e. within a catalog the same track number can only be assigned once.
- In all listings from which tracks can be selected, the tracks are listed together with a statement
of the track number in ascending order.
- Track numbers do not have to be assigned consecutively.
- In (almost) all listings, not only the track number but also the track name is listed.
- On the radar 9xxx series, only the files of a single catalog are available for selection. On the
CHARTPILOT, it is possible to define at any time which catalog is involved (see page 322).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 179

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Before you specify the track number, you should therefore be certain which catalog you want to
assign the track to. For example, you can inspect the list of existing catalogs by looking under Cata-
logs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu. If you mark the relevant catalog there, all tracks that
already exist in the catalog are listed under Tracks, together with their numbers. (Leave the Merge
menu by pressing the MORE button!)
If you accidentally enter a track number that has already been assigned, your attention will be drawn
to this in good time.
2. In the Name input field in the Track frame, enter the track name and press the Enter key.
When specifying the track name, pay attention to the following points:
- In (almost) all listings, the track name is listed behind the track number.
- In many listings, only the first 13 characters of the track name appear.
3. You can press the Notes button and in the input field of the menu opened in this way you can make
notes about the track; later, you can at any time examine these notes at the same place. After editing
the notes, you must close the menu by pressing the OK button.
4. If, together with the track, a particular map is always to be displayed on the radars of the 9xxx series,
it is possible in the Extension Map frame to enter the number of this map in the No. input field and
to enter in the Catalog input field the catalog to which this map is assigned. If you know the map
number and the catalog, you can enter these data directly. Otherwise you can perform the entry by
pressing Browse, marking the catalog and the extension map one after the other in the menu which
then appears, and leaving the menu by pressing the OK button.
5. Storing the track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, mark the catalog in which
the track generated is to be entered. If you want to generate a new catalog, you can input under
Selected Catalog the name of the catalog that is to be generated.
In the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, press the OK button. If this menu is then closed, the track is
saved on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT (and also on the hard disk of the MULTIPILOT, if
present). If, by means of step 1, you have input a track number that already exists in the catalog,
you will be asked whether the existing track is to be overwritten. Because, in the case described
here, the track is a new one, you must answer this question by pressing the No. button and by
entering a different track number (either as described in Text mode or in the No. input field in the
Tracks > Edit > Store menu).
☞ While the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, no track can be put into storage
under the number of the System Track in the directory of the System Track.

180 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Number under which the track selected for editing is

stored; this number can be changed here.

Name of the selected track; this name can be changed here.

In this list of existing catalogs, mark the

catalog in which the track is to be stored.

Catalog in which the track is stored.

By overwriting with a new name, a new catalog is generated.

Activates the settings of this menu; the menu is exited.

Leaves the menu without activation of the new settings.

Fig. 5-14 The Tracks > Edit > Store menu

Ending the Generation of a Track which you Generate by Copying and Modifying an Existing
Track
In the main memory, by the selection process described in Section 5.1.3 (see page 155), you have
already generated a copy of the existing track. The modifications which you have made were made in
this copy. Therefore, the administrative data of the track used as the basis must not be taken over,
because otherwise the track used as the basis would be overwritten by the modified copy.
1. Switch on Text mode, alter the track number in the No. input field in the Track frame and press
the Enter key.
2. Also modify the track name and (if applicable) the notes and the data of the extension map - see
above, processes 2 to 4.
3. Store the track - see above, step 5.

Ending the Modification of a Track

In the main memory, by the selection process described in Section 5.1.3 (see page 155), you have
already generated a copy of the existing track. The modifications which you have made were made in
this copy. The track stored on the hard disk must now be overwritten by this copy: do not alter the track
number; call up the Tracks > Edit > Store menu; do not alter the catalog; and close the menu by pressing
the OK button. A question then appears about overwriting of the existing track file; answer this question
by pressing the Yes button.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 181

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

5.1.11 Printing Out Track Data in List Form

The waypoint data of all waypoints of a track can be printed out in list form.
You have a choice between
- a standard list containing the following parameters (from left to right):
. Waypoint number
. Arrival attribute and parameter attribute
. Waypoint position, stated in geographical coordinates
. Sailing mode
. Track control mode
. Radius
. Planned Speed
. Remark about the waypoint
- and a list with a different configuration which you can specify yourself; the configuration selected for
the waypoint list in the Text Mode menu is used.

Preparing the Printing of the List (if still necessary)

1. Set the printer and the printer control (see page 77).
2. Loading a track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is
assigned, under Tracks click the track that is to be loaded, and leave the menu by pressing the OK
button.
3. Selecting a track: Under Loaded Track in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, click the track that is to
be used as the basis, and leave the menu by pressing the OK button.
4. In the Tracks Edit menu, switch on the Text mode function.

Printing Out a Standard List

1. In the Text Mode menu, press the Print button. The Print menu appears:
2. Under Format, press the Standard button. By pressing the OK button, start the printing of the
standard list.

Prepares the printing of the list in standard configuration.

Prepares the printing of the list in the configuration of the waypoint list.
Prepares the printing of the Waypoint NOTES in the configuration of the waypoint list.
Printing takes place on this printer.
0 = no printer is selected.
Leaves the menu without a print-out taking place.

Starts the printing.

Fig. 5-15 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Print menu

Printing Out the List in a Different Configuration

1. In accordance with the desired list, configure the waypoint list displayed in the Text Mode menu (see
page 163).
2. In the Text Mode menu, press the Print button. The Print menu appears.

182 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

3. Under Format, press the As Configured button. By pressing the OK button, start the printing of the
list.

5.1.12 Generating Waypoint Files

For waypoints that are needed frequently (e.g. approach buoys used in several tracks), it is also possible
to generate waypoint files from which, during generation of the tracks, the waypoint positions can be
transferred if necessary.
The loading and generation of waypoint files take place via the Tracks > Waypoint File menu. The proce-
dure involves the use of methods and operating sequences that are also used for the generation of
tracks.
☞ Because you will probably not use waypoint files until you have acquired experience in the genera-
tion of tracks, the following description covers only those special features that occur during the
generation of the waypoint files.
Waypoint files consist of the following data:
- Administrative data (these data refer to the entire waypoint file)
- Number of the waypoint file
- Name of the waypoint file
- Catalog to which the waypoint file is assigned
- Last modified date, time
- Waypoint data
- Owner
- ID
- Waypoint position
- Remark about the waypoint
Waypoint files can be assigned to the same catalogs as those that also contain the tracks. The numbers
of the waypoint files can be assigned independently of the numbers of the tracks.
If several waypoint files are generated, it must be noted that, in contrast to tracks, only one waypoint
file at a time can be loaded, i.e. the content of only one waypoint file can be displayed.
The waypoints contained in a waypoint file have no relationship to one another; the sequence of the
waypoints within the file does not have any significance. However, the set of waypoints in a waypoint
file can be sorted into two levels:
- Owner is the upper level. It consists of a four-place alphanumerical code and can (for example) be
assigned to the person who generated the waypoint.
- ID is a four-figure number which can be assigned freely for each owner.
In the subdivision into owner and ID, it must be noted that, when the waypoint positions are being taken
over into a track, waypoints of any given owner and of any given ID number range can be selected by
means of a special filter function (see page 168).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 183

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions

Fig. 5-16 The Tracks > Waypoint File > Edit menu with the Text Mode menu

184 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

User Chart Objects can optionally be edited on all CHARTPILOTs and all MULTIPILOTs 1000 and 91xx
of the system. There is only one set of User Chart Objects in the system; edited data are automatically
distributed system-wide, i.e. stored on all hard disks and displayed when required.

5.2.1 General

The User Chart Objects can be added to the electronic charts. These objects are not tied to the type of
electronic chart used, and can be displayed independently of them on the CHARTPILOT, the MULTIP-
ILOT 91xx and on the indicators of the radar 1000 series.
The following objects can be input into the system's database as User Chart Objects:
- Danger highlights: Areas used to mark danger areas and individual dangers. They appear as trans-
parent red areas with a thick red border.
- Own safety lines: Lines used to mark unsafe areas. They are displayed as orange lines provided
with hatching . The hatching points towards the unsafe area.
The danger highlights and the own safety lines are used in the same way as the safety contour of
the vector charts as a basis for ECDIS monitoring (see page 108) and for the checking of the
tracks (see page 175 and 222). Consequently, these important functions can also be implemented
when raster charts are used.
- Own MARPOL lines: Lines for the marking of areas that are relevant according to MARPOL 73/
78 1). These appear as dashed orange/green lines. They are used as a basis for chart monitoring
(see page 108).
- Anchor watch areas: These areas define anchoring zones that can be monitored (see page 112).
They appear as orange-bordered areas filled with orange anchor symbols.
- Feature areas: Used to display areas of any kind (without functions for ECDIS monitoring or for the
checking of tracks). They appear as transparent ochre areas with a brown border.
- Feature lines: Used to display lines of any kind (without functions for ECDIS monitoring or for the
checking of tracks). They appear as orange lines.
Feature areas and feature lines can each be provided with a name and a remark. The names appear
on the screen if (in the Chart menu) the display of text labels is switched on. The name and remark
can be viewed at any time in the Info box.
- Text notes: Notes which are fixed at a particular geographical position and are marked there by
means of a symbol. The (orange) symbol ! is provided for the marking of danger information; the
(orange) symbol i is intended for all other notes. The notes appear at the symbol on the screen
if (in the Chart menu) the display of text labels is switched on. However, they can also be viewed at
any time in the Info box.
- Symbols: The most important symbols of the ENC can also be edited as User Chart Objects. They
differ graphically by the additional (orange) marking .

Automatic Management of the User Chart Objects Files

User Chart Objects are stored in various files (see page 313), but the files are automatically stored and
called up for display.
Each input or change of the User Chart Objects is saved by the program immediately and automatically
on the hard disk drive. Therefore, the final storing too is omitted (in contrast to tracks, maps and Own
Charts). The distribution of the new or changed data to the other items of equipment in the system takes
place as soon as the editing menu is exited.

1)
MARPOL 73/78 = The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution of Ships, 1973

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 185

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects Operating Instructions

☞ On the other hand, because the editor cannot be exited without storing, it is not possible to recover
the old data after a change.
If there are several CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs in a system, the catalog structure of the User
Chart Object files, their file structure and the contents of the files are automatically kept identical on
all of the hard disk drives that exist there. As a result of this, there is a common stock of data in the
system, regardless of which CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT was used for editing.

Data Source
Electronic chart: If an officially approved electronic chart with a suitable scale exists for the area (ARCS
chart or ENC), this chart should be used to generate the objects. In the case of non-approved electronic
charts, the nautical safety of the planning must be checked by comparing with official (paper) charts.
WARNING:
ARCS charts whose coordinate systems are not known 1) may be used as
the basis of editing only in those geographical areas in which high accu-
racy of position is not important.
Paper chart: If neither a suitable electronic chart nor a digitizer is available, the positioning of the objects
takes place with the cursor and its displayed position only.

Preparation for Editing

Editing can take place at any time, both in Planning display mode and in Monitoring display mode.
1. Check to determine whether the electronic chart used is officially approved.
2. Switch on the display of the electronic chart (in the Chart menu, by means of Chart Visible).
Select the chart excerpt in such a way that the scale allows a graphic input with adequate accuracy.
☞ You can also make this setting by marking the position on the (zoomed) world chart by means
of the Chart Maintenance subroutine, and switching back directly to the Navigation program;
see page 239.
3. If the system is equipped with a digitizer and the objects are to be inserted on the basis of a (paper)
chart, the digitizer must be set up beforehand in accordance with Section 5.1.4.
WARNING:
In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection, scale and
chart datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be
entered.

General Remarks about the Editor

Editing is performed in the menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects. The menu can be opened only if this
menu is not open on any of the other items of equipment in the system 2).
☞ By opening the menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects (= start of the editor), the display of the User
Chart Objects is switched on.
Before insertion, all characteristics of the objects that are to be inserted are to be specified in the Set
Objects frame (except for the position). Insertion is then performed by clicking on the desired position.
The geographical coordinates are displayed at all times as the cursor position.
☞ For the insertion of objects, the digitizer can additionally be used in the manner described for the
editing of tracks in Section 5.1.7.

1)
These are marked in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background.
2)
User Chart Objects can be edited on any CHARTPILOT and MULTIPILOT 1000 and 91xx of the system, but only on one equipment item
at a time.

186 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

In order to modify objects that already exist, the desired function is selected first of all in the frame
Modify Objects, and then the object to be modified is selected in the chart area by clicking on the object
that is to be changed. If, at the clicked position, there are several objects that can be modified by means
of the selected function, a context menu appears for the purpose of selecting the object that is to be modi-
fied. If Delete is selected, the context menu is always shown, in order to reduce the risk of accidental
deletion.
During the input and modifying of lines and areas, the cursor position is often joined to the adjacent line
points by means of a "rubber band" and the distance and direction of the cursor position are shown rela-
tive to the preceding line point. At any time, the "rubber band" represents the shape that would be caused
by clicking. By pressing of the MORE key, the cursor can be released from the "rubber band" and hence
from the object being edited.
Y
Example: Inserting a line point Z
X
— X — Y — Z — : Existing line

2.35NM
Distance and direction of the cursor as seen from point X; 251.3° Cursor
values are stated on the extension of the line from point X to the cursor.

Insertion of the object named

Modifying of individual User Chart Objects

Deletion of individual User Chart Objects

Fig. 5-17 The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 187

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION

Auxiliary Points Generated Automatically

At high latitudes, the following is applicable: If two set points of a line (including an area-bounding line)
are more than one degree of longitude apart, the line is automatically provided with auxiliary points (one
point per degree of longitude). The auxiliary points are not visible, but they fix the line at the geographical
position concerned.
Because edited lines are always straight, this characteristic leads to the fact that long lines near the pole
which intersect several degrees of longitude become curved lines when the projection is switched over
(Mercator/radar). Therefore, when editing is performed in the radar projection, approximate Great Circles
are created.

Generating User Chart Objects from Maps

When a map edited on the RADARPILOT 9xxx and on the MULTIPILOT 91xx is converted, the objects
contained in the map become User Chart Objects. For details, see Section 8.1.6.

5.2.2 Editing of Symbols

General Remarks about the Editor: After the cursor has been moved into the chart area, the editing
function remains switched on until the cursor exits from the chart area again.
Inserting a symbol: Press the Symbols button. If there is a symbol description in the display field under
the Symbols button, the symbol described can now be set at the desired position by clicking. Repeated
clicking sets the same symbol several times.

Position of the symbol to be inserted

Selected: After pressing Set, the Planning mode

is switched on and the inserted symbol is
displayed in the centre.

Inserts the defined symbol at the

position entered

Description of the symbol specified

for insertion
Opens the Select Symbol menu for speci-
fying the symbols to be inserted; for menu,
see Figure 5-19.

Opens the box Set Symbol by Position

Fig. 5-18 The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects after pressing the button Symbols

If a symbol other than the one actual selected is to be inserted, it must first be defined:
- Press the Select Symbol button, and in the menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select
Symbol which then opens up press the button of the desired symbol.
- With most symbols, the Object Feature box then opens up, in which additional parameters have to
be set.

188 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

Symbols can also be inserted at any position by specifying the geographic coordinates. To do this, press
the button Set Symbol by Position, enter the position and click on Set. If the option Show After Set
was selected, clicking on Set switches on the Planning mode and the chart excerpt appears in the chart
area with the inserted object in the middle.
Moving a symbol: Switch on Move, click on the symbol, and click on the new position.
Deleting a symbol: Switch on Delete, click on the symbol, and in the context menu click on the button
containing the description of the symbol that is to be deleted.

Selection of the symbol which is to be inserted

In most cases, this causes opening of the Object Feature box; see
Figure 5-20.

Fig. 5-19 The menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select Symbol

Symbol selected in the

menu ... Select Symbol

Input of additional parameters

This ends the specifying of the

symbols which are to be inserted.

Stops the specifying of the

symbols which are to be input.

Fig. 5-20 Examples of the Object Feature Box

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 189

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects Operating Instructions

5.2.3 Editing of Lines

Inserting a line: Press the Lines button, and in the frame Lines which then opens up press the button
of the desired type of lines. By clicking on the desired position, set the starting point of the line, and
then set all other points one after another by clicking. The input is completed by pressing of the
MORE key.
If Feature Line was selected, a dialog box is first shown for entry of the name and remark which,
for this feature line, are later to be displayable in the Info box.
Inserting a point: Switch on Continue, click on the line where a point is to be inserted, and then click
on the position of the new point.
Continuing the line: Switch on Continue, click on the starting point or end point of the line, and then
set new points by clicking on the positions.
Moving a point: Switch on Move, click on the point, and click on the new position.
Cutting a line: Switch on Cut, and click on the line where cutting is to take place.
☞ Because the cutting point is initially not visible, it is advisable to move one of the new starting
points or end points immediately after the cutting takes place.
Deleting a point: Switch on Delete, click on the point, and click in the context menu ... Line (Vertex
Only).
Reversing the safe/unsafe side of an own safety line: Switch on Reverse Own Safety Lines and click
on the own safety line.
☞ The hatching must always point towards the unsafe area.
Converting a feature line into a own safety line and vice versa: Switch on Convert Lines and click
on the line. 1)
Deleting a line: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the line, and click in the context menu ... Line
(Whole Object).

5.2.4 Editing of Areas

☞ Areas which cover the North Pole or South Pole cannot be edited.

5.2.4.1 Editing Danger Highlights and Feature Areas

Inserting an area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press the button
of the desired type of area. Set the vertices of the area one after another by clicking on the desired
position. The input is completed by pressing of the MORE key.
If Feature Line was selected, a dialog box is first shown for entry of the name and remark which,
for this feature line, are later to be displayable in the Info box.
☞ If the danger highlight is to be provided with a remark, which can be viewed in the Info box for
example, this can be done by setting a text note; see below.
Inserting a vertex: Switch on Continue, click on the line bounding the area where a vertex is to be
inserted, and then click on the position of the new vertex.

1)
This function is provided so that own safety lines can be obtained from feature lines which have been generated by conversion of a map;
see G e n e r a t i n g U s e r C h a r t O b j e c t s f r o m M a p s on page 188.

190 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

Moving a vertex: Switch on Move, click on the vertex, and click on the new position.
Deleting a vertex: Switch on Delete, click on the vertex, and click in the context menu ... (Vertex Only).
Deleting an area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the area, and click in the context menu ... (Whole
Object).

5.2.4.2 Editing Anchor Watch Areas

Anchor watch areas can be edited as a polygon, a circle or a zone shaped like a ring segment.

Editing a Polygonal Anchor Watch Area

Inserting the area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press Anchor
Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Polygon. Set the vertices of the area one after
another by clicking on the desired position. The input is completed by pressing of the MORE key
For all other editing functions: see Section 5.2.4.1.

Editing a Circular Anchor Watch Area

Inserting the area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press Anchor
Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Circle. By clicking in the chart area, define the
center of the circle, then pull open the circle to the desired size by using the cursor, and click again.
Deleting the area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the anchor watch area, and click in the context
menu ... (Whole Object).

Editing an Anchor Watch Area as a Zone with the Shape of a Ring Segment
Inserting the area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press Anchor
Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Zone. In the field Width, enter the (radial) width
of the zone. In the field Angle, enter the (segment) angle of the zone. By clicking in the chart area,
define the center of the circle, then pull open the circle to the desired size and in the desired direction
by using the cursor, and click again.
Deleting the area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the anchor watch area, and click in the context
menu ... (Whole Object).

5.2.5 Editing of Text Notes

General Remarks about the Editor: After the cursor has been moved into the chart area, the editing
function remains switched on until the cursor exits from the chart area again.
Inserting a text note: Press the Text Notes button. In the dialog box which then opens up, specify by
means of Category the category (and therefore the symbol appearing in the chart area), enter the
note, and press the OK button. By clicking on the desired position, set the text note. Repeated
clicking sets the same text note several times.
Moving a text note: Switch on Move, click on the text note, and click on the new position.
Deleting a text note: Switch on Delete, click on the text note, and click in the Text Note context menu.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 191

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC Operating Instructions

5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC

The content of the ENC can be changed not only by means of official updates (see page 251) but also
by the editing of a Manual Update. In this process,
- objects can be added,
- attributes of existing objects can be changed, and
- existing objects can be marked as being deleted.
☞ Because the edited Manual Updates must be distributed together with the ENC data to all CHART-
PILOTs and MULTIPILOTs of the system, and because chart maintenance measures should gener-
ally be performed at the same CHARTPILOT (or MULTIPILOT 91xx), it is advisable to also edit them
there.

Marking of Changes in the Chart

The changes are marked by the addition of the following (orange) markings:
New Modified Deleted

Point objects,
Symbols for centres of areas

Lines,
Borders of areas

☞ Point objects inserted manually are not visually different from the corresponding User Chart Objects.
If you wish to know which type is involved, briefly switch off (in the Chart menu) the display of the
User Chart Objects or obtain information with the aid of the Info box.
☞ Objects which have been changed by an official update are not marked, but they can be marked by
means of the function Highlight Official Updates so that they become visible – see page 102

Display of file name

Input/indication of display scale

Makes it possible to process a further manual ENC update.

Opens the editing menu.

Options for display of the chart during editing

Shows the detailed record of all stored entries in the Manual Update file.

Stores the entered data (after an appropriate enquiry).

Calls up a safeguard question; appropriate answering

of this causes switch-off of the editor.

Fig. 5-21 The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update

192 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC

Management of the Manual Update Data

Any change in the ENC relates to a particular cell of the ENC. For each cell, all changes are summarised
in a manual ENC update file. During this process, the files of the cells remain unchanged. When the ENC
file is then used, the contents of the associated manual ENC update files are also taken into account
automatically.
So that the changes will also take effect on the other items of equipment in the system, the new or
changed manual ENC update files must be transferred to these items of equipment – see page 277.
☞ If the system is equipped with a digitizer and if objects are to be inserted on the basis of a (paper)
chart, the digitizer must be set up beforehand in accordance with Section 5.1.4.

Preparation for Editing

1. In the Chart menu, select the chart type ENC and press Edit Manual ENC Updates.
2. Select the ENC file that is to be changed. With the aid of the Select Manual Update Chart box which
is now open, three possibilities of doing this exist:
a) Switch the Pick function on, and in the chart region click on a position that is covered by the
ENC file that is to be changed. Under Chart, all ENC files that exist at this position are listed. Mark
the file that is to be changed, and press OK.
b) In the box, input the coordinates, and then press Refresh. Under Chart, all ENC files that exist
at this position are listed. Mark the file that is to be changed, and press OK.
c) Under Selected Chart, input the file name of the chart (name of the cell), and press OK.

Selection of the ENC file by clicking on

These charts are present at the clicked/ the position in the chart region
entered position. By clicking, mark the
chart that is to be edited. Selection of the ENC file by input
of the position

Press so that the charts which exist at

the entered position will be listed
Selection of the ENC file by under Chart Selection.
input of the file name

Starts the editor with the

marked chart.

Fig. 5-22 The Select Manual Update Chart Box

3. In the ENC Update Log Data box which is thus opened, enter your name or some other identifier
behind User Identification, and behind Source enter the source from which the change data come.
After the pressing of OK, the chart appears as an overview display, i.e. in such a way that all of it
is visible.
4. Set the display scale, either by setting the range value or by inputting the scale in the input area
Scale 1:.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 193

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC Operating Instructions

5. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Chart Settings,
- by means of Category, define which display groups (objects) can be displayed during editing,
- by means of Text Labels, specify whether text information is to be displayed,
- by means of Ignore Scale Minimum, specify whether the objects selected with the aid of Cate-
gory are to be displayed independently of the display scale or whether the automatic display-
suppression function which acts in the case of smaller display scales is to activated.
☞ In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Chart Settings, the values that are set in the
menu Chart > Depth Contour are displayed for information – see page 104.
6. Move the chart so that the editing position is situated in the chart region: this can be done with the
Set Center function or in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit by entering the editing
position under Centre Position. Editing can now be started.

The Addition of Objects

1. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, under Define Objects click on the type of
object (point object, line object or area object), and in the menu thus opened click on the desired
object.
2. In the case of most point objects, an Object Features box now opens up, in which further character-
istics of the selected type can be specified. In the case of the depth contour, its depth value must
be entered.
3. Click on the position of insertion.
☞ Right from the beginning in all cases, you have to click on the final position. If you have clicked
on an incorrect position, the object will have to be deleted and the input will have to be
repeated.
In the case of a point object, the insertion process is now finished, and so the attributes of the
inserted object should now be entered – see below. By clicking on further positions, the same point
object can be inserted repeatedly.
In the case of line objects and area objects, the next vertices are defined by further clicking. The
insertion process is ended by pressing the MORE key. The next click then sets the first point of a
further object of the selected type.
☞ If several objects of the same type are to be inserted, it is advisable to set the attributes
correctly after insertion of the first object. The subsequent objects are then inserted with these
attributes.
☞ If the Undo button is pressed in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit immediately after
the addition process, the last entry is cancelled.

Changing the Attributes of the Objects

1. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, switch on the Modify Attributes function, click
on the object that is to be processed, and in the context menu which is thus opened mark the object
that is to be processed.
☞ In the context menu, all objects situated at the clicked position are listed, including those which
are invisible because the Ignore Scale Minimum function is switched off.
☞ Objects under the heading of the ENC file name with the extension MUD indicate entries of the
ENC Update file.
☞ The supplements of the point objects, such as lights, topmarks etc., are treated as objects, and
also have to be processed individually.

194 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC

2. In the Attributes box which is thus opened, the attributes can now be added or changed. In this
connection, it must be ensured that the attribute Scale Minimum is set at a suitable value. This
value is the smallest display scale at which the object is still displayed.
☞ The effect of the Scale Minimum can be seen very clearly if the display scale is changed by an
extreme amount by adjustment of the range value, once with the Ignore Scale Minimum func-
tion switched on and once with it switched off (in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update >
Chart Settings).
☞ If the Undo button is pressed immediately after the modification, the last modification is cancelled.

Specifying the object that is to be inserted.

Changing/inputting the object attributes.

Deleting objects, or providing them with a deletion marker.

The position entered here is set at the centre of the

chart region after the pressing of Apply.

Cancels the last input.

Fig. 5-23 The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit

Deleting Objects, Marking Existing Objects as Deleted

1. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, switch on the Delete Objects function, click
on the object that is to be deleted, and in the context menu which is thus opened mark the object
that is to be deleted.
2. The object marked in the context menu is now marked on the chart. If the safeguard question which
simultaneously appears is answered with Yes, the object is provided with a deletion marker. The
ECDIS monitoring function associated with the object is not cancelled by this. If the object was
inserted or modified in the current session, the object or modification is completely removed.
☞ If the Undo button is pressed immediately after deletion, the deletion is cancelled or the deletion
marker is deleted.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 195

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC Operating Instructions

Ending the Editing

Before the editing of a Manual Update is ended, you must pay attention to the following points:
- The objects inserted during this session can no longer be removed after saving of the Manual
Update 1). It is true that the objects can be marked later as being deleted, but they remain visually
present.
- The modification markers and deletion markers inserted during this session can no longer be
removed after saving of the Manual Update 1).
If a further Manual Update file is to be created or changed: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC
Update, press the Chart Selection button and, by answering the question that might appear, decide
whether the changes made should be saved. Continue as described above under P r e p a r a t i o n f o r
E d i t i n g , beginning at 2.b)
If the changes are to be saved: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update, press the Store and
End button.
If no further Manual Update file is to be created or changed: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC
Update, press the Exit button.

1)
Except for the possibility of completely deleting the manual ENC update file – see page 277.

196 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

With the Own Chart editor, (paper) charts can be digitised. During this process, cells of Own Chart are
created which are technically 1) equivalent to those of the ENC.
☞ Own Chart, in contrast to the User Chart Objects, can always only be displayed as an alternative to
some other electronic chart. Therefore, it must contain all of the information that is necessary for safe
navigation, and so the amount of editing needed is considerable. Therefore, Own Charts are prob-
ably only appropriate for areas for which no official electronic charts are available.
☞ Because the edited Own Chart cells and the Chart Maintenance subroutine have to be distributed to
all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs 1000 and 91xx of the system, it is advisable to edit them at
that particular CHARTPILOT with which the chart maintenance is performed.

5.4.1 Characteristics of Own Chart

Technically, Own Chart is equivalent to the ENC in every respect, with the sole exception that not all
objects defined for the ENC are available for Own Chart. However, the object selection is adequate for
ensuring that all of the information needed for safe navigation can be integrated into Own Chart.
☞ All objects used in Own Chart are therefore described in ECDIS Chart 1 - see page 76.

The explanations regarding the ENC which are contained in these Operating Instructions, particularly in
4.2 to 4.4 and 7.3, are thus applicable for Own Chart too, and cannot be repeated here. In addition, only
those aspects that have to be specially borne in mind during editing are pointed out here.

Skin of the Earth and Other Objects

The objects to be edited can mainly be divided up into
- Skin of the Earth: Objects which describe the earth's surface (lines and areas) and
- Overlaid Objects: Objects that are displayed on the earth's surface (points, lines and areas).
Skin of the Earth: Areas of the Skin of the Earth are, for example, land areas or areas with a particular
depth range. These areas are displayed in colour over their entire extent, and by definition they are mutu-
ally exclusive. (A water area with "depth between 10 m and 20 m" cannot simultaneously be a land area
or a water area with "depth between 5 m and 10 m".) The lines of the Skin of the Earth are the bounding
lines of these areas.
Overlaid Objects: These consist of all point-objects as well as all lines and areas that are not objects of
the Skin of the Earth. Areas of this kind, e.g. traffic separation zones, anchorage area etc., are displayed
transparently, either with outlines only, or as transparent patterns, or both. Basically, they are not mutually
exclusive. (An area designated as a "caution area" can certainly also be a "restricted area".)

Simultaneous Display of Several Cells

When Own Chart is being used, the algorithm described on page 86 under A u t o m a t i c S e l e c t i o n o f t h e
P u r p o s e s t o b e D i s p l a y e d is used.
Where cells of the same navigational purpose overlap, all objects contained in these cells are displayed
superimposed on one another. It is not defined which of the objects are on top. Exception: The areas of
the Skin of the Earth are situated below all other objects. Where Skin of the Earth areas too are contained
in several cells, only one of these areas is displayed; it is not defined which one that is.

1)
As far as approval is concerned, Own Charts do not have the status of the ENC or ARCS charts. They cannot under any circumstances
replace paper charts. No statement can be made here about approval or about restrictions in their use.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 197

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart Operating Instructions

From this it follows that, in areas where cells having the same navigational purpose overlap, all data
should definitely be edited in only one of the cells - see the illustration.

All objects of this area should be edited

only in cell X or in cell Y.
Cell X

Cell Y

If cells having different navigational purposes are displayed simultaneously, the objects of the cells with
the larger scale cover the cells with the smaller scale. This also applies to Skin of the Earth areas.
From this, it follows also that if an object is contained in a cell with a small scale, it also has to be edited
in the cell with the larger scale.
Recommendation: During the editing process, display all cells (at least occasionally for checking)
which, according to the algorithm described above, can be displayed simultaneously when Own Chart is
being used.

Range-Dependent Suppression of the Display of Individual Objects

When Own Chart is being used, particular objects automatically cease to be displayed when the display
scale becomes smaller than the value specified for such display. As a result, for example, when cells
having different navigational purposes are being displayed simultaneously, of the large-scale cell on top
only the most important objects are displayed and over-filling of this area is avoided. When the range is
reduced, the objects appear as soon as the scale becomes smaller than the specified scale. This limit
value can - and should - be defined as the Scale Minimum attribute for each individual relevant object
during the editing process.

Coordinate System of Own Chart

Own Chart is displayed in the Mercator projection during editing. The geodetic datum is WGS 84.

Management of Own Chart

Management of the edited Own Chart (transfer to other units in the system, deletion of cells) is done with
the aid of the subprogram "Chart Maintenance" - see page 277 onwards.

5.4.2 Preparation for Editing

Setting Up the Digitizer

Editing is best done on the basis of an approved, up-to-date paper chart with the aid of the digitizer after
the latter has been set up in accordance with Section 5.1.4. It is true that all inputs can also be made
without a digitizer, but because the editing of these Own Chart cells is a really laborious task anyway, it
is not advisable to do without the digitizer. As preparation, the digitizer must be set up in accordance with
Section 5.1.4 together with the paper chart that is to be used as the basis.
WARNING:
In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection, scale and
chart datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be
entered.

198 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Starting the Own Chart Editor

Press the Tree button, and then the Own Chart editor button. the Own Chart Editor menu appears.

Loading of existing cells and generation of a new cell

From the loaded cells, this selects the cell that is to be edited.

Data of the cell that is currently being edited

Editing of the cell(s)

(Intermediate) storage of the cell(s) that is (are) being edited

Selection of the display groups that are to be displayed - see page 101; this is set
to All when the Edit menu is opened
Setting of the depth contours - see page 103

Setting of the display

Switching the display of the text labels on and off

Switching on and off the range-dependent suppression of the display of individual

objects. By opening of the Edit menu, Ignore Scale Minimum is switched on, i.e.
all objects are displayed during editing.

Switches the Own Chart editor subroutine off and calls up the display of the
electronic chart again.

Fig. 5-24 The Own Chart Editor menu

Generating a New Cell

1. In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Load (New) Cell button to open the box having the same
name.
2. Behind Select (New) Cell, enter the name of the new cell. For this purpose, use the name of the
paper chart used.
3. Press the Add button. In the box which then opens up, enter the data of the cell:
... Border: The geographical borders of the cell
Scale: The scale of the paper chart used
Date of Edition: The date of issue of the paper chart used
4. After pressing of the OK button, the new, empty cell is generated and displayed. The range and the
center position are automatically set in such a way that the complete cell is displayed. The area of
the cell is shown dashed.

Loading the Existing Cell that is to be Modified

1. In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Load (New) Cell button to open the box having the same
name. There, all cells that are present in the Own Chart database are initially listed (sorted according
to navigational purpose).
2. In the list, mark the cell that is to be modified (or enter its name behind Select (New) Cell).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 199

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart Operating Instructions

If the name of the cell is not known, the list of possible cells can be reduced by
- entering the position of the cell under Geographic Position and then
- pressing the Refresh button.
As a result, only those cells are listed that are present in the region of the current editing area.
3. With the Add button, the marked or entered cell is loaded and displayed. The range and the center
position are automatically set in such a way that the complete cell is displayed. The area of the cell
is displayed dashed.

Selection of the cell by input of

position
After starting of the Own Chart editor:
Listing of all cells present in the local data- Press so that the cells present at the
base entered position will be listed.
After pressing of the Refresh button:
These cells are situated in the current
editing area (in whole or in part).
Purpose: The navigational purpose (see
Section 4.1.3)

Cells already loaded are marked as - This cell is loaded.

loaded-.
Loads the selected cell additionally
By clicking, mark the cell that is to be
edited. Removes all cells from the load
memory and loads the selected cell

Fig. 5-25 The Load (New) Cell box

Loading Further Cells

1. After the cell that is to be edited has been loaded, press the Refresh button in the Load (New) Cells
box.
2. From this list, load further cells if necessary. All loaded cells are displayed simultaneously (transpar-
ently, one on top of another).
☞ If the wrong cell has been loaded by mistake: By means of Replace, all loaded cells can be removed
from the load memory and replaced by the cell selected in the list.

Selecting the Cell that is to be Edited

In the editing area, the cell selected for editing is marked by means of a violet frame. The data of this cell
are displayed in the Selected Cell frame in the Own Chart Editor menu:
- Name, Scale and Date of Edition: For data entered during generation of this cell, see above.
- Last Modification: Date of the last modification that was made with the Own Chart editor. This date
is automatically entered in the data set if editing is ended with storage.
If the wrong cell has been selected and objects are to be inserted: In the Own Chart Editor menu, open
the Cell Selection box by pressing the Select button. In that box, all loaded cells are listed. Mark the
desired cell and press Select. If the names of the cells are not informative enough, the data of the
marked cell can be displayed by means of the Info button. Return with OK.
If the wrong cell has been selected and existing objects are to be modified, the procedure already
described can be used. In this case, however, selection is much easier during editing - see S e l e c t i n g a
D i f f e r e n t C e l l f o r E d i t i n g on page 202.

200 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Specifying the Editing Area

The display scale during editing:
- Enter the desired scale in the Scale field or
- change the range by means of the arrow button of the Range field.
Center position:
- Move the cursor in the editing field to the desired position and press the INFO key or
- press the Set Center button and then click on the desired position in the editing field, or enter the
position in the Set Position frame in the menu Own Chart Editor > Edit and press Apply or
- in the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Select button, and in the box which then opens up mark
the desired cell and, at that place, press the Set Center button. The center position is then set at
the center of the marked cell.
☞ After pressing of the Overview button, the display scale and the center position are selected such
that all loaded cells are displayed.
☞ In the Own Chart editor, the effect of the INFO key is usually not to open the Info box but to specify
a new center position.

Specifying the Display of the Cells

In the Display Settings frame of the Own Chart Editor menu, selection of the objects that are to be
displayed can be influenced as follows:
- With Category: Selection of the display groups that are to be displayed - see page 101
- With Text Labels: Switching all text labels on and off
- With Ignore Scale Minimum: When this function is switched on, no range-dependent suppression
of the display of objects takes place.
With Depth Contour, the way in which the depth contours are to be displayed is specified - see page 103
☞ So that all objects will be visible during editing, when the Edit menu is opened the Category is auto-
matically set to All and the function Ignore Scale Minimum is switched off.

5.4.3 Editing of Own Chart Cells

General Remarks about Editing

The actual editing process (insertion and modification of objects) takes place in the menu Own Chart
Editor > Edit and in its submenus. The following descriptions are based on this menu.
There are six editing functions available:
Set: Insertion of new objects (definition of the object, position, necessary attributes)
Modify Attributes: Modifying and adding to attributes
Insert/Continue: Insertion of line points (and also points in the border lines of the areas) and
extending the lines
Move: The moving of points (point objects, line points, including the points of the border lines of
areas)
Cut Lines: The cutting of lines (not of border lines of the areas)
Delete: Deletion of the objects (all kinds)
On the left under the editing area, a message about the switched-on editing function appears.
Key functions within the editor:
DO: Normal function
INFO: This sets the center position at the place that is clicked in the editing area.
MORE: This switches off the active function.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 201

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart Operating Instructions

Return to the Own Chart Editor menu

Name of the cell that is being edited

Specifying the object that is to be inserted

Modifying and adding to the object attributes

Deletion of objects or assigning the deletion mark to them

The position entered here is set at the center of the chart area after pressing of Apply.

Fig. 5-26 The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit

Selection of the Objects that are to be Modified Cell selected for editing
An object that is to be modified is selected by clicking (normal script)
on it in the editing area.
If there are several objects at the clicked position, a The objects contained
there at the clicked posi-
context menu appears, in which these objects are tion
listed. There, all objects that are present at the
clicked position in any one of the loaded cells are also Cell that is loaded but not
listed. The name of the cell is likewise listed. selected for editing (pale
script)
In the context menu, click on the object that is to be
modified. The objects contained
there at the clicked posi-
Selecting a Different Cell for Editing tion
If, in the context menu, an object is clicked which is
not present in the cell selected for editing, the result is that the cell containing the clicked object is
selected for editing. This setting continues to exist until, by a similar process or by means of the Select
button of the Own Chart Editor menu, a different cell is selected.
Identification of the Objects Present in the Editing Area
If there is no editing function switched on and there is only one object present at the clicked position, or
if an object is clicked that is not present in the cell selected for editing, the context menu containing the
type of the clicked object appears also. For this purpose, a switched-on editing function can be switched
off beforehand by means of the MORE key and then switched back on again in the Edit menu. The Set
function (the only function for which special settings have to be made) retains the settings previously
made.
Measuring/Specifying the Distance and Direction between Two Positions
Press the Set Ref Point button (on the left under the editing field), and click on the reference position.
The distance and bearing of the cursor position relative to the reference position are now displayed
beside the cursor position.

202 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Adding Overlaid Objects

1. In the Set Objects frame of the Edit menu, click on the kind of object (point object, line object or
area object), and in the menu which then opens up click on the desired object.
2. With many objects, a box now opens up in which particular attributes of the selected type have to
be specified.
With many point objects, further additions have to be defined in this box, such as topmarks or lights.
3. In the editing area, enter the position(s) of the object that is to be inserted; do this either by clicking
with the digitizer cursor, mouse cursor or trackball cursor, or by entering the geographical coordi-
nates in the Edit menu.
In the case of a point object, the insertion process is now finished, and so the other attributes of the
inserted object should now be entered - see below. By clicking on further positions, the same point
object is inserted repeatedly.
In the case of line objects and area objects, the next vertices are specified by further clicking. Inser-
tion is ended by pressing the MORE key. The next click then sets the first point of a further object
of the selected kind.
☞ If several objects of the same kind are to be inserted, it is a good idea to set the attributes
correctly after insertion of the first object. The subsequent objects are then inserted with these
attributes.
☞ Long lines are not automatically fixed by means of auxiliary points (in contrast to lines of the
User Chart Objects - see page 188, A u x i l i a r y P o i n t s G e n e r a t e d A u t o m a t i c a l l y ). When Own
Chart is being used, lines are displayed as straight lines between the manually edited positions,
regardless of the projection that is selected at that time. As a result, the following is true: If, in
the radar projection too, a line at high latitudes is to run via the same coordinates as those
displayed during editing, straight lines must be subdivided (fixed) by means of auxiliary points
that are inserted manually.
4. With all inserted objects, the attributes entered must be checked/corrected and added to - see below.

Adding Objects of the Skin of the Earth

1. In the Set frame of the Edit menu, click on the Skin of the Earth button to open the menu having
the same name.
The geometry of each area of the Skin of the Earth is defined by one of the lines contained in the
Skin of the Earth menu. The area concerned must thus be completely enclosed by these lines;
the boundaries of any of these areas usually consist of various types of line.
Except for the Closing Lines, the lines are also independent objects which are displayed when Own
Chart is being used and whose data can be called up in the Info box.
The Closing Lines are auxiliary lines which bound the areas of the Skin of the Earth at those places
where no bounding line is to be displayed. This is usually the case at the boundaries of the cell that
is being edited. Therefore, when the cell is being generated it has a closing line which coincides with
the boundaries of the cell. This Closing Line too can, if necessary, be modified like all other lines.
2. Edit the lines as described under A d d i n g O v e r l a i d O b j e c t s .
3. In the Areas frame, select the kind of area; then, one after another, click on all areas of this kind.
Repeat this for the other kinds of area.
☞ It is true that the depth areas are given identical colours, depending on the setting of the depth
contour, but nevertheless they are independent objects, as can be seen in the Info box when
Own Chart is being used.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 203

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart Operating Instructions

Return to Edit menu

These lines are independent objects, but they also represent the bound-
aries of the Skin of the Earth areas.

This auxiliary line serves to bound the Skin of the Earth areas, but
is displayed as a line in the Own Chart editor only.

This defines the meaning of the areas whose geometry is specified by the
lines which can be edited in this menu.

Fig. 5-27 The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit > Skin of the Earth

Modifying or Adding to Attributes of the Objects

1. In the Edit menu, switch on the function Modify Attributes and click on the object that is to be proc-
essed.
☞ The supplements of the point objects, such as lights, topmarks etc., are listed as objects, and
also have to be processed individually.
2. In the Attribute Editor box which then opens up, the attributes can now be added to or modified. In
this connection, it must be ensured that the attribute Scale Minimum is set appropriately. For the
meaning of Scale Minimum, see Seite 198.

Modifying the Geometry or Position of the Objects

Inserting a line point (also a point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Insert/Modify function,
and click on the line at the place where a line point is to be inserted. Then click on the position of the
new line point.
Extending a line: Switch on the Insert/Modify function and click on the line at its end; then click on the
position of the new line point.
Moving a point (point object, line point, or point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Move func-
tion and click on the point; then click on the new position of the point.
Cutting a line: Switch on the Cut function, click on the line at the place where it is to be cut, and answer
the resulting safeguard question with Yes.
☞ Because the cutting point is invisible at first, it is advisable to move or delete one of the new
starting/end points immediately after cutting.

204 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Deleting a line point (also a point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Delete function and click
on the point that is to be deleted. In the context menu, click on the entry with the supplement (Vertex
Only).
Deleting an object (point object, line, or area): Switch on the Delete function and click on the object that
is to be deleted. If necessary, click on the entry with the supplement (Whole Object) in the context menu,
and answer the resulting safeguard question with Yes.
Deleting a feature line: switch on Delete, click at any place on the feature line, and click on Feature
Line (Whole Object) in the context menu.

5.4.4 Ending the Editing Process

In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Store button. In the box which then opens up, all loaded cells
are listed. The cells that have been modified but not yet stored after starting of the editor are marked as
-modified-. Cells that have already been stored after starting of the editor and have not been modified
since then are marked as -stored-.
One after another, mark the cells that are to be stored and press the Store button. As a result, the old
content in each case is overwritten in the local database and the present date is entered under Last
Modification in the data set of the cell.
Exit the box by means of the Close button.
Ending the subprogram Own Chart Editor: In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Exit button and
answer the safeguard question appropriately.
☞ Before the new or modified cells can be used throughout the entire system, they have to be trans-
ferred to the Own Chart databases of the individual units by means of the Chart Maintenance
subprogram - see Section 7.5.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 205

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series Operating Instructions

5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series

At the radars of the series 9xxx, the only possibility of displaying sea chart information together with the
video lies in generating “maps”, over which the radar video can then be superimposed. Such maps can
be generated at any radar of the series 9xxx and used locally there; alternatively, they can be edited
much more conveniently at a CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT 91xx and are then available to all series
9xxx radars.
☞ If such self-generated sea chart information is also to be used at the CHARTPILOT, it is advisable
to edit the corresponding User Chart Objects, because - unlike the maps - these are compatible to
the electronic charts.
For the same purpose as these maps, maps can also be edited at the radars of the series 1000 that
can then be displayed locally there in Radar mode. The maps generated for the radar 1000 series
are not compatible to those produced for the radar 9xxx series, however.
The map editor described below therefore only serves to generate maps for use at the radar
9xxx series. For this reason, it is not available at systems with the radar 1000 series.

5.5.1 General Information about Maps

The Elements of the Map

A map can contain both map lines (for land contours, channel boundaries etc.) and various symbols (for
buoys, beacons etc.).
Map lines are chains of straight segments whose starting points, end points and vertices (called line-
points in the following) are defined by the geographical position. The positioning of the symbols too is
done by defining their geographical positions.
☞ It must be clearly understood that, in contrast to maps printed on paper, each of the maps being
discussed here can span the entire world, because any geographical position can be entered in any
map. Furthermore, the various areas of a map can have any desired different degrees of detail.
☞ When the data are being divided up into individual maps, it must be remembered that maps are diffi-
cult to maintain if they contain too many items of data. On the other hand, each map has to be called
up separately for display in the radar picture, and so this operating procedure is often necessary if
maps cover only a small geographical area.

The Data of Which a Map Consists

A distinction must be drawn between the administrative data, which relate to the entire map, and the
data of the map elements.
Administrative Data (for details, see page 218)
The following parameters relate to the entire map:
- Map number
- Map name
- Catalog to which the map is assigned
- Last modified date, time (the date and time of the last modification; these are generated automat-
ically)
Data of the Map Elements (for details, see pages 212 and 216)
A map line is defined by the following data:
- The sequence in which the line points are entered in the line point list
- The starting identifier, which is assigned to the first line point of a map line.

206 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series

Data for each line point:

- Line point positions
- Map line pattern
- Map line colour
- Furthermore, a remark about the line point can be entered.
Each symbol is defined by the following data:
- Symbol position
- Symbol type
- Symbol colour
- Furthermore, a remark about the symbol can be entered.

5.5.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of Maps

Insofar as is permitted by the various tasks and structures, there is no difference between maps and
tracks as far as generation, handling and administration are concerned.
- Generated maps too are stored in the form of separate files on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT
(and the MULTIPILOT 91xx, if present) and are assigned to the same catalogs as those to which
the tracks are assigned.
- The menu operating procedure for maps is performed via the Maps menu, just as the menu oper-
ating procedure for tracks is performed via the Tracks menu.
- Like the waypoint positions, so can the positions of the line points and symbols too be transferred
from the electronic chart or possibly with the digitizer from the (paper) chart, or can be edited in Text
mode together with the other items of map data.
Like the waypoint in the case of the track, in the case of the map the map lines and/or symbols can also
be taken over (copied) from maps that already exist, or - by means of a special function - all map lines
and symbols of an existing map can be appended (copied) to the map that is being generated.
☞ In this section and in the description of the map generation process, it is assumed that you have
already studied the generating of tracks. The details explained in Section 5.1 regarding the tracks,
insofar as such details also apply to maps, are not repeated here. Therefore, there is no need for
you to search through pages of text already known to you from Section 5.1 in order to find map-
related information. Thus, if an explanation which you need is missing, look it up in Section 5.1.

Loads maps into the main memory so that they can be displayed, modi-
fied or handled in some other way (see page 156).

Deletes maps from the main memory, e.g. in order to switch off
their display in the chart area (see page 65).

Opens the menu area for the generating of maps; makes it possible to
generate catalogs (see page 180; menu see Figure 5-29 on page 208).
Deletes maps irretrievably on the hard disk and
deletes superfluous catalogs (see page 311).

Fig. 5-28 The Maps menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 207

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series Operating Instructions

Generation of Maps
A map is generated by generating the map lines and/or symbols and by inputting (editing) their additional
data and the administrative data. If the file is then stored, the map generated is available at any time.
Map lines and symbols are generated in the same way as waypoints, by inputting the positions (of the
line points and symbols). The methods and procedures are similar; exception: in the Maps > Edit menu,
by pressing Symbols or Lines under Objects, it is additionally necessary to specify whether symbols or
map lines are to be edited. Thus, in the case of the map, the symbols and map lines are processed in
separate operations. As in the case of the tracks, with the maps too the administrative data and the other
data of the map lines and symbols must be edited in Text mode. The Text mode menus too that are used
are very similar to the Text mode menu used in the track generation process.
Regardless of whether you wish to generate a completely new map or to generate a map by copying an
existing one, or whether you wish to modify a map, the preparations are the same as for track generation
(see page 155), and so too is the method of completion (see page 179).
Here too, the following applies to the coordinate systems used:
WARNING:
In Text mode, you must ensure that, for editing, the same chart datum is
set as the one to which the source of the position data refers.
In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection and chart
datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be entered.

Number and name of the map that is being edited

Selection of the map on which the new map is to be based,

or of the map that is to be modified

Press if a completely new map is to be generated.

Takes over all map lines or symbols of an existing track, and copies them behind the last
waypoint; see pages 211 and 211.
Storing the selected map; see page 218.

Specifying whether map lines or symbols are to be edited:

- The Text Mode menu is switched over accordingly.
- The operating elements for graphic editing act only on the selected type of element.
- The Merge button acts only on the selected type of element.
- With the digitizer, only the selected type of element can be edited.

Operating elements for graphic editing by means of the electronic chart;

see page 209

Switches over between Text mode and Graphic mode, and thus switches on
and off the menu for alphanumerical editing.

Fig. 5-29 The Maps > Edit menu

208 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series

Administrative data of the Coordinate system on which the input of The Maps > Edit menu; see
map, see page 218 the line point positions is based; see page below
208

Input area:
Here, the data of the line point marked in the line point list are displayed and edited - see page 214.
When the editing of the symbols is switched on, the data of the symbol marked in the symbol list appear here.

Line point list:

- Shows an overview of all edited map lines and line points, together with a selection (defined by you) of waypoint data.
- Makes it possible to generate map lines and line points alphanumerically (see page 214).
When the editing of symbols is switched on, the symbol list appears here (see page 217).

Fig. 5-30 The CHARTPILOT Display for the editing of maps in Text Mode

5.5.3 Generating Map Lines and Symbols by Means of the Electronic Chart

In the Maps > Edit menu, the Text mode function must not be switched on, press the Text Mode button.
The generation, insertion, shifting and deletion of map lines and symbols are performed (as in the case
of the waypoints, see page 161) with the functions listed under Graphic Mode.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 209

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series Operating Instructions

5.5.3.1 Map Lines

To generate the map lines, the Lines button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the
pressed state.

Generating a Map Line

A map line is generated by generating line points at the starting point, at each bend, and at the end of
the line. If the pattern or colour is to change within the map line, a line point must be generated at the
position of the change.
1. Before the first line point is generated, the pattern and colour of the map line should be set. In this
way, you avoid the retrospective work that would otherwise be needed later (in Text mode) for these
characteristics.
Whenever a line point is being generated, the pattern and colour of the line point processed last are
taken over. Therefore, there are three different cases:
- The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of the map line that was processed
last:
The task of generating the line points can be started without any further activities.
- The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of a map line displayed on the screen:
Switch on Modify, and click on the map line with the desired pattern/colour combination.
Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.
- The map line is to be given a new pattern/colour combination:
Switch to Text mode, select the desired pattern and colour under Line (for details, see page
215), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.
2. Generating the line points:
Switch on Set and click the position of the first line point, then click the position of the next line point,
and so on. Each click in the chart area generates a further line point at the end of the map line, and
thus enters the existing cursor position as the line point position. The resulting map line is displayed
in the chart area. After clicking of the last line point, move the cursor out of the chart area or press
the MORE key. If you use the MORE key, Set remains switched on, and with the next click of a posi-
tion you generate the first line point of the next map line.

Extending an Existing Map Line

Switch on Continue and click the first or last line point. Click the position of the next line point that is to
be added, then click the next line point position, and so on.

Inserting One or More Consecutive Line Points

Switch on Continue and click the map line between the line points between which the line point is to be
inserted. Click the position of the line point that is to be inserted. Behind this line point, further line points
can be inserted by clicking.
You can cancel the clicking of the map line by pressing the MORE key.

Shifting a Line Point

Switch on Modify, click the line point that is to be shifted, and then click the desired position.
The clicking of the line point can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.

210 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series

Deletion of Line Points

Switch on Delete; one after the other, click the line points that are to be deleted.

Cutting a Map Line

Switch on Delete and click the map line between the line points.

Taking Over All Map Lines from an Existing Map

The maps whose map lines are to be copied must be loaded. Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit >
Merge menu, mark the catalog to which this map is assigned, and under Maps mark the desired map.
Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all map lines (including all line point data)
of the map marked in the Merge menu are copied into the map selected for editing.

5.5.3.2 Symbols

To generate the symbols, the Symbols button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the
pressed state.

Generation of Symbols
1. Symbols can be generated in any desired sequence. Because, whenever a symbol is generated, the
type and colour of the last symbol processed are taken over, by proceeding according to type and
colour you avoid the retrospective work (in Text mode) that would otherwise be needed later for
these characteristics. Therefore, there are three different cases:
- The symbol is to be given the type and colour of the symbol that was processed last:
The symbol can be generated without any further preparation.
- The symbol is to be given the type and colour of a symbol displayed on the screen:
Switch on Modify, and click on the symbol with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch
on Set and generate the symbol(s).
- The symbol is to be given a new pattern/colour combination:
Switch to Text mode, select the desired type and colour under Symbol (for details, see pages
216 and 215), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and generate the symbol(s).
2. Generating the symbols:
Switch on Set and click the position of the symbol, then click the position of a further symbol, and
so on. Each click in the chart area generates a symbol of the same type and colour and enters the
existing cursor position as the symbol position. These symbols are displayed in the chart area.

Shifting a Symbol
Switch on Modify, click the symbol that is to be shifted, and then click the desired position.
The clicking of the symbol can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.

Deletion of Symbols
Switch on Delete and, one after another, click the symbols that are to be deleted.

Taking Over All Symbols from an Existing Map

The map whose symbols are to be copied must be loaded. Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit > Merge
menu, mark the catalog to which this map is assigned, and under Maps mark the desired map. Leave
the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all symbols (including all symbol data) of the
map marked in the Merge menu are copied into the map selected for editing.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 211

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION

If a Displayed Map Line or Symbol Cannot be Modified

Although it is possible to display several maps simultaneously in the chart area, only the map selected
for editing can be modified. If you cannot modify a displayed element, it probably does not belong to the
selected map. It is advisable to switch off the display of all maps that are not needed (this should be done
in the Maps > Clear menu).

5.5.4 Generating Map Lines and Symbols with the Digitizer

With the digitizer, you can generate map lines and symbols regardless of whether the Graphic mode or
the Text mode is switched on in the Maps > Edit menu. Shifting and deletion of line points and symbols
is not possible by means of the digitizer.
Whether you generate map lines/line points or symbols with the digitizer depends on whether the
Symbols or Lines button is pressed under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu.
The generation of map lines and symbols with the digitizer is done in the same way as described for
waypoints in Section 5.1.7 (see page 169). The remarks made there about the generation of the coordi-
nate system and of the digitizer cursor are applicable here too.
Before you generate the first line point or symbol with the digitizer, you should ensure that the chart is
correctly calibrated. To do this, position the digitizer pointer on a coordinate cross (if possible, not one
that was used as a reference point) and compare these coordinates with the presentation on the Digitizer
Cursor display.
If the positions are not in agreement with one another, check the set coordinate systems (the coordinate
system of the (paper) chart is marked in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer > Coordinate System menu)
and, if necessary, repeat the setting-up of the chart on the digitizer.

5.5.4.1 Map Lines

To generate the map lines, the Lines button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the
pressed state.

Generating a Map Line

A map line is generated by generating line points at the beginning, at every bend and at the end of the
line. If the pattern or colour is to change within the map line, a line point must be generated at the position
of the change.
1. Before the first line point is generated, the pattern and colour of the map line should be set. In this
way, you avoid the retrospective work that would otherwise be needed later (in Text mode) for these
characteristics.
Whenever a line point is being generated, the pattern and colour of the line point processed last are
taken over. Therefore, there are three different cases:
- The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of the map line that was processed
last:
The task of generating the line points can be started without any further activities.
- The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of a map line displayed on the screen:
Switch on Modify and click on the map line with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch
on S e t and start to generate the line points.

212 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series

- The map line is to be given a new pattern/colour combination:

Switch to Text mode, select the desired pattern and colour under Line (for details, see page
215), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.
2. Generating the line points:
Click the line point position on the (paper) chart, then click the next line point position, and so on.
Each click generates a line point at the end of the map line and enters the existing cursor position
as the line point position. The resulting map line is displayed in the chart area if Graphic mode is
switched on. After clicking the last line point, press key 3 of the digitizer pointer. With the next click
of a position, you generate the first line point of the next map line.

Inserting One or More Consecutive Line Points

Graphic mode is switched on:
Switch on Continue and, on the screen, click the map line between the line points between which the
line point is to be inserted. Click the line point position on the (paper) chart. Behind this line point, further
line points can be inserted by clicking.
The clicking of the map line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
Text mode is switched on:
In the line point list, mark the line point in front of which the line point is to be inserted. Click the line point
position on the (paper) chart. Behind this line point, further line points can be inserted by clicking.

Extending a Map Line

Graphic mode is switched on:
Switch on Continue and click the last or first line point of the map line. On the (paper) chart, click the
position of the line point that is to be generated, then click the next line point position, and so on.
The clicking of the line point can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
Text mode is switched on:
In the waypoint list, mark the last or first waypoint. On the paper chart, click the position of the line point
that is to be generated, then click the next line point position, and so on.

5.5.4.2 Symbols

To generate the symbols, the Symbols button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the
pressed state.

Generation of Symbols
1. Symbols can be generated in any sequence. Because, whenever a symbol is being generated, the
type and colour of the symbol processed last are taken over, by proceeding according to type and
colour you avoid the retrospective work (in Text mode) that would otherwise be needed later for
these characteristics. Therefore, there are three different cases:
- The symbol is to be given the type and colour of the symbol that was processed last:
The symbol can be generated without any further preparation.
- The symbol is to be given the type and colour of a symbol displayed on the screen:
Switch on Modify, and click on the symbol with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch
on Set and generate the symbol(s).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 213

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series Operating Instructions

- The symbol is to be given a new pattern/colour combination:

Switch to Text mode, select the desired type and colour under Symbol (for details, see pages
216 and 215), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and generate the symbol(s).
2. Generating the symbols:
Click the position of the symbol, then click the position of a further symbol, and so on. Each click in
the chart area generates a symbol of the same type and colour and enters the existing cursor posi-
tion as the symbol position. These symbols are displayed in the chart area if Graphic mode is
switched on.

5.5.5 Generating Map Lines Alphanumerically in Text Mode

Select Lines under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu, and switch on the Text Mode. The Text Mode
menu shown on page 168 appears. As you can see, it is very similar to the Text Mode menu for gener-
ating a track (see page 152). In fact, a map line is generated by generating the line points, just as a track
is generated by generating the waypoints (see page 163). Here too, as a preparatory step, the coordinate
system to which the line point positions to be input refer must be set, and if necessary the line point list
must be configured. The editing of the line point data too is done in the same way as described for
waypoint data in Section 5.1.8 (beginning page 170).

Line point data whose parameters were selected in

the Maps > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu for
display in the line point list

Causes printing of the line point

list; see page 219.

Calls up the Maps > Edit > Text

Mode > Columns menu, in
which it is possible to specify the
parameters whose data are to
be displayed in the line point list
and (if necessary) printed out.

Stores the marked line points as In front of the line point marked last, this
line points that are to be copied. Deletes the marked inserts the line points that were either deleted
line points. last or marked last with Copy.

Fig. 5-31 The line point list in the Text Mode menu

Differences exist in the following points only:

1. In the task of configuring the line point list, the following line point parameters can be set (the
designations used in the Maps > Edit > Lines > Columns menu are quoted on the left, and those
used in the headline of the line point list are quoted in the middle column).

214 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series

Color Color The colour of the section of the map line between this line point
and the line point which is entered above it in the line point list
Date Date Date on which one of the items of line point data was modified last
Pattern Pattern Pattern (of dots and dashes in the map line section between this
line point and the line point entered above it in the line point list)
Position 1) Latitude Waypoint position
Longitude
Remark Remark Remark about the line point
2. In contrast to the track, a map can contain several lines. You obtain several map lines by splitting
up one map line:
Splitting up a map line: In the line point list, mark the line point above which splitting is to take
place, and under Line press the New Line button. As a result, the marked line point becomes the
start of the map line that is formed by the line points entered under it. This start of a map line is
marked by means of an asterisk on the left in the line point list.
3. In contrast to the track, a map line has no direction; in contrast to waypoints, the line points and map
lines have no serial numbers. Consequently, for the map lines there is no function equivalent to the
reversal of the track direction.
4. For the map lines, there is no equivalent to the waypoint files.

- Sets the start of a map line. For details of pattern and color, see text.
- Splits up a map line.

- Takes over the values displayed in In front of the line point marked Permits the modification of the geographical
the input area into the map file and last in the line point list, this position by input of the direction and distance by
switches over to the next line point. inserts a line point with the data which the displayed position is to be modified.
- Generates the first line point. shown in the input area.

Fig. 5-32 The input area of the line point data in the Text Mode menu

5. Line points have two parameters for which waypoints do not have an equivalent:
Pattern
Meaning: This specifies the pattern of dots and dashes which is to be used for displaying the map
line between this line point and the line point that is entered above it in the line point list. By selection
of the Pattern 01, the display of a map line section can be suppressed.
Editing: In the Line frame
Color
Meaning: This specifies the colour in which the map line is displayed on the colour screens between
this line point and the line point entered above it in the line point list.

1)
See footnote on page 164

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 215

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series Operating Instructions

The following colours are available:

- Default (colour which is programmed for the display of map lines for the Radar mode)
- Black/white (black if Brightness is set to Bright Day;
white in all other brightness settings)
- Magenta
- Blue
- Green

5.5.6 Generating Symbols Alphanumerically in Text Mode

Select Symbols under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu, and switch on Text Mode. A Text Mode menu
appears, differing from the one shown on page 209 in that it contains the symbol list shown in Figure 5-
33 and the symbol data input area shown in Figure 5-34. Symbols are generated in exactly the same way
as the waypoints of a track or the line points of a map line. Here too, as a preparatory measure, it is
necessary to set the coordinate system to which the symbol positions to be input refer, and (if necessary)
to configure the symbol list. The editing of the symbol data too is done in the same way as described for
waypoint data in Section 5.1.8 (beginning page 170).
Differences relative to the editing of the navigation lines exist in the following points only:
1. In the configuring of the symbol list, the following parameters can be set (the designations used
in the Maps > Edit > Symbols > Columns menu are quoted on the left, and those used in the head-
line of the symbol list are quoted in the middle column).
Color Color The colour of the symbol
Date Date Date on which one of the items of symbol data was modified last
Position 1) Latitude Waypoint position
Longitude
Remark Remark Remark about the symbol
Type Type Symbol type (form and meaning of the symbol)
2. Symbols are individual elements. They do not form lines. Therefore, the sequence of the symbols
within the file is of no significance, and the editing possibilities which relate to lines are not applicable
here.
3. Symbols have only one parameter for which the line points have no equivalent:
Type
Meaning: This specifies the form of the symbol.
Editing: In the Symbol frame

Light vessel Spar light buoy (SB)

Radio reporting point Spar light buoy (P)
Pilot station Hazard buoy (N)
Anchorage Hazard buoy (E)
Fishing area Hazard buoy (S)
Cylindrical buoy Hazard buoy (W)
Conical buoy Light
Cylindrical light buoy Radio station

1)
See footnote on page 164

216 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series

Symbol data whose parameters were selected in

the Maps > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu
for display in the symbol list

Causes printing of the symbol

list; see page 219.

Calls up the Maps > Edit > Text

Mode > Columns menu, in
which it is possible to specify the
parameters whose data are to
be displayed in the symbol list
and (if necessary) printed out.

Stores the marked symbols as In front of the symbol marked last, this
Deletes the marked inserts the symbols that were either
symbols that are to be copied. symbols. deleted last or marked last with Copy.

Fig. 5-33 The symbol list in the Text Mode menu

For details of Type, see text; for Color, see page 215.

- Takes over the values displayed in In front of the symbol marked last Makes it possible to modify the geograph-
the input area into the map file, and in the symbol list, this inserts a ical position by inputting the direction and
switches over to the next symbol. symbol with the data displayed in distance by which the displayed position is
- Generates the first symbol. the input area. to be modified.

Fig. 5-34 The input area of the symbol data in the Text Mode menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 217

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series Operating Instructions

5.5.7 Completing the Generation of the Map

The new or modified map must be stored, together with a statement of the necessary administrative data,
so that the data that have been input will not be lost as soon as the CHARTPILOT is switched off. The
details of this process depend on whether the map has only been modified, whether it has been gener-
ated as a completely new map, or whether it is generated on the basis of an existing map.

Ending the Generation of a Completely New Map

In the Maps > Edit menu, the Text mode must be in the switched-on state.
1. In the No. input field in the Map frame, enter a new map number.
When specifying the map number, note the following:
- Map numbers are independent of track numbers, i.e. a map and a track both having the same
number can be assigned to one and the same catalog.
- All circumstances that also have to be taken into account in the specifying of the track number
(see page 179).
2. In the Name input field in the Map frame, enter the map name.
When specifying the map name, note the following:
- In (almost) all lists, the map name is quoted behind the map number.
- In many lists, only the first 13 characters of the map name appear.
3. Store the map: Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit > Store menu, mark the catalog in which the
map generated is to be entered. If you want to generate a new catalog, you can input under
Selected Catalog the name of the catalog that is to be generated (see also page 180).
In the Maps > Edit > Store menu, press the OK button. When this menu is then closed, the map is
saved on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT. If, in step 1, you have input a map number that already
existed in the catalog, you are asked whether the existing map is to be overwritten. Because, in the
case described here, the map is a completely new one, you must answer this question by pressing
the No button, and you must enter a different map number (either as described in Text mode or in
the No. input field in the Maps > Edit > Store menu).

Ending the Generation of a Map which you Generate by Copying and Modifying an Existing Map
In the main memory, when preparing the editing, you have already generated a copy of the existing map
by selection. The modifications which you have made were made by you in this copy. Therefore, the
administrative data of the map that is used as the basis must not be taken over, because otherwise the
map used as the basis would be overwritten by the modified copy.
1. Switch on Text mode, and in the No. input field in the Map frame change the map number.
2. Also change the map name - see above, step 2.
3. Store the track - see above.

Ending the Modification of a Map

In the main memory, when preparing the editing, you have already generated a copy of the existing map
by selection. The modifications which you have made were made by you in this copy. The map stored
on the hard disk must now be overwritten by this copy: do not change the map number; call up the Maps
> Edit > Store menu; do not alter the catalog; and close the menu by pressing the OK button. A question
then appears about overwriting the existing map file; you must answer this question by pressing the Yes
button.

218 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series

5.5.8 Printing Out Map Data in List Form

Like the waypoint data of all waypoints of a track, it is also possible to print out, in list form, the line point
data of all map lines of a map and the data of all symbols contained in a map. The procedure is the same
for all three types of list, and is described on page 182.
Whether you print out the data of the map lines or the data of the symbols depends upon whether
Symbols or Lines is selected under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu.
The standard list which can be selected with Standard in the menu Maps > Edit > Print contains the
following
- for map lines:
. Marking of the beginning of the line by means of an asterisk,
. Line point position stated in geographical coordinates,
. Colour,
. Pattern,
. Remark about the line point,
- for symbols:
. Position stated in geographical coordinates,
. Colour,
. Pattern,
. Remark about the symbol.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 219

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.5 Generation of Maps for Radar 9xxx Series Operating Instructions

220 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 6 Voyage Execution
Operating Instructions 6.1 Voyage Preparation

6 Voyage Execution

If, during the voyage, the CHARTPILOT is currently not being used for planning, it is used in Chart mode
for navigation and collision avoidance. The operating procedure for this is described in Section 4.
This section describes which preparations have to be made at the beginning of the voyage for the utili-
sation of the tracks generated as per Section 5.1, and which operating procedures can be performed on
the CHARTPILOT during the voyage with regard to the track being used.
Furthermore, under V o y a g e P r e p a r a t i o n , the time schedule planning aspect of track generation, of
voyage preparation and of voyage execution is summarised.

6.1 Voyage Preparation

This section describes the preparations that have to be made when pre-planned tracks are to be used
during the voyage. This work can be done on any CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT 1000 or 91xx.
If a pre-planned track is only to be used to steer the ship, it is sufficient to define this track as the System
Track in accordance with Section 6.1.1.
If the possibilities provided by the system to control the speed of the ship are to be utilised too, set values
for the times and speed to be achieved must have been specified to the system. An overview of the
procedures required for this is given in Section 6.1.2.

6.1.1 Defining the System Track

If the ship is to sail along a pre-planned track, this track must be defined beforehand as the System
Track. This can also occur on any radar indicator.
The System Track is an important basis for the ECDIS monitoring (see page 106). A System Track must
also be defined so that the passage plan can be activated to achieve the planned sailing time (see page
232).
When a pre-planned track is defined as the System Track, it acquires the following special characteristics:
- The TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT cannot be remotely controlled by any pre-planned track other
than the System Track.
- When the passage plan is being activated, the System Track is always used as the basis. Therefore,
the set speed information and sailing time information computed by the system during the voyage
always refer to the System Track.
- In the data displays of the CHARTPILOTs, the MULTIPILOT 91xx and the radar 1000 series, only
data of the System Track are displayed.
- If the system configuration is suitable, the System Track is also available on the connected GPS
receiver 1).
The System Track is indicated by the fact that it is displayed in red (and nor in orange like all other
tracks). At the monochrome screens of the radar 9xxx indicators, the number of the System Track is
displayed inverted.

1)
This function can be activated on service level and for specific position sensors only.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 221

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
6 Voyage Execution CHARTPILOT
6.1 Voyage Preparation Operating Instructions

As long as
- the TRACKPILOT is using data of the System Track (i.e. when steering with Pilot Data and in Track
mode) or
- the SPEEDPILOT is using data of the System Track (i.e. in Profile mode and in Arrival mode),
no other pre-planned track can be defined as the System Track.

Defining the System Track on the CHARTPILOT

1. The pre-planned track must be loaded: In the Tracks > Load menu, under Catalogs click the catalog
to which the track is assigned, under Tracks click the track that is to be loaded, and exit the menu
by pressing the OK button.
2. Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Set System Track menu, mark the track that is to be defined
as the System Track, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, the System Track
is defined.
☞ Frequently, own ship's position is then joined to the System Track by means of a approach track (for
details of this, see below under A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m T r a c k ).
If own ship's position is beside the System Track, you must check whether the program has selected the
current waypoint that you want (displayed under To WP in the Track/Schedule or Track/Control display,
for example) or whether you will have to define a different current waypoint.

Defining a Different Current Waypoint

Under Waypoints in the Tracks > Select Next Waypoint menu, mark the desired waypoint and exit from
the menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, this waypoint is set as the current waypoint.
☞ The defining of a different current waypoint leads automatically to other changes, which are defined
below under A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m T r a c k .

Checking the System Track

You have the possibility of checking the System Track against the vector chart and against the User
Chart Objects. The program uses the same routine as for the track check which is performed at the end
of the track generation process (see page 175). The check can also be performed during the voyage. The
region from the present track segment to the last waypoint is checked in this case.
The check is started by clicking with the INFO key into the field To WP, on the Track/Schedule display
or on the Conning Data display.
☞ For the currently applicable track section, this check is also performed automatically by the program
while the ship is sailing along the track section – see page 111.

Deselecting the Existing System Track on the CHARTPILOT

If neither the TRACKPILOT nor the SPEEDPILOT is using data of the System Track, the System Track
can be deselected on the CHARTPILOT by pressing the Cancel System Track button in the Tracks
menu

222 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 6 Voyage Execution
Operating Instructions 6.1 Voyage Preparation

USEFUL INFORMATION

Approach Track to the Defined System Track

The approach track, which - possibly after defining of the System Track or of a different current waypoint
- joins own ship's symbol to the current waypoint of the System Track, appears because the track control
mode of the TRACKPILOT was switched to To Waypoint. 1)
The switch-over of the TRACKPILOT to To Waypoint (and thus the insertion of the approach track)
always occurs
- when, during the defining of the System Track, the beginning of this track lies ahead (and therefore
waypoint No. 1 was used as the current waypoint) or
- when a different current waypoint was defined in the manner described above.
If, during the defining of the System Track, the ship is already situated beside the System Track, a
waypoint situated ahead (to one side) is automatically used as the current waypoint. In this case, the
TRACKPILOT is switched to To Waypoint
- if the use of the Pilot Data is switched on and, in the System Track, the track control mode is set to
To Waypoint for the track segment that is now the current track segment, or
- if the use of the Pilot Data is not switched on and the track control mode of the TRACKPILOT (in
the Pilot > TRACKPILOT menu) is To Waypoint.

Mark the track that is to become the System Track.

Defines the marked track as the System Track (if neither the TRACKPILOT nor the
SPEEDPILOT is already using data of a track); the menu is exited.

Exits the menu without definition of the System Track.

Fig. 6-1 The Tracks > Set System Track menu

1)
If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, the approach track appears in the following cases:
- When the System Track is being defined, the beginning of this track is situated ahead (and therefore waypoint No. 1 was used as the
current waypoint).
- A different current waypoint was defined as described above.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 223

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
6 Voyage Execution CHARTPILOT
6.1 Voyage Preparation Operating Instructions

When the System Track is being defined, the ship does not necessarily have to be near this track. On
the contrary, the ship can be situated at any distance from the track. In the case of the voyage from
Rotterdam to New York, at the exit from the English Channel for example the track for the approach to
New York could be loaded and the first waypoint of this track could be approached in Track mode if there
are no other nautical conditions opposing this. Whether the approach track which then appears follows a
great circle or is a rhumb line depends on the setting of the sailing mode in the TRACKPILOT 1) (for
display, see the Pilot > TRACKPILOT menu).
☞ The approach track to the defined System Track can be used as the track in every respect. Thus,
for example, it can not only be sailed along automatically with the TRACKPILOT: in the activated
passage plan too (see page 225), this route is taken into account for the time planning.

Number and name of the System Track

Mark the waypoint which is to be directly approached.

Pressing the OK button

- sets the marked waypoint as the present waypoint,
- switches the track control mode to To Waypoint.

Exits the menu without a waypoint having been selected.

Fig. 6-2 The Tracks > Select Next Waypoint menu

Messages about Missing, Unsuccessful or Incorrect Checking of the Track

If a track was not checked after the last change or if an error (message: Error) was reported in the check
but has not been corrected, an appropriate message appears when the System Track is being defined.
To ensure the required safety when the ship is sailing along the track, the track must be checked
successfully as per Section 5.1.9 before it is defined as the System Track.
☞ On ships with DNV approval, an appropriate message also occurs if the check of the track was
indeed successful but was performed against a different type of electronic chart from the one used
when defining the System Track.

1)
If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, the sailing mode parameter of waypoint No. 1 is the key parameter for this.

224 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 6 Voyage Execution
Operating Instructions 6.1 Voyage Preparation

6.1.2 Planning and Achieving the Voyage Timing

To plan the timing of the voyage and to fulfil this plan, several processes occurring at different times are
necessary. They depend upon whether the planning is to take place on the basis of the Planned Speed
values or on the basis of a constant speed.

Voyage Planning on the Basis of the Planned Speed Values

1. During Track Generation
For the individual track segments, the Planned Speed must be defined (see page 174).
Furthermore, the waypoints which are to appear in the passage plan or are to be selectable as the
arrival point must be labelled by entering the Arrival Attribute (see step 2).
If the individual track segments are to be sailed at particular speeds with the aid of the SPEEDPILOT
(in Profile mode), the Profile Speed values must be input (see page 175).
2. Before the Start of the Voyage (for details, see Section 6.1.3)
If the planned time of departure and/or the planned time of arrival are known, a passage plan can
be printed out. For this purposes, the following items are input:
- the starting point, i.e. the waypoint at the beginning of the track section that is to be covered by
the time schedule planning (this is usually the first waypoint of the pre-planned track),
- the destination point, i.e. the waypoint at the end of the track section that is to be covered by
the time schedule planning (e.g. port of destination, pilot take-over point etc.; this destination
point is called the arrival point in the following),
- the planned time of departure or the planned time of arrival or - in the case of ferry services for
example - both the planned time of departure and the planned time of arrival,
- the maximum speed at which the ship is to sail (speed limit).
For all waypoints (which are provided with an Arrival Attribute), the passage plan contains, among
other things, the Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) resulting from the Planned Speed values and
from the values that were input in the process of generating the passage plan.
If the time of departure and the time of arrival have been input and if these times are further apart
than the time difference resulting from the Planned Speed values, taking account of the speed limit
that has been input, then for the computation of the ETA values the highest Planned Speed values
are reduced sufficiently to ensure that the time of arrival that was input will in fact be achieved.
The speed at which the ship must sail in order to achieve the computed (and displayed) ETA values
is called the Arrival Speed within the system. The Arrival Speed values too are listed in the passage
plan.
3. Shortly Before or After Departure
To ensure that, during the voyage, the relevant displays and the computation of the Arrival Speed
will refer to the planned time of arrival at the arrival point, the passage plan must be activated. For
this purpose, the arrival point and the planned time of arrival must be input anew after the pre-
planned track has been defined as the System Track.
The ETA values of the waypoints situated ahead of the ship and the Arrival Speed values of the track
segments situated ahead of the ship are then computed anew. The computation is based on the
distance still to be sailed before the arrival point is reached, and on the existing time.
The Arrival Speed is determined as follows:
- If, with the Planned Speed values that were entered, the arrival point would be reached earlier
than planned, the Planned Speed values are reduced for the computation in the manner
described in step 2.
- If, with the Planned Speed values that were entered, the arrival point would be reached later
than planned, the delay is indicated behind Delay in the Track/Schedule display.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 225

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
6 Voyage Execution CHARTPILOT
6.1 Voyage Preparation Operating Instructions

The active voyage planning data can be modified at any time. It is also possible at any time to
generate a new passage plan containing the updated data for the rest of the voyage.
4. During the Voyage
While the ship is sailing along the System Track, the computation described in step 3 is continuously
repeated by the program. The Arrival Speed which is computed during that process for the present
track segment (and for the next one) and the ETA computed during that process for the present
waypoint and for the arrival point are displayed in the Track/Schedule display.
From this, it follows that
- if no delay is displayed, the arrival point will be reached at the planned instant of time, as long
as the ship sails at the Arrival Speed displayed in each case,
- if a delay is displayed, it can be reduced or prevented by increasing the speed limit that was
input.
If the system is equipped with a SPEEDPILOT, the currently applicable Arrival Speed can be
achieved by activating the SPEEDPILOT and operating it in Arrival mode.

CHARTPILOT 01.11.95 DMY 10:27:04 HMS [ZT] Page 1

P A S S A G E P L A N

Text entered under Notes 1300 STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI

in the Text Mode menu
during track generation Charts: 1125, 2314, 1316, 1317

ArSp ETA ATA Remark Waypoint Notes Weather/Remarks

3.1 10:26 __:__ AVGÅNG VÄRTAN ANM.VHF 9

The first waypoint 8.0 10:47 __:__ FJÄDERHOLM.VHF ANM.VHF 9
listed is the starting 12.0 10:51 __:__ KUNGSHAMN .
12.0 11:11 __:__ GRANHOLMEN .
point. 10.0 11:24 __:__ BERGHOLMEN .
8.0 11:34 __:__ LAGNÖGR.VHF ANM.VHF 9
10.0 11:51 __:__ OFB .
12.0 12:14 __:__ Ö.ÄLGÖGRUND ANM.VHF 9
12.0 12:27 __:__ BLÖTHOLMEN .
12.0 12:48 __:__ RYSSMASTERNA GRHOLMEN VHF 9
12.0 13:04 __:__ STABOUDDE .
12.0 13:36 __:__ GRYTEN ANM.VHF 9
12.0 13:51 __:__ EKNÖ .
8.0 14:03 __:__ FURUSUND SKATEN .
17.0 14:19 __:__ MARÖ VHF ANM.VHF 9
19.0 14:35 __:__ LERSKÄR D =0.02
Data of the waypoints 22.0 14:51 __:__ TJÄRVEN ANM.VHF 9
22.0 14:58 __:__ SÖDERARM 2 RODERP./ECON.6
that have an Arrival 23.0 15:47 __:__ ARMBÅGEN B= D= L=
Attribute 23.0 16:16 __:__ BOGSKÄR B= D= L=
23.0 16:53 __:__ SUOMEN LEIJONA B= D= /NMT SF
23.0 17:35 __:__ LILLHARUN B= D= L=
23.0 18:12 __:__ HAMNSKÄRS KUMMEL B= D= L=
23.0 19:11 __:__ BENGTSKÄR B= D= L=
23.0 20:34 __:__ JUSSARÖ B= D= L=
23.0 21:35 __:__ KALLBÅDAN B= D= L=
23.0 22:31 __:__ H:FORS KASUN ANM.TILL GRHARA
The last waypoint 23.0 22:44 __:__ FLATHÄLLSGRUNDET SE CHECK LISTA 1
listed is the arrival 16.0 22:50 __:__ GRÅHARA ANM.VHF 16
12.0 23:01 __:__ G-SVÄRD SE CHECK LISTA 2
point. 1.5 23:30 __:__ ANK.HELSINGFORS

Fig. 6-3 Example of a Passage Plan

226 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 6 Voyage Execution
Operating Instructions 6.1 Voyage Preparation

Voyage Planning on the Basis of a Constant Speed

If the greater part of the pre-planned track is to be sailed at constant speed and therefore no Profile
Speed values have been entered for the track, it might be sufficient to perform the voyage planning
activity only for that part of the track that is to be sailed at constant speed. In that case, during the
passage plan generation process in step 2, you should input not the speed limit but the set speed (see
page 227), and when the passage plan is being activated (step 3) you should additionally input this set
speed (see page 232).

6.1.3 Generating the Passage Plan

If the time of departure or the desired time of arrival or (e.g. in the case of schedule shipping line serv-
ices) the time of departure and the time of arrival are known, the passage plan can be generated. The
passage plan (see Figure 6-3 on page 226) contains among other things the ETA values for all waypoints
that are provided with an Arrival Attribute, and can be used as a dead reckoning table.

Generating the Passage Plan

1. Adjust the printer and the printer controller (see page 77).
2. In the Tracks > Load menu, load the track that is to be used as the basis, mark that track in the
Tracks > Time Schedule > Loaded Track menu, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button. The
Time Schedule menu appears (see Figure 6-5 on page 229); its structure is similar to that of the
text editing menus. 1)
3. If the parameters which you need for your work are not displayed in the waypoint list of the Time
Schedule menu, you must first configure the waypoint list (see below).
4. Switch off the Show All function.
5. Specifying the time zone to which all time information in the passage plan is to refer: in the frame
Time Zone,
- select Actual if the time zone that is currently set (entered in the menu Sensor Settings > Date/
Time - see page 145) is to be used
- select UTC or
- select Manual and enter the time zone that is wanted for the passage plan.
6. Selecting the Starting Point (the waypoint at which the time calculation is to begin):
In the waypoint list, mark the starting point and press Set Departure.
7. Selecting the arrival point:
In the waypoint list, mark the arrival point and press Set Arrival.
8. Setting the speed limit (if the voyage planning is to take place on the basis of the Planned Speed
values):
Press the Planned button in the Speed Base frame; under Limit, enter the maximum speed at
which the ship is to sail; and press the Apply button in the Speed Base frame.
or
9. Inputting the Set Speed (if the planning is to take place on the basis of a constant speed):
Press the Set button in the Speed Base frame; under Value, enter the speed at which the ship is
to sail; and press the Apply button in the Speed Base frame.

1)
If, in the passage plan, the position data are to refer to a coordinate system different from the one that was set for the display in the chart
area, you can set the desired coordinate system under Coordinate System in the Time Schedule menu.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 227

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
6 Voyage Execution CHARTPILOT
6.1 Voyage Preparation Operating Instructions

10. Now, you can

- input only the planned time of departure. The earliest possible times of arrival are then
computed on the basis of this point in time.
- input only the planned time of arrival. The latest possible times of departure are then computed
on the basis of this point in time.
- input both the time of departure and the time of arrival. If these times are further apart than the
time difference resulting from the Planned Speed values, taking account of the set speed-limit,
or resulting from the set speed that was input, then for the computation of the ETA values the
highest speed values are reduced sufficiently to ensure that the time of arrival that was input
will in fact be achieved. If these times are closer together than the time difference resulting from
the Planned Speed values, taking account of the set speed-limit or resulting from the set speed
that was input, the possible times of arrival are computed on the basis of the time of departure
that was input.
Inputting the Planned Time of Departure
Under ETD in the input area in the Departure frame, input the planned time of departure (estimated
time of departure), and press the Apply button in the Departure frame. The time-dependent data
are then computed anew in the waypoint list.
Inputting the Planned Time of Arrival
Under ETA in the input area in the Arrival frame, input the planned time of arrival (estimated time
of arrival), and press the Apply button in the Arrival frame. The time-dependent data are then
computed anew in the waypoint list.
☞ All time information must be based on one and the same time zone, preferably the one that will
be set for the system during the planned voyage.
11. If the desired timing is displayed in the waypoint list, the passage plan can be printed: press the
Print button; in the menu which then appears, click Passage Plan; and press the OK button. The
passage plan is then printed.
☞ If, in the Print menu, To Diskette is selected instead of To Printer, the passage plan is not
printed out but is stored as a .CSV file on a DOS-formatted diskette inserted into the diskette
drive beforehand. This file can be read by the Microsoft programs Word or Excel, and then proc-
essed further, for instance in order to add specific information or to generate a user specific print
format on an external Windows-PC.

Prepares the printing of the passage plan.

Prepares the printing of the passage list in standard configuration- see. page 231.
Prepares the printing of the passage list in the configuration of the waypoint list of
the Time Schedule menu. - see page 231.
Selects whether the passage plan or the passage list is output to the printer (To Printer) or
written to a diskette as a file (To Diskette).
Printing takes place on this printer.
0 = no printer is selected.
Leaves the menu without a print-out taking place.
Starts the printing.

Fig. 6-4 The Tracks > Time Schedule > Print menu

228 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 6 Voyage Execution
Operating Instructions 6.1 Voyage Preparation

Calls up the Tracks > Edit > Selecting the time zone to Here, a different coordi-
Text Mode > Columns menu which all time information in nate system can be set
(Figure 5-9 on page 165) in the passage plan refers: for the listed position
which it is possible to specify UTC data than the one that is
the parameters whose data Actual: The time zone that is set for the chart area. 1)
are to be displayed in the currently set (entered in the
Initiates printing of the waypoint list and are to be menu Sensor Settings > Date/
passage plan or of the time printed out in the list of time Time - see page 145)
schedule planning data in schedule planning data. Manual: The time zone that is
list form - see page 231. entered manually here

Management data of the track;

under Notes, you can inspect the
notes that were input during
generation of the track.

Switched on: In the waypoint list, all

waypoints are listed.
Switched off: Only the waypoints
having an Arrival Attribute are listed.

Waypoint list:
Waypoint data whose parameters
were selected in the Tracks > Time
Schedule > Columns menu for
display in the waypoint list.
The Arrival Speed and the ETA
values are calculated from the
values that were input in the
Departure, Arrival and Speed
Base frames.

Defines the marked waypoint

as the starting point (not
possible if the track is defined
as the System Track).

Defines the marked waypoint

as the arrival point.

Activates the passage plan with

the values displayed in this menu
(possible only if the track is
defined as the System Track).
Planned pressed:
The Arrival Speed and the ETA values are
Data of the starting point; if necessary, computed from the Planned Speed values,
change ETD and press Apply (not Data of the arrival point; if taking account of the limit that is entered
possible if the track is defined as the necessary, change ETA and under Limit.
System Track). press Apply. Set pressed:
The Arrival Speed and the ETA values are
computed for the speed that is entered
under Value. The Planned Speed values
1) If the parameterisation of the coordinate system for are not used.
special tasks was set at service level, the Geographic After any change of these data, press
button serves only to display the (permanently) set Apply.
projection (see page 97).

Fig. 6-5 The Time Schedule menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 229

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
6 Voyage Execution CHARTPILOT
6.1 Voyage Preparation Operating Instructions

Configuring the Waypoint List

The configuring of the waypoint list shown here is done in the same way as the configuring of the
waypoint list during generation of the tracks (see page 163). During this process, the following parame-
ters can be set (the designations used in the Tracks > Time Schedule > Columns menu are listed on the
left, and the designations used in the headline of the waypoint list are listed beside them).
1. All parameters which can be configured for the waypoint list during generation of the track:
Control Mode CM Track control mode
Course Limit CrsL Course limit
Date Date Date on which an item of the waypoint data was last altered
Distance Dist Distance from the last waypoint (from waypoint to waypoint)
Economy Ec Rudder economy
Owner ID Owner ID Administration Owner and Administration ID
Planned Speed PlSp Planned Speed
Position 1) Latitude Waypoint position
Longitude
Profile Speed PrSp Profile Speed
Radius Rad Radius
Remark Remark Remark about the waypoint
Sail Mode SM Sailing mode
Track Track Direction of the track segment from the last waypoint
Track Distance TrDst Sum of the distances between the waypoints, cumulatively
from the first waypoint onwards
Track Limit TrkL Track limit
Type Type Arrival Attribute and Parameter Point Attribute
2. Special Planning Parameters:
Arrival Speed ArSp Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track,
taking account of the radii)
DistanceR Dist R Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track,
taking account of the radii)
Distance To Go R DTG R Total distance to go to the arrival point (along the track, taking
account of the radii)
ETA ETA Estimated time of arrival (probable time of arrival if the ship
sails at the Arrival Speed)
ETA Profile ETA P ETA for Profile mode (probable time of arrival if the ship sails
at the Profile Speed)
Track Distance R TrDstR Total distance from the starting point (along the track, taking
account of the radii)
TTG TTG Time to go (sailing time to the arrival point if the ship sails at
the Arrival Speed)
TTG Profile TTG P TTG for Profile mode (sailing time to the arrival point if the
ship sails at the Profile Speed)
☞ If you select ETA Profile and TTG Profile, the waypoint list will show you the times which will result
if the ship sails along the track with the Profile Speed values.

1)
See footnotes on page 164

230 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 6 Voyage Execution
Operating Instructions 6.1 Voyage Preparation

6.1.4 Printing Out Time Schedule Planning Data in List Form

The planned timing of the voyage can be printed out in list form. The passage plan is one of the possi-
bilities for doing this; the process of generating it is described on page 227. Another standard configura-
tion is the passage list. Alternatively, however, you can configure the list yourself, and while doing so you
can select the parameters to be listed.

Passage List
In the passage list, the following parameters are listed for all waypoints of the pre-planned track (see
Figure 6-6:
- Waypoint number
- Arrival attribute and Parameter attribute
- Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track, taking account of the radii)
- Planned Speed
- Arrival Speed
- Profile Speed
- Time to go
- Estimated time of arrival
- Remark about the waypoint.
The passage list is generated and printed out in exactly the same way as the passage plan, the only
difference being that, after pressing of the Print button, Passage List has to be clicked instead of
Passage Plan - see page 228, step 11.

Configured List
If you proceed in accordance with Section 6.1.3 as if you wanted to generate a passage plan, but after
pressing of the Print button you then click As Configured instead of Passage Plan, a list is printed out
with the configuration that is set for the waypoint list in the Time Schedule menu.
☞ With the Show All button, you can specify whether the data of all waypoints are to be printed out,
or only the data of those waypoints that have an Arrival Attribute.

CHARTPILOT 01.11.95 DMY 10:27:25 HMS [ZT] Page 1

P A S S A G E L I S T

1300 STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI

Charts: 1125, 2314, 1316, 1317

Text entered under Notes
in the Text Mode menu No. DistR PlSp ArSp PrSp TTG ETA Remark
during track generation
0001 A 0.00 3.1 3.1 3.1 01.11.95 10:26 AVGÅNG VÄRTAN
0002 0.39 3.4 3.4 3.4 6:54 01.11.95 10:32 YTTER OM VÄRTAN
0003 0.76 8.0 8.0 8.0 5:41 01.11.95 10:38 LOUDDEN
0004 0.69 8.0 8.0 8.0 5:08 01.11.95 10:43 FJÄDERHOLMARNA
0005 A 0.53 8.0 8.0 8.0 3:57 01.11.95 10:47 FJÄDERHOLM.VHF
The data of all waypoints 0006 P 0.28 10.0 10.0 10.0 1:39 01.11.95 10:49 HÖGUDDEN
are listed. 0007 A 0.45 12.0 12.0 12.0 2:14 01.11.95 10:51 KUNGSHAMN
0008 1.31 12.0 12.0 12.0 6:33 01.11.95 10:58 HASSELUDDEN

Fig. 6-6 Beginning of a Passage List

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 231

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
6 Voyage Execution CHARTPILOT
6.1 Voyage Preparation Operating Instructions

6.1.5 Activating the Passage Plan

So that, during the voyage, the Arrival Speed and the displays for fulfilment of the passage plan will refer
to the planning values that are input during generation of the passage plan, the passage plan must be
activated with these values as soon as the System Track has been defined.
1. In the Tracks > Time Schedule menu, press the System Track button. In the Time Schedule menu
which then appears, the data of the System Track are displayed.
2. Set the speed limit (if the pre-planned track is to be sailed on the basis of the Planned Speed
values):
In the Speed Base frame, press the Planned button; under Limit, enter the maximum speed at
which the ship is to sail; and in the Speed Base frame, press the Apply button.
or
3. Input the set speed (if the pre-planned track is to be sailed at a constant speed):
In the Speed Base frame, press the Set button; under Value, enter the speed at which the ship is
to sail; and in the Speed Base frame, press the Apply button.
4. Select the arrival point:
In the waypoint list, mark the arrival point, and press Set Arrival.
5. Input the planned time of arrival:
Under ETA in the input area in the Arrival frame, input the planned time of arrival, and press the
Apply button in the Arrival frame. This time of arrival must refer to the time zone that is set for the
system (e.g. on the radar) when the time of arrival is input.
6. Press Activate Schedule, and answer the question which then appears by pressing the Yes button.
Only then do the inputs that were made become effective.
☞ If the values that are input here are not in agreement with the passage plan generated previously,
the generation of the passage plan can be repeated with input of the new values. The differences
relative to the procedure described in Section 6.1.3 are that the starting point and the departure time
can no longer be defined and that the passage plan is printed only for the waypoints lying ahead.
☞ If, during activation of the passage plan, the ship is not situated on the System Track (see page 223),
this is taken into account in the activated passage plan.

232 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 6 Voyage Execution
Operating Instructions 6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage

6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage

This section describes the possibilities available to you for changing the System Track and the activated
voyage planning during the voyage, and how the track can change during the voyage as a result of other
influences.
☞ All of the changes described here are temporary. The stored data of the track that is defined as the
System Track remain unaffected by this.

Changing the Activated Voyage Planning

If lateness develops during the voyage and is displayed, the voyage planning for the rest of the voyage
can be modified by raising the speed limit that was input during activation of the schedule. The planned
time of arrival too or the arrival point can be altered during the voyage. The input of the new values is
done using the procedure described in Section 6.1.5.

Changing the Track by Changing the Sailing Mode

If the ship is being steered with the TRACKPILOT in Track mode, the sailing mode (see page 173) can
be changed manually on a radar indicator, i.e. the current track segment (and possibly the following track
segments up to the next waypoint for which the sailing mode is defined in the stored track data) changes
from a rhumb line to a great circle segment or vice versa. 1))
Depending on the spacing and position of the waypoints, a lateral offset occurs between the waypoints,
which, if the range setting is small, can also cause the track to disappear from the screen.

A Waypoint Lying Further Ahead is Approached Directly

When the ship is sailing along the System Track, it can be specified that, instead of the current waypoint,
a different waypoint is to be approached directly. This specification process can also be performed on the
CHARTPILOT:
1. Under Waypoints in the Tracks > Select Next Waypoint menu, mark the waypoint that is to be
approached.
2. Press the OK button. As a result,
- the marked waypoint is set as the current waypoint,
- the track control mode is switched to To Waypoint,
- the distance between the ship and the waypoint that is now the current waypoint is computed
anew as a direct connection and is displayed additionally in the chart area,
- in the System Track, the current track segment is replaced by this newly computed track
segment 2).

1)
If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, a change in the sailing mode is possible only by editing the track. For this
purpose, the track must be deselected so that it is no longer the System Track.
2)
All displays of the System Track (e.g. those in the data displays) now refer to the newly computed System Track.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 233

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
6 Voyage Execution CHARTPILOT
6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage Operating Instructions

234 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.1 General

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

If the use of electronic charts is to increase the level of safety in navigation, the charts that are displayed
must be reliable. A prerequisite for this is that the charts are installed correctly and are constantly kept
up-to-date. This goal can only be achieved if the operator has adequately understood what effect his data
maintenance activities actually have on the system.
Unfortunately, the fact that, for technical reasons, different procedures are necessary for the various chart
types 1) which can be used at the CHARTPILOT, that the same objects or concepts are given different
names by the providers 2), that the same terms sometimes have different meanings 3) and also that the
on-board systems differ in the number of CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs and with regard to the chart
types used 4) does not lead to particularly clear situation.
If you are not yet familiar with the subject matter, we recommend the following:
- First read Section 4.1 and 4.2 for general information on the chart types used (or to be installed) in
your system.
- Then read through Section 7.1 and 7.2 and, if possible, reproduce the operating sequences
described there at a CHARTPILOT for a better understanding.
- Only then should you perform the work described in Section 7.3 to 7.8 for the chart types used or to
be installed in your system.

7.1 General

For each chart type to be used, every CHARTPILOT and every MULTIPILOT has a database on its hard
disk drive. 5) This contains all the files needed for displaying and updating the corresponding chart type.
These sets of data must be continually updated, i.e. new files must be transferred to them, and old files
must be deleted or overwritten there.
At CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, only the chart data existing in the own database can be
displayed. 6) Most chart maintenance activities can be performed at any CHARTPILOT for all CHARTPI-
LOTs and all MULTIPILOTs 7), but please note:
IMPORTANT:
It is urgently recommended that all chart maintenance work for all
CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs should, if possible, always be
performed o n th e s am e CH AR T P I L OT .

1)
Examples: Various licensing schemes; different information on the data media provided
2)
Example: The “permit” for ARCS charts is known as the “licence” for other chart types.
3)
Example: For various chart types, the “plan” is the designation for the navigational purpose corresponding to the largest chart scale, but for
ARCS charts this is also the term for detailed charts it contains. Such a plan can also have the navigational purpose Harbour or Approach.
4)
It is not practicable to produce separate Operating Instructions for the various combinations which may result. This section refers to the
maximum version of the system, i.e. having several CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs and using all the possible chart types. If there is
only one CHARTPILOT or no MULTIPILOT installed, the corresponding selection possibilities and transfer requirements mentioned in the
following are not applicable. The same applies for the chart types.
5)
The same chart types are normally used on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs. On the service level, however, it is possible to define
that certain chart types are not used on particular CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, i.e. that no databases for these types are created
there. The reason for distinctions can also lie in the different possibilities of the units which can be combined with each other: Within a
NACOS xx-2 system, for example, only the chart type CM-93/2 can be used at a MULTIPILOT 9x22, but other chart types can also be
utilized at a CHARTPILOT.
6) The data of the charts displayed at the CHARTRADARs of the system originate from the databases of a CHARTPILOT (defined for this
purpose on the service level).
7) MULTIPILOTs 1000 and 9x22 do not have any chart maintenance functions at all, whereas MULTIPILOTs 91xx not fitted with a CD drive
have only limited chart maintenance functions. The chart maintenance work for these MULTIPILOTs must be performed at a CHART-
PILOT.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 235

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.1 General Operating Instructions

IMPORTANT:
The initial installation can take several hours. Even an update may
require a considerable length of time. Therefore, perform this task in
good time before the start of the voyage.

IMPORTANT:
The chart maintenance work must be carried out so that the databases
of all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs always have the same status.
This is ensured if the notes given here are observed and the sequences
described are followed.

☞ An easily determined indication of unequal stati of the databases is when the numbers of cells /
charts they contain are different; see Figure 7-2.

7.1.1 Starting, Background Operation and Ending the Chart Maintenance Subroutine

Data maintenance of the electronic charts is performed by means of the Chart Maintenance subroutine.
An exception to this rule is the data maintenance of the User Chart Objects, which is performed together
with the track files and waypoint files - see Section 8.1.
☞ When starting the Chart Maintenance subroutine, all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs at which a
chart maintenance action is to be performed must already have been switched on.
Starting: Press the Tree button, and then press the Chart Maintenance button. As a result, the world
chart appears (see Figure 7.1.2) together with the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance and the selection
menu. In the following, this setting is assumed as the starting point.
Background operation: To use the CHARTPILOT for other purposes while prolonged maintenance
sequences are running automatically, there are the following possibilities:
- Switching over without changing the previous settings: Press the Tree button, and then in the top
line press the CHART or CONNING button.
- Switching over to the standard display using the button Std Disp (see page 56).
- Switching over to Planning display mode at a marked position (see page 239).
☞ As soon as the chart maintenance program running in the background needs an operator action, a
message is shown. Then return to the current chart maintenance operation by using the buttons
Tree and Chart Maintenance.
Ending: The Chart Maintenance subroutine should be terminated if it is not performing any operations:
In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the Exit button.

236 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.1 General

7.1.2 The World Chart

Menu Utilities >

Chart Mainte-
nance - see Figure
7-3 on page 240

World chart with

display of the existing
charts or cells

For certain back-

ground operations
that take some time,
an appropriate
message is shown
here.

Selection menu - see

Figure 7-2 on page
238

Geographical posi-
tion of the cursor on
the world chart

Fig. 7-1 The Chart Maintenance display with the world chart

The world chart offers a graphic overview of the existing files of the various types of electronic chart, for
all CHARTPILOTs, MULTIPILOTs and for the data media inserted in the CD drive 1) and diskette drive of
the CHARTPILOT being operated. If necessary, it is also possible to select here the electronic chart files
that are to be dealt with in connection with data maintenance - see page 245.
Furthermore, the tracks existing in the system can be added to the display of the world chart.

Displaying the Position of the Existing Cells / Charts / Plans 2)

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, select under Source the equipment item or data medium
whose data are to be displayed.
☞ If the content of a CD-ROM or of a diskette is to be displayed and if this data medium was
exchanged after the start of the Chart Maintenance subroutine, a new table of contents must be
generated by pressing the Make Table of Contents button; see also page 250.

1)
If the CHARTPILOT is equipped to maintenance the chart type CM-93/3Pro, a DVD drive is installed. (DVD drives can also read CD-ROMs
and generally do not differ from CD drives in external appearance.) The term CD drive commonly used in these Operating Instructions
then also stands for DVD drive.
CM-93/3Pro DVDs that are suitable for use at the CHARTPILOT are marked as Only readable in SAM Electronics systems. If other DVDs
are used for CM-93/3Pro, unpredictable errors may occur.
2)
Cells of the vector charts (ENC, CM-93/3Pro, CM-93/2, Own Chart), charts and plans of the raster charts (ARCS).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 237

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.1 General Operating Instructions

2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, select under Type the type of electronic chart whose
data are to be displayed.
3. By means of the Navigational Purpose button under Displayed Cells or Displayed Charts in the
Selection menu, select the navigational purpose of the cells / charts / plans that are to be displayed.
The existing cells / charts / plans which fulfil the selection are marked by means of white hatching.
The white lines around these areas represent the boundaries of the individual cells / charts / plans.

Displaying an Excerpt from the World Chart in Enlarged Form

1. In the Selection Mode frame, select the Rectangle function.
2. Move the cursor to a corner of the area that is to be enlarged, press the DO key, and keep it
pressed; with the trackball, draw a rectangle round the area that is to be enlarged, and release the
DO key. If the rectangle is to be modified, move the cursor to the line or corner that is to be modified;
when the cursor symbol changes, press the DO key and correct the rectangle. Next, under Display,
press the Zoom button.
3. For greater enlargement, repeat point 2.
4. If necessary, press Previous to return to the display that had been generated previously.
5. If necessary, press World to return to the display of the world chart.

In the case of long-duration data Navigational purpose of the Switches on/off the display of
maintenance activities, the current displayed cells 1) towns and points of approach.
program-status is displayed here.
For zooming, switch
on Rectangle.

Specifying the
chart excerpt.

Scale range of the navigational Number of cells 1) 2) of the

Graphic selection of cells*) Total number of cells 1) 2) purpose being displayed (in the case navigational purpose
of ARCS, CM-93/2 and CM-93/3Pro) being displayed
1) or ARCS charts and ARCS plans.
2) When all databases of a chart type have the same status, the number must be the same:
Check this by marking all Sources one after the other in the Chart Maintenance menu; see Figure 7-3.

Fig. 7-2 The selection menu in the Chart Maintenance display

Displaying the Position of the Existing Tracks

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Display Tracks, select under Catalogs the catalog in
which the tracks to be displayed are listed, and under Tracks select one or more tracks.
2. Press the OK button. The selected tracks are then displayed (in orange) in the world chart.
Alternatively, all tracks can be displayed by pressing the Display All Tracks button.
☞ If there are a large number of tracks, the necessary loading of all tracks might take several minutes.
The display of the tracks is switched off by pressing the Clear Track Display button in the menu Util-
ities > Chart Maintenance > Display Tracks and by exiting the menu by pressing the OK button.

238 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.1 General

Display of Town Names and Points of Approach

By pressing the Locations button, you can switch on and off the display of the town names and points
of approach on the world chart.

7.1.3 Switching Over to Planning Display Mode at a Marked Position

1. Enlarge the excerpt of the world chart so that the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed
can be defined precisely enough.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set as the Type the electronic chart that is to be used.
3. In the Selection menu, define the range scale of the chart display by setting the navigational
purpose.
4. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the Set Planning Mode button, and for the ques-
tion which then appears give the answer OK.
5. In the world chart, click on the position that is to be the centre of the chart excerpt which is to be
displayed. As a result,
- a switch-over to Planning display mode occurs,
- a switch-over to the display of the electronic chart occurs, and
- in the case of vector charts, there is a switch-over to a range corresponding to the navigational
purpose that is set under Displayed Cells or,
in the case of raster charts, a chart having the scale that is displayed under Displayed Charts
is selected,
- the clicked position is used as the centre of the chart area.
☞ The Chart Maintenance subroutine continues to run. If a return to that subroutine is to take place,
the buttons Tree and Chart Maintenance must be pressed one after another. The display that had
been set before pressing of the Set Planning Mode button then appears.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 239

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types Operating Instructions

7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

7.2.1 The Menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance

The most important operating steps here are:

- Selection of the chart type: After pressing the Type button.
- Selection of the data source, the data of which are to be displayed, transferred or deleted:
Mark as required in the Source list. Explanation of the possibilities:
- CHARTPILOT/MULTIPILOT: The source is the database of the equipment item mentioned. If
several equipment items of the same type are present, the number displayed in the header of
the equipment item’s data display is stated - see page 68.
- (this one): If there are several CHARTPILOTs installed, (this one) indicates the CHARTPILOT
on which this menu appears (= local database).
- CD-ROM: The source is the CD 1) that is inserted in the CD 1) drive
- DISKETTE: The source is the diskette that is inserted in the diskette drive of the CHARTPILOT
- Selection of the chart maintenance activity:
- With the buttons Update and Transfer: Transfers/updates of the chart or cell files.
- With the button Delete: Deletion of files in the databases.
- With the button ... Licensing or ... Subscription: Procure/transfer/change of the subscription,
permits or licences.
- With the button Other Functions: Other functions, e.g. delete databases completely.
For further operating possibilities in this menu: see figure.

Checking of the available hard disk capacity (see page 250)

Marking the equipment item / data medium (source) whose cells/charts/plans are to be
displayed, transferred or deleted.

Selecting the type of electronic chart to be displayed.

This generates a table of contents of the inserted data medium; it is only

necessary after an exchange of CD or diskette (see page 250).

Transferring and updating of chart data. The button that must be used for a partic-
ular transfer or update is described in Section 7.3 to 7.8.
Deleting of chart data.

After the clicking of a position, this switches over into the main program (into Planning
display mode), and thus switches on the display of the electronic chart. This does not
cause switch-off of the Chart Maintenance subroutine (see page 239).
Displays tracks in the world chart (see page 238).
Purchase/transfer/change the subscription, permits or licences.
Other functions, e.g. delete databases completely.

Switches the Chart Maintenance subroutine off and calls up the display of the
electronic chart again (see page 236).

Fig. 7-3 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance

1)
Or DVD, see footnotes on page 237 and on page 289.

240 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

7.2.2 Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences

The electronic charts are not included within the scope of delivery of the CHARTPILOT 1). To be able to
use them, licensed cells / charts must be procured or a subscription taken out in many cases.
Licensed cells / charts are encrypted by the manufacturer or provider. The provider supplies a key that
is needed to be able to use such a cell / chart; amongst other data, it contains the identification code of
the system for which the cells / charts were procured. It is therefore necessary to inform the provider
about this system identification code 2) in addition to the required geographical regions. You can deter-
mine the system identification code at the CHARTPILOT, specify the required geographical areas, and
then contact the provider 3) yourself.
Depending on the chart type, you will then receive
- one key for all regions (with CM-93/2, where this is called the Authorization Code),
- a file with keys for individual regions or cells (with C-MAP ENC 4) and CM-93/3Pro, where they are
called licences), or
- one or more files with the keys for the individual cells / charts (with IHO ENC 4) and ARCS, where
they are called permits).
Normally, you will be sent these data on a diskette. It is also possible that they are sent by e-mail to the
ship, where they must then be copied to a diskette.
These keys must then be transferred to the local database before the licensed cells / charts can be trans-
ferred. Insofar as they are needed for the display, they are automatically transferred to the other data-
bases during the transfer and updating of the chart and cell files.
☞ Before the cells / charts for which licences were installed are actually used (Section 4 and following
sections), the corresponding chart type must be selected again as per Section 4.1.1 at the corre-
sponding CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT. This does not apply to the CHARTPILOT at which the
chart maintenance work was performed.
For further details on this subject, see Section 7.3.1 to 7.8.1.

7.2.3 Transferring and Updating the Charts or Cell Files

(ARCS) chart and (vector) cell files are made available by the relevant provider on CD-ROM, both for the
initial installation and the regular updates. Various providers make it possible, through their online
update services, to transfer the most recent data to the ship by e-mail and/or by Internet file transfer, so
that the necessary CD-ROM (or, in certain cases, the diskette) can be produced on board.
There are two different functions:
Transfer function: This is started with the Transfer button of the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance.
It can be used for all chart types to perform the following tasks:
- Transfer data of all files, or of selected files, from the CD-ROM or diskette to one, several or all data-
bases of the system.
- Also to copy all, or selected, files from the local database to one, several or all other databases of
the system.
Any files there which have the same name are overwritten.

1)
Exception: In certain cases, a licence of the chart type CM-93/3Pro is included in the scope of supply; see page 290.
2)
This system identification code has the designation User Permit No. for the chart types IHO ENC and ARCS and the designation System
ID for C-MAP ENC and CM-93/3Pro. For CM-93/2, it is contained in the CM-93/2 User Code.
3)
Or the distributor. In this business, some distributors perform the tasks of the provider, and vice versa. The term "provider” will be used
throughout this document, even when the tasks typically performed by a distributor are involved.
4)
C-MAP ENC and IHO ENC: see page 251

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 241

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types Operating Instructions

Update function: This is started with the Update button of the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance. It
is used for licensed ENC cells, for ARCS charts and for CM-93/3Pro cells. In one working step, this func-
tion is used for the following purposes with the CD-ROM on one, several or all databases of the system:
- New additional files are transferred 1).
- Where necessary, files are updated.
- Outdated files that are no longer supported are deleted (for ENC cells and ARCS charts after a safe-
guard question) 1).
With regard to the selection of these functions and the order in which the data are transferred to the
various databases of the system, we recommend this approach:
- Always first transfer the licences / permits to the local database; see Section 7.2.2.
- For the initial installation of the databases with all chart types using the Transfer function, first
transfer all data to the local database only and then, in a second step, transfer them from the local
database to all other databases.
- If the provider offers an online update service, we urgently recommend that you use this service
and perform the following step with the data received in this way; see below.
- Perform the updates of the licensed ENC cells, the ARCS charts and the CM-93/3Pro cells
using the Update function in one working step for all databases.
- For the updates of the unlicensed ENC cell files and the CM-93/2 cells using the Transfer func-
tion, first transfer all data to the local database only and then, in a second step, transfer them from
the local database to all other databases. (In these cases, the corresponding deletion measures
must be used to ensure that files which are no longer supported do not remain in the databases.)
- Installation of subsequently licensed cells and charts: as for updating (in the case of large quan-
tities of data, also as for initial installation).
Other approaches are possible and, in special cases, even advisable; see Section 7.3 to 7.8.
Online Update Services: If a PC with Internet connection is available on board, the online update
service that is offered should be used no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD.
If this is done, the charts used on board can be kept constantly up-to-date.
With all online update services, the data must be requested by the ship for each update; in contrast to
the procedure for the regular update, the provider does not automatically send the data.
From the viewpoint of the CHARTPILOT, a distinction must be made:
- Update procedure of the company C-MAP: This is available for the chart types C-MAP ENC and
CM-93/3Pro and bears the designation Real Time Update (RTU). This method is supported by the
CHARTPILOT, in that the request file can be generated there; see Section 7.3.5.
- Update procedures of other providers: At present, Primar Stavanger offers an online update
service for IHO ENC and UKHO offers one for ARCS charts. These providers also supply PC
programs for downloading the data.
What all procedures have in common is that the update data received at the PC must be transferred to
a CD (or diskette), with which an update is then performed at the CHARTPILOT as per Section 7.3.4,
7.3.6 or 7.7.5
NOTICE:
These online updates do not replace the regular updates. Even if online
updates are performed at regular intervals, an update must still be
carried out with every (Update) CD received in the regular way.

1)
Not with all online update services.

242 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

Dialog Box for Displaying the Progress and Errors/Warnings

As soon as the program begins the transfer, update or other lengthy operations, a dialog box opens; this
has the same basic structure for all activities:
The activities currently taking place are reported in the upper list of the dialog box. At the end of the
process, the completion message is shown together with notes on any problems which may have
occurred.
If applicable, the lower list indicates which problems occurred for which cells / charts.
The Print button can be used to log these activities on paper.
The Abort button can be used to terminate the entire process, if necessary. The transfer and conversion
of the file currently being transferred are then continued until they are finished, and are completed with
an appropriate message.
☞ An abort should be avoided, because this can easily result in databases with different contents,
which in turn may lead to errors during the subsequent data maintenance work or during using the
chart.
To ensure that the positions of the cells / charts / plans are displayed correctly in the world chart,
the table of contents must be generated again after an abort; see page 250.

Here, the activity currently taking

place is displayed. From the
resulting list, it is possible to see
(among other things) which files are
transferred.

Here, messages appear if prob-

lems occur in the transfer process.

Prints the information Aborts the transfer.

contained in the lists
Closes the dialog box after transfer is finished.

Fig. 7-4 Dialog box for displaying the progress and errors/warnings

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 243

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types Operating Instructions

7.2.4 Deleting the Charts or Cell Files

(ARCS) charts and (vector) cells that are not (or no longer) updated must be deleted in the data-
bases, to ensure that the active electronic charts continue to operate reliably.
Reasons why cells / charts are not updated (examples):
- The manufacturer or provider no longer supports the chart / cell.
- The licences / permits have expired and were not renewed.
- The charts / cells of a region are no longer needed (e.g. because the sea region is no longer being
sailed).
The deleting of files is performed at the CHARTPILOT intended for the chart maintenance work on all
databases of the system (see page 235).
The relevant details are described in Section 7.3 to 7.8.

Complete Deletion of a Database

If no further work with a chart type is to be done on the system, or if an error occurs in the licence
management process and cannot be corrected by means of the operating procedure described, or if it is
simply that you have lost the overview of the contents of a database, the entire database of that type can
be deleted 1). For the ARCS charts this work can only be carried out at the CHARTPILOT the database
of which is being deleted. This is not possible at MULTIPILOTs 1000; in the event of problems, for ARCS
chart it is only possible to delete all cell files of the MULTIPILOT (at the CHARTPILOT).
NOTICE:
After execution of the following procedure, charts / cells of the type can
no longer be used on the equipment item. The database can be restored
only if the database of the type is OK on another CHARTPILOT or if all
current chart CDs and, for licensed charts / cells, the licence / permits
diskette are available and if there is still enough time available.
In the Other Functions menu of the type, press the button Remove Complete Database. A safeguard
question then appears. 2) If you then enter the word PRUNE in the input field of that safeguard question
and press the OK button, all data of the chart type (chart / cell files, lists, licences/ permits etc.) are
deleted on the hard-disk drive of the CHARTPILOT that is being operated.

7.2.5 Deleting the Product List

After the installation of the first IHO ENC cell from your new supplier we recommend to delete the Product
List from your previous supplier.
A new Product list will be installed automaticly with the next IHO ENC cell installation if nessasary
(see page 270).

1)
Is not possible with the chart type CM-93/2, but is also not necessary. In this case, it is sufficient to delete the cell files contained in the
databases.
2)
For the chart types ENC and CM-93/3Pro, a menu is shown beforehand in which, under Destination, the equipment items for which the
database is to be deleted must be marked. Exit the menu with OK.

244 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

7.2.6 Selecting the Charts or Cell Files

☞ A selection is only required in special cases. If you are still familiarizing yourself with the topic of
chart maintenance, you can initially skip this section and return to it later when it becomes neces-
sary.
If not all files but only certain ones are to be transferred or deleted by means of the Transfer function,
they must be selected for this purpose. The following steps must be conducted in sequence:
- selection according to regions,
- selection according to navigational purposes 1),
- selection according to agency codes, and
- selection according to cell / chart number.
These selection procedures are basically the same for all chart types, but some of the selection possibil-
ities mentioned will not always be available. Section 7.3 to 7.8 describe when to use which procedure.

7.2.6.1 Selection according to Regions

This is used to define a region in the world chart. All (vector) cells or (ARCS) charts and (ARCS) plans
that lie completely or partially in this region are selected by this method. This applies to all navigational
purposes.
☞ With the chart type ARCS, the chart and all plans located on it are always treated in the same way.
For example, even if only one plan is selected, the chart and the other plans of the same chart
number are also selected.
☞ If no selection is performed in the working step in which the selection by regions is intended to take
place, then a l l cells / charts / plans are selected.

Definition of the Region

Three functions are available:

Rectangle Function
In the Selection menu of the Chart Maintenance display within the Selection Mode frame, the function
Rectangle must be selected.
In the world chart (zoomed, if necessary), a rectangle is drawn as is also done for zooming of the world
chart; see page 238.

Contour Function
In the case of an intercardinally arranged shipping area (e.g. from Hamburg to the exit from the English
Channel), use of the rectangle function also selects the (unneeded) cells (here, cells of the Irish Sea and
the English North Sea coast). To prevent this, the contour function can be used:
In the Selection menu of the Chart Maintenance display within the Selection Mode frame, select the
function Contour. Move the cursor to a vertex of the region, and click on the DO key. By moving the
trackball and clicking repeatedly, more vertices can be set. Conclude the process by pressing the INFO
key. If necessary, the definition can be cleared by pressing the MORE key, and can be repeated by
means of the procedure described.

1)
Where relevant, it is possible to define for the type ENC whether cells of unlicensed ENC, IHO ENC and/or C-MAP ENC charts are selected;
see page 251.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 245

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types Operating Instructions

Track Function
In the case of a transfer or an update from the CD-ROM or diskette, the selection can also be performed
in such a way that only the cells needed in connection with existing tracks are transferred. This is done
with the Track function:
In the world chart, display the relevant tracks - see page 238. In the Selection Mode frame, press the
Tracks button. With the Range button that exists there, it is also possible to specify the width of the strip
for which cells are selected on either side of the tracks.

Displaying Selected Cells / Charts / Plans in the World Chart

In the world chart, the positions of the cells / charts / plans selected according to region are shown in
green instead of white, if (in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the button Transfer) the
Transfer menu is opened or (with the Delete button) the Delete menu is opened. See also D i s p l a y i n g
t h e P o s i t i o n o f t h e E x i s t i n g C e l l s / C h a r t s / P l a n s on page 237.

Selecting Only the Cells / Charts / Plans that Lie Completely within the Defined Region
If the selection was made according to region, the button Include Touched Cells or Include Touched
Charts is provided in the Delete menu (to be opened in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the
button Delete). By switching off this function, you can limit the selection to the cells / charts / plans that
lie completely within the defined region.

7.2.6.2 Selection according to Navigational Purposes

This selection is performed in the Transfer menu or in the Delete menu, which is opened (in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the button Transfer or Delete) after the selection according to regions
has taken place.
There, the number of cells / charts / plans previously selected according to regions is specified in the
lower area: After Total the total sum, and above that the figures for the individual navigational purposes 1).
By clicking on the navigational purposes, all cells / charts / plans of certain navigational purposes can be
excluded from the selection.

1)
With ENC CDs, the update cells are also counted (see page 267), and with ARCS charts also the included plans.

246 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

(Data source from which transfer takes place)

(Chart type which is transferred)

(Equipment items to which the cells are transferred)

Selection of the navigational purpose by clicking

Number of cells / charts / plans selected according to regions:

Raster charts: Sum of the charts and plans
Vector charts: Sum of the cells (exception: ENC – during transfer from CD, the sum
of the files (base files and update files; see page 267 is shown)

Opens the selection menu with which selection can take place according to file name

Fig. 7-5 Selection according to navigational purposes in a Transfer menu

7.2.6.3 Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers

Where this selection possibility is given, a corresponding selection menu appears as soon as the OK
button is clicked in the Transfer menu or Delete menu; see Figure 7-6. 1)
If no selection by cells / charts and agency codes is to take place, click on the Add All >> button.
Then click on the OK button in the selection menu to begin the transfer or deletion process.
If a selection is to be made, the following applies:
The left-hand list of the selection menu names the files of all cells / charts 2) that have been selected up
to that time. The selection is made by entering the cells / charts to be transferred or deleted into the right-
hand list. By then clicking the OK button, the transfer or deletion process is initiated.
Selection according to agency codes
☞ The agency code is the first two places of the cell name. It denotes the manufacturer of the cell. This
is generally a national hydrographic organization, so that the agency code corresponds to a certain
geographical area in most cases.
In the case of ENC and CM-93/3Pro charts, the button Selection by Agency Codes is located above
the right-hand list. Switching on this function calls up the selection menu Agency Codes, which contains
all agency codes of the cells that have been selected up to this time.
The left-hand list contains the cells whose agency codes are marked in the selection menu Agency
Codes. By marking the agency codes, the contents of the left-hand list can therefore be limited as
required.

1)
This selection possibility is available not only for charts / cells but also, where necessary, for permits / licences.
2)
The plans of the ARCS charts are contained in the chart files and therefore do not appear in this list.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 247

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types Operating Instructions

If all cells of the marked agency codes shall be transferred or deleted, click on the Add All >> button.
Then click on the OK button in the selection menu to begin the transfer or deletion process.

Only available with List with all previously selected Cells / charts to be Only available with vector charts:
vector charts: Opens cells / charts. transferred or selection menu Agency Codes:
and closes the addi- Only with vector charts: If the deleted when the Contains all agency codes of the cells
tional selection menu selection menu Agency OK button is clicked selected in the previous selection
Agency Codes. Codes is active, only the cells steps.
with the codes marked there These files belong
remain in this list. Mark all the agency codes
to the same cell. whose cells are to be included
in the left-hand list.

Puts all cells / charts Explains the possibili- Removes all cells / Marks all listed agency
displayed in the left- ties of the marking. charts from the codes.
hand list into the right-hand list.
right-hand list.

Starts the deleting or Puts the cells / charts Removes from the right-hand Clears all markings in this
transfer process. marked in the left-hand list all of the cell / charts that selection menu
list into the right-hand list. are marked there.

Fig. 7-6 Selection menus for the selection by cell / chart numbers and agency codes

Selection according to cell names / chart numbers

By means of Add >>, only those cells / charts that are marked in the left-hand list are entered into the
right-hand list.
☞ In the right-hand list, the entries marked there can be removed by means of << Remove, and all
entries are cleared with << Remove All.

248 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

Marking several agency codes or cells / charts

- Hold the Shift key down and then click to mark a range of consecutive list entries.
- Hold the Ctrl key down and click to mark a number of non-consecutive list entries.
- If list entries have already been marked, hold the Ctrl key down and click on an entry again to
remove the marking.

7.2.7 Displaying Information about a Cell / Chart / Plan

The Chart Maintenance subroutine has its own Info box. It contains information which is necessary or
useful in the execution of chart maintenance.

Opening the Info box

The Info box is opened when the INFO key is used to click in the world chart on the displayed position
of a cell / chart / plan.
If there are several cells / charts / plans of the same navigational purpose at the clicked position, these
are listed in the Info box.
The cell / chart / plan marked in the Info box is marked orange in the world chart. If (with ARCS charts)
there are several charts or plans in the clicked chart for the same navigational purpose, these are also
marked orange in the world chart.
With the Expand button of the Info box, a list opens with the detailed data of the marked cell / chart /
plan. With ARCS charts, this also contains the data of charts or plans for other navigational purposes, if
these are located on the clicked chart.
☞ For the ENC chart, the Info box contains special items of information. These are explained from page
274.
With the button Set Planning Mode of the Info box, the cell / chart / plan marked in the list is displayed
(as for the same button in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance; see page 237).

Main data of the cell / chart /

plan clicked in the world chart

Switches on/off the display of the details.

Switches over to the main program (to Planning display mode) and thus switches on the display of the selected Closes the
cell / chart / plan. This does not cause switch-off of the Chart Maintenance subroutine. For details see page 239. Info box.

Fig. 7-7 The Info box of the Chart Maintenance subroutine

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 249

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types Operating Instructions

7.2.8 Creating a Table of Contents

For each database whose data are displayed or modified in any way, the program needs an up-to-date
table of contents. This is generated automatically as soon as it is definite which data media are affected.
The table of contents is automatically updated when the contents are changed, and remains stored until
the Chart Maintenance subroutine is exited.
However, if the inserted data medium is exchanged after selection of CD-ROM or DISKETTE as the
Source and the program has not requested this change of medium, the table of contents for the new data
media must be created anew in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance by pressing Make Table of
Contents.
If the transfer or deletion of data was terminated (Abort function; see page 243), it may also be necessary
to create a new table of contents for the relevant database, e.g. so that the positions of the cells / charts
/ plans are shown correctly in the world chart. To do this, mark the corresponding equipment item under
Source and then press Make Table of Contents.

7.2.9 Checking the Available Hard-Disk Capacity

In the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu, the Actual Source State button can be used to open up a
box containing information about the hard disk drives of all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs installed.
The meanings are as follows:
Status: On-line = data exchange with the CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT is possible.
Free Disk: Free hard disk capacity, including the capacity that is to be kept free for other purposes (Min
Free). For the electronic Charts, the difference between Free Disk and Min Free is therefore avail-
able.
Min Free: Capacity to be kept free for other purposes.

7.2.10 Errors Caused by Dirty CDs / CD Drives

If problems arise when data are transferred from the CD, they may be caused by soiling of the CD or the
optics of the CD drive. In such cases, cleaning may possibly solve the problem - see page 397.

250 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

ENC cell files are always produced by the national hydrographic organizations according to the same
standards. The distribution, and thus the procurement by the user, takes place in various ways, however.
The ENC data of some regions are made available only through one or more providers authorized for
this, following procurement of the relevant licences (involving further cost), whereas the ENC data of
other regions can be procured without the need for licences.
Licensed cells are delivered in an encrypted form. There are several different encryption methods. Most
providers use the method corresponding to the S63 standard, which was published by the IHO. ENC cells
encrypted in this way are referred to as IHO ENC in the following. The company C-MAP uses its own
method; the ENC cells delivered by C-MAP are referred to as C-MAP ENC in the following. When
importing the ENC cells into the own database, the CHARTPILOT must apply various decryption
methods; the required operating sequences may differ to some degree.
The CHARTPILOT is capable of using IHO ENC, C-MAP ENC and unlicensed ENC cell files, also simu-
taneously. 1)
☞ The distinctions between these ENC types only exist with regard to the chart maintenance, not for
use of the ENC cells. When different types are utilized at the same time, it is possible to use the Info
box at any time to find out which ENC type is currently being displayed.

Use of Licensed Cells

If licensed ENC cells are obtained from different providers, the following operations must be performed
for each provider.
In special cases, however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.3.7.
Initial Installation of Licensed Cells:
1. Conclude a contract with the provider, obtain the necessary ENC cell permits from him, and then
install them on the local database; see Section 7.3.1.
2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.2, transfer all the cell files for which permits have
already been installed from the provider’s CDs to the local database.
3. Then use the Transfer function to transfer all ENC files as per Section 7.3.3 from the local database
to all other ENC databases of the system.
Updating of Licensed Cells:
Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all ENC databases of
the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4 or 7.3.6.
Online update: If an online update is possible (see page 242), perform it at least once a week, beginning
no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD.
To do this, an Online Update CD is produced at the PC, with which the update is performed on all ENC
databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4 or 7.3.6;
see also page 242. The online update of the C-MAP ENC begins with the generation of the RTU request
as per Section 7.3.5.
Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells:
1. Install any ENC cell permits that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.3.1.
2. Using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4 or 7.3.6, transfer the cells to all ENC databases of
the system in one working step.

1)
What this means: Various cells may differ in respect of the ENC type, but the same cell cannot be present in different ENC types several
times over.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 251

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

Use of Unlicensed Cells

Unlicensed cells should only be installed if they originate from the same provider or, if the cells of various
providers are used, if the updating process can be performed properly; see below.
When both licensed and unlicensed ENC cells are being used, the following actions may only be
performed for the unlicensed cells. For this, only the function Unlicensed ENC Data may remain
switched on in the menu which appears as one of the first selection steps.
If unlicensed ENC cells are obtained from several different providers, the following operations must be
performed for each provider. 1)
In special cases, however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.3.7.
Initial Installation of Unlicensed Cells:
1. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.2, transfer all the cell files to the local database.
2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.3, transfer all cell files from there to all other ENC
databases of the system.
Updating of Unlicensed Cells
1. On the local ENC database, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8.
2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.2, transfer all the cell files of the provider to the local
database.
3. On all other ENC databases, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8.
4. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.3, transfer all cell files from the local database to all
other ENC databases of the system.
If unlicensed files from several providers are used, it must be possible to select the files of each provider
out of the unlicensed files of all other providers for the purposes of deleting them. This is practically only
possible if they are located in a region in which there are no unlicensed files from other providers 2). This
difficulty does not arise if the provider regularly announces which cells are no longer supported. In this
case, only these cells must be deleted in step 1.
From this follows:
CAUTION
To keep the ENC database up-to-date with a justifiable amount of effort,
unlicensed files should only be used
- when exclusively files from one provider and no licensed files are
used, or
- when up-to-date information is always available on which files are
no longer supported, or
- when it is easy to select only the files originating from each
provider.
If the provider regularly announces which cells are no longer supported and which new cells have been
issued, the following procedure is advised for the updating of unlicensed cells:
1. Install newly issued cells subsequently on all databases; see page 264.
2. Using the Update function as per page 263, perform the update of the existing cells on all ENC data-
bases of the system in one working step.
3. Delete cells that are no longer supported, as per Section 7.3.8.

1)
The case in which different data sets (i.e. supplied on separate CDs) are obtained from the same contractual partner (provider) must be
treated as if the data sets originated from different providers.
2)
Or if there are only a few files and the user knows the region and file names.

252 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

7.3.1 Permits for Licensed ENC cells

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241.

☞ All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended
for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type ENC must
be set in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance.

Initial Installation of IHO ENC

1. Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be taken out with a provider. Here the
system identification code is needed, and the ENC cells to be used must be determined.
For IHO ENC, the system identification code is called the User Permit Number and is displayed
when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, the button View User Permit
No. is pressed.
You can obtain the information on the available ENC cells in various ways, e.g. through the provider,
or through the internet. If you have an ENC CD from the provider: The product list located on the
CD details all the ENC cells available from the publisher of the CD at the time it was made; for the
required operating actions, see page 269.
If the provider needs other data about the system, further relevant data can be generated as an
ECDIS Passport and sent to the provider; see page 256.
2. You then receive
- the permit file, in which all ENC cell permits acquired by you are present (per ENC permit
diskette or per e-mail),
- the current (IHO) ENC Base CD,
- if applicable, the current (IHO) ENC Update CD.
3. Installing ENC cell permits:
Put the ENC permits diskette into the diskette drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
> ENC Licensing press the button Install Permits from Diskette. A request to insert the diskette
then appears; after you have answered that request with OK, the permit file containing the permits
is copied from the diskette into the local ENC database. These processes can be observed in a
dialog box. The question Transferring permits to all other systems? should be answered with OK.
After the corresponding request, close the dialog box with Cancel.
☞ The files needed for the licensing process are called ENC.PMT and PERMIT.TXT. The proce-
dure described must also be applied if these files were received by e-mail. In this case, you
must create the ENC permits diskette yourself beforehand by transferring the received files to
a DOS-formatted diskette.
If the above-mentioned files were transferred as an archive file (e.g. the.ZIP format), they must
be decompressed. Installation as described is only possible if the files with the a.m. names are
located on the diskette (if necessary, check this with a PC).
The initial installation can now be continued with the transfer of the cell files as per Section 7.3.2.

Initial Installation of C-MAP ENC

1. Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be taken out with a provider. Here the
user key file is needed (containing the system identification code among others, and the ENC cells
to be used must be determined.
When a DOS-formatted diskette is inserted and the button Generate User Key File is then pressed
in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, the user key file with the name
USER.USR is stored on the diskette. Send the file or the diskette to the provider.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 253

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

You can obtain the information on the available ENC cells in various ways, e.g. through the provider,
or through the internet.
If you have an ENC CD from C-MAP: The table of contents of the CD details all the ENC cells avail-
able from the publisher of the CD at the time it was made; for the required operating actions, see
page 250.

Installation of the permits on the ENC databases

Check of the permits installed on the local database
Data backup of the permits installed on the local database
Deletion of permits on the local database

Installing the Public Key for IHO ENC data

Displaying the User Permit Number for IHO ENC data; see page 253
Generating an ECDIS Passport for IHO ENC data; see page 256

Generating the system identification code for C-MAP ENC data

Fig. 7-8 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing

2. You then receive

- the licence file, in which all ENC cell licences acquired by you are present (per ENC licence
diskette or per e-mail),
- the current CM-ENC CD.
3. Installing ENC cell licences:
Put the ENC licence diskette into the diskette drive and the newest CM-ENC CD into the CD drive,
and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing press the button Install Permits
from Diskette. After the requests to insert the diskette and the CD-ROM have been answered with
OK, the licence information is checked and stored on all ENC databases of the system. These proc-
esses can be observed in a dialog box.
After the corresponding request, close the dialog box with Cancel.
☞ The file needed for the licensing process is called password.usr. The procedure described
must also be applied if this file was received by e-mail. In this case, you must create the ENC
licence diskette yourself beforehand by transferring the received file to a DOS-formatted
diskette.
The initial installation can now be continued with the transfer of the cell files as per Section 7.3.2.

Renewing the Cell Permits 1), Procuring New Cell Permits

If existing permits are renewed or further permits are procured later, the procedure described above must
be repeated. The corresponding cell files can be transferred by means of the Update function as per
Section 7.3.4 or 7.3.6.

1)
permits for IHO ENC cells or licences for C-MAP ENC cells. In the following, “permit” also stands for “licence”.

254 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

An ENC permits diskette can also contain new permits which you have not ordered, even if you are not
expressly informed about this. This is the case when cells are replaced by other cells.
If all cells for which permits have been procured have been installed, you need not concern yourself with
this, because the replacement cells are automatically installed by the Update function (see Section 7.3.4
or 7.3.6) and the replaced cells are proposed for deletion.
However, if you do not install all cells for which permits were procured, the replacement cells must be
installed as per Section 7.3.2. For this reason, you must determine the additionally installed permits
already during the installation of the permits, in order to know which cells you then have to install. For
further details, see page 262, N o t A l l C e l l s o f I H O E N C f o r W h i c h P e r m i t s a r e A v a i l a b l e a r e t o b e
Installed.

Deleting Permits
ENC cell permits are generally not deleted automatically. If expired cell permits are not to be extended,
these permits must be deleted manually.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, press the Delete Permits button. If the
corresponding enquiry appears, select the ENC type(s) to be deleted.
3. In the selection menu which then opens up, transfer those permits that are indicated by the text
EXPIRED from the left-hand list to the right-hand list (for the list operating procedure, see also page
247). After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu and appropriate answering of the
resulting safeguard question, the expired permits are deleted in the local ENC database.
If a transfer or update of ENC cells is to take place afterwards, these actions need only be performed on
the local ENC database.
☞ If ENC cells are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independently of the
source), all ENC permits on the local database are automatically copied to the ENC databases to
which the transfer of the cells is taking place. Here permits that are not located on the local database
are deleted from the other ENC databases.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Checking the Installed Permits

If difficulties occur in the display of cells for which a permit exists, the permits installed in the local ENC
database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC
Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Permits. If the corresponding enquiry appears, select
the ENC type(s) to be deleted. In the dialog box which then opens up, information about the check
performed is given.
☞ If IHO ENCs from various providers are used, all permits are assembled here.
☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the permits existing
in the other ENC databases of the system.

Performing Data Backup of the Installed Permits

Data backup can be performed for the acquired permits too: put an empty, DOS-formatted diskette into
the diskette drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing press the Permit
Backup button. If the corresponding enquiry appears, select the ENC type(s) to be deleted. The permit
file is then copied from the local ENC database to the diskette. A dialog box then opens up, containing
information about each process that is completed.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 255

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

Installing the Public Key for IHO ENC

The public key is used for authentication of the IHO ENC cells. It need, and indeed may, only be changed
when the provider requests that this be done. The menu for entering the public key is opened in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing by means of the Install Public Key button.

Generating the ECDIS Passport for IHO ENC

The system data which may possibly be needed by the provider of IHO ENC are compiled in the ECDIS
Passport,. When, after a DOS-formatted diskette has been inserted into the diskette drive, the Generate
ECDIS Passport button in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing is pressed and the
entries which are then requested are performed, the data are stored as an .xml file on the diskette,
together with two other files which may needed for the interpretation of the .xml file.
☞ Parts of the content can be viewed and printed out at the PC.

Expiry of the Cell Permit of IHO ENC

In the last month prior to expiry of the permit, you are made aware of this date by means of a message
when you select the cell for display. After expiry of the permit, you can still display in the usual way the
cells that exist in the ENC database. However, you do not receive any ENC Update CDs, and cells
cannot be transferred. Thus, not all cells are up-to-date. When you select a cell for display, your attention
is drawn to this fact by means of an appropriate message, the Chart Status field of the navigation data
line becomes yellow, and the display Permit warn. appears there.

End of the Subscription Licence of C-MAP ENC

C-MAP has defined two expiry dates for the end of a subscription licence:
- Subscription expiry date: This is the day on which the contractual relationship expires. After this
date, no more updates are performed and the use of the data (then obsolete) may be dangerous;
this is followed two months later by the
- Licence expiry date: There is now no legal basis for continuing to use the data.
One month before the subscription expiry date, a message about the subscription expiry date is shown
as soon as a C-MAP ENC cell affected by this date is displayed.
From the subscription expiry date until the licence expiry date, a message about the licence expiry date
is shown as soon as a C-MAP ENC cell affected by this date is displayed. In addition, the Chart Status
field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence appears there.
From the licence expiry date, there is a corresponding message as soon as a region affected by this date
is shown in the chart display with the C-MAP ENC chart selected. In addition, the Chart Status field of
the navigation data line becomes red, and the display Licence appears there.

Checking the CM-ENC CD

If problems occur when accessing the CM-ENC CD, it is possible to check the consistency of the data
contained there. This is done by means of the function Validate Data on CD-ROM provided in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions.
☞ This check can take 30 minutes. During this time, the CHARTPILOT cannot be used for other
purposes.

Showing Information about the CM-ENC CD

The properties of the CM-ENC CD can be displayed by means of the function View CD-ROM Version
provided in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions.

256 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Showing the System ID for C-MAP ENC

The system ID needed for the licensing of C-MAP ENC can be displayed by means of the function View
System ID provided on the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions. It uniquely iden-
tifies the system installed on board your ship with regard to the installation of the ENC, and may be
needed for servicing purposes.

7.3.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from CD to Local Database

☞ For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 241 and 251.
Application:
- Initial installation of (licensed and unlicensed) ENC cells
- Update of unlicensed ENC cells
With the procedure described:
- All ENC cells existing on the CDs being used are transferred to the local database and updated
there. If they are licensed ENC cells, the transfer is limited to those cells for which permits are
installed on the local database.
☞ For more details on this topic, see page 271.
Preparations:
- If licensed ENC cells are to be transferred: Install all permits of the provider whose CD is being used
to the local database, as per Section 7.3.1.
- If unlicensed ENC cells are to be updated: In all ENC databases, delete all cells of this provider, as
per Section 7.3.8.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. Put the newest ENC Base CD 1) into the CD drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
set CD-ROM as the Source. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no
frame shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and
press the Transfer button again.
4. Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).
☞ Under Cells to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
5. In the Transfer menu, click the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all
the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >> and press the OK button.
6. When data of the IHO ENC are transferred, the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer then opens. There,
define how the program should behave when certain errors occur during the transfer.
☞ This is used to decide whether faulty data are incorporated into the ENC database and whether
ENC cells with faulty data are updated. This topic is explained in detail on page 272.
7. After pressing of the OK button of the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer, transfer and data conversion
begin. The dialog box Transferring ENC Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently
taking place is listed, and in the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer and
conversion process are listed. (What happens during this transfer is described on page 271.)
8. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Transferring ENC
Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.

1)
For unlicensed ENC cells: the newest CD. Unlicensed ENC cells are not normally divided into Base CD and Update CD.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 257

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

If there is an Update CD that is newer than the ENC Base CD being used, then it is probable that
not all of the transferred cell files are up-to-date. The necessary updating is performed with step 9:
9. Remove the ENC Base CD from the CD drive and insert the newest ENC Update CD. Then perform
step 3 to step 8 once again.

7.3.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases

☞ For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 241 and 251.
Application:
- Initial installation of (licensed and unlicensed) ENC cells
- Update of unlicensed ENC cells
With the procedure described:
- All ENC cells 1) located in the local database are copied to all other ENC databases of the system.
- All ENC cell permits located on the local database are copied to all other ENC databases, whereas
permits that are not on the local database are deleted from the other ENC databases.
Preparations:
- The transfer as per Section 7.3.2 must have been carried out.
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
- If it is possible that the other databases could contain ENC cells for which you are not sure that they
are up-to-date, delete all ENC cells from these databases as per Section 7.3.8.
- If unlicensed ENC cells are to be updated: If this has not yet been done, delete all cells of this
provider from the other ENC databases as per Section 7.3.8.
☞ This transfer proceeds faster than the updating or transfer from CD, since the data no longer have
to be decrypted, decompressed and converted.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the equipment item that is currently
being operated (this one).
3. Press the Transfer button. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
☞ Under Cells to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
4. In the Transfer menu, press the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all
the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.
5. After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote
Transfer of ENC Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in
the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.
6. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Remote Transfer
of ENC Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.

1)
Including the allocated Manual ENC Update files that are available there.

258 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

7.3.4 Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241 and 251.
Application:
- Update of the IHO ENC cells in all ENC databases of the system after receiving a new ENC (Base
or Update) CD or after generating an Online Update CD.
- Installation of IHO ENC cells for post-procured permits in all ENC databases of the system.
With the procedure described 1):
- All ENC cell permits located on the local database are copied to all other ENC databases, whereas
permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ENC databases.
- On the local database, all ENC cells are updated for which permits are available there. (If new
permits were installed in the meantime, the corresponding cells are also transferred and updated.)
- The updated cells are transferred to all other ENC databases of the system.
- Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted (after a safeguard question).
☞ Please note: The Update function analyses the local database, and only the changes that are neces-
sary for this are also carried out in the other databases. On the other databases, this will only cause
no errors if they have the same status (date of issue) as the local database. This is one of the
reasons why all databases of the system must generally always have the same status.
Preparations:
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
- Permits that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as
per Section 7.3.1.
- For an online update: The Online Update CD was produced. It must contain all cumulative updates
based on the Base CD last used for an update.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. Put the Online Update CD or the most recent IHO ENC CD into the CD drive.
☞ The most recent ENC CD is usually an Update CD. If, after the last Update CD, a Base CD has
appeared, that CD must be inserted. What is important is that it must be the latest ENC CD.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD-ROM as the Source. If a message about the
table of contents appears, answer it with OK.
4. Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance >
Update opens 2). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
5. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog
box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest CD. If you have not done
this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the dialog box Type
of Update opens up.
6. In the dialog box Type of Update, press the button Update based upon installed permits.
☞ For the function of the button Update based upon installed cells, see page 262.
7. In the dialog box Type of Update, press the OK button. As a result, the update process is started
and the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.
8. If another CD has to be inserted, a request to do that appears in an additional dialog box.
9. In the selection menu, press the OK button and, in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer which then
opens, define how the program should behave when conversion errors occur during the transfer.

1)
For the ENC cells of the provider whose Update CD is being used
2)
Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 259

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

☞ This is used to decide whether faulty data are included in the ENC database or whether ENC
cells are not updated in the event of conversion errors. This topic is explained in detail on page
272.
10. The program compares the cells on all other databases with the cells on the local database. If neces-
sary, the respective cells will be transferred to the other database.
If the program detects that the local ENC database contains cells that are no longer supported or for
which no permits exist, the corresponding message is shown. After confirmation, a selection menu
appears in which these cells are listed on the left. It is recommended that these cells be deleted (use
Add All >> to enter all cells into the right-hand column and then press OK). The deletion is then
carried out in all databases of the system.
11. When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating
ENC Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.
It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.3.10.

7.3.5 Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC

☞ For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 241 and 251.
☞ The procedure can be performed by any subscriber of the C-MAP ENC data. A special registration
is not required.
IMPORTANT:
This online update does not replace the regular updates. Even if online
updates are performed at regular intervals, an update must still be
carried out with every new CD received from C-MAP.

The Real Time Update is performed in three steps:

1. Generating the RTU request; see below.
2. Producing the Online Update CD 1); see below.
3. Performing the update as per Section 7.3.6.
A prerequisite for successful updating by RTU is that an update according to Section 7.3.6 must have
been performed completely and successfully with the last CD received from C-MAP.

Generating the RTU Request and Producing the Online Update CD

1. Put a DOS-formatted diskette into the diskette drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
> ENC Other Functions press the button Generate RTU Request. After the request to insert the
diskette has been answered with OK, an RTU request is generated and written to the diskette as a
file with the name ENC_[date]_[UTC].org. This process can be observed in a dialog box.
2. When this file is sent as the attachment of an e-mail to the C-MAP RTU server, the server then
returns one or more e-mails after a short while, each with one or more files attached.
☞ The e-mail address must be requested from C-MAP or, alternatively, it may be obtained from
the C-MAP homepage on the Internet.

1)
If the data volume is low, the data can also be transferred to a diskette. The term “Online Update CD” is then understood to mean this
diskette in the following.

260 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

☞ The entire process is automatic. Any message in the body of the own e-mail is ignored. The file
name is used to indicate how many files belong in total to this update:
u001x002.ans

Number of files belonging to this update

Sequential number of this file

3. Producing the Online Update CD: Label a CD (best done by including the chart type and date) and
burn all the files received to this CD.
Use this Online Update CD to perform an update as per Section 7.3.6.

7.3.6 Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241 and 251.
Application:
- Update of the C-MAP ENC cells in all ENC databases of the system after receiving a new CM-ENC
CD or for a Real Time Update (after generating the Online Update CD).
- Installation of C-MAP ENC cells for post-procured licences in all ENC databases of the system.
With the procedure described:
- All C-MAP ENC cell licences located then on the local database are copied to all other ENC data-
bases, whereas licences that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ENC
databases.
- On all ENC database, all cells are updated for which licences are available there.
- Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted on all ENC databases.
Preparations:
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
- Licences that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as
per Section 7.7.1.
- For a Real Time Update: The Online Update CD was produced in accordance with Section 7.3.5.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. Put the CM-ENC CD or the Online Update CD into the CD drive.
If a new CM-ENC CD has been received with which no update has been performed yet, this CD
must always be used.
This also applies when its issue date lies before the date of the last online update that was
performed. In this case, perform an online update again (with a renewed update request) after
carrying out the update with the CM-ENC CD.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD-ROM as the Source. If a message about the
table of contents appears, answer it with OK.
4. Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance >
Update opens 1). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
5. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog
box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest CD. If you have not done
this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the update process
is started and the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.

1)
Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 261

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

6. When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating
ENC Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.
It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.3.10.
If the update was aborted for some reason, then the databases will contain cells from different CD
versions. Therefore the update must be initiated again as soon as possible and brought to completion.

7.3.7 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update

In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.3.2 to 7.3.6 for the
transfer and update:

Initial installation of the Licensed ENC cells using the Update Function
The initial installation of the licensed ENC cells can also be performed as per Section 7.3.4 or 7.3.6, if all
permits for the cells to be installed were installed (as per Section 7.3.1) on at least the local database
beforehand.
This approach is particularly advantageous when only a few cells are to be installed, or if the necessary
time (several hours) is available in the case of large volumes of data.

Changing from CM-ENC to IHO ENC or vice versa

In case of a complete change you have to remove the complete database before you install the new type.
see(Section 7.2.4.)

Initial installation of the Unlicensed ENC cells on all Databases in one Step
The initial installation of unlicensed ENC cells can be performed with the procedure as per Section 7.3.2
directly in all databases of the system. The transfer as per Section 7.3.3 is then no longer necessary.
With transfer as per Section 7.3.2, mark all CHARTPILOTs in step 4 under Destination in such cases.

ENC merged from CM- ENC and IHO ENC

It is recommended that you do not use different sources of licences for the same area, to be sure that
you have a consistent system.

Not All Cells of IHO ENC for Which Permits are Available are to be Installed
☞ In this case, the initial installation is not possible by means of the Update function (see above).
With the initial installation as per Section 7.3.2, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the selec-
tion procedure, see Section 7.2.6. Then perform the transfer as per Section 7.3.3 to all other databases.
Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also be carried out for new cells for which
permits were procured afterwards.
With the update as per Section 7.3.4, in this case, the function Update based upon installed cells must
be selected in step 6.

262 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

If cells were replaced by other cells by the provider, the replaced cells are proposed for deletion during
the update (and should also be deleted), but the replacement cells are not automatically transferred
(because the setting Update based upon installed cells was selected). They must therefore be trans-
ferred to the local database before the update as per Section 7.3.2.
In such a case, you will automatically be sent the required permits per ENC cells permits diskette 1) or per
e-mail by the provider. You will receive the information on which new cells are to be transferred when you
install the permits provided on the diskette as per Section 7.3.1. All cells to be installed because of new
permits are marked with the message Cell (name) : Permit added to permit database. If desired, print
out this list.
If not all cells have already been installed, it is also advisable to transfer only the replacement cells which
belong to the region covered by the installed cells. This is achieved when a regional selection (Section
7.2.6.3) is performed before the selection by cell names (Section 7.2.6.1).

Not All the Available Unlicensed ENC Cells of a Provider are to be Installed
For the initial installation and for each update:
1. On the local ENC database, delete all cells of the provider as per Section 7.3.8.
2. During transfer as per Section 7.3.2, select the required cells; for the selection procedure, see
Section 7.2.6.
3. On all other ENC databases, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8.
4. Perform the transfer as per Section 7.3.3 to all other databases.

The Number of Unlicensed ENC Cells of a Provider is Small in Relation to the Number of Other
Installed ENC Cells
For the initial installation and for each update:
1. On the local ENC database, delete all cells of the provider as per Section 7.3.8.
2. Perform the transfer as per Section 7.3.2, if applicable only with selected cells; see above.
3. On all other ENC databases, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8.
4. During transfer as per Section 7.3.3, select only the cells transferred with step 2; for the selection
procedure, see Section 7.2.6.

Update of the Installed Unlicensed ENC Cells using the Update Function
The Update function can also be used to update unlicensed cells. Here only those cells which are
contained in the CD being used and which are already installed on the local database will be updated.
No cells are proposed for deletion. This approach is therefore only advisable if the provider regularly
announces:
- which cells have been published anew, so that they can be installed subsequently, as described on
page 264, and
- which cells are no longer supported, so that they can be deleted as per Section 7.3.8.
With the procedure described, the changes made in the local database are also performed in all other
ENC databases.
☞ In the other databases, this will only cause no errors if they have the same status (issue date) as
the local database. This is one of the reasons why all databases of the system must generally
always have the same status.

1)
The permits of such new cells can also be contained on a permits diskette which you are still expecting (because permits have been
renewed or new ones have been ordered).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 263

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

Preparations: All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. Put the most recent ENC CD into the CD drive.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD-ROM as the Source. If a message about the
table of contents appears, answer it with OK.
4. Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance >
Update opens 1). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
5. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog
box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest CD. If you have not done
this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the Update process
is started and the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.
6. In the selection menu, press the OK button and, in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer which then
opens, define how the program should behave when conversion errors occur during the transfer.
☞ This is used to decide whether faulty data are included in the ENC database or whether ENC
cells are not updated in the event of conversion errors. This topic is explained in detail on page
272.
7. When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating
ENC Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.

Subsequent Installation of Single Unlicensed ENC Cells

The new cells are transferred to all ENC databases in one working step. This is done with the procedure
described in Section 7.3.2, with the following deviation:
- In step 4 under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
- In step 5, transfer only the files that bear the names of the new cells into the right-hand list of the
selection menu (for selection menu, see page 247).
☞ Often, there will be several files for a particular cell on the CD (for explanations of this, see page
267).

7.3.8 Deleting ENC Cells

Application:
There are so many reasons why it may be necessary to delete cells from the databases that they cannot
be listed here. Reference to the necessity of deleting cells is made at the corresponding points.
By means of the following procedures, it is possible to delete any desired selection of ENC cells on each
ENC database that exists in the system. The associated Manual ENC Update files, if there are any, are
automatically deleted as well. Permits are not deleted in this process.

Deleting Selected Cells

The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.

1)
Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

264 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

3. If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corre-
sponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.
4. It is possible to select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the
button Include Touched Cells, it can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted
that are situated completely within the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.
5. If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, a box also appears with a button for each
of these types. By pressing the corresponding buttons, a selection can be made here according to
these ENC types.
☞ Because the cells selected in the world chart are marked green, it is possible in this way to
show where the cells of a particular ENC type are located.
6. In the Delete menu, press the OK button and then, in the selection menu which opens, perform the
selection according to cell names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.
7. When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the cells listed in the right-hand list are
deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the
Cancel button.

Deleting All ENC Cells of a Database

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame
shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu.
4. In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all
ENC cells are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented
by pressing the Cancel button.

7.3.9 Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item

If an update was not performed on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, the non-updated databases
must be updated as soon as possible.
However, the Update function is not suitable for this; see note on page 259.
The simplest approach is to delete all ENC cells on the non-updated database as per Section 7.3.8 and
then to perform a transfer as per Section 7.3.3 from a CHARTPILOT with an ENC database that has
already been updated.

7.3.10 Check of the ENC Cells Installed

After an update and whenever there are doubts about the consistency or up-to-dateness of the database,
the databases should be checked by means of the following function. The procedure depends on the type
of ENC.

Check of the IHO ENC Cells

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Verify
Installed Cells.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 265

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

2. Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under
Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.
3. If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, in the dialog box which then opens up,
select IHO ENC and press OK.
4. In the dialog box which then opens up, choose the reference against which the check is to be
performed:
- Check against installed product list: Choose this in normal cases (for the contents of this
product list: see P r o d u c t L i s t on page 269).
- Check against CD-ROM: For special cases, e.g. if the difference between the contents of the
database and the contents of a CD-ROM (older or newer) is of interest.
5. Press the OK button. If Check against CD-ROM was chosen, insert the CD-ROM now, at the latest,
and click the OK button in the box with the corresponding request.
6. As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found,
the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a reports on the errors is provided
in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box. The following messages may need explanation:
- ERROR: Cell (cell name): No entry found in product list!
This message is shown when the data provider has deleted the cell from the product list, e.g.
because it is no longer supported.
Recommendation: Enquire at the provider
- WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing!
This message is shown when the data provider has indicated in the cell file that an additional
file contains supplementary information but this additional file was not found. Recommendation:
Enquire at the provider, or delete the cell file and re-install it on all ENC databases.

Check of the C-MAP ENC Cells

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Verify
Installed Cells.
2. Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under
Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.
3. If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, in the dialog box which then opens up,
select C-MAP ENC and press OK.
4. Since there is no product list for C-MAP ENC cells, it is only possible to check against the CM-ENC
CD and against the Online Update CD. Now, at the latest, insert the CD-ROM and click the OK
button in the box with the corresponding request.
5. As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found,
the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a reports on the errors is provided
in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box. The following messages may need explanation:
☞ Because only cell files, but no external reference files are transferred during a Real Time
Update, the message WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing!
is shown for all cells updated by RTU for which additional files are intended. At the next regular
update, the external reference files are transferred and so these messages are no longer
shown. If this message still appears after a regular update, it is advisable to ask the provider
about the possible cause.

Check of the Unlicensed ENC Cells

Unlicensed cells can only be checked for consistency, not for up-to-dateness.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Verify
Installed Cells.

266 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

2. Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under
Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.
3. If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, in the dialog box which then opens up,
select Unlicensed ENC and press OK.
4. As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found,
the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a reports on the errors is provided
in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box.

7.3.11 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of the IHO ENC Cells

Base Files and Update Files of the Cells on CDs; Cell Files in the Databases
The ENC files usually supplied on CDs are different from the files contained on the hard disk drives in
the ENC databases 1).
Cell files on the CDs: For every cell of the ENC, there is a base file. If changes are necessary, an
update file is generated, containing the changes only. If further changes are then necessary, a further
update file is generated, containing only the new changes. In this way, for every cell a number of update
files can result which all refer to the one base file of the cell and to the update files previously issued for
this base file.
This sequence is interrupted at some time by the issuing of a base file for a new edition or for a re-
issue. When the new edition is issued or a re-issue is made, the new base file contains all changes
published up until then by means of update files, and often additional changes that were not yet contained
in the last update file.
After a new edition has been issued, the edition number is incremented, but after a re-issue the cell
retains its old edition number. The update files that had been issued up until then and the old base file
thus become invalid.
The file names consist of the name of the cell and the file extension.
- The extension 000 indicates the base file.
- Following a new edition, the update files are given a serial extension-number beginning at 001.
- After a re-issue, the count of the update files does not begin at 001 but is resumed instead.
- The file names of different editions do not differ.

DE416050.000
File extension: 000 = base file, > 000 = update file

Production number
Navigational purpose, see page 81 Name of the cell
Agency code, see page 247

Cell files in the ENC databases: For each cell, there exists in the ENC databases of the equipment
items only one file, to which the most recent changes are added during an update.

1)
For this, the IHO uses the term SENC (System Electronic Navigational Chart).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 267

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

In addition, the cell files of the ENC database differ from those of the CDs through the data format:
- In the database, the files are stored in a format that is optimized for the everyday use of the data.
- Files of the unlicensed ENC cells are stored on the CDs in a transfer-specific format defined in the
IHO standard S-57. To be able to use the data, they must be converted into the database format.
This is done during the transfer or update.
- Files of the licensed ENC cells are compressed and encrypted by the provider on the basis of the
S-57 format. During the transfer or update, these files must therefore be decrypted, decompressed
and converted into the database format.

ENC Base CDs and ENC Update CDs of the IHO ENC
The files of the licensed cells are distributed over two different CDs:
ENC Base CDs: When a Base CD is issued, it usually contains all cell changes that are necessary at
that time. For changed cells for which a new edition is not issued at the same time, the Base CD therefore
also contains the update files.
ENC Base CDs therefore contain
- the base files of all cells that were issued when the Base CD was issued,
- all update files that were issued for these base files when the Base CD was issued,
- in addition, the product list representing the update status at the time when the Base CD was issued;
see below.
ENC Update CDs: The next changes in the set of data (new update files, new editions, first editions for
new cells) are all contained in an Update CD. This CD therefore refers to the Base CD that was issued
last.
After the issuing of an Update CD, further changes are published cumulatively in the same way on the
following Update CD. Therefore, for an update it is always sufficient to use the current Base CD together
with the most recent Update CD.
ENC Update CDs contain only additions to the Base CD, i.e.
- all update files issued after appearance of the Base CD,
- frequently, base files of new editions,
- if appropriate, first editions of cell files (base files)
- in addition, the product list representing the update status at the time when the Update CD was
issued; see below.
This sequence is interrupted at some time by the issuing of new Base CDs - see above. When it is
issued, the old Base CD and all Update CDs previously issued become invalid.

268 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Checks the update status of the ENC cells in the local database; see page 265
Deletion of the complete ENC database; see page 244

Displays the list of available IHO ENC cells (product list); see page 269.
Transfers the product list from the CD into the local ENC database 1).
Deletion a installed product List; see page 270
Displays current information from the provider of IHO ENC cells; see page 275.
Checks the consistency of the data on the C-MAP CD; see page 256
Shows the information about the C-MAP CD; see page 256
Shows the system ID needed for installing C-MAP ENC cells; see page 257
Generates an RTU request for execution of an online update; see page 260.

1) This also takes place automatically for all ENC databases of the system when the Update func-
tion is used - see page 269.

Fig. 7-9 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions

Product List
Each CD (Update or Base CD) of IHO ENC cells contains a product list detailing all available cells,
together with the corresponding file status valid at the time of CD manufacture. Meaning of the terms:
Name: Name of the cell
Sts: Status of licence: P = permit installed
Edition: Current edition number
Issue Date: Date when the current base file was issued
Latest Upd. Issue Date: Issue date of the last update file that was published for the current base file
Latest Upd. Number: Number of update files published up to this time for the current base file
Base Cell Upd. Number: Last update file that was incorporated into the base file during a re-issue
Last Upd. Number for prev. Edition: Total number of update files published up to this time for the
previous base file
(C)ompress (E)ncrypt: C=1; E=1: File is compressed/encrypted
For each provider of IHO ENC cells, there is a product list in each ENC database. During a transfer or
update, it is automatically replaced by the latest product list of the provider. The program uses this to
generate another product list detailing all cells which occur in one of the provider-product lists in the ENC
database. For each cell, it enters the most up-to-date status of those it finds in the provider-product lists.
This “merged” product list can be viewed and printed out, just like the product list contained on the CD
which is currently inserted:
Showing the Product List:
In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Show Product List.
In the dialog box which then opens up, select Product List on CHARTPILOT to display the “merged”
product list located in the database or Product List on CD-ROM if the product list 1) located on the
currently inserted CD is to be shown, and then press the OK button. The product list appears and can
be printed out by means of the Print button in the dialog box.

1)
If you obtain ENC cells from both Primar Stavanger and IC-ENC, you may notice that their product lists hardly differ. This is because these
two providers synchronize their product lists.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 269

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

Deleting one Product List

After the installation of the first IHO ENC cell from your new supplier we recommend to delete the Product
List from your previous supplier.
A new Product list will be installed automaticly with the next IHO ENC cell installation if neccesary .

☞ It is not possible to delete the last File from the Chartpilot!

At least one file must remain.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button ENC Other Functions.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, ENC Other Functions press the button Delete Product
List.
4. When the OK button is pressed the selected Product List will be deleted. Deletion can be prevented
by pressing the Cancel button.

Deletion of the selectet Product List Closes the window Open the helptext window

Fig. 7-10 Deletion a Product list

270 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Operating the Product List; Showing Listed Cells in the World Chart
The positions of all cells which are included in the product list are shown in the world chart, irrespective
of the navigational purposes. Cells for which permits are available are shown in green.

Contents: See text.

Prints of the product list (all pages!) Closes the list

Fig. 7-11 The product list

By clicking in the world chart, the cell located at the clicked position is marked in the list. If several
cells are available at the clicked position, this is indicated. Repeated clicking of the position marks all cells
in the list in succession. A cell can also be marked by clicking in the list.
In the world chart, the marked cell is highlighted in orange.

Internal Process of the Transfer (Transfer Function as per Section 7.3.2)

For the transfer, the program uses the list which was created in the selection menu on the right-hand side
(step 5, see ppage 257). In the case of licensed cells, this list only includes the files of cells for which
permits are available in the local database.
For each cell for which a file is listed there, first the base file is transferred and then the update files:
A base file is only transferred if the cell located in the local database is based on an older edition or on
the same one, and in the case of the same edition only if no update has been incorporated so far. An
update file is only transferred if the associated base file and all update files issued until then have already
been incorporated into the cell located on the database. Update files are therefore always transferred in
a continuously increasing order.
☞ The fact that, for each transfer, unlicensed files are converted and licensed files decrypted, decom-
pressed and converted (see B a s e F i l e s a n d U p d a t e F i l e s o f t h e C e l l s o n C D s ; C e l l F i l e s i n t h e
D a t a b a s e s on page 267) and that the contents of the update files are then incorporated into the cell
files located in the database will no longer be mentioned here every time.

The most frequent cases in which error/warning messages about the transfer process appear in the lower
list of the box which then opens are:
- Owing to a conversion error, the (base or update) file was not transferred:
ERROR: Cell ’file name’: Failed to install cell to database!
- The cell located on the database already has at least the status which would have been achieved
with the selected file:
WARNING: ’file name’: ENC Update ’a.b’ is already installed in SENC!
(a = edition of the cell; b = update No.)

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 271

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

- The selected update file cannot be transferred, because not all older update files have already been
incorporated into the cell in the database.
ERROR: ’file name’: UPDATE SEQUENCE: Can’t Update SENC ’a.b’ to Edition.Update ’a.x’!
(a = edition of the cell on which the cell located in the database is based; b = the last update No.
incorporated into the database; x = update No. of the file that lead to this message)
- For the selected update file, there is no cell on the database.
ERROR: ’file name’: Can’t update, base cell is not installed!
If it is stated in an update file that the entire associated base file is no longer valid and should be deleted,
the program halts and requests confirmation of the deletion in a separate dialog box. In addition, the
following message appears in the dialog box:
ATTENTION: ’file name’: CANCEL BASE CELL : SENC cells should be deleted!
In the case of licensed cells, it is possible that additional error/warning messages of a self-explanatory
nature are shown.

Handling of Conversion Errors

Unfortunately, faulty ENC files are available on the market, and these lead to errors during the conversion
process. It is clear that these data cannot be used to create an ENC database that is both complete and
error-free, but a database that is either as complete as possible 1) or one that is free of errors.
The program gives the operator the opportunity to decide which of the two objectives should be achieved
when conversion errors are encountered.
Moreover, thanks to detailed error reports, the program also makes it possible for the operator to decide
for each conversion error whether the faulty file should be transferred. This possibility is described under
A n a l y s i s o f C o n v e r s i o n E r r o r s on page 273.
☞ When making the decision on which objective to achieve, one should be aware that most of the
conversion errors caused by faulty files are of a formal nature and of little nautical relevance, but that
at the same time it cannot be excluded that hazardous nautical errors may possibly arise in this way.
☞ The error frequency depends on the region (and hence on the manufacturer of the files). In some
regions, the files contain so many errors 2) that only a few ENC cells would be left in an error-free
database; for this reason, only the use of a fairly complete database (but one containing errors) is
advisable in such cases.
The database should be as complete as possible:
This is done by also including cells in the database with which conversion errors have been encountered.
Here it is necessary to accept nautically relevant errors in the cell. The cells are not marked as being
faulty, and the errors are not detectable as such in the display of the cell.
This objective is achieved by activating the function Transfer on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell
Transfer before commencing the transfer or update (step 6 on page 257 or step 9 on page 259).
During the transfer or update, the files for which conversion errors occurred are listed under Errors/Warn-
ings in the dialog box. If it was not possible to transfer an ENC file (base file or update file) because of
the conversion errors, this is also reported there.
☞ Details on the errors that occurred during the last transfer of the base file and that occurred during
the transfer of the last update file are displayed in the Info box of the Chart Maintenance subroutine
(see page 274) and in the Info box which appears when the cell is used.

1)
“As complete as possible” because some files also contain errors that make conversion of the file impossible.
2)
A large error frequency is the typical result of initial problems with production. It may be assumed that the situation will improve in the short
or medium term.

272 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Starts the transfer

or update Aborts the transfer or
update

If the errors are to be analysed If the database should be as If the database should be
complete as possible free of errors

Fig. 7-12 The dialog box ENC Cell Transfer

The database should be free of errors:

With this approach, the conversion of a file is aborted as soon as the program detects an error. The corre-
sponding cells on the ENC database are therefore not updated. They do not contain any conversion
errors but content-related errors that were supposed to have been corrected through the update. To
obtain an error-free database, these cells must be deleted.
To achieve this objective, the following steps are necessary:
1. Before commencing the transfer (step 6 on page 257) or update (step 9 on page 259, or step 6 on
page 264), activate the function Skip on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer.
2. Make a note of the cells for which the following messages have appeared in the lower list of box
which opens during the transfer or update (if necessary, print out this list):
ERROR: Cell ’file name’: Failed to install cell to database!
ERROR: ’file name’: UPDATE SEQUENCE: Can’t Update SENC ’a.b’ to Edition.Update ’a.x’!
3. On all databases, delete these cells as per Section 7.3.8.
It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.3.10.

Analysis of Conversion Errors

During a transfer or update, details may be shown on the conversion errors which occurred. For each
individual conversion error which occurred, you can then decide whether the faulty file should be trans-
ferred. Alternatively, the producer should be able to use these data to clarify the nautical relevance of the
error and to correct the error in a future edition.
1. Before commencing the transfer or update (step 6 on page 257, or step 9 on page 259), activate the
function Halt on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer.
2. As soon as a conversion error occurs during the transfer or update, the program halts and the dialog
box ENC Conversion Error opens. With the button Details provided there, another dialog box is
opened with details on the conversion error which occurred. If necessary, print out the details and
close the box.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 273

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

Information about Opens a dialog box with

the faulty file detailed information about
the faulty file (for special-
ists only).
The data can also be
printed out by means of
the Print button which is
provided there.

This (faulty) file is to be This and all further (faulty) This (faulty) file is not to be This and all further (faulty)
transferred. files are to be transferred. transferred. files are not to be transferred.

Fig. 7-13 The dialog box ENC Conversion Error

3. After you have decided in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer whether the file should be transferred
despite any errors (by pressing the Transfer button) or not (by pressing the Skip button), the program
continues execution.
4. If more conversion errors occur, repeat step 2 and 3. Alternatively, continue by pressing the button
Transfer All or Skip All. For the remaining cells, this has the same effect as if the button Transfer
on Error or Skip on Error had been pressed at the start instead of Halt on Error; see H a n d l i n g o f
C o n v e r s i o n E r r o r s on page 272.
Subsequent analysis of the errors contained in the cells of the database (because the function Transfer
on Error was used during the transfer or update) is only partially possible 1). To obtain clarity on the error
situation in a systematic way, the cells of the database must be deleted and an initial installation as per
Section 7.3.2 must be carried out with the setting Halt on Error.

Displaying Information about the ENC Cells of the Local Database

When you click with the INFO key in the world chart on an ENC cell which belongs to the local ENC data-
base (this one) and is displayed in the world chart, a dialog box opens up, containing information about
the updating of this cell. With the Expand button, the dialog box can be extended by the addition of
detailed information about the ENC cell that is marked in the upper list.
With the Details of button, you specify which information is to appear additionally 2):
- Cell History: For the first issue of the cell file and for all update files that have been added: edition
of the files, and transfer date.
- Last Conversion Errors 3): The conversion errors that have occurred during transfer of the base file.
This is the same information as the information displayed in the dialog box ENC Conversion Error
by means of the Details button during transfer or update - see page 273.
- Last Conversion Messages: Information about the contents of the last base file that was trans-
ferred.
- Last Update Errors 3): The conversion errors that occurred during transfer since the last transfer of
the base file. This is the same information as the information displayed in the dialog box ENC
Conversion Error by means of the Details button during transfer or update - see page 273.

1)
One possibility is: Determine the position of the faulty cell in the world chart by marking it in the product list (see page 271) and displaying
information on this cell; see further below: D i s p l a y i n g I n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t t h e E N C C e l l s o f t h e L o c a l D a t a b a s e .
2)
Except for the Cell History, this information is available only in the ENC database of the equipment item on which the transfer and conver-
sion from the CD took place.
3)
Appears after pressing of Details of if, and only if, relevant messages or errors are present.

274 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

- Last Update Messages: Information about the contents of the changes produced by the transfer of
the last update file.
With the Print button, the content of the displayed list can be printed out.

Edition of the cell file: Date of issue of the most Date of the last transfer from the
Number before the dot: the edition of the recent update file used ENC CD to the ENC database
base file used during the last update
Number after the dot: file extension of the
most recent update file used

Name of the cell

Switches on/off the display

of the details.

Switches over to the main program

(to Planning display mode) and thus
switches on the display of the
selected electronic chart. This does
not cause switch-off of the Chart
Maintenance subroutine.

Jumps to the Manual ENC Update

editor; the update file of the marked
cell then opens up.

Printing of the information Specifying which information Detailed information about Closes the box.
contained in the list is to appear in the lower list. the file marked above

Fig. 7-14 The dialog box with detailed information about an ENC cell file of the ENC database

Displaying Further Information from the Provider of the Licensed ENC

Insert the latest ENC (Update or Base) CD into the CD drive. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
> ENC Other Functions, press the button Show README Text and, in the dialog box which then opens
up, select README.TXT on CD-ROM and press OK. The provider’s latest information appears and can
be printed out by means of the Print button in the dialog box.
If, in the dialog box, README.TXT on CHARTPILOT is selected, the information contained in the local
ENC database appears. 1)

7.3.12 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of C-MAP ENC Cells

CM-ENC CD
The ship receives the CM-ENC CD at intervals governed by the individual contract with C-MAP. For it to
be permissible to sail without paper charts, the corresponding regulations must be observed with regard
to the frequency of these updates.

1)
For each application of the Update function, the README text on the ENC CD is transferred to the ENC databases of the system and
overwrites the README text previously stored there.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 275

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions

This CM-ENC CD contains all ENC cells that are available at the time of publishing. It contains new
editions or re-issues of ENC cells, but no update cells.
Unlike the cells of the IHO ENC CDs, the ENC cells are available directly in the SENC format and there-
fore need not be compiled. This increases the speed when installing the cells.

RTU Service
In the periods between publishing of the CM-ENC CDs, C-MAP provides the RTU service as a way of
keeping the data as current as possible.
To keep the data quantities to be transferred as low as possible, only updates are provided by the RTU
service. New editions, or additional new cells, are not made available. In the same way, the updates do
not include the external reference files needed in some cases. These are separate files containing addi-
tional textual or graphic information.
For the reasons mentioned above, it is absolutely necessary to update
the database immediately when a new CM-ENC CD is received, because
only this source contains all the necessary data!

The RTU service therefore represents a useful supplement, but is no substitute for the update with the
CM-ENC CD!
In order to obtain a correct set of update cells for the data installed on the units, it is necessary to
generate a new request directly before each planned online update and to send this to the RTU server
of C-MAP.
The updates then received always refer to the CM-ENC CD installed last. For this reason, all cells
updated by RTU are replaced by the version of the cell located on the CD whenever a new CM-ENC CD
is installed, even if their date indicates that they are more up-to-date than the new CM ENC CD.
For this reason, it is urgently recommended that an online update be
performed immediately after the latest CM-ENC CD is installed.

276 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.4 Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates

7.4 Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates

At the end of the editing process, Manual ENC Updates which have been edited according to Section 5.3
are stored as a file in the local ENC database only.
The transfer that is then necessary to the other hard disk drives of the system is performed in the same
way as described in Section 7.3.3 for transfer of the ENC cells except that, as the Type, ENC - Man.
Updates is selected, and not ENC.
If a Manual ENC Update file is to be deleted and the file of the corresponding ENC cell is to remain
preserved, deletion is performed as described in Section 7.3.8 for the ENC, again with the exception that,
as the Type, ENC - Man. Updates is selected, and not ENC.
☞ If ENC cells are transferred between the equipment items, the associated Manual ENC Update files
that exist on the equipment item that is set as the source are automatically transferred too. When
ENC cells are deleted, the associated Manual ENC Update files that exist in the equipment item are
automatically deleted.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Displaying Information about the Manual ENC Update Files of the Local Database
If ENC - Man. Updates is selected as the Type, and if the INFO key is used to click on a Manual ENC
Update cell belonging to the local ENC database and displayed in the world chart, the dialog box which
then opens up displays the name of the cell and the date of the last change; see also D i s p l a y i n g I n f o r -
m a t i o n a b o u t t h e E N C C e l l s o f t h e L o c a l D a t a b a s e on page 274. With the Expand button that exists
there, the dialog box can be extended by the addition of a list which, for all editing sessions, shows which
objects have been inserted or deleted in the Manual ENC Update File.

7.5 Data Maintenance of Own Charts

Before the Own Chart cells edited according to Section 5.4 can be used in the overall system, they must
be transferred to the Own Chart databases of the individual units by means of the subroutine Chart Main-
tenance. This is done by means of the procedure described for the ENC data - see Section 7.3.3.
Deletion of the Own Chart cells too is performed in the same way as deletion of the ENC files - see
Section 7.3.8.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 277

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts Operating Instructions

7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

ARCS charts are produced exclusively by the Admiralty Raster Chart Service. They can be procured from
several different providers.
For chart maintenance, a distinction must be made between the following procedures. In special cases,
however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.6.5.
Initial installation of ARCS charts:
1. Procure an ARCS Navigator Licence from a provider, procure the necessary ARCS chart permits
from him, and install these on the local database; see Section 7.6.1.
2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.6.2, transfer all the chart files for which permits have
already been installed from the provider’s CDs to the local database.
3. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.6.3, transfer all ARCS files from the local database to
all other ARCS databases of the system.
Updating of ARCS charts:
Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all ARCS databases
of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.6.4.
Online update: If an online update is possible (see page 242), perform it at least once a week, beginning
no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD.
To do this, an Online Update CD is produced at the PC, with which the update is performed on all ARCS
databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.6.4; see also
page 242.
Installation of subsequently licensed charts:
1. Install any ARCS chart permits that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.6.1.
2. Using the Update function as per Section 7.6.4, transfer the charts to all ARCS databases of the
system in one working step.

278 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

7.6.1 Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241.

☞ All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended
for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type ARCS
must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.

Initial Installation
1. Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be taken out with a provider. Here the
system identification code and the PIN 1) are needed, and the ARCS charts to be used must be
determined.
With the chart type ARCS, the system identification code is called the User Permit Number and this
is displayed together with the PIN when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS
Licensing, the button View User Permit No. is pressed.
You can obtain the information on the available ARCS charts in various ways, e.g. through the
provider, or through the Internet.
If the provider needs other data about the system, further relevant data can be generated as an
ECDIS Passport and sent to the provider; see page 281.
2. You then receive
- the ARCS chart permits diskette (which contains the permit files, in which all permits
acquired by you are present),
- the ARCS Charts CDs of the geographical areas for which you have ordered charts (these CDs
contain all charts of the geographical area in the original state, i.e. without update),
- the current ARCS Update CD (this contains updates for all charts issued, and cumulatively the
Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners published by
the UKHO).

Installation of the permits on the ARCS databases

For the later acquisition of permits without ARCS chart permits diskette
Check of the permits installed on the local database
Data backup of the permits installed on the local database
Deletion of permits on the local database

Displaying the User Permit Number and the PIN

Displaying licensing data.
Generating an ECDIS Passport for IHO ENC data; see page 256

Fig. 7-15 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing

1)
This PIN is not a “personal” number, but denotes the type and manufacturer of the system.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 279

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts Operating Instructions

3. Installing ARCS chart permits:

Put the ARCS chart permits diskette into the diskette drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Main-
tenance > ARCS Licensing press the button Install Permits from Diskette. A request to insert the
diskette then appears; after you have answered that request with OK, the permit files containing the
permits are copied from the diskette into the local ARCS database. These processes can be
observed in a dialog box. These processes can be observed in a dialog box. The question Trans-
ferring permits to all other systems? should be answered with OK.
The files needed for the licensing process are called GB.LCN and GB.NCP. The procedure
described must also be applied if these files were received by e-mail. In this case, you must create
the ENC permits diskette yourself beforehand by transferring the received files to a DOS-formatted
diskette.
☞ If the above-mentioned files were transferred as an archive file (e.g. the .ZIP format), they must
be decompressed. Installation as described is only possible if the files with the a.m. names are
located on the diskette (if necessary, check this with a PC).
After the corresponding request, close the dialog box with Cancel.
☞ The licensing data are displayed when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS
Licensing, the button View Licence Details is pressed. A list of the permits that are now installed
is displayed when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing, the button Verify
Installed Permits is pressed. Close the dialog boxes by means of Cancel.
The initial installation can now be continued with the transfer of the cell files as per Section 7.6.2.

Renewing the ARCS Chart Permits; Procuring New Permits

If existing permits are renewed (extended) or further permits are procured later, the procedure described
above must be repeated. The corresponding chart files can then be transferred by means of the Update
function as per Section 7.6.4.
If permits are to be ordered later for further charts, and data transfer per ARCS chart permits diskette is
not appropriate or not possible (e.g. because the ship is at sea), the permit code of the charts can also
be communicated by e-mail, fax or telephone. For each chart, the appropriate dialog box must be opened
in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing by pressing Install Permit Manually, this
permit code must be entered behind Permit, and the OK button must be pressed.

Deleting Permits
ARCS chart permits are generally not deleted automatically. If expired permits are not to be renewed,
these permits must be deleted manually.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing, press the Delete Permits button.
3. In the selection menu which then opens up, transfer those permits that are indicated by the text
EXPIRED from the left-hand list to the right-hand list (for the list operating procedure, see also page
247). After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu and appropriate answering of the
resulting safeguard question, the expired permits are deleted in the local ARCS database.
If a transfer or update of ARCS charts takes place subsequently, these actions need only be performed
on the local ARCS database.
☞ If ARCS charts are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independently of
the source), all ARCS chart permits on the local database are automatically copied to the ARCS
databases to which the transfer of the charts is taking place. Here permits that are not located on
the local database are deleted on the other ARCS databases.

280 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

USEFUL INFORMATION

Checking the Installed Permits

If difficulties occur in the display of charts for which a permit exists, the permits installed in the local ARCS
database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS
Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Permits. In the dialog box which then opens up, infor-
mation about the check performed is given.
☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the permits existing
in the other ARCS databases of the system.

Performing Data Backup of the Installed Permits

Data backup can be performed for the acquired permits too: put an empty, DOS-formatted diskette into
the diskette drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing press the Permit
Backup button. The permit file is then copied from the local ARCS database to the diskette. A dialog box
then opens up, containing information about each process that is completed.

Generating the ECDIS Passport for ARCS Charts

The system data which may possibly be needed by the provider of ARCS charts are compiled in the
ECDIS Passport,. When, after a DOS-formatted diskette has been inserted into the diskette drive, the
Generate ECDIS Passport button in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing is
pressed and the entries which are then requested are performed, the data are stored as an .xml file on
the diskette, together with two other files which may needed for the interpretation of the .xml file.
☞ Parts of the content can be viewed and printed out at the PC.

New ARCS Chart Permits Diskette

Each permit is valid for two successive issues of the chart. The ARCS chart permits diskette only contains
permits for the existing current edition and for the next future edition of the chart. If a further edition
appears, UKHO supplies a new ARCS chart permits diskette whose permit file contains the most recent
permit.

Expiry of the ARCS Navigator Licence

In the last month prior to expiry of the licence, a message drawing your attention to this deadline appears
as soon as a chart is selected for display.
In the month after expiry of the licence, the charts that exist on the hard disk can still be displayed in the
usual way. However, no ARCS Update CDs are sent, and no charts can be transferred. Therefore, not
all charts are completely up-to-date. When a chart is selected for display, a message about this appears,
the Chart Status field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence exp. appears
there.
One month after expiry of the licence, it is no longer possible to display ARCS charts.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 281

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts Operating Instructions

7.6.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241 and 278.
Application:
- Initial installation of ARCS charts
With the procedure described:
- All ARCS charts 1) for which unexpired ARCS chart permits are present on the local database are
transferred to the local database and updated there.
- All ARCS chart permits located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases,
whereas permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ARCS data-
bases.
- The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners provided on the ARCS
Update CD are transferred to the local database.
Preparations:
- Install all permits to the local database as per Section 7.6.1.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.
2. Put the most recent ARCS Update CD into the CD drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Mainte-
nance set CD-ROM as the Source. If a message relating to the table of contents appears, answer
it with OK.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no
frame shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and
press the Transfer button again.
4. Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).
☞ Under Charts/Plans to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
5. In the Transfer menu, press the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all
the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.
6. In the selection menu, press the OK button. The dialog box Transferring ARCS Charts appears.
7. After the corresponding request, insert the requested CD and resume the transfer with OK.
8. If the charts that are to be transferred are distributed over several CDs, procedure 7 is repeated
accordingly.
9. On completion of the transfer, start the update of the local database by pressing the OK button after
the corresponding request.
10. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in a dialog box), close the dialog
box Transferring ARCS Charts by means of the Cancel button.

1)
Together with the included plans

282 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

7.6.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241 and 278.
Application:
- Initial installation of ARCS charts
With the procedure described:
- All ARCS charts 1) located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases of the
system;
- All ARCS chart permits located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases,
whereas permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ARCS data-
bases.
- The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners located on the local
database are transferred to all other ARCS databases.
Preparations:
- The transfer as per Section 7.6.2 must have been carried out.
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the CHARTPILOT that is currently
being operated (this one).
3. In the world chart, pull open the largest possible frame (up to the margin) and press the Transfer
button.
4. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
☞ Under Charts/Plans to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
5. In the Transfer menu, press the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all
the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.
6. After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote
Transfer of ARCS Charts appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and
in the lower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.
7. When the transfer process has finished, press the Cancel button after the corresponding request.

1)
Together with the included plans

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 283

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts Operating Instructions

7.6.4 Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241 and 278.
Application:
- Update of ARCS charts in all ARCS databases of the system after receiving a new ARCS Update
CD or after generating an Online Update CD.
- Installation of ARCS charts for subsequently procured permits on all ARCS databases of the system.
With the procedure described, the following actions are carried out on all ARCS databases:
- All charts are updated for which there are unexpired permits on the local database. 1) (If new permits
were installed there in the meantime, the corresponding charts are also transferred and updated.)
- All ARCS charts for which there are no permits, or only expired permits, on the local database are
deleted (after a safeguard question).
- All obsolete ARCS charts that are no longer supported are deleted (after a safeguard question).
- All ARCS chart permits located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases,
whereas permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ARCS data-
bases.
- The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners located on the ARCS
Update CD are transferred to all other ARCS databases.
Preparations:
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
- Permits that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as
per Section 7.6.1.
- Expired permits that are not to be renewed must have been deleted in the local database; see page
280.
- For an online update: The Online Update CD was produced. It must cover all charts that are to be
updated.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.
2. Put the Online Update CD or the most recent ARCS Update CD into the CD drive.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD-ROM as the Source. If a message about the
table of contents appears, answer it with OK.
4. Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance >
Update opens 2). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
5. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog
box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest ARCS update CD. If you
have not done this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the
dialog box Type of Update opens up.
6. In the dialog box Type of Update, press the button Update based upon installed permits.
☞ For the function of the button Update based upon installed charts, see page 286.
7. In the dialog box Type of Update, press the OK button. As a result, the update process is started
and the dialog box Updating ARCS Chart Database opens up.
8. If another CD has to be inserted, a request to do that appears in an additional dialog box.

1)
When using the Online Update CD, this applies only for the charts downloaded when generating the Online Update CD.
2)
Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

284 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

9. If the program detects that the local ARCS database contains charts that are no longer supported,
or for which the permit has expired, or for which no permit exists, an appropriate message is shown.
After confirmation, a selection menu appears in which these charts are listed on the left. It is recom-
mended that these charts be deleted (use Add All >> to enter all charts into the right-hand column
and then press OK). The deletion is then carried out in all databases of the system.
10. When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating
ARCS Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.
11. With an additional check, you can make sure that the update on the local database was successful:
In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Other Functions, press the button Verify
Installed Charts. A selection menu appears in which all charts installed on the local database are
listed on the left. If all charts are to be checked use Add All >> to enter all charts into the right-hand
column and then press OK. In the dialog box which then opens, the message No errors found must
be shown, to indicate a successful update.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Data Existing on an ARCS Update CD

Each ARCS Update CD contains the following data which are up-to-date at the time of issuing of the CD:
- The complete catalog of the charts issued by UKHO. It contains, among other things, the informa-
tion indicating which CD contains which chart.
- The areas (or tiles, according to ARCS terminology) of all ARCS charts issued that have changed
relative to the files contained in the most recent ARCS Charts CDs.
- All charts which have been completely changed or issued anew after the issuing of the most recent
ARCS Charts CDs.
- The most recent Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners.
- Further data which are necessary for proper execution of the update.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 285

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts Operating Instructions

7.6.5 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update

In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.6.2 to 7.6.4 for the
transfer and update:

Initial Installation of the ARCS charts using the Update Function

The initial installation of the ARCS charts can also be performed as per Section 7.6.4, if all permits for
the charts to be installed were installed (as per Section 7.6.1) on at least the local database beforehand.
This approach is particularly advantageous when no MULTIPILOT 1000 is installed or when only a few
charts are to be installed.
If MULTIPILOTs 1000 are available and more than just a few charts are to be installed, it is advisable to
mark in step 4 under Destination only CHARTPILOT (this one) and then to perform the transfer to all
other databases as per Section 7.6.3.

No MULTIPILOT 1000 is Installed in the System

The initial installation of ARCS charts is most easily performed with the Update function; see above.

Not All Charts for Which Permits are Available are to be Installed
☞ In this case, the initial installation is not possible by means of the Update function (see above).
With the initial installation as per Section 7.6.2, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the selec-
tion procedure, see Section 7.2.6. Then perform the transfer as per Section 7.6.3 to all other databases.
Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also be carried out for new charts for which
permits were received later.
With the update as per Section 7.6.4, the function Update based upon installed charts must in this
case be selected in step 6.
If charts were replaced by other charts through UKHO, the replaced charts are proposed for deletion
during the update (and should also be deleted), but the replacement charts are not automatically trans-
ferred (because the setting “Update based upon installed charts” was selected). They must therefore
be transferred to the local database before the update as per Section 7.6.2. In such a case, you will auto-
matically be sent an ARCS chart permits diskette 1) by UKHO. The information about which new charts
must be transferred is given on the info sheet supplied with the diskette.
If not all charts have already been installed, it is also advisable to transfer only the replacement charts
which belong to the region covered by the installed charts. This is achieved when a regional selection
(Section 7.2.6.3) is performed before the selection by chart names (Section 7.2.6.1).

1)
The permits of such new charts can also be contained on a permits diskette which you are still expecting (because permits have been
renewed or new ones have been ordered).

286 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

7.6.6 Deleting ARCS Charts

Application:
There are so many reasons why it may be necessary to delete ARCS charts from the databases that they
cannot be listed here. Reference to the necessity of deleting ARCS charts is made at the corresponding
points.
By means of the following procedure, it is possible to delete any desired selection of ARCS charts on
each ARCS database that exists in the system. Permits are not deleted in this process.

Deleting Selected Charts

The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
charts are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
3. If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corre-
sponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.
4. If no frame was drawn in step 3, the number of charts and plans on the database are shown in the
Delete menu, grouped according to navigational purpose. If a frame was drawn, it is possible to
select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the button Include
Touched Charts/Plans, it can be specified there whether only those charts and plans are to be
deleted that are situated completely within the frame, or also those charts and plans that are only
touched by the frame.
☞ Because the plans located on a chart are stored in the file of the chart, the chart and the plans
it contains are always processed together. If a plan is selected for deletion, then the chart on
which the plan is situated and all other plans contained in the chart are also selected for dele-
tion, even if they lie outside of the defined region.
To prevent charts / plans outside the defined region from being deleted, the selected charts /
plans are displayed in the world chart (in succession for each navigational purpose). In the case
of charts / plans that lie outside the defined region and should therefore not be deleted, click on
them with the INFO key to determine the chart number and then remove this chart from the
right-hand list of the selection menu after performing step 5.
5. In the Delete menu, press the OK button and then, in the selection menu which opens, perform the
selection according to chart names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.
6. When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the charts listed in the right-hand list are
deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the
Cancel button.

Deleting All ARCS Charts of a Database

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
charts are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame
shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu.
4. In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all
ARCS charts are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be
prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 287

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION

Meaning of the Status Display in the Selection Menu

No entry: The permit is installed and valid, i.e. the chart is available for display.
EXPIRED: The permit has expired; it is not certain that the chart is completely up-to-date.
NO PERM: The chart is installed, but a valid permit no longer exists. It is not certain that the chart
is completely up-to-date. Presumably, the permit has been deleted and can be
installed again.
OBSOLETE: The chart has been removed from the ARCS catalog. It is no longer being supported
by UKHO with the aid of updates, and should be deleted.

7.6.7 Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item

If an update was not performed on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, the non-updated databases
must be updated as soon as possible.
The simplest approach is to perform an update as per Section 7.6.4 from a CHARTPILOT with an ARCS
database that has already been updated to the ARCS database that has not yet been updated. Here only
the non-updated CHARTPILOT / MULTIPILOT should be marked in step 4.

288 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

The CM-93/3Pro chart is exclusively published by the company C-MAP.

Chart maintenance for the CM-93/3Pro chart comprises the following operations:
Initial Installation of the CM-93/3Pro Chart
1. If there are no CM-93/3Pro licences, procure these for the desired zones or areas from SAM Elec-
tronics. Then install the licences you receive on the local database. See Section 7.7.1.
2. Transfer all the CM-93/3Pro cell files for which the licences apply from the provider’s CDs 1) to the
local database, as per Section 7.7.2.
3. Now transfer all CM-93/3Pro cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/3Pro databases of
the system, as per Section 7.7.3.
If large volumes of data are to be transferred, this process may take a very long time: The entire
CM-93/3Pro chart consists of approx. 15,000 cells, and the transfer to several CHARTPILOTs and/
or MULTIPILOTs can take many hours. If this period of time is not available, it is advisable to transfer
only the cells of the region that is to be sailed first (for the procedure, see page 301).
By the first regular update, at the latest, all cells should have been transferred in this way. The
reason: when the CM-93/3Pro CD is used, the Update function always transfers all those licensed
cells that are not yet contained in the databases. If large numbers of cells are missing from the data-
bases, the update will take correspondingly longer.
Updating the CM-93/3Pro Cells:
Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all CM-93/3Pro data-
bases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5.
Online update: If an online update is possible (see page 242), perform it at least once a week, beginning
no later than one week after last receiving a CM-93/3Pro CD.
To do this, an Online Update CD is produced at the PC, with which the update is performed on all CM-
93/3Pro databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5;
see also page 242. The online update of the CM-93/3Pro cells begins with the generation of the RTU
request as per Section 7.7.4.
Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells:
1. Using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5, perform an update on all CM-93/3Pro databases of
the system in one working step.
2. Install any CM-93/3Pro licences that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.7.1.
3. If only a few cells were licensed subsequently: Using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5,
transfer the cells to all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system in one working step.
If many cells were licensed subsequently: Use the Transfer function as per Section 7.7.2 and Section
7.7.3 as for the initial installation, step 2 and 3.

1) The data media to which the CM-93/3Pro cells are transferred are in fact DVDs. Because this distinction is irrelevant for the actual handling,
the term “CD” is used both in the user interface of the CHARTPILOT (e.g. Source: CD-ROM) and in these Operating Instructions. Therefore,
only CHARTPILOTs equipped with a DVD drive are able to handle CM-93/3Pro charts.
CM-93/3Pro DVDs that are suitable for use at the CHARTPILOT are marked as Only readable in SAM Electronics systems. There are
older CHARTPILOT versions, where unpredictable errors may occur if other DVDs are used.
There are older CHARTPILOT versions with a CM-93/3Pro database, on which CM-93/3Pro charts can hence be displayed but which cannot
access the CM-93/3Pro CD. Such a CHARTPILOT is therefore not suitable for this work; it must be supplied with these data by means of
step 3.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 289

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Operating Instructions

7.7.1 Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241.

☞ All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended
for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type CM-93/
3Pro must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.
The CM-93/3Pro chart is divided into ten zones, and has divided up each zone into a different number
of areas. Each cell of the CM-93/3Pro chart is assigned to an area.
For this chart type, two different licence types are available:
- Subscription licences: These utilization rights are limited in time, and also include the supply of
updates during the period of use.
- Purchase licences: These are time-unlimited rights to use the cells of a certain edition.
Before deciding on a Purchase Licence, it is essential to consider the following:
- Within a particular system, only one of the licence types can be used for the CM-93/3Pro Chart.
- All purchase licences refer to the editions of the cells located on a certain CD. If a purchase licence
is obtained subsequently for another region, this licence also refers to the editions of the cells
located on the CD supplied for the first purchase licence. However, these cells may already be obso-
lete by this time.
- If a change is made later from purchase licences to subscription licences, none of the purchase
licences procured previously can be used after that (not even on other systems).
- Cells used on the basis of a purchase licence can only be updated by using a new purchase licence.

Licences Provided with Hardware (Test Licence)

For some of the CHARTPILOTs installed after introduction of the chart type CM-93/3Pro, a subscription
licence for all available cells (Zone 0) is included in the scope of supply. This test licence has a validity
of 6 months, beginning at its activation.
For these systems, a CM-93/3Pro CD 1) is already provided and the corresponding licence is already
installed. So it is possible to start the initial installation, see page 289. If you intend to continue using the
CM-93/3Pro chart after expiry of this licence, the desired licences can be procured as described in
Section 7.7.1.1.

7.7.1.1 First Procurement of Subscription Licences

Procurement of the licences is supported by the subroutine Chart Maintenance. If you do not wish to use
the assistance of SAM Electronics, please proceed as follows:

Procurement of the CM-93/3Pro CD

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.
2. Acknowledge the request to insert a CD with OK.
3. Answer the question posed in the subsequent dialog box (i.e. whether a CD is to be delivered) with
OK.

1)
If the CD provided is no longer up-to-date when the system is delivered, please contact SAM Electronics to request the current version of
the CD.

290 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

4. Then a box appears with the request to insert a diskette. Now, at the latest, insert a DOS-formatted
diskette into the diskette drive and press the OK button.
5. As a result, the file USER.USR is generated; this contains the system ID (this is the system identi-
fication code described in Section 7.2.2). A box appears to report this process. After the corre-
sponding request, close it with Cancel.
6. Send the diskette or the file USER.USR to SAM Electronics 1). You will then receive the CM-93/
3Pro CD.
☞ If you already know which zones and/or areas you need, you can order the licences at the same
time, by specifying the desired zones and/or areas and the licence type when you send the
USER.USR file. You will then receive the codes of the requested licences together with the CM-
93/3Pro CD and can dispense with the steps described below.

Selecting the Zones and Areas and Procuring the Subscription Licences
1. After receiving the CD, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing in the menu Utilities > Chart Main-
tenance.
2. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD into the drive and confirm the request to do so with
OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been read in.
3. In the CM-93/3Pro Licensing menu, press the Subscription Licence button.
4. In the Subscription Licence menu which then opens, select the regions by choosing the corre-
sponding zone or area in the frames Zone Selection and Area Selection and entering it into the list
Selected Regions, and then repeating the procedure for all desired regions.
Details:
- When opening the menu, Zone 0 is selected. Zone 0 denotes the entire surface of the earth; it
therefore contains the zones 1 to 9, with the boundaries indicated.
- To be able to select an area within the frame Area Selection, the corresponding zone (1 to 9)
must have been selected in the frame Zone Selection.
- The zone or area selected last is displayed as a hatched region in the world chart.
- The buttons Next and Prev. can be used to select each zone or area in sequence.
- The Add/Remove button is then used to enter the selected zone or area into the list Selected
Regions. Repeated pressing deletes the entry.
- The entries in the list can also be deleted by marking them and then pressing the button
Remove from List.
- The boundaries of the zones and areas entered in the list are displayed in the world chart, with
their water areas appearing dark-blue.
- If licences are already installed on the CHARTPILOT, the corresponding zones and areas are
also shown. In the list, the corresponding expiry date of the subscription licence (yyyy-mm-dd)
is also displayed, whereas for purchase licences the indication (purchased) is shown.
5. In the Subscription Licence menu, press the Write Licence Request button.
6. Now, at the latest, insert a DOS-formatted diskette 2) into the diskette drive and confirm the request
to do so with OK.

1)
address see page 2.
2)
or the diskette used for requesting the CM-93/3Pro CD

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 291

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Operating Instructions

7. As a result, the file USER.USR (containing the system ID) is generated, together with the file
AREA.REQ, which contains the licence type and the data of the selected regions. These activities
are indicated in a dialog box. Acknowledge the completion message with OK, and close the box with
Cancel.
8. Send the diskette or the two files by e-mail to SAM Electronics 1), and apply for the licences.

Selection of the zones

Number of the currently selected zone

This marks the next or previous zone by means of hatching.

Enters the currently hatched zone into the list Selected

Regions, or deletes this list entry

Selects the area (with operating analogous to zone selection)

The list contains:

- the selected zones and areas (without the date)
- the zones and areas for which licences have already been
installed (with the date on which the licence expires)
Deletes the entries marked in the list

Generates the files for procuring the licences

Fig. 7-16 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Subscription Licence

Procurement of Subscription licences

Procurement of Purchase licences

Installation of the existing licences on the inserted diskette – see page 293

Installation of licences through manual entry of the licence codes - see page 294

Check of the licences installed on the local database - see page 296
Deletion of CM-93/3Pro licences on the local database - see page 295

Fig. 7-17 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing

1)
address see page 2.

292 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7.1.2 First Procurement of Purchase Licences

☞ Purchase licences cannot be installed if subscription licences are already installed; see page 291.
Purchase licences are procured in the same way as subscription licences, with the sole distinction that
the Purchase Licence menu is used instead of the Subscription Licence menu (press Purchase
Licence in step 3).

7.7.1.3 Subsequent Procurement of Further Licences

The subsequent procurement of licenses is carried out in the same way as the first procurement
described above.
Here the following must be observed: If you intend to continue using the licences applied thus far, the
licences to be procured subsequently must be of the same type. If purchase licences are procured subse-
quently, these must refer to the same CD to which the existing licences already refer. To exclude misun-
derstandings, it is advisable to mention in your request for subsequent Purchase Licenses that purchase
licences are already in use, with indication of the issue date of the CD to which they refer.

7.7.1.4 Installing the Licences

This section applies independently of the licence type and irrespective of whether the licences were
procured for the first time, whether subscription licences were extended, and whether the licences were
provided or procured additionally.
Depending on what was agreed, you will receive the licences
- as the file PASSWORD.USR on diskette or by e-mail, or
- in the form of the licence code by e-mail or by telephone.
The entry procedures to be applied are therefore different. Refer to A) how to read in the licences by
diskette. Refer to B) for manual entry of the 16 character licence code.

A) Installing the Licences Contained on the Diskette

With this procedure, all existing licences are always installed.
This procedure must also be applied if the file PASSWORD.USR was received by e-mail. In this case,
you must create the CM-93/3Pro licence diskette yourself beforehand, by transferring the received file to
a DOS-formatted diskette.
☞ If the above-mentioned file was transferred as an archive file (e.g. the .ZIP format), it must first be
decompressed. Installation as described is only possible if the file with the a.m. name is located on
the licence diskette (if necessary, check this with a PC).
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.
2. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive and confirm the request
to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been
read in.
☞ If a subsequently procured purchase licence is to be installed, the CD to which the earlier
purchase licences refer must be inserted.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Install
Licences from Diskette.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 293

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Operating Instructions

4. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro licence diskette into the drive and confirm the corre-
sponding request with OK.
5. The activities are shown in the dialog box which then opens. Successful installation of the licences
is reported in another box. Confirm this. Acknowledge the box with the completion message, and use
Cancel to close the dialog box that opened first.

B) Installing the Licences through Manual Entry of the Licence Codes

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.
2. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive and confirm the request
to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been
read in.
☞ If a subsequently procured purchase licence is to be installed, the CD to which the earlier
purchase licences refer must be inserted.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Install
Licences Manually.
4. In the menu Install Licences Manually which then opens, select the zone or area for which a
licence code is available and insert it under Licence Code for:. This is done the aid of the button
provided in the frames Zone Selection and Area Selection; see page 291.
5. Under Enter Licence Code, type in the 16-digit licence code and press the Apply button. A dialog
box will then report that the licence has been installed. Acknowledge the completion message with
OK, and close the box with Cancel.
6. If more licences are to be installed, repeat step 4 and 5.

Specifies the region for which the licence is to be installed

For operating sequences, see page 291

Region for which the licence is to be installed

Here you enter the licence code received for the region.
Installs the entered licences

List contains the zones and areas for which licences have already been installed:
- Subscription licences with indication of the licence expiry date
- Purchase licences with the remark (Purchased)

Fig. 7-18 The menu ... > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Install Licences Manually

294 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7.1.5 Useful Information about Licensing

Deleting of Licences
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.
2. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive and confirm the request
to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been
read in.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Delete
Licences.
4. In the Delete Licences menu, mark the licences to be deleted and then press the button Delete
Licence(s).
5. Confirm the safeguard question. A dialog box will then show that the marked licences have been
deleted on all CM-93/3Pro databases. Acknowledge the completion message with OK, and close the
box with Cancel.
If a transfer or update of CM-93/3Pro cells takes place subsequently, these actions need only be
performed on the local CM-93/3Pro database.
☞ If CM-93/3Pro cells are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independ-
ently of the source), all CM-93/3Pro licences on the local database are automatically copied to the
CM-93/3Pro databases to which the transfer of the charts is taking place. Here licences that are not
located on the local database are deleted on the other CM-93/3Pro databases.

End of the Subscription Licence

C-MAP has defined two expiry dates for the end of a subscription licence:
- Subscription expiry date: After this date, no more updates are performed,
and two month later
- Licence expiry date: After this date, the cells are no longer displayed.
One month before the subscription expiry date, a message about the subscription expiry date is shown
as soon as a CM-93/3Pro cell affected by this date is displayed.
From the subscription expiry date until the licence expiry date, a message about the licence expiry date
is shown as soon as a CM-93/3Pro cell affected by this date is displayed. In addition, the Chart Status
field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence appears there.
☞ This behaviour also applies for any 6-month test licence which may have been supplied with the
hardware, see page 290. With this licence, the first message about the subscription expiry date
already appears 3 months after the start of the licence period, but the CM-93/Pro chart can be used
for a total duration of 6 months.
From the licence expiry date, there is a corresponding message as soon as a region affected by this date
is shown in the chart display with the CM-93/3Pro chart selected. In addition, the Chart Status field of the
navigation data line becomes red, and the display Licence appears there.

Checking the CD
If problems occur when accessing the CM-93/3Pro CD, it is possible to check the consistency of the data
contained there. This is done by means of the function Validate Data on CD-ROM provided in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions.
☞ This check can take 30 minutes. During this time, the CHARTPILOT cannot be used for other
purposes.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 295

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Operating Instructions

Showing Information about the CD

The properties of the CD can be displayed by means of the function View CD-ROM Version provided in
the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions.

Checks the consistency of the data on the CD-ROM

Shows the information about the CD

Shows the system ID

Checking the installed cells; see page 302

Deletion of the complete ENC database; see page 244

Fig. 7-19 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions

Checking the Installed Licences

If difficulties occur in the display of cells for which a licence exists, the licences installed in the local CM-
93/3Pro database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-
93/3Pro Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Licences. In the dialog box which then opens
up, information about the check performed is given.
☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the licences existing
in the other CM-93/3Pro databases of the system.

Showing the System ID

The system ID can be displayed by means of the function View System ID provided on the menu Utilities
> Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions. It uniquely identifies the system installed on board
your ship with regard to the installation of the CM-93/3Pro chart, and may be needed for servicing
purposes.

296 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from CD to Local Database

☞ For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 241 and 251.
☞ It is not permissible to have cells from different versions of the CM-93/3Pro CD installed on the same
system. For this reason, the following important condition applies for the transfer function: If the data-
base into which new cells are to be transferred already contains cells, both these and the new cells
must originate from the same CD.
Application:
- Initial installation of CM-93/3Pro cells
With the procedure described:
- All CM-93/3Pro cells existing on the CD being used are transferred to the local database and
updated there.
Preparations:
- Install all CM-93/3Pro licences to the local database, as per Section 7.7.1.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.
2. Put the CM-93/3Pro CD into the CD drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance set CD-
ROM as the Source. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no
frame shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and
press the Transfer button again.
4. Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).
☞ Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
5. In the Transfer menu, click the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all
the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.
6. After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, transfer and data conversion begin. The
dialog box Transferring CM-93/3Pro Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking
place is listed, and in the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer and conversion
process are listed.
7. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Transferring CM-
93/3Pro Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.
It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.7.8.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 297

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Operating Instructions

7.7.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases

☞ For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 241 and 251.
☞ It is not permissible to have cells from different versions of the CM-93/3Pro CD installed on the same
system. For this reason, the following important condition applies for the transfer function: If the data-
base into which new cells are to be transferred already contains cells, both these and the new cells
must originate from the same CD.
Application:
- Initial installation of CM-93/3Pro cells
With the procedure described:
- All CM-93/3Pro cells located in the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro databases of
the system.
- All CM-93/3Pro licences located on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro data-
bases, whereas licences that are not on the local database are deleted from the other CM-93/3Pro
databases.
Preparations:
- The transfer as per Section 7.7.2 must have been carried out.
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the equipment item that is currently
being operated (this one).
3. Press the Transfer button. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
☞ Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
4. In the Transfer menu, press the OK button. The transfer begins. The dialog box Remote Transfer
of CM-93/3Pro Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in
the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.
5. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Remote Transfer
of CM-93/3Pro Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.
It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.7.8.

7.7.4 Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC

☞ For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 241 and 251.
☞ The procedure can be performed by any owner of a subscription licence. A special registration is not
required.
IMPORTANT:
This online update does not replace the regular updates. Even if online
updates are performed at regular intervals, an update must still be
carried out with every new CD received from C-MAP.

298 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

The Real Time Update is performed in three steps:

1. Generating the RTU request; see below.
2. Producing the Online Update CD 1); see below.
3. Performing the update as per Section 7.7.5.
A prerequisite for successful updating by RTU is that an update according to Section 7.7.5 must have
been performed completely and successfully with the last CD received from C-MAP.

Generating the RTU Request and Producing the Online Update CD

1. Put a DOS-formatted diskette into the diskette drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
> CM-93/3Pro Other Functions press the button Generate RTU Request. After the request to
insert the diskette has been answered with OK, an RTU request is generated and written to the
diskette as a file with the name CM93-3_[date]_[UTC].org. This process can be observed in a
dialog box.
2. When this file is sent as the attachment of an e-mail to the C-MAP RTU server, the server then
returns one or more e-mails after a short while, each with one or more files attached.
☞ The e-mail address must be requested from C-MAP or, alternatively, it may be obtained from
the C-MAP homepage on the Internet.
☞ The entire process is automatic. Any message in the body of the own e-mail is ignored. The file
name is used to indicate how many files belong in total to this update:
u001x002.ans

Number of files belonging to this update

Sequential number of this file

3. Producing the Online Update CD: Label a CD (best done by including the chart type and date) and
burn all the files received to this CD.
Use this Online Update CD to perform an update as per Section 7.7.5.

7.7.5 Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241 and 251.
Application:
- Update of all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system after receiving a new CM-93/3Pro CD or for a
Real Time Update (after generating the Online Update CD).
- Installation of CM-93/3Pro cells for post-procured licences in all CM-93/3Pro databases of the
system.
- After an initial installation has been performed step by step (see page 301), check to ensure that all
licensed cells have been transferred.
With the procedure described:
- Expired licences are deleted in the local database.
- All CM-93/3Pro licences located then on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro data-
bases, whereas licences that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other CM-
93/3Pro databases.
- On all CM-93/3Pro database, all cells are updated for which licences are available there.
- Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted on all CM-93/3Pro databases.

1)
If the data volume is low, the data can also be transferred to a diskette. The term “Online Update CD” is then understood to mean this
diskette in the following.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 299

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Operating Instructions

Preparations:
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
- Licences that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as
per Section 7.7.1.
- For a Real Time Update: The Online Update CD was produced in accordance with Section 7.7.4.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.
2. Put the most recent CM-93/3Pro CD or the Online Update CD into the CD drive.
If a new CM-93/3Pro CD has been received with which no update has been performed yet, this CD
must always be used.
This also applies when its issue date lies before the date of the last online update that was
performed. In this case, perform an online update again (with a renewed update request) after
carrying out the update with the CM-93/3Pro CD.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD-ROM as the Source. If a message about the
table of contents appears, answer it with OK.
4. Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance >
Update opens 1). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
5. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog
box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest CD. If you have not done
this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the update process
is started and the dialog box Updating CM-93/3Pro Chart Database opens up.
6. When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating
CM-93/3Pro Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.
It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.7.8.
If the update was aborted for some reason, then the databases will contain cells from different CD
versions. Therefore the update must be initiated again as soon as possible and brought to completion.

1)
Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

300 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7.6 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update

In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.7.2 to 7.7.5 for the
transfer and update:

The required time is not available for the initial installation

If, before the first use of the CM-93/3Pro chart, there is not enough time for a complete initial installation,
it is possible to use the Transfer function to transfer only the cells of the region which will be sailed next.
With the initial installation as per Section 7.7.2, an appropriate selection can be performed; for the selec-
tion procedure, see Section 7.2.6. Then perform the transfer as per Section 7.7.3 to all other databases.
As soon as there is sufficient time, the other licensed regions should be installed in the same manner,
but at the latest when the first regular update is due; see the note on page 289.
The cells that were not included by the consecutive selections are installed during the next update as per
Section 7.7.5. If you do not wish to wait for the next scheduled update, the CD received most recently
can be used for this purpose.

7.7.7 Deleting CM-93/3Pro Cells

Application:
By means of the following procedures, it is possible to delete any desired selection of CM-93/3Pro cells
on each CM-93/3Pro database that exists in the system.

Deleting Selected Cells

The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
3. If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corre-
sponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.
4. It is possible to select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the
button Include Touched Cells, it can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted
that are situated completely within the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.
5. In the Delete menu, press the OK button and then, in the selection menu which opens, perform the
selection according to cell names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.
6. When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the cells listed in the right-hand list are
deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the
Cancel button.

Deleting All CM-93/3Pro Cells of a Database

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame
shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 301

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Operating Instructions

4. In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all CM-
93/3Pro cells are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be
prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

7.7.8 Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed

After an update and whenever there are doubts about the consistency or up-to-dateness of the database,
the databases should be checked by means of the following function.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions, press the button Verify
Installed Cells.
2. Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under
Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.
3. At the latest, insert the CD-ROM and click the OK button in the box with the corresponding request.
4. As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found,
the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a reports on the errors is provided
in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box.
☞ Because only cell files, but no external reference files are transferred during a Real Time
Update, the message WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing!
is shown for all cells updated by RTU for which additional files are intended. At the next regular
update, the external reference files are transferred and so these messages are no longer
shown. If this message still appears after a regular update, it is advisable to ask the provider
about the possible cause.

7.7.9 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of C-MAP ENC Cells

CM-93/3Pro CD
The ship receives the CM-93/3Pro CD at intervals governed by the individual contract with C-MAP. For
it to be permissible to sail without paper charts, the corresponding regulations must be observed with
regard to the frequency of these updates.
This CM-93/3Pro CD contains all CM-93/3Pro cells that are available at the time of publishing. It contains
new editions or re-issues of CM-93/3Pro cells, but no update cells.

RTU Service
In the periods between publishing of the CM-93/3Pro CDs, C-MAP provides the RTU service as a way of
keeping the data as current as possible.
To keep the data quantities to be transferred as low as possible, only updates are provided by the RTU
service. New editions, or additional new cells, are not made available. In the same way, the updates do
not include the external reference files needed in some cases. These are separate files containing addi-
tional textual or graphic information.
For the reasons mentioned above, it is absolutely necessary to update
the database immediately when a new CM-93/3Pro CD is received,
because only this source contains all the necessary data!

The RTU service therefore represents a useful supplement, but is no substitute for the update with the
CM-93/3Pro CD!

302 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

In order to obtain a correct set of update cells for the data installed on the units, it is necessary to
generate a new request directly before each planned online update and to send this to the RTU server
of C-MAP.
The updates then received always refer to the CM-93/3Pro CD installed last. For this reason, all cells
updated by RTU are replaced by the version of the cell located on the CD whenever a new CM-93/3Pro
CD is installed, even if their date indicates that they are more up-to-date than the new CM-93/3Pro CD.
For this reason, it is urgently recommended that an online update be
performed immediately after the latest CM-93/3Pro CD is installed.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 303

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart Operating Instructions

7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

The CM-93/2 chart is exclusively published by the company C-MAP.

Chart maintenance for the CM-93/2 chart comprises the following operations:
Initial Installation of the CM-93/2 Chart
1. Take out a subscription for the desired zones or areas from SAM Electronics and then install the
CM-93/2 Authorization Code you receive on the local database; see Section 7.8.1.
2. Transfer all the CM-93/2 cell files for which the Authorization Code applies from the provider’s CDs
to the local database, as per Section 7.8.2.
3. Now transfer all CM-93/2 cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/2 databases of the
system, as per Section 7.8.3.
Updating of the CM-93/2 Chart
1. On the local database, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5 1).
2. Transfer all the CM-93/2 cell files for which the Authorization Code applies from the newest CDs to
the local database, as per Section 7.8.2.
3. On all other databases, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5 1).
4. Now transfer all CM-93/2 cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/2 databases of the
system, as per Section 7.8.3.
Purchasing and Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells: As for I n i t i a l I n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e C M - 9 3 / 2
Chart

7.8.1 Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241.

☞ All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended
for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type CM-93/2
must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.
Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be arranged with SAM Electronics to cover
one or more particular geographical areas. With this chart type, the system identification code (see
Section 7.2.2) and geographical areas are combined to form the CM-93/2 User Code. This code must
be generated at one of the CHARTPILOTs of the system on which the CM-93/2 chart is to be used; see
below. You will be sent the CM-93/2 CDs when the subscription has been taken out.
When you send the CM-93/2 User Code to your contractual partner, you will be given the CM-93/2
Authorization Code, with which you can then activate the subscription in the system; see below.

The CM-93/2 chart is divided into nine zones, and has divided up each zone into a different number of
areas. Each cell of the CM-93/2 chart is assigned to an area. If you wish to obtain cells of the CM-93/2
chart, you can take out a subscription for all zones, for one or more zones, or for one or more areas.

Generating CM-93/2 User Code

1. Put one of the CM-93/2 CDs into the CD drive.
2. Call up the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription. In the world chart which
then appears, Zone 1 is displayed as a hatched region. If an existing subscription has already been
activated, the corresponding regions are marked dark blue.

1)
See page 308: S a v i n g T i m e w i t h t h e U p d a t e

304 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription, indicate under Selection by
whether you have taken out a subscription for zones or for areas.

Time at which the subscription was last activated

Specifies whether only zones or only areas are selected.

Number of the currently selected zone
Number of the currently selected area within the currently selected zone
This marks the next or previous zone or area by means of hatching.

Enters the currently hatched zone or area into the list of regions that are to be covered
by the subscription, or deletes this list entry (the regions entered in the list are displayed
dark blue in the world chart).

CM-93/2 User Code

From the list of regions to be covered by the subscription, and from
other data, this generates the CM-93/2 User Code.

Input field for the CM-93/2 password

Activates the subscription.

Cancels the subscription.

Fig. 7-20 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription

4. With the buttons + and –, mark under Selection all subscribed zones or areas by means of hatching,
and in each case press Add/Remove until all subscribed-for zones or areas are marked dark blue
on the world chart. When doing this, note the numbers of the marked zones or areas.
By pressing Add/Remove again, marking can be cancelled.
5. Press the Generate User Code button. The 18-place CM-93/2 User Code is then displayed to you
above this button.
☞ The menu can be exited by clicking on the Chart Maintenance button, which is situated above
the menu.
6. To obtain the CM-93/2 Authorization Code, send this CM-93/2 User Code to the department from
which the subscription was obtained,
IMPORTANT:
Note not only the User Code but also - and without fail - all numbers of
the zones or areas covered by your subscription. You will need these
numbers so that you can activate the subscription.

Entering the Authorization Code; Activating the Subscription

After the 16-place CM-93/2 Authorization Code has been received, the subscription can be activated:
1. Generate the User Code again by marking all zones or areas covered by the subscription - see
above. If, in this process, the same zones/areas are marked as in the first-time generation of the
User Code, the same User Code must also be displayed. Compare the User Codes!

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 305

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart Operating Instructions

2. Under Authorization Code, input the Authorization Code received, and press Activate Subscrip-
tion. The transfer of the files of the zones or areas covered by the subscription is then enabled in
the CHARTPILOT. If, previously, the subscription had covered different zones or areas, these can
no longer be transferred from the CD.
☞ Zero or capital O? The User Code and Authorization Code are hexadecimal numbers, and so
they do not contain a capital O.
☞ The menu can by exited by clicking on the Chart Maintenance button situated above the menu.
You can now transfer the subscribed-for data from the CD to the hard disk drive (see Section 7.8.2).

Deleting the Subscription Data

If work with the CM-93/2 chart is no longer to be performed with the system, or if an error in licence
management occurs and cannot be corrected by means of the operating procedure described, the
subscription can be cancelled.
NOTICE:
After the following procedure has been performed, cells of the CM-93/2
chart cannot be transferred from the CD into the CM-93/2 databases of
the system. Only if it is known which zones or areas were covered by the
subscription, and only if the Authorization Code is available, will it be
possible to bring the subscription back into existence so that cells of the
CM-93/2 chart can again be transferred from the CD.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription, press the Remove Subscription
button. A safeguard question then appears. If you then enter the word PRUNE in the input field of that
safeguard question and press the OK button, the subscription data will be deleted on the hard disk drive
of the CHARTPILOT that is being operated.
☞ In this process, the cells of the CM-93/2 chart remain preserved. If the entire local CM-93/2 database
is to be deleted, then in addition the cells of the CM-93/2 chart will have to be deleted in accordance
with Section 7.8.5.

7.8.2 Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241 and 304.
Application:
- Initial installation of CM-93/2 cells
- Update after receiving the latest CM-93/2 CDs
- Installation of subsequently licensed CM-93/2 cells
With the procedure described:
- All CM-93/2 cells for which there is a subscription are transferred to the local database.
☞ From the program point of view, no distinction is made between first-time transfer and an update:
both on receiving the CM-93/2 CDs for the first time and on receiving the more up-to-date CDs, all
desired data must be transferred into the CM-93/2 databases of the system by means of the proce-
dure described here.
Preparations:
- For the initial installation and for the installation of subsequently licensed cells: Install the Authoriza-
tion Code on the local database as per Section 7.8.1.
- For an update: On the local database, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5 1).

1)
See page 308: S a v i n g T i m e w i t h t h e U p d a t e

306 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.
2. Put the CD of the desired zone into the CD drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance,
set CD-ROM as the Source. If a message appears concerning the table of contents, answer it with
OK.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no
frame shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and
press the Transfer button again.
4. Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).
☞ Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
5. After pressing of the OK button of the Transfer menu, transfer and conversion begin. The only cells
that are transferred are the selected cells not yet present in the CM-93/2 database selected under
Destination, and the selected cells that are present with a different status. During this process, the
progress of the transfer (and of the simultaneous decoding and conversion to the internal format) is
displayed. Transfer is finished when the display Percentage copied 100% appears, together with a
corresponding message.

7.8.3 Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases

☞ For general information on this topic, see page 241 and 304.
Application:
- Initial installation of CM-93/2 cells
- Update after receiving the latest CM-93/2 CDs
- Installation of subsequently licensed CM-93/2 cells
With the procedure described:
- All CM-93/2 cells located on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/2 databases of the
system.
Preparations:
- The transfer as per Section 7.8.2 must have been carried out.
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
- Only for an update: On all other databases, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5 1).
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the CHARTPILOT that is currently
being operated (this one).
3. In the world chart, pull open the largest possible frame (up to the margin) and press the Transfer
button.
4. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
☞ Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
5. After pressing of the OK button of the Transfer menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote
Transfer of CM-93/2 Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed,
and in the lower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.
6. When the transfer process has finished, press the Cancel button after the corresponding request.

1)
See page 308: S a v i n g T i m e w i t h t h e U p d a t e

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 307

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart Operating Instructions

7.8.4 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update

In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.8.2 to 7.8.5 for the
transfer and update:

Saving Time with the Update

If, during an update, the existing cells on the databases are not deleted before the transfer is performed,
the transfer process is much faster, because only the changed (and, if any, the new) cells are transferred.
Deleting the cells before the update is only necessary to ensure that no cells remain on the databases
that were replaced by one or more other cells and are therefore no longer supported. Because this
replacement of existing cells occurs very rarely, it is justifiable not to perform the deletion with every
single update.

No MULTIPILOT 1000 is Installed in the System

The initial installation can be performed with the procedure as per Section 7.8.2 directly on all databases
of the system. The transfer as per Section 7.8.3 is then no longer necessary.
With transfer as per Section 7.8.2, mark all CHARTPILOTs under Destination in step 4.

Not All of the Cells of the Subscription are to be Installed

With the initial installation as per Section 7.8.2, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the selec-
tion procedure, see Section 7.2.6. Then perform the transfer as per Section 7.8.3 to all other databases.
Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also be carried out for new cells for which
subscriptions were taken out later.

7.8.5 Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart

Deleting All CM-93/2 Cells of a Database

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame
shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu. An input field appears. If the
word PRUNE is entered there and the OK button is pressed, all cells of the CM-93/2 chart on the
CM-93/2 database defined by step 2 are deleted.

Deleting Selected Cells

The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
3. If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corre-
sponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.

308 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

4. If no frame was drawn in step 3, the number of cells in the database are shown in the Delete menu,
grouped according to navigational purpose. If a frame was drawn, it is possible to select according
to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the button Include Touched Cells, it
can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted that are situated completely within
the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.
5. In the Delete menu, press the OK button. When the safeguard question which then appears is
answered by pressing of the associated OK button, all cells that are contained in the CM-93/2 data-
base defined by step 2 and have been selected for deletion are deleted. Alternatively, deletion can
be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 309

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart Operating Instructions

310 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

8.1.1 Maintaining Order in the Catalogs

8.1.1.1 Track, Map and Waypoint Files

When you have generated the first track files or map files, you will probably assign them to the catalog
that was created by the manufacturer. If you then make more frequent use of the advantages offered to
you by the system in conjunction with the tracks, you might wish to distribute the existing files later on to
several catalogs. Furthermore, at some time, files will certainly have to be deleted or assigned to a
different catalog, or a file will have to be given a different number, or a catalog will have to be renamed,
and so on. You can also obtain an overview of the contents of a catalog by having a list printed out indi-
cating the files contained in the catalog.
The procedure for executing these measures is described in the following. However, it is assumed that
the procedure for handling the files needed for generating the tracks, maps and waypoint files (loading,
selecting, storing etc. - see Section 5.1) are known.
☞ The description is given using the tracks as an example. waypoint files are always dealt with in the
same way, except that the specific menu is called up under
Maps > ... or Tracks > Waypoint File > ... and not under
Tracks > ... .

Generating a New Catalog

A catalog is generated when, during storage of a file, a catalog name not yet used is entered under
Selected Catalog in the ... > Store menu and the menu is exited by pressing of the OK button.
☞ All catalogs are of equal priority; there are no lower-level catalogs.

Deletion of Files
A track is deleted on the hard disk drive when
- the catalog containing the tracks to be deleted is marked under Catalogs in the Tracks > Delete
menu,
- the tracks to be deleted are marked under Tracks, and
- the menu is exited by pressing of the Delete button.
NOTICE:
Files that are deleted are irretrievably lost. Therefore, make back-up
copies on diskette (see Section 8.1.2) before making extensive changes
to the catalogs and files.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 311

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files Operating Instructions

Deleting a Catalog
A catalog can be deleted only if there are no files assigned to it. Therefore, if necessary, all files
contained in the catalog must first be deleted or assigned to a different catalog.
A catalog is deleted when
- the catalog does not contain any files,
- this catalog is marked under Catalogs in one of the ... > Delete menus, and
- the ... > Delete menu is exited by pressing of the Delete button.

Assigning a File to a Different Catalog

The file must be loaded. A track is assigned to a different catalog as follows:
- it is selected in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu,
- in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, a copy of this track is stored in the other catalog, and then
- in the Tracks > Delete menu, the track is deleted from the original catalog.
The copy is given a different number or a different name if you change the entries under No. or Name
in the ... > Store menu.

Giving a New Number to a File

The file must be loaded. The number of a file is changed as follows:
- the file is selected in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu,
- the new number is entered under No. in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, and
- the menu is exited by pressing of the OK button.

Giving a New Name to a Catalog

A catalog cannot be renamed. However, you can obtain the same effect as renaming if you
- create a new catalog with the desired name and
- assign to the new catalog all files contained in the catalog that is to be renamed.

Printing Out a List of the Files Contained in the Catalogs

It is also possible to print out a list of the files contained in one or more catalogs. Printing takes place if
- the printer and the printer controller are set (see page 77),
- the catalogs whose files are to be listed are marked under Catalogs in the Data Transfer From
Harddisk menu,
- the file types that are to be contained in the list are selected under File Type in the Utilities >
Backup/Restore menu,
- the Print Catalog button is pressed there, and the question which then appears is answered by
pressing of the Yes button.
☞ In the list that is printed out, the track files are preceded by a T, the map files by an M, and the
waypoint files by a W.

312 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

8.1.1.2 Files of the User Chart Objects

Catalog Structure
The files of the User Chart Objects are stored in separate catalogs. The program automatically defines
both the files and the catalogs. During this process, symbols and lines are not treated in the same way
as areas.

Files of the Symbols and Lines

- The earth's surface is divided up into areas measuring 3° by 3°. All symbols and lines positioned on
such an area are put into one and the same file.
☞ During the process of division into files, lines which extend beyond these boundaries are cut at
the boundary; when the files are called up for the purpose of display or processing, these lines
are joined together again.
- The earth's surface is divided up into areas measuring 15° by 15°. All User Chart Objects files
assigned to such an area are put into a catalog.
For the designation of the files and catalogs, the south-west corner of the area is used in all cases.

File of the Areas

All areas edited as User Chart Objects, together with the marked events (see Section 4.8) and the
entered position-fixes (see Section 4.9), are put into a single file with world-wide coverage. In the Data
Transfer menus, this file is called Areas, Events and Fixes.

Processing of the Catalog Structure

Changes in the files and catalogs, as described in Section 8.1.1.1, cannot be made in the User Chart
Objects files. Printing of the files contained is not possible either.
☞ Just as a line/symbol file and the catalog are generated automatically as soon as a symbol or line
is edited for the defined area, the file and (if applicable) the catalog are also deleted again as soon
as there are no longer any symbols and lines (or parts of lines) in the area defined for them.

8.1.2 Data Saving

It is strongly recommended that all track, map, waypoint and User Chart Objects files present on the hard
disk drive should be copied onto diskettes, and that these diskettes should be kept in a safe place. If the
hard disk gets damaged or if the files stored on it are accidentally erased, the copies stored on the
diskettes can be used to recover the stock of data.
Naturally, you can also transfer the files onto diskettes in order to copy them onto CHARTPILOTs or
MULTIPILOTs 1000 and 91xx of other systems.
The program also allows the copying of any desired selection of the existing files. However, if you are
copying the files for the purpose of data saving, it is advisable to save track, map and waypoint files and
all User Chart Objects files in one operation each, or to save one or more catalogs completely per oper-
ation, or to proceed according to file types.
☞ During copying, any files that are present on the diskette are erased.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 313

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files Operating Instructions

Performing Data Saving: Copying Files onto Diskettes

1. Put a diskette into the diskette drive (with the sliding protective cap leading the way, and with the
central hole facing downwards; the write protection must be off, i.e. the hole at bottom left, as seen
from above, must be covered).
2. Under Transfer Direction in the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, press the From Hard Disk
button. The selection menu Data Transfer From Harddisk appears.
3. Under Diskette Format in the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, press the Backup Diskette button.
4. Switch on Track or User Objects and, by pressing the buttons Track (T), Waypoint (W) or Lines
and Symbols and Areas, Events, Fixes, specify which file types are to be copied. All of the
following actions refer only to the file types selected in this way.

This specifies the type of files that are offered for selection as files to be transferred.

Prepares the transfer of files from the hard disk drive to the diskette
(calls up the menu Transfer From Harddisk).
Prepares the transfer of files from the diskette to the hard disk drive
(calls up the menu Transfer To Harddisk) - see page 316.
This makes it possible to perform saving and restoration of the data.
This makes it possible to transfer the files to/from the PC. Only files previously stored
in the catalog named ImportExport can be transferred to the PC - see page 319.

Calls up a safeguard question; if this question is answered in the affirma-

tive, transfer of the files begins.
Calls up a safeguard question; if this question is answered in the affirmative,
printing of the catalog begins - see page 312.

Converting Objects of the map into User Chart Objects - see page 320. 1)
Calls up a safeguard question; if this question is answered appropri-
ately, the subroutine Backup/Restore is switched off.

1)
Depending on the system configuration, the button is absent on some systems.

Fig. 8-1 The Utilities > Backup/Restore menu

5. All files that are to be copied must now be entered under Selected Files in the Data Transfer From
Harddisk menu. For this purpose, the following possibilities exist and can be used one after another:
Selecting all files of one or more catalogs: Mark the catalog(s) under Catalogs, and press Add
Catalogs >>.
Selecting one or more files of a catalog: Under Catalogs, mark the catalog; under Files, mark
the file(s) that is (are) to be selected; and press Add Files >>.
Withdrawing the selection of one or more catalogs or files: Under Selected Files, mark the
catalogs or files that are not to be copied, and press the Remove button.
Completely resetting the selection made: Press the button Remove All.

314 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

6. In the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, press the Transfer button. If you answer the safeguard
question which then appears by pressing the Yes button, the content of the inserted diskette will be
erased and the selected files will be copied onto the diskette. In the dialog box Transfer which is
opened up here, the progress of the work is displayed.
7. When the message Backup finished appears in the Transfer menu, all selected files have been
copied onto the diskette and you can close the Transfer menu by pressing the OK button.
8. After taking the diskette(s) out, switch on the write protection: open the hole at bottom left (as seen
from above) by sliding the small plate. As a result, the content of the diskette cannot be overwritten
and cannot be erased. Label the diskettes to indicate their content and the date.

USEFUL INFORMATION

If not all selected files fit on the inserted diskette

If a file that is to be transferred no longer fits on the diskette, an appropriate message appears. When
this occurs, take the inserted diskette out and put another diskette in. After pressing of the Continue
button, the transfer is continued. On the diskettes, make a note of the sequence in which they were
inserted. (During the process of copying back, diskettes used one after another in one and the same
operation must be inserted in the same sequence.)

Copying the Catalog Assignments, Index File

On the diskette, a special file (Index File) is created in which, for every file copied, a note is made stating
which catalog this file comes from. As a result, when files are being copied back they can be assigned
to the original catalogs again.

Mark the catalog(s)

which contain files
that are to be copied.
- In the case of Catalogs and files
Own Object that are to be copied
catalogs, the
geographical
area too is
stated.

Inserts all files of

the marked cata-
logs into the
Selected Files list.

Files of the catalog

that was marked
(last) under Catalogs
- In the case of
Own Object cata-
logs, the
geographical
area too is Removes all catalogs
stated. and files from the
Selected Files list.
Inserts all files marked under Removes the catalogs and files marked under
Files into the Selected Files list. Selected Files from the Selected Files list.

Fig. 8-2 The Data Transfer From Harddisk menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 315

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files Operating Instructions

Data Entered under Selected Files

From left to right, the following items are entered:
- File type; T = Track, M = Map, W = Waypoint file,
- Catalog >
- File number (track number, map number, number of the waypoint file). In the case of line/symbol files
of the User Chart Objects: the coordinates of the file content,
- File name (track name, map name, name of the waypoint file)
Instead of the file number and file name, (All) is entered if all files of the catalog of the type shown in the
line are selected.

Aborting the Transfer

If, for some reason, the program should not or cannot end the transfer, it is necessary to abort the
transfer. You can abort it by pressing the Abort button in the dialog box Transfer.

During copying, the progress of the work is displayed here.

The copying process is not finished until Backup finished is displayed.

After the end of the copying process, this closes the Aborts the copying process.
Track/Map Transfer menu.

Fig. 8-3 The dialog box Transfer

8.1.3 Restoring Data

This section describes how track, map, waypoint and User Chart Object files that have been copied onto
diskettes as described in Section 8.1.2 1) can be copied back onto the hard disk drive of the CHART-
PILOT.
If a set of data damaged on the hard disk drive is to be restored by copying, it is usually a good idea to
copy all files that exist on the diskette. However, the program also permits the copying of just a selection
(any desired selection) of the files that exist on the diskette.

Data Restoration: Copying Files from Diskette(s) onto the Hard Disk Drive
1. Put the diskette into the diskette drive (with the sliding protective cap leading the way and with the
central hole facing downwards). If files have been copied onto several diskettes in one and the same
operation, these diskettes must now be used in the same sequence.
2. Under Transfer Direction in the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, press the From Hard Disk
button. The selection menu Data Transfer to Harddisk appears.

1)
and may have been modified on another computer with special programs, e.g. tracks with the aid of a weather routing program,

316 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

Catalogs and files

that are to be copied

The catalogs from which

there are files present on
the diskette are listed here:
Mark the catalog(s) which
contain files that are to be
copied.

This puts all files of the

marked catalogs into the
Selected Files list.

Files present on the

diskette which are
contained in the
catalog marked (last)
under Catalogs

Puts all files marked under Files Removes from the Selected Files Removes all catalogs
into the Selected Files list. list those catalogs and files that are and files from the
marked under Selected Files. Selected Files list.

Fig. 8-4 The Data Transfer to Harddisk menu

3. Under Diskette Format in the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, press the Backup Diskette button.
4. Switch on Track or User Objects and, by pressing the buttons Track (T), Waypoint (W) or Lines
and Symbols and Areas, Events, Fixes, specify which file types are to be copied. All of the
following actions refer only to the file types selected in this way.
5. In the Data Transfer to Harddisk menu, all files that are to be copied must now be entered under
Selected Files (for the operating possibilities, see page 314).
6. In the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, press the Transfer button. If you answer the safeguard
question which then appears by pressing the Yes button, the transfer is first of all prepared, and then
the selected files are copied from the diskette onto the hard disk drive. In the dialog box Transfer
which is then opened, the progress of the work is displayed.
During the copying onto the hard disk drive, the catalog assignment which existed when the files
were copied onto the diskette is retained. If, for a file, the diskette contains a note about a catalog
which does not exist (or no longer exists) on the hard disk drive, a new catalog with this name is
created.
So that a file cannot be accidentally overwritten on the hard disk drive, and thus lost, the program
checks during the preparation whether the catalog into which a file is to copied already contains a
file of the same type with the same number. If it does, the menu Transfer - Overwrite appears - see
Figure 8-5.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 317

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files Operating Instructions

There, you can now specify

- by pressing the Yes button that the displayed file in the displayed catalog of the hard disk drive
is to be overwritten, i.e. irretrievably lost.
- by pressing the No button that the file of the displayed type that is present on the diskette under
the displayed number and catalog assignment is not to be copied.
- by pressing the Yes to All button that all files that are present on the diskette are to be copied,
even if this will cause overwriting of files present on the hard disk which have the same number
and catalog assignment and are of the same type.
Alternatively, by pressing the Abort button you can prevent a file from being copied, and can thus
prevent the overwriting of a file on the hard disk drive.
7. When the message Restoring finished appears in the Transfer menu, all selected files have been
copied onto the hard disk, unless this has been prevented by pressing of the No button in the
Transfer - Overwrite menu; by pressing the OK button, you can now close the Transfer menu.

A file with this number is present in the catalog named here, both on the hard disk
drive and on the diskette. By overwriting, the file which is present on the hard disk
drive would be irretrievably lost.

The file that is present on the No files are copied, i.e. no files are
hard disk drive is overwritten. overwritten on the hard disk drive.

All files that are present on the diskette are copied, even The file that is present on the diskette is not
if this will cause overwriting of files on the hard disk drive copied, i.e. the file that is present on the hard disk
which have the same number and catalog assignment drive remains intact.
and are of the same type.

Fig. 8-5 The Transfer - Overwrite menu

USEFUL INFORMATION

Aborting the Transfer

If, for some reason, the program should not or cannot end the transfer, it is necessary to abort the
transfer. You can abort it by pressing the Abort button in the dialog box Transfer (see Figure 8-3 on
page 316).

Data Entered under Selected Files

From left to right, the following are entered:
- File type (T = Track, M = Map, W = Waypoint file)
- Catalog >
- File number (track number, map number, number of the waypoint file). In the case of line/symbol files
of the User Chart Objects: the coordinates of the file content,
- File name (track name, map name, name of the waypoint file)
Instead of the file number and file name, (All) is entered if all files of the catalog of the type shown in the
line are selected.

318 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

8.1.4 Transfer of Track and Waypoint Files by E-Mail

So that track, map and waypoint files can be sent by e-mail, they must be transferred between the
CHARTPILOT and a PC. The procedure is very similar to that of data saving or data restoration.
However, attention must be paid to a few special features.

Transfer of Track, Map and Waypoint Files from the CHARTPILOT to the PC
Only files that are contained in the catalog named ImportExport can be transferred. The files to be trans-
ferred therefore have to be copied into that catalog first of all:
- Open a file for editing (in the menu Tracks 1) > Edit > Select)
- Store the opened file in the ImportExport catalog (in the menu Tracks > Edit > Store)
- Repeat both steps for all files that are to be transferred.
The procedure described on page 314 for the data saving procedure should then be used, with the
following differences and special features.
Re step 1: A DOS-formatted diskette must be used.
☞ The diskettes that are usually obtainable commercially are already DOS-formatted.
The data saving described in Section 8.1.2 does not need any formatting. The DOS formatting of the
diskette is destroyed during the data saving process.
Re step 3: In the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore, under Diskette Format press the button DOS
formatted Diskette.

Transfer of Track and Waypoint Files from the PC to the CHARTPILOT

Using the diskette to which files have been transferred from the PC, the procedure described on page
316 for the data restoration procedure should be used, with the sole exception that, in step 3, you should
not press the button Backup Diskette but should press the button DOS formatted Diskette instead.
All files that are selected in this way are copied into the ImportExport catalog. Files of the same type
and name that already exist there are overwritten. Assigning files to the intended catalogs: see page 312.

8.1.5 Reception of Track Files from a Connected Computer

The CHARTPILOT can also receive track files from a connected computer, e.g. when used in a surveying
system. The data transfer is initiated in the connected system. All tracks received in this way are stored
in the ImportExport catalog and can be called up from there when needed for use at the CHARTPILOT
and the radar indicators.

1)
The description is based on the example of the tracks. Waypoint files are always handled in the same way with just one exception, namely
that the specific menu is called up not under Tracks > ... but under Tracks > Waypoint File > ... .

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 319

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files Operating Instructions

8.1.6 Converting Objects of the Map into User Chart Objects

☞ Depending on the system configuration, this function is absent on some systems

Because the maps can only be used on the radar 9xxx series, but not on the radar 1000 series, in the
case of systems with mixed equipment there might be a desire to display the objects of the maps on the
radar 1000 series as well. This is made possible by conversion of the maps.
In the process of converting a map, the map objects are transformed into corresponding User Chart
Objects 1). In this form they are stored in the files of the User Chart Objects on the local hard disk drive
and are distributed to all hard disk drives in the system. For details, see Appendix D.
To avoid confusion during future editing of the User Chart Objects, the same map objects must not be
converted more than once. It is true that the program prevents the same map from being converted more
than once on a given unit, but it does not prevent a map from being converted more than once on
different units.
Important:
Conversion should always take place on one and the same unit.
If a map is created as a modified copy of another map, only one of the
two should be converted.

Conversion of Maps
For systems with radar 9xxx series:
1. Open the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Charts, and if the maps that are to be
converted are present on a diskette, insert that diskette in the diskette drive.
2. In the Conversion frame
- Switch on From Hard Disk if the maps that are to be converted are present on the hard disk
drive;
- switch on From Backup Diskette if the maps are present on a diskette and the maps have
been transferred to this diskette in accordance with Section 8.1.2.
- Switch on From DOS formatted Diskette if the maps are present on a diskette and the maps
have been transferred to this diskette by means of a PC - see Section 8.1.4.
For systems with radar 1000 series:
1. In the diskette drive, insert the diskette containing the maps that are to be converted.
2. In the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore, under Diskette Format press the button Backup Diskette
if the data have been transferred to the inserted diskette in accordance with Section 8.1.2 or press
the button DOS formatted Diskette if the diskette has had files transferred to it from a PC - see
Section 8.1.4. Press the button Maps to User Chart Object.
For all systems:
3. If it is not known whether maps have already been converted, and if so, which ones, a list of the
maps that have already been converted on this unit can be displayed by means of the button List
Converted Maps.
4. In the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects, press the Convert button.
A selection menu appears which corresponds to the menu Data Transfer to Harddisk shown on page
317. There, the map catalogs and map files contained in the inserted diskette or (for systems with
radar 9xxx series) in the data medium selected with step 1 are listed on the left.
☞ Maps which have already been converted on this unit, and catalogs in which all maps have
already been converted on this unit, are marked with a C on the left.

1)
Copies of the objects are converted; the original map remains unchanged.

320 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

5. In this menu, all files that are to be converted must be entered under Maps for Conversion (for the
operating possibilities, see page 314).
☞ Files which have already been converted on this unit cannot be entered.
6. In the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects, press the Convert button.
The Conversion/Deletion dialog box, in which you are informed of the on-going activities, then opens
up, and the conversion begins.
7. When the message Conversion finished appears in the dialog box, this means that all selected
maps have been converted and you can close the dialog box by pressing the OK button.

Reversing the Conversion of Maps

The conversion of individual maps can be reversed. During this process, all User Chart Objects which
have got into the User Chart Objects files by conversion of these maps are deleted from these files.
Furthermore, the map is removed from the list of maps that have already been converted (see above,
step 3).
1. In the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects, use the button List
Converted Maps to call up a selection menu in which all maps that have already been converted
on this unit (and whose conversion has not already been reversed) are listed on the left.
2. In this menu, all maps whose conversion is to be reversed must now be entered under Maps for
Deletion (for the operating possibilities, see page 314).
3. In the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects, press the button Delete
Converted Objects. The dialog box Conversion/Deletion, which informs you of the on-going activ-
ities, then opens up, and the deletion begins.
4. When the message Deletion finished appears in the dialog box, this means that the conversion of
the selected maps has been reversed, and you can close the dialog box by pressing the OK button.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 321

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files Operating Instructions

Specifies that conversion of maps is going to take place.

For systems with radar 9xxx series:

- Maps which are present on the local hard disk drive are converted.
- Maps which are present on the inserted diskette are converted. Defining whether
the diskette is a data saving diskette (From Backup Diskette) or a diskette which
has had files transferred to it from a PC (From DOS formatted Diskette).

Starts the conversion process

- Indicates the maps that have already been converted on this unit.
- Makes it possible to select the maps whose conversion is to be reversed.

Reverses the conversion of the maps selected for such reversal.

Calls up a safeguard question; after the appropriate answering of that ques-

tion, the subprogram Backup/Restore is switched off.

Fig. 8-6 The menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects

8.1.7 Specifying the tracks and maps which can be loaded on the 9xxx radars

Because it is not possible on the radars of the 9xxx series to choose between several catalogs when a
track is being loaded, it is necessary to define on the CHARTPILOT from which catalog it is to be possible
to call up the tracks. The same applies to maps.
This definition process is performed in Chart mode in the Radar > Track/Map Catalog menu by marking
the desired catalog there in the lists Tracks from Catalogs and Maps from Catalog.

322 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes

8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes

8.2.1 Generating and Using the Text Pages

With the CHARTPILOT, you can also write texts, e.g. address lists of agents, the abandon ship list, or
the crew muster roll. Such texts, called Text Pages, can be inspected at any time on the CHARTPILOT
and on the CONNINGPILOT, and can be printed out on the connected printer.
This function is implemented by means of a subroutine which you can start in the Tree under Utilities in
the Chart and Conning modes by pressing the Text Pages button. The Utilities > Text Page menu then
appears (if the menu function is switched on), and the entire chart area is covered by a menu with which
Text Pages can be generated, modified and read.

Number of the Text Page:

It identifies the Text Page within the catalog; it must be entered.

Name of the Text Page:

It appears in the menus for calling up the Text Page (entry is not obligatory).

Date of the last modi-

fication; it is entered
automatically.

The Utilities >

Text Page menu;
see Figure 8-8 on
page 324.

Text Page display:

If the Text Page is longer than 25 lines, only part of it is displayed; the rest can be made visible by scrolling.

Fig. 8-7 The CHARTPILOT Display for the Text Page

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 323

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes Operating Instructions

Text Pages are generated and handled as individual files in exactly the same way as tracks, for example.
Like tracks,
- Text Pages are provided with a number to identify them,
- Text Pages must be loaded before any modification,
- a new or modified Text Page must be stored, and during that process it must be assigned to a
catalog,
- Text Pages that are no longer needed can be deleted.
The operating procedure for this is completely equivalent to the corresponding operating procedure for
tracks as described in Section 5.1 and Section 8.1.1. In the following, therefore, apart from the general
principles only those special features that relate to the handling of Text Pages are explained.

Loading a Text Page; Examining a Text Page

If a Text Page is to be examined, modified or printed out, it must first be loaded: press Load; under Cata-
logs, click the correct catalog; under Text Pages, click the correct Text Page; and by pressing the Apply
button, trigger the loading process. The first 25 lines of the loaded Text Page then appear in the Text
Page display. The remaining lines can be made visible by scrolling. When you have loaded the correct
Text Page, you can close the ... > Load menu by pressing the Cancel button.
☞ In contrast to the tracks, only one Text Page at a time can be loaded; it is then also displayed in the
Text Page display.

Load the existing Text Page in order to display it or modify it;

this is done in the same way as loading a track - see page 156.
Generating a completely new page.

Storing the Text Page displayed; this is done in the same

way as storing a track - see page 180.

Deleting a loaded Text Page; this is done in the same

way as deleting a track - see page 311.
Causes printing of the Text Page displayed.

Makes it possible to edit a Text Page.

Copies all Text Pages from the hard disk drive to the diskette
contained in the diskette drive - see page 325.

Deletes all Text Pages from the hard disk drive and copies all Text Pages
from the diskette in the diskette drive to the hard disk drive - see page 326.

Leaves the menu and stops the current processing.

Alternative: Pressing the Tree button likewise causes leaving of the menu; the
processing of the Text Page is not stopped, and can be resumed at any time.

Fig. 8-8 The Utilities > Text Page menu

324 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes

Generating or Modifying a Text Page

1. If a completely new Text Page is to be generated, press the New button,
or
2. if an existing Text Page is to be modified or if a new Text Page is to be generated from an existing
one by copying and modifying, load the relevant Text Page.
3. By pressing the Edit button, switch on the Editing mode. As a result, the Text Page display becomes
an input field.
4. In the Text Page frame, click the No. field and enter a new four-figure number (for specifying of the
number, see below).
5. In the Text Page frame, click the Name field and enter the name which is to be used for the Text
Page.
6. In the editing field, you can now input or modify the desired text.
7. To complete the editing process, the Text Page must be stored, possibly not until after it has been
printed out.

Storing the Text Page

With Store, call up the Store Text Page menu, and under Catalogs select the catalog in which the Text
Page is to be stored. When you leave the menu by pressing the OK button, storage takes place (this is
all equivalent to the storing of a track - see page 180).

Printing Out a Text Page

In all cases, it is the loaded Text Page that is printed out, so load the Text Page if necessary. Adjust the
printer and the printer controller (see page 77). In the Text Page menu, press the Print button. The Text
Page is printed out.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Specifying the Text Page Number

When selecting the number, note the following:
- The Text Page is listed in ascending numerical order in the catalog in which it is stored.
- It is uniquely identified by the number within the catalog. If a number already present in the catalog
is used, the old Text Page with this number is erased when the new Text Page is stored. (However,
during the storing process, a safeguard question draws you attention in good time to the double allo-
cation of the number.) You can obtain an overview of the existing numbers after pressing the Load
button (then leave the Load menu by pressing Cancel).

8.2.2 Management of the Text Pages

Text Pages too should be saved so that they will not be irretrievably lost if a defect occurs in the hard
disk drive. Saving of the Text Pages is done by copying their files onto a data-saving medium. In all
cases, all of the Text Pages present on the hard disk drive are saved together.
☞ In the CHARTPILOT, the files of the Text Pages are handled fully independently of the track, map,
waypoint and User Chart Object files, and therefore so too is their saving process.
You perform the saving process by putting the data-saving medium into the drive, pressing the Save Text
Pages button in the Utilities > Text Page menu, and answering the safeguard question which then
appears by pressing the OK button.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 325

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes Operating Instructions

NOTICE:
All data which already exist on the data-saving medium are erased by
this.
If the saved files of the Text Pages are to be copied back onto the hard disk drive, put the data-saving
medium into the drive, press the Restore Text Pages button, and answer the safeguard question which
then appears by pressing the OK button.
NOTICE:
All Text Page files which already exist in the system are erased by this.

Creating a New Catalog

The Main catalog is created in the factory. If you make use of the possibilities offered by the Text Pages
for more effective organisation, it might be appropriate to create additional catalogs (e.g. for individual
geographical areas). A new catalog is created if, during storage (after pressing of Store), the name is
changed in the Selected Catalog field.

326 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.3 Voyage Recording

8.3 Voyage Recording

The CHARTPILOT offers several possibilities of recording important nautical data during the voyage.
Basically, a distinction must be drawn between the following:
- Voyage recording, in which the data are stored on the hard disk drive and which you cannot switch
off, and
- the generation of protocol prints (i.e. record print-outs) which you can initiate and parameterise
during the voyage (see Section 8.4).

8.3.1 Performing of Voyage Recording, Management of Recordings

As long as the CHARTPILOT is switched on, the present data relating to

- Navigation, Short Term
- Navigation, Long Term
- ARPA Targets
- AIS Targets
- Engine and Thruster
- Azimuth Thruster
- Environment
- Weather
- ECDIS
- TRACKPILOT
- SPEEDPILOT
are stored cyclically in individual records on the hard disk drive.
The records are put into two different files:
- In the short-term recording file, all records with the exception of Navigation, Long Term are stored
at short intervals (record ECDIS only if the data has been changed). Each individual record remains
in the file for 12 1) hours at least, and is then deleted (overwritten). Because the file remains intact
even when the CHARTPILOT is switched off, it therefore always contains the data of the past 12 1)
hours during which the CHARTPILOT was switched on.
- In the long-term recording file, only the Navigation, Long Term records are stored; this is done
once every 30 minutes. Each individual record remains in this file for 3 month unless the file is
deleted before that by means of the Reset function.
☞ Details for contents of the recordings and recording intervals see Appendix C.
At any time, both recordings can be stored permanently, their content can be replayed on the screen of
the CHARTPILOT (see Section 8.3.2) and can be printed out on the printer. For these purposes, the file
concerned must first be loaded. The files can also be backed up on diskette and (e.g. for replay or
printing out) they can be copied back to the hard disk again from the diskette.
So that the long-term recording file will only contain the data of the present voyage, it must be reset at
the beginning of the voyage, i.e. its content must be deleted.
The recording of records is done by the main program, and therefore takes place as long as the CHART-
PILOT is switched on. However, if you want to operate the voyage recording function you must switch on
a special subroutine and must switch it off again at the end of the operating procedure.

1)
Can also be set to 24 hours at service level.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 327

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.3 Voyage Recording Operating Instructions

Switching the Voyage Recording Operating Program On and Off

In the Tree, call up the voyage recording operating program by pressing the Voyage Recording button.
The Voyage Recording menu then appears (see Figure 8-9).
This subroutine is switched off by pressing the Exit button in the Voyage Recording > File menu and by
appropriately answering the safeguard question which then appears.

Reset Long-Term Recording...

Search Date and Time ...

General Information...
Replay Monitor... See Section 8.3.2.
ECDIS Information ...

Load Newest Short-Term Recording...

Load Long-Term Recording...
Store...
Print... For functions of the individual buttons, see text.
Delete
Backup...
Restore...
Exit...

Fig. 8-9 The Voyage Recording menu and its submenus

Resetting the Long-Term Recording at the Beginning of the Voyage

Click the Reset Long-Term Recording button in the Voyage Recording > Options menu. If you give the
appropriate answer to the safeguard question which then appears, the content of the long-term recording
file will be deleted.
☞ If the content of the long-term recording file is to be preserved, you must store the file or copy it onto
a diskette before.
☞ The content of the short-term recording file cannot be deleted.

Loading the present File

By pressing the Short-Term Recording button or the Long-Term Recording button in the Voyage
Recording > File > Load Newest menu, select the file type. The current content of the selected file is
then loaded into the main memory of the operating program. If there was already a file loaded, it is
deleted in the main memory during this process.

Loading a File which is Already Stored

In the Voyage Recording > File > Load menu, select the file type. A list of the stored files of the selected
type then appears in a menu. Click the name of the desired file. It then appears in the Selection field.
By pressing of the OK button, this file is loaded into the main memory of the operating program. If there
was already a file loaded, it is deleted in the main memory during this process.

328 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.3 Voyage Recording

Storing a File
To be able to store a file on the hard disk drive, the file must be in the loaded state.
Under Selection in the Voyage Recording > File > Store menu, enter the name under which the loaded
file is to appear for further handling in the menus. If the name of a file already stored is to be used and
the stored file is to be deleted, the name can be taken over into the Selection field by clicking in the list
situated above that. By pressing of the OK button, the file situated in the main memory is stored on the
hard disk drive under the file name entered.
☞ If the hard disk drive already contains a file with this name, a message about this appears. After
appropriate confirmation of this message, the file present on the hard disk drive is deleted when the
new file is stored.
☞ Depending on the file type, up to five files can be stored. If an attempt is made to store a sixth file,
an appropriate message appears. As an alternative to storing, copying onto a diskette is possible.

Data Backup, Copying Files onto a Diskette

Data backup of the voyage recording files is done in the same way as data backup of the track and map
files (see page 313). The menu corresponding to the Data Transfer From Harddisk menu (see Figure
8-2 on page 315) is opened in the Voyage Recording > File menu by pressing the Backup button. In the
Files on Harddisk frame, all existing short-term recording files and all long-term recording files are listed
in one list each.
Insert a diskette in the diskette drive 1). All files that are to be copied must now be entered under Selected
Files. Start the copying process by pressing the Transfer button.
☞ For entering the files into the Selected Files list and the further procedure, see M a n a g e m e n t o f t h e
Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files, Performing Data Saving: Copying Files onto
D i s k e t t e s , step 5 on page 314.

Copying a File from a Diskette onto the Hard Disk Drive

Insert a diskette in the diskette drive and press the Restore button in the Voyage Recording > File menu.
In the dialog box which then appears, the type and name of the file contained on the diskette is displayed.
After appropriate answering of the safeguard question contained in the dialog box, the file is copied onto
the hard disk.
☞ If the hard disk contains a file of the same type having the same name, an appropriate message
appears. If the file present on the hard disk is not to be overwritten and thus deleted, the file must
first be loaded and stored under a different name.
☞ If the hard disk already contains five files of the type, a request appears, requesting deletion of one
of the files on the hard disk.

Deleting a File on the Hard Disk

In the Voyage Recording > File > Delete menu, select the file type. A list of the stored files of the selected
type then appears in a menu. Mark the file that is to be deleted and press the OK button. After the safe-
guard question which then appears has been answered appropriately, the marked file is deleted on the
hard disk.

1)
With the sliding protective cover pointing away from you, the central hole facing downwards, and the write protect function switched off, i.e.
the hole at bottom left (as seen from above) must be covered.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 329

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.3 Voyage Recording Operating Instructions

Printing Out the Content of the Short-Term Recording

The content of the short-term recording cannot be printed out directly. However, the content of the
short-term recording can be printed out indirectly by switching on the cyclical recording of nautical own-
ship data and the recording of the selected position and speed sensors according to Section 8.4 while
the track is being replayed according to Section 8.3.2.

Printing Out the Content of the Long-Term Recording

To be able to print out the content of the long-term recording, the long-term recording must be in the
loaded state.
1. Set the printer and the printer controller (see page 77).
2. Click the Print button in the Voyage Recording > File menu. The Print Voyage box then appears.
The Print Complete function is switched on. Under From, the recording instant of the first record is
displayed, and under To the recording instant of the last record is displayed.
3. If you want to print the entire content of the loaded file, you must now press the OK button.
or
4. If you only want to print out part of the file, switch on the Print Part function, under From and To
input the beginning and end of the recording time-period that is to be printed out, and then press the
OK button.
☞ The execution of the printing process is controlled by the operating system. During printing, you can
therefore use the voyage recording program for other purposes or else you can switch it off.

330 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.3 Voyage Recording

8.3.2 Replay of a Voyage Recording

During replay of a voyage recording, the program parts which provide the displays and the operating
functions use the recorded data (including the recording instant concerned) instead of the data that
currently exist.
The display used during the recording, the display mode, the track that may have been used, the
switched-on menus etc. are not recorded. Therefore, these settings can be operated freely when the
voyage recording is being replayed.
While the voyage recording is being replayed, the own ship symbol and all own ship data appear on the
screen as usual. You can then operate the CHARTPILOT largely as if the ship were currently moving
according to the data displayed. If, for example, you then load a track and define it as the System Track,
the data in (for example) the Track/Schedule display refer to this track. If, for example, you change the
alarm limits, the alarm messages appear in accordance with the set values. If, during replay, you have
activated the generation of protocol prints, the recorded own ship data are printed out on the connected
printer on the basis of the System Track that is set during the replay.
During replay of a voyage recording, only the following differences exist compared to on-line operation:
- The definition of the System Track affects the CHARTPILOT only; it has no effect on the other
components of the system.
- If a voyage recording is replayed during the voyage, the alarm messages generated by the system
in the meantime do not appear on the CHARTPILOT.
- The time axis is compressed, and the compression can be varied.
During replay, a large, flashing appears in the chart area.
Basically, these remarks apply both to the 12 Hours Recording and to the long-term recording. in the case
of the long-term recording, however, it must be borne in mind that, because of the low frequency of
recording (one recording every 30 minutes), this recording is equivalent to a series of snapshots.

Replay of a Voyage Recording

1. If a System Track has been defined, it must first be deselected (see page 222).
2. Switch on the operating program for voyage recording, and load the desired file (see page 328).
3. With the symbol keys of the Voyage Recording menu, you can now control the timing of the replay
in a manner similar to that of a video recorder (see the following illustration).
☞ During replay of the short-term recording, a recording instant is reproduced every second or so;
during replay of the long-term recording, every 10 seconds or so.
☞ In the menu Voyage Recording > Options, you can open the Time Search box by means of the
Search Date and Time function. There, the recording (start) instant that is to be displayed can be
specified (as often as is desired, including during replay).
☞ In the menu Voyage Recording > Display,
- by switching on the function General Information, you can obtain an indication of the number
of records contained in the file and of the period of recording time covered by the file,
- by switching on the function Replay Monitor, you can, during replay, obtain an indication of the
numbers and types of the records recorded at the time displayed,
- by switching on the function ECDIS Information, you can obtain an indication of data of the
electronic chart that was being presented at the time displayed.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 331

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.3 Voyage Recording Operating Instructions

Type and name of the file being replayed

Recording instant Paused: Replay is currently not taking place.

Running: Replay is taking place.

Jump to the beginning of the file Jump to the end of the file

Jump to an earlier recording instant Stops replay. Starts replay. Jump to a later recording instant
(Pressing for a longer time (Pressing for a longer time increases the
increases the rewind speed.) fast forward speed.)

Fig. 8-10 The Voyage Recording menu (replay functions)

Making a Protocol Print of a Short-Term Recording

During replay of the Short-Therm Recording, you can perform all recording processes described in
Section 8.4. The recording period which can be set under Period in the Peripheral Devices > Printer >
Config. Cyclic Protocol menu refers to the recording instants. If you want to obtain a print-out of all
records for a particular section of the voyage, you must therefore set the Time there to 10 seconds.

332 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.4 Protocol Prints

8.4 Protocol Prints

On the (optional) printer, important nautical data and operational data of the system can be recorded
continually during operation of the system.

Setting of the Recording

The Protocol Print (i.e. the print-out of a record) is switched on/off in the menu Peripheral Devices >
Printer by means of the button Protocol Print.
Under Protocol Type, the data groups to be recorded are specified:
- System Settings: Changing of important settings of the system
- System Messages: All alarms and messages that have occurred in the system
- Cyclic Protocol: Selected nautical data (these are recorded cyclically).

------------------------------------------------------------------
Table header
Time: ZT 14:33 22.11.95 UTC 13:33 22.11.95
Track No: 1300 Track Name: STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI
These parameters were Waypoint No: 50 Waypoint Remark: SÖDERARM
WPB: 70.0 deg WPD: 2.5 NM Track: 69.1 deg
specified in the ... > Config. ------------------------------------------------------------------
Cyclic Protocol menu. Time GPS 1 Position HDG SMG CMG Depth
[ZT] WGS84 [deg] [kt] [deg] [m]
14:33 59:46.260 N 019:23.472 E 68.7 16.7 68.7 122.1
In the ... > Config. Cyclic 14:34 59:46.359 N 019:23.990 E 69.3 16.7 69.3 87.5
14:35 59:46.459 N 019:24.497 E 69.0 16.7 69.0 101.4
Protocol menu, 60 s was 14:36 59:46.559 N 019:25.023 E 69.7 16.7 69.7 116.8
specified under Period, Time. 14:37 59:46.658 N 019:25.541 E 69.5 16.7 69.5 82.4
14:38 59:46.756 N 019:26.057 E 69.0 16.7 69.0 113.8
14:39 59:46.855 N 019:26.574 E 69.3 16.7 69.3 106.0
Track No. 1300 is defined ------------------------------------------------------------------
Time: ZT 14:40 22.11.95 UTC 13:40 22.11.95
as the System Track; Track No: 1300 Track Name: STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI
waypoint No. 51 was Waypoint No: 51 Waypoint Remark: ARMBÅGEN
passed at 14:40 hours. WPB: 119.6 deg WPD: 18.7 NM Track: 120.1 deg
------------------------------------------------------------------
Time GPS 1 Position HDG SMG CMG Depth
[ZT] WGS84 [deg] [kt] [deg] [m]
14:40 59:46.947 N 019:27.096 E 74.7 16.7 74.6 84.8
Because System Settings 14:41 59:46.997 N 019:27.638 E 84.8 16.6 84.6 121.2
is switched on, the fact is 14:42 59:46.996 N 019:28.189 E 94.8 16.6 94.8 94.6
recorded here that, at 14:43 14:43 59:46.945 N 019:28.729 E 105.7 16.6 105.6 93.7
hours, DGPS was selected < (14:43) Speed Sensor Changed to DGPS >
as the speed sensor. 14:44 59:46.845 N 019:29.241 E 116.5 16.6 116.4 121.5
14:45 59:46.708 N 019:29.720 E 120.8 16.6 120.8 84.9
14:46 59:46.570 N 019:30.194 E 120.3 16.7 120.3 105.7
14:47 59:46.430 N 019:30.674 E 120.0 16.7 120.0 114.7
Because System Messages 14:48 59:46.291 N 019:31.152 E 120.2 16.7 120.0 82.3
is switched on, the fact is < (14:48) TP POSITION STATUS CHANGED Accept or
recorded here that, at 14:48 change position sensor.>
hours, the alarm POSITION 14:49 59:46.151 N 019:31.630 E 120.3 16.7 120.0 116.5
STATUS CHANGED 14:50 59:46.015 N 019:32.110 E 120.3 16.7 120.0 103.3
occurred.

Fig. 8-11 Example of a Protocol Print

Setting the Cyclical Recording of the Nautical Data

For the cyclical recording, the following items can be specified:
- Whether the cyclical recording is to take place at fixed intervals of time or at fixed intervals of
distance travelled, and how large the interval should be,
- which items of own ship's data are to be recorded.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 333

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.4 Protocol Prints Operating Instructions

Setting the Recording Cycle and the Period

1. Under Period in the Peripheral Devices > Printer > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu, specify by
clicking Time or Distance whether the recording is to be done at intervals of time or at intervals of
distance sailed by the ship.
2. Behind the clicked button, input the interval (time or distance).
3. f necessary, you can retrieve the old setting at any time by pressing Reset. If the new setting is to
be put into effect, you must press OK.

Selecting the Own Ship Data that are to be Recorded

1. Select the Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu. In the
Configured Items list, all data selected for recording are listed. In the Available Items list, the other
data which can also be recorded are listed.
2. The sequence in the record line will correspond to the sequence selected in the Configured Items
list. Therefore, starting at the top of this list, check firstly the position in the list up to which the selec-
tion desired for the protocol print has already been entered correctly, including the sequence. Delete
the data entered below this position in the list by marking them and pressing Remove.
3. In the correct order in the Available Items list, select the data that are to be recorded additionally,
and by pressing Add transfer these data to the end of the Configured Items list. When the number
of data included under Selected Items is equal to the maximum number of data that can be printed
out in a record line, further inclusion is prevented.
4. If necessary, you can retrieve the old record selection at any time by pressing Reset. If the record
is to be made using the new selection of data, you must press OK.

Prints out the existing content of the screen.

Switches the Protocol Print on and off. Switching off initiates the printing of data
that have already been stored but not yet printed out.
Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain the change in the selected position and
speed sensors and in the operational data of the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT.

Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain alarms that occur.

Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain the nautical data specified under
Config. Cyclic Protocol.

Settings for the cyclical recording of the nautical data

All print-outs generated by this CHARTPILOT are printed out on this printer.

Causes premature print-out of the accumulated data that are to be recorded.

Aborts the Protocol Print. The data not yet printed out are deleted.

With this, printing can be stopped at any time. (The commands already
sent to the printer are still executed.) See page 77.

Fig. 8-12 The Peripheral Devices > Printer menu

334 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.4 Protocol Prints

Printing the Recording Data Out Prematurely

Basically, printing out is performed page by page. In the case of Protocol Prints, this has the effect that
printing takes place at fairly long intervals of time. If the recording data that have accumulated in the
meantime are to be printed out prematurely, this can be achieved in the menu Peripheral Devices >
Printer by the pressing of Print Now / Form Feed.

Aborting the Protocol Print

In the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, the Print Erase/Stop button can be used to abort the protocol
print. The data not yet printed out are deleted.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Recording of Important Settings of the System

If, in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, under Protocol Type, the function System Settings is
switched on, the following changes are recorded if Protocol Print is in the switched-on state:
- The newly selected position sensor,
- the newly selected speed sensor,
- the fact that the TRACKPILOT has been activated or switched off,
- the mode to which the TRACKPILOT has been switched,
- the fact that the SPEEDPILOT has been activated or switched off,
- the mode to which the SPEEDPILOT has been switched.
If the cyclical recording of nautical data is in the switched-on state as well, these changes in the system
settings are inserted in that recording in chronological order.

Nautical Data which can be Recorded Cyclically

The following data can be recorded (if the sensors for the data are connected):
- Air Humidity Relative humidity of the outside air
- Air Pressure Air pressure (the outside air)
- Air Temperature Temperature of the outside air
- CMG (Course Made Good) Observed course over ground
- Depth Water depth measured with the navigation echosounder
- Dewpoint Dewpoint of the outside air
- DMG (Distance Made Good) Distance from the last waypoint
- ETA (Estim. Time of Arrival) Probable time of arrival at the present waypoint
- HDG (Heading) Present compass course
- Position Present position of own ship (the coordinate system that is set for
the display of the chart area is used)
- Sea Water Temperature Sea water temperature
- SMG (Speed Made Good) Observed speed over ground
- STW (Speed Through Water) Speed through the water
- Time (ZT) Zone time
- TTG (Time To Go) Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint
- Wind Direction (True) Absolute direction of the wind
- Wind Speed (True) Absolute speed of the wind
- WPB (Waypoint Bearing) Bearing of the present waypoint
- WPD (Waypoint Distance) Distance of the present waypoint
- XTD (Cross Track Distance) Present cross track distance from the pre-planned track

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 335

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.4 Protocol Prints Operating Instructions

Recording of the Alarms and Messages

If, in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, under Protocol Type, the function System Messages is
switched on, particular alarms which the CHARTPILOT has reported in the alarm list are recorded if
Protocol Print is in the switched-on state.

Additional Recording in the Table Header

The table which is thus created contains the following items additionally in the table header on each page:
- Date and time (zone time and UTC)
and, if a System Track has been defined, the following also:
- Number and name of the track
- Number of the present waypoint and remark about the waypoint
- Bearing (WPB) and distance (WPD) of the present waypoint
- Direction (track) of the present track segment.
In addition, this table header is inserted in the same form on the page when the ship has passed a
waypoint of the System Track and also when another System Track is defined.

Specifies that the cyclical recording is to take place at intervals of

time or at intervals of distance travelled.
Time period of the cyclical record print-out
Distance travelled between the cyclical record print-outs
Specifies that the cyclical recording is to take place at intervals of
distance travelled.
Data that are not recorded but can be recorded
Removes the data marked under Available Items and
inserts them under Configured Items.

Removes the data marked under Configured Items and inserts them under
Available Items.

Data intended for recording

Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited.

Retrieves the configuration that existed when this menu was called up.
Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.

Fig. 8-13 The Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu

336 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation

8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation

In the setting-to-work process, a large number of settings are made on the CHARTPILOT at service level,
with which the CHARTPILOT is adapted to suit the connected items of equipment. The same applies to
the other components of the system (TRACKPILOT, Engine Interface, SPEEDPILOT). The configuration
files which contain these data of the components mentioned can be backed up on a diskette when the
setting-to-work process has been completed; the diskette is then kept on board. These data can then be
accessed at any time during service work.
If you discover that this diskette is no longer available, you can perform the data back-up yourself.
If a fault occurs during operation, it can be very helpful if, prior to service work, you can inform our Service
Department of particular setting values if requested to do so. This may even eliminate the need for
service work. For this reason, you can inspect the larger part of these data and can print them out on the
system's printer.
These functions are implemented by a subroutine which you can start by pressing the System Mainte-
nance button under Utilities in the Tree in the Chart and Conning modes.

Determining the System Parameterisation

In the list contained in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu, mark the compo-
nents whose system parameter settings are to be displayed, and press the OK button. These data are
then displayed in a scrollable list in the Status Log Page - see Figure 8-16.
☞ If you are looking for a particular term in the list, you can press the Find button: a box then appears.
Enter the term in that box, and press the Find Next button situated there.

Printing Out Displayed System Parameter Settings

If you press the Print button in the Status Log Page and answer appropriately the question which then
appears, the content of the list contained in the Status Log Page is printed out on the system's printer.

Data Back-Up; Copying Configuration Files onto Diskette

1. Put a diskette into the diskette drive (with the sliding protective cover pointing away from you, the
central hole facing downwards, and the write protect function switched off, i.e. the bottom left-hand
hole as seen from above must be covered).
2. Press the Backup button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu. If you
answer the safeguard question which then appears by pressing the Yes button, the content of the
inserted disk is deleted and the configuration files are copied onto the diskette. When all files have
been copied, an appropriate message appears.
3. After taking the diskette out of the drive, switch on the write protect function: to do this, open the
bottom left-hand hole (as seen from above) by sliding the small plate. As a result, the diskette
contents cannot be either overwritten or erased. Label the diskette to indicate its content and the
date, and store it in a safe place.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 337

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation Operating Instructions

Calls up the Configuration menu for the following functions:

- Determining the system parameterisation and printing it out.
- Data back-up of the configuration files.
- Making system settings - see Section 8.7.

Determining the system version - see Section 8.6

Switches off the subroutine System Maintenance

and calls up the display of the electronic chart again.

Fig. 8-14 The Utilities > System Maintenance menu

Make system settings (see Section 8.7)

Determining the system parameterisation

Data back-up of the configuration files

Operating at service level (after input of the password).

Password input (for service activities only)

Operating at service level (after input of the password)

Fig. 8-15 The Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu

338 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation

Selects the component whose system param-

Status Log list eterisations are to be displayed

Clears the display of the Searches in the Status Prints out the content of the Shows the parameters of
data shown in the Log list to find a text Status Log list on the the components marked i
Status Log list. which is to be input. system's printer. the list above

Fig. 8-16 The Status Log Page and the ... > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 339

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.6 Determining the System Version Operating Instructions

8.6 Determining the System Version

If a fault occurs during operation, it can be very helpful if you can inform our Service Department of the
program version and the versions of the program modules if requested to do so. For this reason, you can
inspect these data and can print them out on the system's printer.
These functions are implemented by a subroutine which you can start by pressing the System Mainte-
nance button under Utilities in the Tree in the Chart and Conning modes.

Determining the System Version and Printing it Out

Press the Version button in the Utilities > System Maintenance menu. These data are then listed in the
Status Log Page (see Figure 8-16).
If you press the Print button in the Status Log Page and give the appropriate answer to the question
which then appears, these data will be printed out on the system's printer.

8.7 Making System Settings

You can make the following system settings:

- The transmission ratio between trackball movement and cursor movement
- The duration for which a key of the A/N keyboard must be pressed so that the button reacts as
having been clicked
- The repetition function of the keys of the A/N keyboard
- The tone with which alarms are emitted on the CHARTPILOT.
These functions are implemented by a subroutine which you can start by pressing the System Mainte-
nance button under Utilities in the Tree in the Chart and Conning modes.

Transmission Ratio between Trackball Movement and Cursor Movement

Press the Pointer button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In the
dialog box which then opens, you can set the speed of the cursor by means of the sliding controllers
Acceleration and Threshold. With the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting.

Changing the Duration for which a Key of the A/N Keyboard must be Pressed to Click it
Press the Keyboard button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In
the dialog box which then opens, you can use the sliding controller Click Volume to set the duration for
which a key of the A/N keyboard must be pressed so that the button reacts as having been clicked. With
the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting.

Switching the Repetition Function of the Keys of the (A/N Keyboard On and Off
Press the Keyboard button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In
the dialog box which then opens, you can use the Auto Repeat function to specify whether or not
prolonged pressing of a key causes repetition of the input.

Setting the Alarm Tone

In the menu Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options, press the Audio button. In the
dialog box which then opens, you can set the frequency with the sliding controller Tone, the duration with
Duration, and (in some configurations) the volume of the acoustic signal which can be emitted by the
CHARTPILOT with Volume. With the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting.

340 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 9 Alarm Management
Operating Instructions 9.1 General

9 Alarm Management

9.1 General

If the CHARTPILOT wants to draw the operator's attention to a situation which might require intervention
by him, it generates an alarm. An alarm consists of a text message, which in most cases is supplemented
by an acoustic signal. The text message is shown in the alarm list.
Is there is a bridge alarm system connected which signals alarm messages to the CHARTPILOT, then
when the CHARTPILOT receives particular 1) messages it generates the BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM
alarm, together with the designation of the received message.

9.1 General
Behaviour when an Alarm Occurs
1. Switch off the acoustic signal (if there is one):
Press the Acknowledge button in the alarm list. As a result, the acoustic signal emitted by the
CHARTPILOT is switched off 2).
2. You must immediately try to get a clear idea of the causes of the alarm, the system status, and
possible system reactions, and, if appropriate, you should immediately take all of the necessary
measures to counteract any possible dangers.
3. Removing the cause of the alarm: If the alarm has occurred due to a cause that can be removed,
that cause must be removed as quickly as possible; see also Section 9.2 and Section 9.3.
Many alarms disappear when the cause disappears. Acknowledgement is then unnecessary.
4. The alarm must be acknowledged if the situation allows or requires such acknowledgement:
In the alarm list, press the Acknowledge button. As a result, the alarm which is marked is usually
acknowledged, i.e. it is removed from the alarm list. As a result of this, alarms which have also been
distributed to other items of equipment within the system are acknowledged there too. If some other
alarm is marked, the alarm which is to be acknowledged must be marked beforehand by clicking 3).
If alarms are also distributed to other items of equipment within the system, or if the system deviates
from the behaviour described above, e.g.
- if the alarm cannot be acknowledged at all or throughout the entire system, or
- if acknowledgement causes something to be initiated or enabled, or
- if an acknowledged alarm is repeated for as long as the cause of the alarm continues to exist,
this situation is mentioned in Section 9.2 and Section 9.3. In all cases, this second pressing of the
Acknowledge button switches off on all items of equipment the acoustic signal caused by the alarm.
☞ It is advisable to acknowledge the alarms of the main navigation sensors (gyro, speed and position
sensor) at one of the radar indicators; when the TRACKPILOT is in use, only the radar indicator
selected as TRACKPILOT Master, is able to execute the required sensor selection functions.

Generally Switching the Acoustic Signal On and Off for Particular Alarms
In the Alarm Settings menu, you can define by means of the Buzzer On function whether the acoustic
signal should or should not be sounded on the CHARTPILOT when one of the alarms marked with the
symbol in Section 9.2 and Section 9.3 occurs.

1) For each alarm that can be emitted by the bridge alarm system, a setting is made at service level to specify whether the alarm message
BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM or BRIDGE ALARM SYST. is to be triggered on the NACOS components mentioned, and whether this is to
occur there together with an acoustic signal.
2)
In the case of appropriate installation, the acoustical signal can be switched off by operation of an external operating element too.
3) If the display of the list has been switched off even although an alarm that can be acknowledged has not been acknowledged, that alarm
is automatically marked as soon as the list is opened again. Only in this case is it necessary, after opening of the alarm list, to mark the
most recent alarm by clicking before acknowledgement. The most recent alarm is inserted at the top of the alarm list.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 341

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
 9 Alarm Management CHARTPILOT
9.1 General Operating Instructions

Switching Off the Display of the Alarm List

When the last alarm in the alarm list is acknowledged, the display of the alarm list is switched off auto-
matically. By pressing the Cancel button, you can switch off the display of the alarm list without having
acknowledged the alarm message. The horn symbol in the navigation data line is then displayed in order
to point out that not all alarms have been acknowledged.

Switching On the Display of the Alarm List

The display of the alarm list can be switched on at any time by clicking the horn symbol.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Contents of the Alarm List

9.1 General

All of the alarms are listed which have occurred so far but have not been acknowledged.

Alarm message with time and date of its appearance and stating the
NACOS component that has triggered the alarm.

Acknowledges the marked alarm message. Switches off the display of the alarm list.

Fig. 9-1 The alarm list

For each alarm, the following items of information are entered:

Date, Time
The date and time at which the alarm was generated
Source
The system component which has generated the alarm. Meanings:
- AIS AIS electronics unit
- BAS External alarm system, e.g. Bridge Alarm System BAS40 - see Section 11.4
- CP CHARTPILOT computer
- ECDIS CHARTPILOT computer (ECDIS program)
- RADAR Electronics of one of the connected radar indicators
- UPS Uninterruptible power supply
Description
Here, the alarm message appears, often followed by other items of information and by a suggestion of
how you can react appropriately to the alarm.
In Section 9.2, all alarms which can occur on the CHARTPILOT are explained in alphabetical order.

Alarm Outputs
In particular situations, the CHARTPILOT outputs an electrical signal, e.g. for the purpose of driving an
external alarm display unit. The faults and alarms which cause the output of such an alarm signal are
stated in Appendix B.

342 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 9 Alarm Management
Operating Instructions 9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

The following alarms can appear in the alarm list of the CHARTPILOT (both in Chart mode and in
Conning mode).
The acoustic signal which then occurs is indicated by the following symbols:
On the CHARTPILOT, an acoustic signal occurs regardless of whether the Buzzer On/Off
function is set in the Alarm Settings menu (see page 341).
On the CHARTPILOT, an acoustic signal occurs if the Buzzer On function is set in the
Alarm Settings menu (see page 341).
Whether an acoustic signal occurs on the CHARTPILOT depends on the factors described.

AIS INTERROGATION
The AIS has received a long-range interrogation. The Reply mode (see page 124) AUTO has been
selected. The reply was given automatically.

AIS INTERROGATION Reply required

The AIS has received a long-range interrogation. The Reply mode (see page 124) MANUAL has
been selected. The reply is sent when, in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation, the button Reply is
pressed.

AIS OFF, POSITION LOST Check position sensor

All information about AIS targets including their displays has been deleted because determination of
own position has been taking place by dead reckoning for the past 10 minutes.
Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elimi-
nated.
Remedy: Select some other position sensor.

AIS OFFLINE
Data are no longer being received from the AIS system.
Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elimi-
nated.
Remedy: Check the AIS system. It might be possible to eliminate the fault by switching the voltage
supply to the AIS electronics unit off and then on again at the ship's mains.

APPROACHING WAYPOINT [Waypoint] WOP [xx : yy min]

The next wheel over point (before the stated waypoint) will probably be reached in xx minutes and
yy seconds (see page 106). The time between reaching the wheel-over point and the occurrence of
this alarm is displayed in the Alarm Settings menu and can be changed there.
Special feature: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
is not switched off (on the CHARTPILOT: in the menu Alarm Settings). On each of these units, an
acknowledgement is necessary.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 343

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
 9 Alarm Management CHARTPILOT
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series Operating Instructions
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM (alarm designation)

A bridge alarm system (if installed and connected) has signalled to the NACOS the alarm message
stated under alarm designation (see page 378).
☞ See footnote on page 341.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
By acknowledgement of the alarm on the CHARTPILOT, the bridge alarm system too is acknowl-
edged.

CAUTION: Replay activated; do not use sensor information.

The data recorded with the voyage recording function are reproduced. The display does not corre-
spond to the nautical situation that currently exists.
Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged.

CHECK LEG to [the present waypoint]

The ECDIS has detected that the present track segment of the System Track is touching a poten-
tially dangerous area or object (details see page 111).
Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the alarm to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRA-
DARs; name on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: CP[n] CHECK LEG.
For as long as the System Track is touching the same regions or objects as those that have led to
the alarm, the alarm is not repeated.
Remedy: Check the System Track and modify it if necessary.

CHECK NEXT LEG to [the next waypoint]

The ECDIS has detected that the next track segment of the System Track is touching a potentially
dangerous area or object (details see page 111).
Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the alarm to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRA-
DARs; name on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: CP[n] CHECK NEXT LEG.
For as long as the System Track is touching the same regions or objects as those that have led to
the alarm, the alarm is not repeated.
Remedy: Check the System Track and modify it if necessary.

COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED Off course xx.x ° Limit yy °

The actual course differs by xx.x° from the course defined by the System Track, and thus exceeds
the set course limit of yy°.
Special feature: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
is not switched off (on the CHARTPILOT: in the menu Alarm Settings). On each of these units, an
acknowledgement is necessary.
For as long as the course limit continues to be exceeded, an acknowledged alarm is not repeated.
☞ When the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, then instead the alarm TP COURSE
LIMIT generated by the TRACKPILOT appears on the radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT
Master, in this situation.
Remedy:
- Increase the course limit or
- wait until the TRACKPILOT has reduced the course error to zero or
- switch over to manual steering.

344 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 9 Alarm Management
Operating Instructions 9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

DANGEROUS AIS TARGET yy.yNM zzz° (yy.y=range, zzz=true bearing)
An AIS target has become a dangerous target. The CPA and TCPA have become less than the set
limits. The bearing and range of this target are stated.

DANGEROUS AIS TARGET ACQUISITION FAILED

For an AIS target not being tracked, the TCPA/CPA values have fallen below the specified limits. It
was impossible to acquire the target because the maximum possible number of AIS targets are
already being tracked.
Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elimi-
nated.
Remedy: Delete non-critical tracked AIS targets.

DANGEROUS TARGET radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number)

This radar indicator has detected a dangerous target.
☞ The alarm should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator.
Special feature: This alarm can only appear if activated on service level.

DEAD MAN PRE ALARM Press any key on any radar indicator.
The watch alarm system will trigger the watch alarm after a short time if, within that time, the DEAD
MAN PRE ALARM is not acknowledged and no watch alarm key is pressed.
Special feature: Acknowledgement with the Acknowledge button on the CHARTPILOT and with
any key on any radar indicator.

DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED Depth xxx.xm Limit yym, check chart and sounder
The water depth below the transducer measured by the navigational echosounder is xxx.x m and is
thus less than the set depth alarm value of yy m.
Special features: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
is not switched off (at the CHARTPILOT: in the Alarm Settings menu). On each of these units, an
acknowledgement is necessary.

EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA

The ship is touching the boundary of the anchor watch area.
Special feature: This alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the ship is completly
inside the ANCHOR WATCH area again or when the watch alarm function is switched off.

FAULT xx AIS: (Description)

This alarm indicates that there is a technical fault which is impairing, or could impair, the functioning
of the AIS system (xx = number of the fault).
☞ If such an alarm is occurring frequently or if it persists for some time, the service organisation
should be informed of this.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 345

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
 9 Alarm Management CHARTPILOT
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series Operating Instructions
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

GYRO FAULT Check gyro compass, switch to back-up gyro.

The compass has been switched off, or is faulty, or is reporting incorrect data.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
If the GYRO FAULT alarm occurs, the North-Up display mode is automatically switched on and all
display objects and operating possibilities for which the heading information is required are no longer
shown or are inactive. If the cause is not corrected within 30 seconds, the tracked targets are
deleted.
Remedy: Check the compass.

GYRO VALID Check/accept gyro value.

The compass is again transmitting valid data.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
When the TRACKPILOT is in the activated state, this alarm can be acknowledged only on the radar
indicator selected as TRACKPILOT Master.
If a compass is installed which sends heading changes only, the heading transfer must be synchro-
nised again. For this purpose, the menu Sensor Settings > Set Gyro appears automatically after
switch-off of the acoustic signal; for further information, see page 137.

LATITUDE EXCEEDED Check position data.

The 85th parallel of latitude has been exceeded. The NACOS is no longer processing position data.
Functions that need position data, e.g. Track mode, may no longer be used here.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.

LOG STATUS CHANGED Accept or change speed sensor.

The log selected as the speed sensor has changed its status, e.g. from Bottom Track to Water
Track. It is sending valid data.
WARNING:
If the TRACKPILOT is in Course mode or Track mode, a course change
occurs if the drift component has changed as a result of the switch-over.

Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system

If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
At service level, it is possible to define that this alarm can generally be suppressed by the operator
at the radar indicators.
Remedy: Check what change of status is involved; if necessary, select some other speed sensor or
change to heading mode.

LOST AIS TARGET

An AIS target being tracked has been lost.

346 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 9 Alarm Management
Operating Instructions 9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

LOST TARGET radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number)
This radar indicator has lost a tracked target.
☞ The alarm should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator.
Special feature: This alarm can only appear if activated on service level.

LOW POSITION QUALITY Check position, change position sensor.

The selected position sensor is transmitting position data which vary more than is usual for this type
of sensor.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
This alarm can only appear if activated on service level.
Remedy: Check the position sensor; select some other position sensor.

NAVIGATION SENSOR DATA NOT AVAILABLE Check radar indicator.

None of the radar indicators which can operate as a Sensor Master provides navigation data. There-
fore, all own ship data are missing on the CHARTPILOT, and so it can no longer be used for nautical
surveillance.
Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elimi-
nated.
Remedy: Check the radar system. Switch off or restart the defective radar indicator.

NEW SAFETY MESSAGE

The AIS has received a safety message.
☞ The content of the safety message is stated in the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message.

NO DANGEROUS AIS TARGET ACQUISITION SOG Lost, check sensors

Because of missing data, the own speed vector over ground cannot be determined. For all AIS
targets, the collision avoidance computation and therefore the automatic acquisition and the
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm do not take place.
Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elimi-
nated.
Remedy: Check speed sensor, check position sensor.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 347

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
 9 Alarm Management CHARTPILOT
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series Operating Instructions
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

OBJECT OF INTEREST [object class and supplement]

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that a vector chart object being
monitored, i.e. a potentially dangerous chart object, is situated a short distance ahead of own ship,
or is already being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently
relevant part of the System Track.
A) With nearby as the supplement (see also page 109):
The guard sector (see page 106) is touching one or more objects belonging to the specified
object class, i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these objects might be run over
within the time or distance entered under Objects of Interest in the menu Alarm Settings >
Chart Alarms.
- or -
Own ship is situated on an object belonging to the object class mentioned.
B) With On Track as the supplement (see also page 111):
The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching one or more
of the objects specified in A).
Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the alarm to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRA-
DARs; name on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: CP[n] OBJECT OF INTEREST.
The alarm can be acknowledged only on the CHARTPILOT.
An acknowledged alarm is not repeated while the conditions that led to the alarm continue to exist.
Only when these conditions no longer exist does renewed occurrence of the above-mentioned condi-
tions in the same object class cause an alarm message again.
If several cases of the above-mentioned conditions occur at the same time, the following limitations
exist:
- Only the three cases that occurred first will generate an alarm.
- For each object class, only the alarm for the case that occurred first will appear.
When one of these alarms is acknowledged, the next OBJECT OF INTEREST alarm can appear.

OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA

The ship has left the anchor watch area.
Special feature: Through the acknowledgement, the anchor watch function is switched off.

POSITION INVALID Select ESTIMATED or another position sensor.

The selected position sensor is sending invalid position data. Another position sensor will have to be
selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position by dead
reckoning.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Posi-
tion Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledgement.
This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The sensor
which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon
as the position sensor which led to the POSITION INVALID alarm is sending valid data again, the
POSITION VALID alarm appears.

348 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 9 Alarm Management
Operating Instructions 9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

POSITION STATUS CHANGED Accept or change position sensor.
The selected position sensor has performed an internal change of status (e.g. from DGPS to GPS)
or the receiving method has changed (e.g. from DECCA to LORAN).
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
The acoustic signal does not appear if a change-over from GPS to DGPS takes place and no posi-
tion offset has been set.
At service level, it is possible to define that this alarm can generally be suppressed by the operator
at the radar indicators.

POSITION TIMEOUT Select another position sensor.

Data are no longer being received from the selected position sensor. Another position sensor will
have to be selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position
by dead reckoning.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Posi-
tion Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledgement.
This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The sensor
which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon
as the position sensor which led to the POSITION TIMEOUT alarm is sending valid data again, the
POSITION VALID alarm appears.

POSITION VALID Check and accept position sensor.

The position sensor which had given the POSITION INVALID or POSITION TIMEOUT alarm is
again sending valid data.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Posi-
tion Sensor, containing the data of the sensor which had given the POSITION INVALID or POSI-
TION TIMEOUT alarm, opens automatically after acknowledgement. After checking the new sensor-
data, either confirm this sensor by clicking on the OK button or select some other sensor.

POWER FAILURE UPS reserve xx min. Restore power to UPS

The uninterruptible power supply (UPS) of the CHARTPILOT is no longer being supplied with power
by the ship's mains. The energy for the supply of power to the CHARTPILOT now comes from the
batteries of the UPS. The main program of the CHARTPILOT is automatically shut down properly in
good time before the specified time if the supply of power by the ship's mains has still not be restored
by that time.
Remedy: Secure the supply of power from the ship's mains to the UPS.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 349

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
 9 Alarm Management CHARTPILOT
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series Operating Instructions
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

ROT LIMIT EXCEEDED Check gyro compass, switch to backup gyro.

The rate of turn computed from the change in the received heading signal is greater than is possible
on the basis of the ship's dynamics as parameterised in the system. From this, it can be concluded
that the compass or the transfer of the heading signal is defective.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
This alarm can only appear if activated on service level.
Remedy: Check the compass.

SAFETY CONTOUR [object class and supplement]

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that the safety contour or some
other area that is not deep enough is situated a short distance ahead of own ship, or is already being
touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently relevant part of the
System Track.
A) With ahead as the supplement (see also page 108):
The guard sector (see page 106) is touching the safety contour or the insufficiently deep region
specified as the object class, i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these objects
might be run over within the time or distance entered under Objects of Interest in the menu
Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms.
B) With nearby as the supplement:
Same as A)
- or -
Own ship is situated in an insufficiently deep region.
C) With inside as the supplement:
Own ship is situated on the safety contour or in the specified insufficiently deep region.
D) With On Track as the supplement (see also page 111):
The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching the safety
contour or the specified insufficiently deep region.
Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the alarm to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRA-
DARs; name on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: CP[n] SAFETY CONTOUR.
The alarm can be acknowledged only on the CHARTPILOT.
An acknowledged alarm is not repeated while the conditions that led to the alarm continue to exist.
Only when these conditions no longer exist does renewed occurrence of the above-mentioned condi-
tions in the same object class cause an alarm message again.
If several cases of the above-mentioned conditions occur at the same time, the following limitations
exist:
- Only the three cases that occurred first will generate an alarm.
- For each object class, only the alarm for the case that occurred first will appear.
When one of these alarms is acknowledged, the next SAFETY CONTOUR alarm can appear.

SAFETY MESSAGE LOST

Because the safety message that was received last has caused the number of messages to exceed
the number that can be stored, the oldest safety message is deleted.
Remedy: Delete any safety messages that are no longer needed.

350 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 9 Alarm Management
Operating Instructions 9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

SAFETY MESSAGE TRANSMISSION FAILED
The AIS system has recognised that the safety message might not have been transmitted success-
fully.
☞ The cause of this can be that an incorrect MMSI number has been entered and that, as a result,
no confirmation of reception has been received from the addressee.

SPEED INVALID Select another speed sensor.

The speed sensor is sending invalid data. Another speed sensor will have to be selected by the
operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used. Dashes are
shown in the speed area.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings >
Speed Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledge-
ment. This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The
sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as
soon as the speed sensor which led to the SPEED INVALID alarm is again sending valid data, the
SPEED VALID alarm appears.
Until valid speed data are received, the alarm is repeated at intervals of one minute.

SPEED TIMEOUT Select another speed sensor.

Data are no longer being received from the selected speed sensor. Another speed sensor will have
to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being
used. Dashes are shown in the speed area.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings >
Speed Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledge-
ment. This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The
sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as
soon as the speed sensor which led to the SPEED TIMEOUT alarm is again sending valid data, the
SPEED VALID alarm appears.
Until valid speed data are received, the alarm is repeated at intervals of one minute.

SPEED VALID Check and accept speed sensor.

The speed sensor which had given the SPEED INVALID or SPEED TIMEOUT alarm is again
sending valid data.
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings >
Speed Sensor, containing the data of the sensor which had given the SPEED INVALID or SPEED
TIMEOUT alarm, opens automatically after acknowledgement. After checking the new sensor data,
either confirm this sensor by clicking on the OK button or select some other sensor.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 351

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
 9 Alarm Management CHARTPILOT
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series Operating Instructions
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

TARGET IN ACQUISITION ZONE radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number)

This radar indicator reports that a target which is not yet being tracked has been acquired automat-
ically in the acquisition/guard zone.
☞ The alarm should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator.
Special feature: This alarm can only appear if activated on service level.

TARGET IN GUARD ZONE radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number)

This radar indicator reports that a target which is already being tracked has entered the acquisition/
guard zone at the indicated range and bearing.
☞ The alarm should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator.
Special feature: This alarm can only appear if activated on service level.

TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED XTD xxx m Limit yyy m, navigate with care.
The cross track distance is xxx m and thus exceeds the set track limit of yyy m.
Special features: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
is not switched off (on the CHARTPILOT: in the menu Alarm Settings). On each of these units, an
acknowledgement is necessary.
For as long as the track limit continues to be exceeded, an acknowledged alarm is not repeated.
☞ When the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, then instead the alarm TP TRACK
LIMIT generated by the TRACKPILOT appears on the radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT
Master, in this situation.
Remedy: Increase the track limit (if the nautical situation allows this) or deactivate the track alarms
on the CHARTPILOT.

UNEXPECTED END OF [Program name] select TREE, EXIT to restart

A serious fault has occurred. The program of the equipment on which this alarm appears must be
aborted with the EXIT button after clicking on the TREE button, and must be restarted; see page 32.
If this is not successful, it might be possible to correct the fault by switching the equipment off
completely with the POWER DOWN button; see page 29.
Special feature: Acknowledgement is not possible.

USER CHART OBJECT [object class and supplement]

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that an User Chart Object of the
class "own safety line" or "danger highlight", i.e. a potentially dangerous object, or an User Chart
Object of the class "own MARPOL line" is situated a short distance ahead of own ship, or is already
being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently relevant part
of the System Track.
A) With Own safety line nearby, Own MARPOL line nearby or Danger highlight ahead as the
object class and supplement (see also page 110):
The guard sector (see page 106) is touching one or more own safety lines or danger highlights,
i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these objects might be run over within the time
or distance entered under User Chart Objects in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms.
B) With Inside danger highlight as the supplement and object class:
Own ship is situated on a danger highlight.

352 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 9 Alarm Management
Operating Instructions 9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

C) With On Track as the supplement (see also page 111):
The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching one or more
own safety lines or danger highlights.
Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the alarm to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRA-
DARs; name on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: CP[n] USER CHART OBJECT.
The alarm can be acknowledged only on the CHARTPILOT.
An acknowledged alarm is not repeated while the conditions that led to the alarm continue to exist.
Only when these conditions no longer exist does renewed occurrence of the above-mentioned condi-
tions in the same object class cause an alarm message again.
If several cases of the above-mentioned conditions occur at the same time, the following limitations
exist:
- Only the three cases that occurred first will generate an alarm.
- In case C), only one alarm appears for each object class.
- In cases A) and B) taken together, only one alarm occurs for each object class. It also appears
if an alarm in accordance with case C) is present for the same object class.
When one of these alarms is acknowledged, the next USER CHART OBJECT alarm can appear.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 353

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
 9 Alarm Management CHARTPILOT
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series Operating Instructions
9.2 List of Alarms in Systems with Radar 1000 Series

354 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Part III CHARTPILOT as Conning Display

In this part, those functions are described which the CHARTPILOT, when used in NACOS, offers in
Conning mode.

In the following instructions for the operating procedure of these func-

tions, it is assumed that the CHARTPILOT is switched to Conning mode.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 355

b_cp_e4.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

356 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e4.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 10 General
Operating Instructions

10 General

☞ In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, the Conning mode described in this part is not appli-
cable. In this case, in addition to the functions described in Part II, the functions marked with # in
the following are available on the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode.
When the CHARTPILOT is switched to Conning mode, it displays a conning display grouped around a
diagram of the ship and consisting of a summary of the most important ship-handling data.
The composition of the data displayed can be adapted to suit the given situation by switching over
between
- the Navigation Page for sailing on the open sea and in coastal approaches
- the Docking Page # for docking
- the Keel Clearance Page # for sailing in shallow water.
As the data display, the following can be displayed, whichever is selected:
- the Track/Schedule display 1) or
- the Track/Control display 1),
- the NACOS Status display or
- an External Alarm display 2).
Furthermore, in Conning mode the following functions are available:
- Performing nautical calculations #
- Generating the pilot card #
- Generation, display and management of lists and notes (Text Pages) 1)

- Determination and saving of system parameterisations 1)

- Determining the system version 1)
- Making system settings 1)
In parts, Conning mode has the same man-machine interface as Chart mode. Therefore, all of Section 3
is applicable, except that the chart area is replaced by different displays. 3)
The basic setting of Conning mode is the Navigation Page. It appears after switch-over to this mode has
taken place for the first time. Because all of the above-mentioned functions are implemented by means
of individual subroutines, function selection is performed via the Tree. The most important functions can
be additionally called up in the basic menu line by means of buttons. The Tree of Conning mode is shown
in Figure 10-1.
☞ The alarm management function described in Section 9 for Chart mode is fully applicable to Conning
mode as well.

1)
The same function is also available in Chart mode
2)
Only if there is an external alarm system connected which provides the necessary signals.
3)
At service level, the display can be changed in such a way that the menus and the data displays appear on the left-hand side. With this
setting, the individual displays of the Navigation Page appear on the right-hand side.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 357

b_cp_e41.fm / 09.07.07
10 General CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Prepares the switch-off (at the mains) of Switches the tree off without a
the CHARTPILOT; see page 31. functional switch-over taking
place.
Stops all programs that are running, and
after presentation of the Log-On display it
independently starts the main program of the
CHARTPILOT (see page 32).

Fig. 10-1 The Tree in Conning mode

358 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e41.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.1 The Navigation Page

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

11.1 The Navigation Page

On the Navigation Page, a set of data needed for sailing in coastal approaches and on the open sea can
be displayed as numerical values and as graphics. You can parameterise some parts of this display your-
self.
The Navigation Page is divided into the middle part and individual displays which can be displayed on
the left-hand side of the screen.
Depending on the type of propulsion, the display of the engines in the middle part is set during setting-
to-work to
- conventional propulsion - see Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3
- propulsion by means of azimuth thrusters - see Figure 11-4 and Figure 11-5 - or
- the individual combination of the existing propulsion types; for an example, see Figure 11-6.

Switching On the Navigation Page

In the Tree, press the Navigation button. The Navigation Page appears, and also the Navigation menu
if the menu display is switched on.
☞ Because the Navigation Page is part of the subroutine which makes the Conning mode possible, the
Navigation Page appears automatically when the switch-over to Conning mode takes place and also
when, in Conning mode, a subroutine that was started there is switched off (with the Exit button).

Parameterisation of the Navigation Page

Parameterisation is performed in the Navigation menu.
- Parameterisation of the Middle Part
In the Display Mode frame, you can choose between
- Open Sea; in the ship symbol, this provides a graphic display of the course deviation, the track
deviation and (in the case of conventional propulsion) the longitudinal speed, among other
things, (Figure 11-2 and 11-4)
- Harbour; in the ship symbol, (in the case of conventional propulsion) this displays the power of
the thrusters, among other things (Figure 11-3).
- Selection of the Individual Displays
In the Display Options frame, by means of the buttons Display 1 to Display 3 it is possible to
specify which of the individual displays shown in Figure 11-9 and 11-10 is to be presented at each
of the three places provided for this purpose on the left-hand side of the screen. Display 1 defines
the top place, and Display 3 defines the bottom place. If the button is set to Empty, no individual
display is presented at the place.
☞ If data are not displayed even although you have switched on the display of these data, the reason
is probably that these data or the values needed for their computation are not available to the
CHARTPILOT.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 359

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.1 The Navigation Page Operating Instructions

In the middle part, the course deviation, track deviation and (in the case of conventional
propulsion) longitudinal speed (among other things) are displayed graphically.
In the middle part, the powers of the thrusters (among other things) are displayed graphically
(in the case of conventional propulsion).
Selection of the individual display for the place at top left.
Selection of the individual display for the place at centre left.
Selection of the individual display for the place at bottom left.

Display indicating that, with the Recording display switched on, the history of gyro
heading is displayed.
In addition to the gyro heading, the history of the rudder angle is displayed when the
Recording display is switched on.
In addition to the gyro heading, the history of the Rate of Turn is displayed when the
Recording display is switched on.

After a safeguard question has been answered appropriately, this switches off the
Conning subroutine and switches over to Chart mode.

Fig. 11-1 The Navigation Menu

360 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.1 The Navigation Page

Next course: preplanned course which is used 2) as the set course Rate of Turn, computed from the change in
by the TRACKPILOT after pressing of the EXECUTE key 3). the gyro heading values supplied by the
compass
Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard.
Radius of the turning circle currently being performed, computed from the Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding
measured speed and the ROT. If the radius of the turning circle is greater of the scale range.
than 5 NM, the radius is not displayed.
Next radius:
Set radius with which the TRACKPILOT is performing a course change. Preplanned set radius
If the next manoeuvre cannot be performed with the set radius, and Track which is defined as the
mode is in the switched-on state, the value flashes. set radius by pressing
of the EXECUTE 3) key

Gyro heading
Yellow triangle: The set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2)

Actual course 1) = Gyro heading + drift angle

(+ course correction 7))

Set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2)

Mode of the TRACKPILOT

Drift angle computed from the longitudinal and transverse speeds

supplied by the selected speed sensor (from BT values, if available)

Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 4) 5)

Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set value.
Red lines: The set course limit
Bar is red: The course limit is exceeded.

Track deviation: 4)
Bar to the right or R: The ship is situated to the right of the track.
Red lines: The set track limit
Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded.

XTD: Deviation from the System Track 6)

R = the ship is situated to the right of the track
Red background: Deviation from the System Track exceeds
the set track limit.

Rudder angle, from the rudder angle sensor

Yellow triangle: The set rudder angle, specified by the TRACKPILOT
Red lines: The rudder limit that is set on the TRACKPILOT

Longitudinal speed measured by

1) Course over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode the selected speed sensor:
Course through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode Bar grey: Speed over ground
2) In Course and Track mode of the TRACKPILOT, this is displayed beside Course to make Bar blue: Speed through the water
it clear that the values are no Heading values.
3) Additionally in Track mode if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appro-
priate alarm.
4) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT.
In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been spec-
ified by the input of the set course (designation: Off Track). In Track mode, this is the devi- Displays not explained here:
ation from the System Track (designation XTD). See Figure 11-3
5) In Anchor Control mode: Heading deviation, red line = set heading limit, etc
6) Computed by the CHARTPILOT main program. The display is absent if the ship is sailing in
Track mode, because then XTD is displayed in the track deviation bar.
7) In the Track mode only.

Fig. 11-2 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part, Open Sea Display Mode

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 361

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.1 The Navigation Page Operating Instructions

Power of the bow and stern thrusters:

Length of bar corresponds to power reported by thruster
(100% = half the width of the ship).
Bar is displayed in direction of ship's acceleration caused by
the transverse thrust.

Transverse speed at the bow, computed by the system 1)

Speed over ground or speed through the water1)

Set speed specified by the SPEEDPILOT 1)

Mode of the SPEEDPILOT

Propeller shaft revolution rate 2)

Pitch of variable-pitch propeller2)

Shaft Power 2)

Longitudinal speed measured by the

selected speed sensor 1)

Clutches 2)
Yellow area: Engine coupled
In the case of ships with two
Transverse speed at the stern, propeller shafts, the data of the star-
computed by the system 1) board shaft are displayed here.

Next speed: Preplanned speed which is specified

as the set speed to the SPEEDPILOTfor the next
leg of the pre-planned track. 3)
Displays not explained here:
See Figure 11-2
Actual set lever value

1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode,
speed through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode
2) Data from the engines
3) Additionally with activated TRACKPILOT if, the WOP of the system track has been passed.

Fig. 11-3 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part in Harbour Display Mode

362 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.1 The Navigation Page

Next course: Preplanned course which is used 2) as the set course Rate of Turn, computed from the change in
by the TRACKPILOT after pressing of the EXECUTE key 3). the gyro heading values supplied by the
compass
Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard.
Radius of the turning circle currently being performed, computed from the Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding
measured speed and the ROT. If the radius of the turning circle is greater of the scale range.
than 5 NM, the radius is not displayed.
Next radius:
Set radius with which the TRACKPILOT is performing a course change. Preplanned set radius
If the next manoeuvre cannot be performed with the set radius, and Track which is defined as the
mode is in the switched-on state, the value flashes. set radius by pressing
of the EXECUTE 3) key

Gyro heading
Yellow triangle: The set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2)

Actual course 1) = Gyro heading + drift angle

(+ course correction 7))

Set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2)

Mode of the TRACKPILOT

Drift angle computed from the longitudinal and transverse speeds

supplied by the selected speed sensor (from BT values, if available)

Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 4) 5)

Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set value.
Red lines: The set course limit
Bar is red: The course limit is exceeded.

Track deviation: 4)
Bar to the right or R: The ship is situated to the right of the track.
Red lines: The set track limit
Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded.

XTD: Deviation from the System Track 6)

R = the ship is situated to the right of the track
Red background: Deviation from the System Track exceeds
the set track limit.

1) Course over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode
Course through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode
2) In Course and Track mode of the TRACKPILOT, this is displayed beside Course to make it
clear that the values are no Heading values.
3) Additionally in Track mode if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appro-
priate alarm.
4) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT. Displays not explained here:
In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been spec- See Figure 11-5
ified by the input of the set course (designation: Off Track). In Track mode, this is the devi-
ation from the System Track (designation XTD).
5) In Anchor Control mode: Heading deviation, red line = set heading limit, etc
6) Computed by the CHARTPILOT main program. The display is absent if the ship is sailing in
Track mode, because then XTD is displayed in the track deviation bar.
7) In the Track mode only.

Fig. 11-4 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Open Sea Display Mode

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 363

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.1 The Navigation Page Operating Instructions

Data of the azimuth thruster:

Length of the yellow bar and lower numerical value:
Revolution rate of the thruster (actual value)
Bar is yellow: Normal direction of rotation of the propeller.
(Ship is propelled in the ahead direction of the thruster). Transverse speed at the bow,
Bar is red: Propeller is rotating in reverse. (Ship is propelled computed by the system 1)
in the direction opposite to the ahead direction of the
thruster.).
Yellow triangle on the outside: Thruster direction set by the
TRACKPILOT
Red scale sector: Rudder limit set for the TRACKPILOT
Yellow triangles on the bar: Thruster revolution rate set by
the SPEEDPILOT
Black triangle and upper left numerical value: Heading
direction of the thruster
At service level, it is possible to specify that the numerical
field becomes green or red when the ship is not being
propelled in ahead. Whether the colour indicates the
direction of the force exerted by the thruster or, alterna-
tively, the direction in which the ship is moved can also be
specified at service level.
Propeller symbol indicates whether the propeller is situated
at the front or back of the thruster.
Circular area is red: Thruster is out of service.
Right numerical value: Power of the thruster, if available

Positions of the azimuth thruster displays:

Ships with normal bridge configuration: At the top, the fore
thrusters; at the bottom, the aft thrusters
Ferries with bridges fore and aft: At the top, the thrusters
situated in front of the person looking at the screen; at the
bottom, the thrusters behind the person looking at the screen.

Mode of the SPEEDPILOT

Set speed specified by the SPEEDPILOT 1)

Longitudinal speed measured

by the selected speed sensor:
Speed over ground or speed through the water1) Bar grey: Speed over ground
Bar blue: Speed through the
water
Transverse speed at the stern,
computed by the system 1) Next speed: preplanned speed which is spec-
ified as the set speed to the SPEEDPILOT
Displays not explained here: after pressing of the EXECUTE key 2)
See Figure 11-4
Actual set lever value

1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode,
speed through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode
2) Additionally in Track mode of the TRACKPILOT if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appropriate alarm.

Fig. 11-5 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Harbour Display Mode

364 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.1 The Navigation Page

This example shows the middle part of

the Navigation Page in Harbour display
mode for a ship with diesel electric
propulsion and azimuth thrusters.

Navigation data according to

Figure 11-2

Data of the bow azimuth thruster (or

pump jet) according to Figure 11-5

Navigation data according to

Figure 11-3

Data of the stern thrusters according to

Figure 11-3

Data of the diesel electric propul-

sion analogous to Figure 11-3

Data of the rudder according

to Figure 11-2

Fig. 11-6 Navigation Page, example of a different propulsion combination

If an echosounder with several transducers is installed, the selected transducer

is noticed here.

Water depth under the keel measured by the navigation echosounder at the location
of the selected transducer including the depth history of the past 10 minutes
Red line: The set depth alarm value
☞ By means of a context-sensitive menu, the depth range displayed can be set to a
different fixed value or to automatic range-adaptation.

Depth

Fig. 11-7 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 1

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 365

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.1 The Navigation Page Operating Instructions

Wind display (Switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu)

Rel: relative wind; measured by the wind sensor
True: true wind; computed by the system

Wind speed (Switch-over of the unit of measurement by

means of context-sensitive menu)
Wind direction
Ship symbol represents the present gyro heading
Yellow arrow pointing inwards: Wind direction
Blue arrow pointing outwards: Direction of the current
Red line: Actual course = Gyro heading + drift angle
Wind + Set
Direction and speed of the current, computed from the difference between Bottom Track data and Water Track data
If the selected speed sensor supplies both Bottom Track data and Water Track data, the set and drift are computed from these.
If the selected speed sensor supplies only Bottom Track data or only Water Track data, the system also uses data from other
connected sensors. If a transverse component is absent, the displayed values do not indicate the drift vector correctly. This is
the case, for example, if the longitudinal speed from the EM log is supplemented by the speed over ground (from the GPS
receiver).

If data entered manually are taken into account in the computation of set and drift, the fields have a yellow background.

Air temperature, outside, transferred from the weather station

Relative humidity of the outside air, transferred from the weather station

Dew point of the outside air, computed from air temperature and relative humidity

Barometric pressure transferred from the weather station, including

its variation during the past 8 hours

Sea water temperature, transferred from the temperature

sensor or from the weather station
Weather

Recording of the past 10 minutes:

Blue: Gyro heading
Yellow: Rudder angle (mean value in the case of twin rudders) or ROT.
Selection of the recorded parameters in the Recording Options frame in
the Navigation menu - see page 360.

☞ Gyro heading is always displayed when the Recording display is in the

switched-on state.
In the case of twin rudder systems, the mean value of the two rudder
systems is displayed.
Recording In Conning mode, the values from the past 10 minutes are continuously
stored for all three parameters which can be displayed here, so that the
history will be displayed immediately when switch-on of the Recording
display and switch-over between Rudder angle and ROT take place.

Fig. 11-8 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 2

366 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.1 The Navigation Page

Environmental data supplied by external item of equipment

Ship's attitude data provided by external equip-

ment - see also Keel Clearance Page, page 372

Environment (selectable only if the appropriate sensors are installed)

Mode of the main generators

Power of the main generators:

- Top edge of the green bar: Total power available at present
- Green area: Spare power at present
- Yellow bar: Power output or used power
Total power available at present For Generated Power, there are
Spare power at present other displays with a different
selection and layout of the data
Power output or used power described.
Generated Power (Can be selected only in the case of ships with electromotive propulsion and special interface.)

Data of the selected speed sensor

Measured speed through the water

☞ The availability of transverse speed is

dependent on the type of speed sensor
Speed
Speed WT

Fig. 11-9 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 3

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 367

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.1 The Navigation Page Operating Instructions

Overall estimated effect of the thrusters:

Green arrow: Present effect (estimated direction of the ship’s movement caused by the
thrust)
Yellow arrow: The set value (estimated sum of propulsion orders)

Both arrows represent the vector sum of the available azimuth thrusters calculated from
the RPM data input. The maximum length of the arrows represents 100% thrust on all
available thrusters.Use RPM: Values are based on the signalled rotational speed of the
azimuth propeller
Use Power: Values are based are the measured output
Use Pitch: Values are based on the signalled propeller pitch data
Use Power**2/3: Values are based are the measured output, taking into account a
nonlinear relationship between measured output and thrust.

Note: The rotational forces, generated by the thrusters cannot be derived from the
Manoeuvre Manoeuvre display.
(Can be selected only in the case
of ships with azimuth thrusters and Mode of the azimuth thruster control system (only available with special interface)
special interface)

Fuel consumption of the propulsion engines, measured by the fuel meters

Fuel consumption after the last consumption reset performed on a radar indicator (see
under Engine Interface in the Operating Instructions of the radar indicator) or after
switch-on of the radar system
Measured charge-air pressure of the main engine

Fuel density at 15°C; this is entered on the radar indicator (see under Engine Inter-
face in the Operating Instructions of the radar indicator).

Measured fuel temperatures

Switches the fuel consumption display over between litres and kg.
Consumption
(selectable only if the appropriate sensors are installed)

Fig. 11-10 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 4

368 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.2 The Docking Page

11.2 The Docking Page

On the Docking Page, a set of data needed for docking manoeuvres can be displayed as numerical
values and also graphically. You can parameterise this display yourself.

Switching On the Docking Page

In the Tree, press the Docking button. The Docking Page and (if the menu display is switched on) the
Docking menu appear.

Parameterisation of the Docking Page

Parameterisation is performed in the Docking menu.
- Selection of the Data to be Displayed
By pressing of the buttons Rate of Turn to Thruster, as well as History and Prediction, select the
data that are to be displayed.
- Setting the past track
When you switch on History, the last 10 positions of the ship are displayed relative to the present
position (if, because of low speed, they are situated within the display). The time covered by this
display can be set under History by means of the sliding controller. The distance between two
displayed positions of the ship is therefore one tenth of the value displayed on the sliding controller.
- Setting the Display of the Ship's Probable Movement
if you switch on Prediction, a prediction takes place to find out where the ship will sail to if it main-
tains its present state of motion. As in the case of the past track, 10 positions of the ship (at the
most) are displayed relative to the present position. Setting is done under Prediction in a manner
similar to the setting of the past track.
- Other Parameterisations:
In the lower part of the menu, after clicking of the relevant buttons you can specify whether
- the ship speeds and the drift are to be displayed in kt or in m/s,
- the ship symbol is to point upwards, downwards, to the right or to the left.
☞ If data are not displayed even although you have switched on the display of these data, the reason
is that these data or the values needed for computing them are not available to the CHARTPILOT.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 369

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.2 The Docking Page Operating Instructions

Rate of Turn, computed from the change in Trim: Difference between the forward draught and aft draught, computed from
the gyro heading values supplied by the the draughts or determined by connected trim sensor (– = bow is down)
compass Heel: Heel determined by the heel sensor
Bar to the right: The ship is turning to star- List: Draught increase caused by heel; determined by the list sensor or
board. computed from the heel
Red Triangle at end of scale: Exceeding of Squat: Draught increase caused by the suction effect occurring between the
the scale range. moving ship and the water bottom; computed from the ship's speed and the
water depth, taking account of the factors stored in the ship model
Clearance: Least distance between the ship and the water bottom, computed
from the least depth measured by the navigation echosounder under the ship
minus the list and squat, and minus the trim if the trim is positive
Gyro heading
Draught aft, manually
Draught forward, set (see page 389) or
Future positions of the ship, assuming that manually set (see page computed from the
the longitudinal and transverse forces remain 389) or determined by draught forward and the
constant; display of the next 10 positions connected sensors trim or determined by
relative to the present position (the time connected sensors
interval can be set under Prediction in the
Docking menu).

Drift, set: Speed and direction of the

current, computed from the difference
between Bottom Track and Water Track data
Wind, Rel. or Wind, True: Wind speed and
wind direction, measured by the wind sensor
(Rel.: relative wind, True: true wind; selec-
tion of True/Rel and unit of measurement of
the wind speed via context menu.

Water depth under the keel measured by

the navigation echosounder at the location
of the selected transducer
including the depth history of the past 10
minutes
If an echosounder with several transducers
is installed, the selected transducer is
noticed next to the depth value.
Red line: The set depth alarm value
☞ By means of a context-sensitive menu,
the depth range displayed can be set to
a different fixed value or to automatic
range-adaptation.

White lines: Speed vectors forward and aft

(computed from the displayed speeds of the
ship); limited to 2.5 kn
Blue arrow: Relative drift vector (= DRIFT
and SET); limited to 2.5 kn Rudder angle,
Yellow flag: Wind direction and speed, rela- Propulsion data as described in measured by the
tive; 5 m/s corresponds to half a division; Figure 11-3 rudder angle sensor
measured by the wind sensor Alternatively, on ships with azimuth
Brown bar: Power of the thrusters thrusters, their data can be displayed
- Bar length corresponds to power here; for explanation, see page 364.
reported by thruster. Ship's speed, measured by the
(100% = half the width of the ship) selected speed sensor:
- Bar is displayed in direction of the ship's Past positions of ship, display of the - Selected sensor
acceleration caused by the transverse last 10 positions relative to the present - Transverse speed at the bow
thrust. position (The time interval can be set - Longitudinal speed
under History in the Docking menu.) - Transverse speed at the stern

Fig. 11-11 The Docking Page

370 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.2 The Docking Page

Switching on the parameters that are to be displayed.

Switches on/off the display of the past track.

Setting the period of time for which the past track is to be displayed

Switches on/off the display of the predicted positions.

Setting the period of time for which the predicted positions is to be displayed.

Specifying the units of measurement for ship's speed and drift.

Specifying the orientation of the ship symbol.

Switches off the subroutine for display of the Docking Page. The Navigation
Page appears.

Fig. 11-12 The Docking Menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 371

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.3 The Keel Clearance Page Operating Instructions

11.3 The Keel Clearance Page

On the Keel Clearance Page, data which are helpful for sailing in shallow water are displayed as numer-
ical values and graphically.

Draught aft, manually set Smallest measured depth from Draught forward, manually set Present measured
(see page 389) or computed the navigation echosounder (see page 389) or determined by depth from the navigation
from the draught forward and under the ship connected sensors echosounder 1)
the trim or determined by
connected sensors

Trim: Difference between the

forward draught and aft draught,
computed from the draughts or
determined by connected trim
sensor (– = bow is down)

Heel: Heel, determined by

the heel sensor

List: Draught increase caused by

heel, determined by the list sensor
or computed from the heel

Squat: Draught increase caused by

the suction effect occurring between
the moving ship and the water bottom,
computed from the speed from the
selected speed sensor and the
present depth measured by the navi-
gation echosounder, taking account of
the factors stored in the ship model

Clearance: Least distance between

the ship and the water bottom,
computed from the least depth meas-
ured by the navigation echosounder
under the ship minus the list and
squat, and minus the trim if the trim is
positive

Graphic display of Heel

Longitudinal speed, with
statement of source
Graphic display of Trim Water depth in meter
Schematic diagram of the depth situation under the ship:
- Horizontal line: Largest draught (forward draught plus list and squat, and plus trim if trim is positive)
- Lower grey area: The upper edge is the depth history (the most recent measurements made by the navigation
echosounder)
- Green bar: Position of least measured depth under the ship; bar height corresponds to clearance. Bar goes red:
The measured water depth is less than the set depth alarm value
- Dashed red line: The set depth alarm value

1) If the ship has an echosounder with several transducers, the displayed data are shown only if the forward transducer is selected.
If a different transducer is used, the values of Minimum Depth, Squat and Clearance as well as the diagram of the depth situ-
ation under the ship are not shown. The numerical value of Actual Depth is arranged in accordance with the position of the
selected transducer.

Fig. 11-13 Keel Clearance Page

372 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.3 The Keel Clearance Page

Switching On the Keel Clearance Page

In the Tree, press the Keel Clearance button. The Keel Clearance Page and (if the menu display is
switched on) the Keel Clearance menu appear.

Parameterisation of the Keel Clearance Page

- Specifying the Depth Range that is to be Displayed Graphically
Under Depth Scale, by means of the two arrow keys, set the depth range which is to be displayed
below the ship symbols on the Keel Clearance Page.
- Specifying the Units of Measurement for the Ship's Speed
With the Speed button, choose between kt and m/s.

Specifying the depth range to be displayed graphically.

Specifying the units of measurement for the ship's speed.

Switches off the subroutine for the display of the Keel Clearance Page.
The Navigation Page appears.

Fig. 11-14 The Keel Clearance menu

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 373

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.4 The Data Displays Operating Instructions

11.4 The Data Displays

In Conning mode too, the display is supplemented by the data displays appearing in the right-hand side-
strip. In contrast to Chart mode, the presentation of these data displays cannot be switched off; they can
only by concealed by the menu.
It is possible to choose between the following types of display:
The Track/Schedule display summarises the most important data needed for track-keeping and time
schedule planning. All data displayed there relate to the System Track. The display corresponds to the
Track/Schedule display which can be selected in Chart mode, but it is supplemented by the addition of
status messages of the TRACKPILOT.
The Track/Control display likewise contains the most important data needed for track-keeping and time
planning, likewise relating to the System Track but with a different set of data. This display corresponds
to the Track/Control display which can be selected in Chart mode, but is supplemented by the addition
of status messages of the TRACKPILOT.
☞ All items of data relating to the System Track which appear in the data displays are determined by
the CHARTPILOT main program. As a result, there might be slight deviations relative to the data
computed and displayed by the TRACKPILOT (e.g. the track deviation on the Navigation Page).
The NACOS Status display indicates which NACOS components and which of the sensors connected
to the NACOS are switched on or are functioning.
In the External Alarm displays, alarm messages are displayed which are signalled by a connected
alarm-system, e.g. a bridge alarm system. 1)
When an alarm signal of this kind reaches the NACOS, the NACOS first generates the BRIDGE ALARM
SYSTEM alarm (see Section 9). Whether an acoustic signal is emitted as well depends on the alarm
message that is signalled.

Selection of the Data Display to be Presented

The selection between Track/Schedule display, Track/Control display and NACOS Status display is made
after clicking of the top button of the data display that is being presented.
Switch-on of the External Alarm display takes place in the NACOS Status display after clicking of the
button below the top button.

1) The following features of the External Alarm displays can be configured at service level, and so these displays might differ from the example
shown in Figure 11-18:
- Title of the displays
- Number of possible alarms and thus number of displays
- Designation of the alarms
- Whether an acoustic signal is emitted by the NACOS, and if so, for which of the alarms.

374 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.4 The Data Displays

The Track/Schedule Display

Title button; after clicking, a different data display can be switched on.
Name and number of the System Track

Number, remark about the waypoint, and Switching forward to the next set of
geographical position of the waypoint that waypoint data takes place abeam of
is passed last the present waypoint. If the TRACK-
PILOT is steering with Pilot Data or
Number1), remark about the waypoint, and in Track mode, the TRACKPILOT
geographical position of the present waypoint makes the decision about switching
forward (normally occurs at the
Estimated time of arrival at the present wheel over point).
waypoint
Estimated time to go to the present
waypoint
Number and remark about the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 225)
Estimated time of arrival at the arrival point
Probable time to go to the arrival point
Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 225)
Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival at the
arrival point
Arrival Speed of the next track segment

Existing status messages of the TRACKPILOT, relative to the System Track

- OFF COURSE: The set course limit is exceeded
- OFF TRACK: The set track limit is exceeded
- REDUCED RADIUS: The next planned manoeuvre cannot be performed with the
set radius that is currently set
- SHORT RADIUS: The next planned manoeuvre cannot be performed with the
maximum rudder angle
- Track Status OK: None of the above-mentioned fault messages are present.
- LOW SPEED: The ship's speed is lower than the minimum speed that ensures safe
manoeuvring by the TRACKPILOT.

1) Number field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of
interest or own safety line.
☞ By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint.

Fig. 11-15 The Track/Schedule Display in the Conning Mode

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 375

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.4 The Data Displays Operating Instructions

The Track/Control-Display

Title button; after clicking, a different data display can be switched on.

Name and number of the System Track

Last waypoint
Number and name of the present waypoint
Field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by
safety contour, object of interest or own safety line
☞ By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as
far as the last waypoint

Geogr. position of the present waypoint

Left: Sailing mode: GC = Great Circle, RL = Rhumb Line
Centre: Track control mode: To WPT = To Waypoint, To TRK = To Track
Right: Pilot Data Status: PD on = Pilot Data are switched on for the TRACKPILOT
Left: Bearing of the present waypoint
Right: WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1)
WOP: Distance to the WOP

Left: In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line

In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the present
waypoint
Field is red: The course limit is exceeded.
Right: Deviation from the System Track; R: Ship is situated to the right of the System
Track
Field is red: The track limit is exceeded.
TTG: Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint 1)
TTG WOP: Probable sailing time up to the WOP
TTG or TTG WOP in red: The APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm is present

Planned time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship
sails to the arrival point at the Arrival Speed.
Actual time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship sails
to the arrival point at the present speed.
Switch-over: After clicking
Next leg data: see figure on page 70

Number of the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 225)

Estimated time of arrival at the arrival point

Planned time of arrival at the arrival point
Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival at the
arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early)

Probable time to go to the arrival point

Remaining distance to go to the arrival point

Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 225)
or with actual time schedule: present speed

Arrival Speed of the next track segment

Existing status messages of the TRACKPILOT, relative to the System Track
(see Track/Schedule display, page 375)

1) At service level, it can be specified that only the distance to go to the WOP is displayed.

Fig. 11-16 The Track/Control Display

376 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.4 The Data Displays

The NACOS Status Display

After clicking, a different data display can be switched on.

Title button; if there is an external alarm system connected which supplies the neces-
sary signals, an External Alarm display can be switched on here after clicking.

Status of the NACOS components

The meaning of the display is stated in the table below.

Status of the connected sensors

ON, green background: The sensor is supplying valid signals to the NACOS.
OFF, red background: The sensor is not supplying valid signals.

Special feature in the case of GPS receiver:

- If the DGPS only function is selected in the Use of GPS frame in the Sensor Settings
> Position Sensor menu, ON appears with a red background if the GPS receiver is not
working in Differential mode.
- If the DGPS and GPS function is selected in the Use of GPS frame in the Sensor
Settings > Position Sensor menu, a red field appears in front of GPS if the GPS
receiver is not working in Differential mode.

Fig. 11-17 The NACOS Status Display

The Status Displays of the NACOS Components

NACOS component ON, green background OFF, yellow background OFF, red background
TRACKPILOT Ship is being steered TRACKPILOT is not acti- Failed or mains power
with the TRACKPILOT vated switched off
Engine Interface Is emitting signals prop- Failed or mains power
erly _____ switched off
SPEEDPILOT Speed is being controlled SPEEDPILOT is not acti- Failed or mains power
with the SPEEDPILOT vated switched off
Radar Indicator or Radar indicator is _____ Failed or switched off
MULTIPILOT switched on

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 377

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.4 The Data Displays Operating Instructions

The External Alarm Displays

After clicking, a different data display can be switched on.

Title button; after clicking, the NACOS Status display or a different External Alarm display
can be switched on here.

List of possible alarm messages

Text with red background: Alarm is present and has not yet been acknowledged.
Text with yellow background: Alarm is present and has been acknowledged.

Fig. 11-18 Example of an External Alarm Display

378 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
Operating Instructions 12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

This section describes how, with the CHARTPILOT, you can

- perform position-reckoning calculations
- calculate the rendezvous point of two ships
- solve current-sailing problems
- obtain support in carrying out a measured mile run
- determine sunrises and sunsets to check the compass accuracy
- determine the altitude and azimuth of the most important fixed stars.
These functions are implemented by means of individual subroutines which you can start in the Tree
under Calculator in Conning mode by pressing the appropriate button. In the chart area, the menu of the
started program then appears, and on the right (if the menu display is switched on) the Calculator menu
appears, from which the other subroutines too can be started.

Position-reckoning calculations; see page 380

Calculating the rendezvous point of two ships; see page 382

Measured mile calculations; see page 384

Determination of sunrises and sunsets; see page 385

Solving current-sailing problems; see page 383

Determining the altitude and azimuth of fixed stars; seepage 387

Leaves the menu and aborts the calculations that are taking place.
Alternative: Pressing of Tree also exits the menu, but the
calculations continue to run in the background.

Fig. 12-1 The Calculator menu

USEFUL INFORMATION

Ending the Calculations

If the calculations are to be ended, you must leave the Calculator menu by pressing Exit. As a result,
the subroutine concerned is switched off.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 379

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning CHARTPILOT
12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations Operating Instructions

However, it is also possible to leave this menu without stopping the calculations; the values upon which
the calculations are based then remain intact. In this case, the calculation data remain preserved and you
can briefly inspect and modify the calculations while you are performing the nautical monitoring with the
aid of the CHARTPILOT.

Coordinate System Used

All computations that can be performed via the Calculator menu are based on the chart datum WGS 84.

12.1.1 Performing a Position-Reckoning Calculation

After selection of the menu function Calculator > Reckoning, the following menu appears:

Own Ship pressed: as the starting data,

the current data of own ship are used.

Other pressed: the starting data can be

input manually; they are not updated.

Starting data

Sailing data

Specifies whether the calculation is

performed for Great Circle (orthodrome)
or for Rhumb Line (loxodrome).

Destination data

Fig. 12-2 The Calculator > Reckoning menu

On the basis of the starting data, it is possible to determine

- the destination data by inputting the sailing data or
- the sailing data by inputting the destination data.
1. Defining the Starting Data
If the data of own ship (position, time) are to be used as the starting data, Own Ship must be in the
switched-on state. In this case, the starting data and also the calculated values are continuously
updated. If the calculations are to be performed on the basis of fixed starting data, you must press
Other and must input or correct the starting data.

380 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
Operating Instructions 12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

2. Selecting the Sailing Mode

This is done by pressing Rhumb Line or Great Circle.
Then either
3. input destination data
After the input of the destination position, the course and distance from the starting position to the
destination position are displayed under Course and Distance. After input of the destination time,
the necessary speed and the travelling time are displayed under Speed and TTG.
or
4. input the sailing data
After input of the course under Course and of the distance under Distance, the destination position
is displayed. After input of the speed under Speed or of the sailing time under TTG, the destination
time is displayed.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Exceeding of Input Limits

If a speed of less than 0.1 kt is input under Speed, this value is not accepted, and dashes appear there.
This is also intended to indicate that the destination time displayed is not correct.
If, under TTG, the value 0 or a value is displayed which would produce a speed which could no longer
be displayed, dashes likewise appear under Speed.
If the destination time that has been input would produce a TTG greater than 99 days, dashes appear in
the TTG day display.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 381

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning CHARTPILOT
12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations Operating Instructions

12.1.2 Calculating the Rendezvous Point of Two Ships

After selection of the menu function Calculator > Rendezvous, the following menu appears:

Sets the starting data of ship A to the

currently existing data of own ship.

Starting data; these have to be input.

Speed data:
these are calculated when Set is pressed; if
Calculated is pressed, they have to be input.

The calculated sailing data

Data of the rendezvous point

Calculated pressed: Rendezvous data are
calculated from the starting data and speed
data of ship A and ship B; the points lie on a
loxodrome.

Set pressed: Rendezvous data and the starting

data of ship A and ship B are preset. The
speed data of ship A and ship B are calculated.

Fig. 12-3 The Calculator > Rendezvous menu

- For ships A and B, the rendezvous data of the ships can be determined on the basis of their starting
data and speed data; the rendezvous point lies on the straight line (loxodrome) between their starting
positions. Or:
- For ships A and B, the necessary speeds can be calculated on the basis of their starting positions
and the preset rendezvous-data.
In both cases, the courses to be sailed, distances to go and times to go are determined as well.
1. Specifying whether the Rendezvous Data are to be Preset or Calculated
Press Calculated if the rendezvous data are to be calculated, or press Set if the rendezvous data
are to be preset.
2. Inputting the Starting Data
Under Ship A and Ship B, input the desired values under Lat, Lon, Time and Date. By pressing of
Restart, the starting data of ship A are set to the currently existing data of own ship.
- If Calculated is pressed, Restart also sets the speed of ship A to the currently existing speed
of own ship. The speed of ship B has still to be input or corrected. When this has been done,
the rendezvous data and sailing data calculated from the input data are displayed.
- If Set is pressed, the rendezvous data must be input or corrected. The speeds and sailing data
calculated from the input data are then displayed.

382 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
Operating Instructions 12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

12.1.3 Solving Current-Sailing Problems

After selection of the menu function Calculator > Current Sailing, the following menu appears:

Selection of the current-sailing problem

The data wanted; result of the calculation

The given data

Graphic display of the current-

sailing problem

Fig. 12-4 The Calculator > Current Sailing menu (problem 1)

The following current-sailing problems can be solved in order to take account of, or to determine, the
direction and speed of the current:
Problem 1:
- Given: the heading (HDG) and speed through the water (STW, and also the direction of the current
(set) and speed of the current (drift).
- Wanted: the course over ground (course made good, CMG) and speed over ground (speed made
good, SMG).
Problem 2:
- Given: the course over ground (course made good, CMG) and speed through the water (STW), and
also the direction of the current (set) and speed of the current (drift).
- Wanted: the heading (HDG) and speed over ground (speed made good, SMG).
Problem 3:
- Given: the heading (HDG) and speed through the water (STW), and also the course over ground
(course made good, CMG) and speed over ground (speed made good, SMG).
- Wanted: the direction of the current (set) and speed of the current (drift).
1. Select the current-sailing problem
This is done by pressing Problem 1, Problem 2 or Problem 3.
2. Input the known values
Inputting is done under Own Ship Data. Data that are not to be input are displayed there faintly. The
result is displayed numerically under Results and graphically in the compass rose; the colours are
used in a consistent manner.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 383

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning CHARTPILOT
12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations Operating Instructions

12.1.4 Support for the Measured Mile Run

After selection of the menu function Calculator > Measured Mile, the following menu appears:

Here, before the measured mile run is performed,

input the distance taken from the chart.

When the ship crosses the starting line, press

Start or the Enter key. The data that exist at this
instant are „frozen“.
The time and distance that have elapsed since
pressing of Start; the data are „frozen“ when
End is pressed.

The currently existing data;

when the ship crosses the finishing line, press
End or the Enter key. The data that exist at this
instant are „frozen“.

Speed determined by the log

Speed determined from the starting posi-
tion, end position and Running Time
Speed determined from the input Distance and
Running Time

Fig. 12-5 The Calculator > Measured Mile menu

To support the measured mile run, the following data are determined:
- The average speed during the measured mile run, according to the log that is being tested.
- The speed calculated from the starting position, the end position and the time required.
- The speed calculated from the distance input and from the time needed.

1. Sensor Selection
On the radar, select the speed sensor whose accuracy is to be checked by the measured mile run,
and select the most accurate position-sensor.
2. Starting the Measured Mile Run
Sail into the measured mile at constant speed on a constant course. When the ship crosses the
starting line, press the Start button or the Enter key. The data that exist at this instant are recorded
under Start. Under Running, the time which has elapsed since pressing of the Start button and the
distance of the present position from the starting position are displayed.
3. Ending the Measured Mile Run
When the ship crosses the finishing line, press the End button or the Enter key. The data that exist
at this instant are recorded under End. Under Running, the time that has elapsed between the start
and the end, and the distance between the starting position and the end position, are displayed.
4. Determining the Results
Under Results, the following items are displayed:
- Speed by Log: During the measured mile run, the speed value supplied by the selected speed
sensor is stored at intervals of one second. The arithmetic mean of these values is displayed
here.

384 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
Operating Instructions 12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

- Speed by Time & Position: The speed resulting from the distance between the starting posi-
tion and end position and from the time between the start and end is displayed. The position
data of the selected position sensor are used.
- Speed by Time and Distance: The speed resulting from the value that was input under
Distance and from the time between start and end is displayed.
5. Repetition of the Measured Mile Run
After the results have been documented, a repetition of the measured mile run can be prepared by
pressing Start. As a result, all measured data are deleted, and the currently existing data of own
ship are displayed again under Start and End.

12.1.5 Determining the Data of Sunrises and Sunsets

After selection of the menu function Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset, the following menu appears:
The time of day and the true bearing of sunrises and sunsets can be determined
- for the next sunrise or sunset, calculated for the position which will then be reached if the course
and speed remain constant, or
- for any future or past sunrise or sunset at any position.
With this function, the accuracy of the compass can be checked.

Press if the coming sunrise or sunset is to be

calculated for the position that will then be
reached (event position). If this is pressed again,
the calculation is repeated.
Eye level must be input.

Data on which the calculation of the event

position is based
Calculated distance to go to the event position
Press if an event position is to be preset as a defi-
nite value.

Event position: the position to which the sunrise

and sunset data displayed below refer.
Set pressed under Own Ship Data: the event
position is calculated from the Own Ship data.
Set pressed under Event Position: the event
position can be preset as a definite value.

With these, it is possible to switch over to the next

or previous sunsets or sunrises.
Data of the sunrise or sunset, relative to the
event position.

Fig. 12-6 The Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset menu

Determination of Data of the Next Sunrise or Sunset

1. Under Eye Level, input the eye height (the observation height above the water surface).
2. In the Own Ship Data frame, press the Set button. When this is done,

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 385

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning CHARTPILOT
12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations Operating Instructions

- the currently existing data of own ship under Own Ship Data are frozen,
- the position which the ship will have during the sunrise or sunset is calculated, assuming that
the course and speed will remain constant (this position is displayed under Event Position),
- the distance to go to reach that point is displayed under DTG,
- in the bottom frame, there are displays showing whether the event is a sunrise or a sunset, the
time at which it will occur, and - under Azimuth - the true bearing at which it will occur.
These displays are automatically updated at intervals of 60 seconds, so that they then correspond
to the own ship data which then exist.

Determining Data of a Future or Past Sunrise or Sunset for Any Position

1. Under Eye Level, input the eye height (the observation height above the water surface).
2. Press Event Position Set.
3. Under Event Position, input the position and (if applicable) the date for which the sunrise or sunset
data are to be determined. In the bottom frame, there are displays showing whether the event is a
sunrise or a sunset, the time at which it occurs, and the true bearing at which it occurs.
4. With Next Event, the data of the next sunrise or sunset can be called up; with Past Event, the data
of the previous sunrise or sunset can be called up.

386 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
Operating Instructions 12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

12.1.6 Determination of the Data of Fixed Stars

After selection of the menu function Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth, the following menu appears:

Run pressed: The star data are calculated for the

ship's existing position and for the existing
time.
Fixed pressed: The reference data can be input
under Own Ship Data.

Ship's position and time to which the star data

refer

Click the desired fixed star; to do this, scroll the

list if necessary.

Fixed star data referenced to the data displayed

under Own Ship Data

Fig. 12-7 The Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth menu

The altitude and azimuth of the most important fixed stars can be determined
- referenced to the ship's existing position and the existing time or
- referenced to any position of the ship and any time.
1. If the fixed star data are to be displayed for the existing position and existing time, press Run. Under
Own Ship Data, the own ship data are displayed and updated
or
2. If the data are to be determined for a different position or for a different time, press Fixed, and under
Own Ship Data input the desired reference position and the reference time.
3. In the Fixed Star Table list, click the desired fixed star. Under Results, the altitude and azimuth of
the selected fixed star are displayed behind Altitude and Azimuth respectively.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Contents of the Fixed Star Table

In this list, the following items are displayed (from left to right):
- Serial number of the star in the Nautical Almanac
- Name of the constellation
- (Name of the star)
- Brightness of the star.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 387

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning CHARTPILOT
12.2 Generating the Pilot Card Operating Instructions

12.2 Generating the Pilot Card

You can at any time generate a pilot card containing the currently existing data.
This function is implemented by means of a subroutine which you can start by pressing the Pilot Card
button in the Tree in Conning mode. Part of the pilot card then appears in the chart area; the other part
can be made visible by scrolling, and the Pilot Card menu appears on the right (if the menu function is
switched on).

Makes it possible to update Makes it possible to update the data

Triggers the printing the draught values and the
of the pilot card. listed under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST on
displacement. the pilot card; menu see Figure 12-9 on
page 390.

Ends the processing of the pilot card.

Fig. 12-8 CHARTPILOT Display for generating the Pilot Card

388 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
Operating Instructions 12.2 Generating the Pilot Card

Generating a Pilot Card

1. Adjust the Printer and the Printer control (see page 77).
2. Entering the Draught and Displacement
Check whether (in the third line from the top) the draught values and the displacement are correct.
☞ If draught sensors fore and aft or a forward draught sensor and a trim sensor are connected, then
no manual input is possible. If only a forward draught sensor is connected, then the draught aft must
be entered, whereas if no draught sensor is available at all, both values must be entered.
The manual input can be made at all CHARTPILOT and MULTIPILOT 1000 and 91xx indicators in
the system. The values are distributed system-wide for the pilot card and conning displays. The
draught values are not taken over into the pilot card if the pilot card is already displayed, but can be
accepted by operation the Draught menu. The value sent out by the own AIS system is not changed
by this and must be entered correctly in addition; see page 121.
A correction of the values is made as follows:
- By pressing Draughts, call up the menu Draughts, and input the currently existing values
under Draught fore and Draught aft. The midship draught calculated from these values is
displayed under Draught midship, and the displacement calculated from them is displayed
under Displacement.
- Make the desired corrections. By pressing of the Apply button, the values calculated for
Draught midship and Displacement from the draught values that were input are displayed.
When all values are correct, press the OK button.
- Then, in the dialog box which then appears, enter your name. By pressing of the OK button of
this dialog box, the Draughts menu is closed and the new values are entered in the pilot card.
3. Entering Further Nautical Data
Check whether the data entered under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST are correct. A correction is made
as follows:
- By pressing Nautical Checklist, the menu Nautical Checklist (see Figure 12-9) is called up.
There, all data entered in the pilot card under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST are listed.
- Make the desired corrections and press the OK button.
- In the dialog box which then appears, enter your name. By pressing of the OK button of this
dialog box, the Nautical Checklist menu is closed and the new values are entered in the pilot
card.
4. Printing Out the Pilot Card
The print-out takes place after the Print button has been pressed.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 389

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning CHARTPILOT
12.2 Generating the Pilot Card Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION

Here, enter values that are to appear under NAUTICAL CHECK-

LIST in the pilot card.

Takes over the entered values into the pilot card.

Leaves the menu without taking account of the altered values.

Fig. 12-9 The Pilot Card > Nautical Checklist menu

Source of the Pilot Card Data

All items of data whose modification possibility is not described above have been input in the process of
installing the CHARTPILOT. This also applies to the factors for calculating the displacement from the
draught values. The pictures were selected from a number of standard pictures. The parameters listed
under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST were entered during the installation process and can, if necessary, be
altered at service level, and (within the scope of the space available) additions can be made to them.

390 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT 12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
Operating Instructions 12.2 Generating the Pilot Card

These draught values were

entered in the Pilot Card >
Draughts menu; the displace-
ment was calculated from these
values.

All other values and displays

were defined during the installa-
tion of the CHARTPILOT.

These values were entered

in the Pilot Card > Nautical
Checklist menu.

The name that was entered

last upon leaving the
... > Draughts menu or the
... > Nautical Checklist menu
appears here.

Fig. 12-10 Example of a pilot card generated on the CHARTPILOT

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 391

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning CHARTPILOT
12.2 Generating the Pilot Card Operating Instructions

392 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Appendices

A Care and Maintenance

B Alarm Outputs
C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording
D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects
E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100
F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150
G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG
H Keyboard Templates

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 393

b_cp_e6.fm / 09.07.07
 CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

394 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e6.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT A Care and Maintenance
Operating Instructions A 1 Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads

A Care and Maintenance

Care of the components of the CHARTPILOT is limited to occasional cleaning of the monitor screens.
This should be done by means of a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
The following maintenance work must be done regularly by the on-board personnel:
❑ Cleaning or exchanging the filter pads and checking the fans the electronics unit of the CHART-
PILOT
❑ Check of the monitor performance
If necessary, the following work can possibly be performed by on-board personnel:
❑ Cleaning the CDs and the optics of the CD drive

A1 Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads

This work needs to be done on the electronics unit of the CHARTPILOT only.
The activity should be carried out quarter-yearly, but more frequently than that if the equipment is
installed in a dusty environment. If the air is particularly dust-free, the interval can be extended.
Taking out the filter pad: This is situated under the cover at the top of the electronics unit. It can be
gripped at its front left-hand corner and can be pulled out without having to undo the screws.
Cleaning the filter pad: Wash the filter pad in lukewarm soapy water and dry it before inserting it again.
If the filter pad has to be exchanged: the ordering number is 2175640.

A2 Checking the Fans

NOTE:
The electronics unit may only be opened by qualified persons.

This work needs to be done on the electronics unit of the CHARTPILOT only.
The check should be performed quarter-yearly.
Performing the check: Undo the screws of the casing cover and take the casing cover off. Check that the
casing fan (under the filter pad) and the CPU fan are running and that there are no noises indicating
damaged bearings. When screwing the casing cover back on, ensure that the grounding cable is plugged
in.

A3 Check of the Monitor Performance

To ensure that the symbols and other objects of the electronic chart can be interpreted correctly, it is
essential that the colours are being displayed correctly. However, monitors are subject to technical influ-
ences which can cause falsification of colour reproduction. Such processes, which are usually due to
aging, take place over a period of years or are caused by external influences, e.g. in the case of monitors
with cathode ray tubes they are caused by magnetic fields from adjacent units.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 395

b_cp_e61.fm / 09.07.07
A Care and Maintenance CHARTPILOT
A 3 Check of the Monitor Performance Operating Instructions

For the use of the ENC charts, a possibility of checking the colour reproduction of the monitor has there-
fore been stipulated as a requirement. If the checks described in the following are unsuccessful, then in
the case of monitors with cathode ray tubes degaussing must be performed (see also page 30) or colour
adjustment of the monitor must be carried out by service personnel. In extreme cases it may be neces-
sary to replace the monitor or parts of it’s electronics.
This check should be performed annually on all monitors 1), especially if the equipment is approved as an
ECDIS.
The test consists of two parts:

Test of the Grey Values

The test should be performed in daylight.
1. Display any ENC chart, and set the brightness to Bright Day.
2. Open the Info box, and in the index card Legend, under ECDIS Chart1 Presentation, click on the
line Show Greyscale Test Diagram.
3. The test bars which then appear must be displayed in graded shades of grey, and must only have
very slight colour components or none at all.

Test of the Colour Display

The test should be performed with various room brightnesses, and definitely also at night with the colour
palette Dark Night.
1. Display any ENC Chart and adjust the colour palette to suit the room brightness.
2. Open the Info box, and in the index card Legend, under ECDIS Chart1 Presentation, click on the
line Show Colour Diff. Diagram.
3. In all rectangles displayed, there is a diagonal line with a different colour. All lines must be clearly
recognisable.

1)
The aging characteristics of monitors having flat screens (TFT) are not yet known. Until appropriate experience has been acquired, the
checks should be performed for these monitors too.

396 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e61.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT A Care and Maintenance
Operating Instructions A 4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive

A4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive

If problems arise when data are transferred from the CD during chart maintenance activities, they may
be caused by soiling of the CD or the optics of the CD drive. In such cases, cleaning may possibly solve
the problem.
☞ The cleaning procedure can only be performed on the CD drives installed in the CHARTPILOT
9330 1). With these CD drives, the optics are located on the CD tray (which is extended when the CD
drive is opened).
Indications that the errors which occurred may be due to a dirty or damaged CD:
- Soiling: Are there any fingerprints or other signs of dirt on the unprinted side of the CD?
- Damage: Are there any scratches or other signs of damage on the CD (both sides!)?
- The errors occur only when a certain CD is used (strong indication).
- The errors can be reproduced when a certain CD is used, i.e. the same errors occur when repeated
attempts are made.
☞ However, dirt on the CD can still be the cause, even if the errors are not the same.
- The same errors occur at different CHARTPILOTs when a certain CD is used (very strong indica-
tion).
Indications that the errors which occurred may be due to dirty optics of the CD drive:
- The lens is visibly dirty (this can perhaps only be seen with a magnifying glass).
- Although there is a CD in the drive, the Chart Maintenance subroutine reports that no CD, or the
wrong CD, was inserted.
- Errors occur only at certain CHARTPILOTs.
- The errors cannot be reproduced, i.e. the same errors do no occur when repeated attempts are
made.
☞ Non-reproducible errors can also be caused by dirty CDs.
Cleaning the CD:
Remove light traces of dirt by using a lint-free cloth (e.g. cleansing tissue for eye glasses) with little pres-
sure. Do not wipe in circles. If this is not successful, clean the unprinted side of the CD with lukewarm
water and the a.m. cloth, and then dry it with such a cloth.

Cleaning the Optics of the CD Drive:

CAUTION
Cleaning is an intrusion into a sensitive optical assembly with high-
precision parts. It should only be performed by persons who have the
necessary capabilities and know-how.
Note: The lens has a diameter of approx. 2 mm and a resolution of several thousandths of a millimetre.
In many CD drives, it is made of plastic. The smallest scratches and the slightest changes to the surface
(e.g. through liquids) can lead to irreversible damage to the optics and hence to the necessity to
exchange the CD drive.
The cleaning must be performed with a soft brush that is suitable for cleaning optics, a soft lint-free cloth
(cleansing tissue for eye glasses) or a cotton bud, all of which must be used with extremely low pressure.
The cloth or cotton bud may be moistened slightly with distilled water (without any formation of drop-
lets). If distilled water is used, ensure that the lens is dried properly afterwards using a cotton bud or cloth
as specified above. Do not use any other liquids!

1)
Finding out the type of the CHARTPILOT: see Section 8.6

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 397

b_cp_e61.fm / 09.07.07
A Care and Maintenance CHARTPILOT
A 4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive Operating Instructions

398 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e61.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT B Alarm Outputs
Operating Instructions

B Alarm Outputs

The following alarm is given in the form of an electrical signal. If there is a Bridge Alarm System BAS40
installed and if the installation is of the standard kind, then this signal is sent to that system and is proc-
essed there in an appropriate manner.

Chart Alarm (for systems with radar 1000 series)

The signal is given when one of the following alarms is generated:
- APPROACHING WAYPOINT
- COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED
- DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED
- GYRO FAULT,
- EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA
- OBJECT OF INTEREST 1),
- OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA
- POSITION INVALID
- POSITION TIMEOUT,
- SAFETY CONTOUR 1),
- SPEED INVALID,
- SPEED TIMEOUT,
- TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED
- USER CHART OBJECT
or if a connected radar indicator detects that the CHARTPILOT has failed.

Dead Man Alarm Trigger (for systems with radar 91xx series)
For the output of this signal, it is possible at service level to choose between two basically different
dependencies:
A) The Ship's Interface outputs this signal whenever a radar component is operated.
☞ This setting is chosen if there is a watch alarm system. This signal then has the same effect
there as operating one of the watch alarm pushbuttons, and so the watch alarm pushbuttons do
not have to be operated if an operating action has taken place in the NACOS.
B) With this signal, a watch alarm can be triggered directly. The Ship's Interface outputs this signal if
the DEAD MAN PRE-ALARM alarm has not been acknowledged - see page 345.
☞ This setting is selected if there is no watch alarm system.

ECDIS Alarm (for systems with radar 91xx series)

When the USER CHART OBJECT alarm is generated, the CHARTPILOT additionally outputs this signal.
This signal is also output if the function To Alarm Panel is ON on the CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT in
the Alarm Settings menu in Chart mode, and one of the chart alarms occurs for which the ECDIS regu-
lations require an on/off-switchable transfer to the central alarm panel (e.g. OBJECT OF INTEREST and
SAFETY CONTOUR).

1)
This alarm causes output of the Chart Alarm signal if, and only if, the To Alarm Panel function is in the switched-on state on the CHART-
PILOT (in the Alarm Settings menu).

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 399

b_cp_e62.fm / 09.07.07
B Alarm Outputs CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

CHARTPILOT Alarm (for systems with radar 91xx series)

The Ship’s Interface outputs this signal
- if the data exchange with the CHARTPILOT computer is not functioning properly.
The cause of this might be as follows:
. The CHARTPILOT program has not been started.
. The CHARTPILOT has been switched off.
. The CHARTPILOT Processor has been reset.
. The CHARTPILOT is defective.
- if the CHARTPILOT computer has triggered one of the following alarms:
. APPROACHING WAYPOINT
. COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED
. DEPTH ALARM
. GYRO FAULT
. POSITION INVALID
. POSITION TIMEOUT
. SPEED INVALID
. SPEED TIMEOUT
. TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED

400 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e62.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording
Operating Instructions

C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording

Recording intervals of the individual records:

Recording Intervals
Duration of
Record Settings possible at service storage 1)
Factory setting level 2)
Navigation, Short Term 10 seconds none 12 hours
ARPA Targets 20 seconds 10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds 12 hours
AIS Targets 20 seconds 10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds 12 hours
Engine and Thruster 60 seconds 10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds 12 hours
Azimuth Thruster 20 seconds 10, 20 and 60 seconds 12 hours
Environment 60 seconds 10, 60 and 300 second 12 hours
Weather 300 seconds 10, 60 and 300 seconds 12 hours
ECDIS 20 seconds 3)
none 12 hours
TRACKPILOT 20 seconds 10, 20 and 60 seconds 12 hours
SPEEDPILOT 20 seconds 10, 20 and 60 seconds 12 hours
Navigation, Long Term 30 minutes none 3 month

1)
The 12 hours settings can also be set to 24 hours at service level.
2)
Recordings with variable recording intervals can also be suppressed
3)
Checking-interval; recording is performed only after changes

Contents of the records:

Navigation, Short Term
Own position with status and selected position sensor
Gyro heading with status
Rate of turn with status
BT speed ahead and across with status
WT speed ahead and across with status
COG and SOG with status
Selected speed sensor
Rudder angle port rudder with status
Rudder angle starboard rudder with status
ARPA Targets
For each ARPA target:
Position
Relative speed (magnitude and direction)
Target ID
Symbol, status of the target
AIS Targets
For each AIS target:
Position
Speed (magnitude and direction)
Target ID
Symbol, status of the target

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 401

b_cp_e65.fm / 09.07.07
C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Engine and Thruster

Shaft revolution rate and shaft status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable)
Shaft power with status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable)
Pitch of the variable-pitch propeller with status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable)
Power of the thruster with status (for each thruster)
Trim with status
Heel with status
Azimuth Thruster
All data needed in the Navigation Page for the azimuth thruster display - see page 364
Environment
Rel. wind direction and speed with status
Abs. wind direction and speed
Wind sensor with status
Drift direction and speed of the current with status
Water depth with status
Weather
Weather sensor with identifier and channel-number
Rel. humidity with status
Abs. humidity with status
Dew point with status
Atmospheric pressure [mmHg] with status
Atmospheric pressure [Bar] with status
Air temperature with status
Sea water temperature with status
ECDIS (separately for CHARTPILOT station and terminal:)
The unit for which the following data are applicable (station or terminal)
Chart type
File name of the cell displayed at own position (vector charts) or name of the chart displayed at own posi-
tion (raster charts)
If relevant:
Edition Number
Update Number
Latest Issue Date
TRACKPILOT
All data displayed in the menu Pilot > TRACKPILOT - see page 73
All data displayed in the TRACKPILOT row of the Navigation Page - see page 363
SPEEDPILOT
All data displayed in the menu Pilot > SPEEDPILOT - see page 73
All data displayed in the SPEEDPILOT row of the Navigation Page - see page 362
Navigation, Long Term
Own position with status and selected position sensor
Gyro heading with status
COG and SOG with status
Selected speed sensor
Rel. wind direction and speed with status
Abs. wind direction and speed
Wind sensor with status
Drift direction and speed of the current with status
Water depth with status

402 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e65.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects
Operating Instructions

D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects

Conversion of the Map Symbols

All sixteen different map symbols are converted into the User Chart Objects having the same meaning
(for conversion, see page 320):

Map Object 1) User Chart Object 2)

Map Paper Simpli-
Symbol Chart fied

Light vessel Light vessel (light color white)

Radio reporting point Radio calling-in point

Pilot station Pilot boarding place

Anchorage Anchorage area

Fishing area Fishing facility

Cylindrical buoy Buoy, special purpose (shape = can)

Conical buoy Buoy, special purpose (shape = con)

Cylindrical light buoy Buoy, special purpose with light

Spar light buoy (SB) Buoy, lateral starboardhand (shape = spar) with topmark

Spar light buoy (P) Buoy, lateral porthand (shape = spar) with topmark

Hazard buoy (N) Buoy, lateral north (shape = pillar) with topmark

Hazard buoy (E) Buoy, lateral east (shape = pillar) with topmark

Hazard buoy (S) Buoy, lateral south (shape = pillar) with topmark

Hazard buoy (W) Buoy, lateral west (shape = pillar) with topmark

Light Light, color white

Radio station Radio station

1) The designation used in the Map editor

2)
Data determined by means of the Info box

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 403

b_cp_e71.fm / 09.07.07
D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Conversion of the Map Lines

Map lines are converted into feature lines.
☞ Feature lines can be converted later into own safety lines by means of the User Chart Object editor
- see page 190. 1)
The sixteen patterns which it was possible to edit for the RADARPILOT 9xxx are displayed on the
CHARTPILOT by means of only eight different map line patterns. These eight patterns are taken over in
the conversion process.
The various colours which it was possible to edit are not converted.
.
Map line Pattern Number Description Line Pattern of User Chart Object 1)

Edited 2) Displayed on the

CHARTPILOT
01 No display (No conversion)
02 02 Solid, thin Solid 1
03 03 Solid, thick Solid 2
04 04 Dashed, thin Dash 1
05 05 Dashed, thick Dash 2
06 06 Dotted, thin Dot 1
07 07 Dotted-and-dashed, thin DashDot 1
08 08 Dotted-and-dashed, thick DashDot 2
09 Same as 04 Solid, thin Solid 1
10 10 Dotted, thick Dot 2
11 Same as 10 Dotted, thick Dot 2
12 Same as 10 Dotted, thick Dot 2
13 Same as 10 Dotted, thick Dot 2
14 Same as 08 Dotted-and-dashed, thick DashDot 2
15 Same as 10 Dotted, thick Dot 2
16 Same as 05 Dashed, thick Dash 2

1)
Data determined by means of the Info box
2)
The designation used in the Map editor

1)
After this conversion, the safety lines are managed as edited User Chart Objects. One of the results of this is that the converted safety
lines continue to exist when the conversion of the map is reversed.

404 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e71.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100
Operating Instructions

E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100

The following description refers to the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), model DLP100, from the
company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l., which is used as standard equipment by SAM Electronics.
The UPS is continuously in the switched-on state, and therefore does not need any operating actions.
This section of the text indicates which displays appear on the UPS during normal operation, and which
displays appear in the case of a fault.

Normal operation is displayed as follows (LED's from the bottom upwards and from right to left – see
also Figure E-1):
Load: Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's are alight. The red LED >100 must not
light up except for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being switched on).
Battery Charge: Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the batteries are
being overcharged (a case requiring service).
The left-hand LED flashes when the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut down
(because, after a long-duration failure of the ship's mains, the battery has lost most of its charge).
Mains Present (green): This must be alight as long as failure of the ship's mains does not exist.
Battery Operation (green): This may be alight only when the UPS is receiving no power from the ship's
mains.
Replace Battery (red): The test performed automatically every 40 hours has revealed that the capacity
of the internal batteries is too small. The batteries must be exchanged immediately.
☞ The batteries require no maintenance. The task of exchanging them is performed by the service
personnel.
By-pass (green): This must not be alight except for a short time (for example when a connected unit is
being switched on).
Fault/Stand-by (red): This must not be alight except after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, or
in the case of overtemperature or overloading.
Acoustic Signal
- During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep occurring every 7 seconds indicates that the UPS is not
receiving power from the ship's mains. When the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being
shut down, the beep occurs every 2 seconds. This signal can be switched off by pressing of the (left-
hand) ON key.
- Four long tones / a one-second pause: the battery is being overcharged.
- Continuous tone: The UPS is not delivering any voltage; the monitoring electronics will have to be
unlocked.

Unlocking the UPS and Switching it On Again

When the Fault/Stand-by LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to a long period of
failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units are
receiving power again. This cannot occur until the voltage of the ship's mains is available again.
Unlocking is performed by switching off the UPS by pressing of the OFF key.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 405

b_cp_e66.fm / 09.07.07
E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100 CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Load: Fault/Stand-by (red):

Flashes when the batteries have become The loading of the UPS - Is alight if the batteries have been
discharged to such an extent that the discharged to such an extent that the
supply of power can be maintained for UPS is no longer producing any
about 3 minutes only. The operating voltage and the monitoring electronics
system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut is locked.
down. Battery Charge: So that the connected units will again
The charging status of the be receiving voltage, the UPS must be
batteries. unlocked by pressing of the ON key.
LED's flashing: the batteries If the above-mentioned causes cannot
Mains Present (green): are being overcharged. be explained in terms of external
Is alight when the UPS is in the switched-on circumstances, there is probably a
state and is receiving >180 V from the ship's need for service.
mains. - Flashes when the UPS is in Stand-By
Flashes if the voltage of the ship's mains lies mode, i.e. when it is not delivering any
between 170 V and 180 V or if the output voltage voltage.
is not yet in synchronism with the voltage of the
ship's mains.

Battery Operation (green):

Is alight if current is being
taken from the batteries of
the UPS (voltage of the
ship's mains is < 170 V).

By-pass (green):
Is alight if the connected
Replace Battery (red): CHARTPILOT is receiving its
The batteries must be power directly from the ship's
replaced by new ones. mains, e.g. because the load
is greater than the permis-
sible UPS load or the UPS
electronics has failed.

ON key:
Switches the UPS on (press at least 5
seconds).
Suppresses the acoustic alarm from the
UPS while the UPS is running in battery Stand-by key:
mode. Switches the UPS to Stand-By
If the key is pressed in the operating mode, i.e. the UPS does not deliver
mode for longer than five seconds, a any voltage.
battery test is performed. If the batteries This key must not be operated when
do not pass the test, the Replace Battery the connected CHARTPILOT is
LED then lights up. running!

☞ Normally, the UPS electronics generates the supply voltage for the connected CHARTPILOT. It takes the energy for this directly
from the ship's mains or – if the ship's mains has failed – from the internal battery.

Fig. E-1 Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP100)

406 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e66.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150
Operating Instructions

F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150

The following description refers to the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), model DLP100, from the
company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l.
The UPS is continuously in the switched-on state, and therefore does not need any operating actions.
This section of the text indicates which displays appear on the UPS during normal operation, and which
displays appear in the case of a fault.

Normal operation is displayed as follows (LED's from the bottom upwards and from right to left – see
also Figure F-1):
Load: Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's are alight. The red LED >100 must not
light up except for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being switched on).
Battery Charge: Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the batteries are
being overcharged (a case requiring service).
Mains Present (green): This must be alight as long as failure of the ship's mains does not exist.
UPS ON (green): Must be alight.
Normal Operation (green): Must be alight.
Fault/Stand-by (red): This must not be alight except after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, or
in the case of overtemperature or overloading.
(The right-hand LED in the third row has no function)
Battery Operation (yellow): This may be alight only when the UPS is receiving no power from the ship's
mains.
By-pass (green): This must not be alight except for a short time (for example when a connected unit is
being switched on).
Battery Low (yellow):
- When no power from the ship's mains is present (Mains Present is not alight): The operating system
of the CHARTPILOT is run down (because after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, the
battery has lost almost all of its charge).
- If power from the ship's mains is present (Mains Present is alight): The test performed automatically
at intervals of 40 hours has revealed that the capacity of the internal batteries is too low. The
batteries must be exchanged immediately.
☞ The batteries are maintenance-free. The task of exchanging them is performed by service
personnel.
Acoustic Signal
- During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep occurring every 7 seconds indicates that the UPS is not
receiving power from the ship's mains. When the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being
shut down, the beep occurs every 2 seconds. This signal can be switched off by pressing of the (left-
hand) ON key.
- Four long tones / a one-second pause: the battery is being overcharged.
- Continuous tone: The UPS is not delivering any voltage; the monitoring electronics will have to be
unlocked.

Unlocking the UPS and Switching it On Again

When the Fault/Stand-by LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to a long period of
failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units are
receiving power again. This cannot occur until the voltage of the ship's mains is available again.
Unlocking is performed by switching off the UPS by pressing of the OFF key.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 407

b_cp_e67.fm / 09.07.07
F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150 CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

Fault/Stand-by (red):
- Is alight if the batteries have been discharged to
Load: such an extent that the UPS is no longer producing
The loading of the UPS any voltage and the monitoring electronics is
UPS ON (green):
Is alight when the UPS is in the locked.
switched-on state and the UPS So that the connected units will again be receiving
voltage, the UPS must be unlocked by pressing of
electronics is generating voltage. the ON key.
Battery Charge:
The charging status of the If the above-mentioned causes cannot be explained
batteries. in terms of external circumstances, there is prob-
LED's flashing: the batteries ably a need for service.
are being overcharged. - Flashes when the UPS is in Stand-By mode, i.e.
Mains Present (green): when it is not delivering any voltage.
Is alight when the UPS
is in the switched-on
state and is receiving >
170 V from the ship's
mains.
Flashes if the output
voltage is not yet in
synchronism with the
voltage of the ship's
mains.

This has no
Normal Operation (green): function here.
Is alight when the
connected CHARTPILOT is
receiving its power from the
UPS electronics.

Battery Low (yellow):

Battery Operation (yellow): - If Mains Present is alight: The
Is alight if current is being batteries have become discharged to
taken from the batteries of such an extent that the supply of
the UPS (voltage of the power can be maintained for about 3
ship's mains is < 170 V). minutes only. The operating system
of the CHARTPILOT is being shut
down
By-pass (green): - If Mains Present is not alight: The
Is alight if the connected batteries must be replaced by new
ON key: ones.
CHARTPILOT is receiving its Switches the UPS on.
power directly from the ship's Suppresses the acoustic alarm from the
mains, e.g. because the load UPS while the UPS is running in battery Stand-by key:
is greater than the permis- mode. Switches the UPS to Stand-By
sible UPS load or the UPS If the key is pressed in the operating mode, i.e. the UPS does not
electronics has failed. mode for longer than five seconds, a deliver any voltage.
battery test is performed. If the batteries This key must not be operated
do not pass the test, the Replace Battery when the connected CHART-
LED then lights up. PILOT is running!

☞ Normally, the UPS electronics generates the supply voltage for the connected CHARTPILOT. It takes the energy for this
directly from the ship's mains or – if the ship's mains has failed – from the internal battery.

Fig. F-1 Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP150)

408 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e67.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG
Operating Instructions

G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG

The following description refers to the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) of the DLG series from the
company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l., which was used up until the end of 1999.
The UPS is switched on continually and therefore does not require any operating actions. From this
section of the text, you can see which displays appear on the UPS when it is running properly, and which
displays appear when there is a malfunction.
Proper operation is indicated as follows (see also Figure ):
- LOAD Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's is alight. The red
LED >100 may only be alight for a short time (e.g. while a connected unit is
being switched on).
- BATTERY Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the
batteries are being overcharged (service case).
- On The LED in the button indicates that the connected units are being supplied
with voltage.
- TIMER This function is not used.
- LINE This must be alight as long as there is no failure of the ship's mains.
- EMERGENCY This may only be alight while the UPS is not being supplied with power from
the ship's mains.
- BATTERY LOW This may only be alight after lengthy failure of the ship's mains
- REPLACE BATTERY The test which is performed automatically every 40 hours has found that the
capacity of the internal batteries is too low. The batteries must be exchanged
immediately.
☞ The batteries need no maintenance. The task of exchanging them is
done by service engineers.
- BYPASS This may only be alight for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being
switched on).
- STANDBY/FAULT This may only be alight after lengthy failure of the ship's mains. Unlocking
the UPS and switching it on again are required - see below.
- Acoustic signal During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep every 7 seconds indicates that
the UPS is not being supplied with power from the ship's mains. If BATTERY
LOW is alight, the beep occurs every 2 seconds.
A continuous tone indicates that there is overtemperature in the UPS or that
the UPS is overloaded (LED >100 alight)

Unlocking the UPS and Switching it On Again

If the STANDBY/FAULT LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to excessively long
failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units will
be supplied with voltage again. This cannot take place until the voltage of the ship's mains is available
again.
Unlocking is done by switching off the UPS by pressing the Off button. After switching it on again by
pressing the On button, the connected units should again be receiving voltage. If this is not the case, the
STANDBY/FAULT LED has lit up not because of exhausted batteries but because of overtemperature or
overloading.

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 409

b_cp_e64.fm / 09.07.07
G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

LOAD %
>100

100
Load of the UPS
75

50

25

BATTERY %

100 Charge state of the batteries

LED's flashing: Batteries are being overcharged.
80

60
Switches the UPS on. The LED in the button indicates that the connected units
40 are being supplied with voltage.
20 Switches the UPS off. This button must not be pressed when the
connected CHARTPILOT is running.

l og
Di a
Suppresses the acoustic alarm generated by the UPS while the UPS is
running in battery mode.

Not relevant

Off
Is alight when the UPS is being supplied with ship's mains voltage > 170 V.
On Is alight when current is being taken from the batteries of the UPS.

Lights up if the batteries are discharged to such an extent that the power supply
TIMER can be maintained for only 2 minutes or so. The operating system of the
CHARTPILOT is shut down.

LINE The batteries must be renewed.

EMERGENCY Is alight when the connected CHARTPILOT is receiving energy directly from the
ship's mains, e.g. because the load is greater than the permissible UPS load or
BATTERY LOW the UPS electronics has failed.
REPLACE BATTERY
Is alight if
BYPASS a) the batteries are discharged to such an extent that the UPS is no longer
supplying voltage,
STANDBY/FAULT b) there is overtemperature in the UPS, or
c) the UPS is overloaded.
The UPS must be unlocked so that the connected units will be supplied with
voltage again.
If the above-mentioned causes cannot be explained on the basis of external
circumstances, there is probably a need for service.

Fig. G-1 Displays and controls of the UPS (model series DLG)

410 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e64.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT H Keyboard Templates
Operating Instructions

✃ ✃ ✃
H Keyboard Templates

F12

F12

F12
You can cut out one of the keyboard
templates printed here and fix it above the
function keys.

Menu

Menu

Menu
F11

F11

F11
☞ The right-hand template is intended for
use in systems without a TRACKPILOT.

Tree

Tree

Tree
F10

F10

F10
Brightness

Brightness

Brightness
F9

F9

F9
Disp

Disp

Disp
Std

Std

Std
F8

F8

F8
Center

Center

Center
Set

Set

Set
F7

F7

F7
Range

Range

Range
F6

F6

F6
Event

Event

Event
F5

F5

F5
F4

F4

F4
F3

F3

F3
CONNING

CONNING
F2

F2

F2
CHART

CHART
F1

F1

F1

✃ ✃ ✃

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 411

b_cp_e63.fm / 09.07.07
H Keyboard Templates CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

412 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_e63.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT Index
Operating Instructions

Index

bearing line, see EBL

2nd Position Sensor (menu) 142 bearing scale 58
bridge alarm system 399
alarm message from b. 344, 374
A brightness
setting b. of screen 84
A/N keyboard British Admiralty Charts 83
setting the necessary click duration 340 BSH approval 24
switching the repetition function on and off 340 button 38
acoustic signal 341 clicking 38
suppressing for particular alarms 341 buzzer on/off 343
address-lists 323
Aids-to-Navigation 67
data display 76 C
AIS targets
collision course 63 Cancel button 44
display data 76 Cancel key of the membrane keyboard 36
displaying/printing information about A. 74 care 395
term 60 Cassini 160
alarm list 342 catalog
switching the display on and off 342 for files of the User Chart Objects 313
alarm outputs 399 for text pages 326
Alarm Settings (menu) 107 for track and waypoint files 179
alarms 341 for track, map, waypoint files 218, 311
recording the a. 336 generation of 180, 311
Anchor watch 185 listing/printing the content 312
Apply button 44 renaming of 312
ARCS charts CD
see also raster chart ARCS Charts 279
chart type 80 ARCS Update CD 279
data maintenance 278 CM-93/Pro 289
deleting charts 287 dirty CD 250
deleting the database 244 ENC Base CD 253, 268
marking changed regions 91 ENC Update CD 253, 268
permits 279 CD drive 23
transferring charts 282, 283, 307 dirty CD drive 250
update 284 cells 80
area (CM-93/2 chart) 304 centered display 92, 93
area (CM-93/3 chart) 290 chart
ARPA targets calibrating on the digitizer 157
collision course 63 preparation 159
display data 76 reference points 158, 159
displaying/printing information about A. 74 CHART (button in the Tree) 30
switching the display on and off 60 chart area
term 60 division 53
arrival attribute 173, 225 empty and grey 87
arrival point 225 switching individual displays on and off 53
defining of 232 chart editor 80
Arrival Speed 174, 225 chart excerpt 159
arrival time 228 chart mode 35
Authorization Code (CM-93/2 charts) 304 chart range, see range 86
chart status field 52
chart types 79
B CHARTPILOT
functions in chart mode 35
backup 315 functions in conning mode 357
Backup (menu) 314, 322 reducing computer workload 78
Bad Scale (display) 88 slave indicator 23
base station 67 slave monitor 23
basic menu line 51 switching off 31
bearing switching on 29
determination of b. between objects 114 switch-over the mode 30
determination of b. of objects 113

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 413

b_cp_eix.fm / 09.07.07
 Index CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

CHARTPILOT program ECDIS Monitoring 110

aborting and restarting of 32 editing 190
CHARTPILOT station 23 data backup
CHARTPILOT terminal 23 ARCS permits 281
switching off 31 ENC permits 255
switching on 29 system parameters 337
clicking 38 text pages 325
CM-93/2 chart track-, map-, waypoint-, User Chart Object- data 313
see also vector chart track-, waypoint-, User Chart Object- data 313
chart type 80 voyage recording 329
code of the navigational purpose 81 data displays 54, 67, 374
data maintenance 304 switching the display on and off 68
deleting the database 244 data input 49
geographical structure 81 data saving
subscription 304 see data backup
transferring cells 306, 307 database 35, 235
update 306 deleting complete d. 244
CM-93/3Pro chart date/time (menu) 145
see also vector chart Datum mism. (display) 163
cells 81 datum, see coordinate system
chart type 80 dead reckoning 143
code of the navigational purpose 81 dead reckoning position, correction of 143
data maintenance 289 deep contour 103
deleting the database 244 Delete button 44
geographical structure 81 delete tracks 311
licences 290 departure time 228
transferring cells 297, 298 depth alarm 107
update 261, 299 depth contours 103
collision avoidance 79 DGPS receiver 141
colour 215 dialog box 46
colour faults on screen 30 changing the size 46
colour information in this document 85 shifting 46
colour reproduction of the monitors 106, 395 digitizer 169, 212
compass 137 ending work with d. 161
configuration file 337 setting up 157
CONNING (button in the Tree) 30 switching off 31, 170
conning data display 71 switching on 29
conning mode 357 digitizer cursor 57, 159, 169
coordinate system 97, 157, 163, 169, 208, 380 digitizer cursor display 53, 159
conversion of c. (raster charts) 162 digitizer pointer 169
in the editing of tracks 153 diskette 314, 316, 320, 329, 337
course and speed vector of own ship 59 displacement 389
switching the display on and off 59 display base 100
course and speed vectors of radar targets display mode 91
display 63 Display Mode menu 95
relative and true display 63, 93 display standard 100
switching the display on and off 63 DNV approval 24, 66, 80, 110, 111, 138, 141, 178, 224
course change DO key 36
see radius Docking display 72
course limit docking manoeuvre 68
ECDIS monitoring 106 Docking page 369
programming 175 draught 389
course transfer 137 drift, manual input 138
course up RM 92, 94 DVD 289
course vector, see course and speed vector DVD drive 237
current-sailing problems, solving of 383
cursor 38
control 36 E
form 38 EBL 113, 114
cursor display 53 switching off the display 116
cylindrical equal spaced 160 EBL2 display 53
ECDIS 79
ECDIS Chart No.1 76
D ECDIS monitoring 106
danger highlight 185 connection with the TRACKPILOT 108
see also User Chart Object System Track against vector chart 111

414 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eix.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT Index
Operating Instructions

edit (menu) GC, see great circle

tracks 208 geodetic datum 97
editing 49 GPS mode 141
editing cursor 39 graphic elements in chart area 56
electronic bearing line, see EBL great circle 173
electronic chart 35, 99 grey shade display 85
cells 80 grid 58, 160
defining objects to be displayed 99 guard sector 108
display groups 100 gyro, see compass 137
object classes 100
switching display on/off 79
types (vector chart or raster chart) 79 H
ENC hard disk drive 235, 250, 267, 277, 306, 313, 316
see also vector chart head up RM 92, 94
base file 267 heading line 58
cell, information about the c. 274 switching the display on and off 58
cells 81
chart type 79
code of the navigational purpose 81 I
data maintenance 251 ID 168
deleting cells 264 ideal purpose, see vector chart
deleting the database 244 IHO S-52 35
geographical structure 81 IHO S-57 35
marking of changes 102 INFO key 36
name of the base file 267 information
name of the update file 267 displaying/printing i. about an object 74
objects displayed 76 input field 39
permits 253, 254 insensitive display 38
transferring cells 257, 258 INT 1 76
update (licensed ENC) 259
update (unlicensed ENC) 252, 263
update file 267 K
estimated position 143
estimated time of arrival 225 keel clearance page 372
ETA 225 keyboard 36
event see also A/N keyboard
displaying/printing information about an e. 74 using the k. instead of trackball 41
marking 131 keyboard illumination 84
symbol 58 keyboard template 411
event marker, deletion of 58, 133 keys
Events (menu) 132 overview of functions 37
Exit button 78
extension map 180
external alarm displays 378 L
licence 241, 251
licence expiry date 256, 295
F linepoint 206
fans deletion of 211
checking 395 generating with digitizer 213
feature area 185 generation of 210
editing 190 insertion of 210
feature line 185 shifting of 210
editing 190 lists 40
filter pads marking lines 41
exchanging/cleaning 395 local database 35, 240
fixed star data, determination of 387 long-term recording 327
focus frame 41
function keys
keyboard template 411 M
overview 37 main program, 78
function overview, see tree maintenance work 395
manoeuvre
display of impossible m. 65
G manual ENC update
Gauss conformal cylindrical 160 data maintenance 277
Gauss-Krueger 97, 160 editing 192

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 415

b_cp_eix.fm / 09.07.07
 Index CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

manual ENC update file 193 objects of vector charts 80

map 22, 206 OK button 44
administrative data 206 Own Chart
conversion 320 see also vector chart
displaying/printing information about m. 74 cell 82
generation of 207, 208 chart type 80
printing of data in list form 219 data maintenance 277
storing of 218 editing 197
map name 218 geographical structure 82
map number 218 Own MARPOL line 185
map symbols 206 MARPOL
deletion of 211 see also own MARPOL line
generating alphanumerically 216 own MARPOL line
generating with digitizer 212, 213 ECDIS monitoring 110
generation of 211 editing 190
shifting of 211 own safety line 185
symbols used 216 see also User Chart Object
taking over from existing map 211 ECDIS monitoring 110
mapline 206 editing 190
cutting a m. 211 own ship vector, see course and speed vector of own ship
generating alphanumerically 214 own ship’s data, recording of 334
generating with digitizer 212 own ship’s symbol
generation of 210 defining position on screen 95
pattern 215 display 58
taking over from existing map 211 switching the display on and off 58
maps 61 own speed
Maps (menu) 207 determination of the longitudinal and transverse speed
MARPOL 73/78 185 140
measured mile run 384 manual input of 140
measurement line 114 owner 168
menu
calling from tree 46
context-sensitive m. 45 P
operating a context m. 45 paper chart No. 157, 159
operating a hierarchical m. 42 parameter point
switching the display on and off 42 display 65
Mercator 97, 160 insertion of 162
monitor parameter point attribute 173
calibration 84 passage list 231
monitoring display mode 92 passage plan 225
MORE key 36 see also voyage planning
mouse 36 activation 225, 232
for mouse functions, see trackball throughout the en- defining the arrival point 232
tire document generation of 227
keys 36 input of planned time of arrival 228
input of planned time of departure 228
printing of 228
N printing of data 231
NACOS status display 377 speed limitation 227, 232
nautical calculations 379 past plot
nautical data switching the display on and off 59
protocolling the n. 335 past plot of own ship 59
navigation data line 51 past plots of radar targets 64
navigation page 359 relative and true display 64
navigation sensors pattern
setting of 136 of maplines 215
navigational purpose 80 pattern of tracks 66
NGO 160 permits 241
north up RM 92, 94 ARCS chart 279
notes 323 ENC cell 253, 254
Notices to Mariners 282, 283, 284 pilot card 388
numbers, input of 49 Pilot Data 149
Pilot menu 73
plan 83, 89
O Planned Speed 174, 225
object classes 109 planning display mode 96, 155

416 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eix.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT Index
Operating Instructions

defining the centre of the displayed chart-excerpt 96 rhumb line 173

position data route, see track
checking the accuracy 142 rudder economy
position fix programming 175
deleting mark 134
marking 133
position sensor 141 S
accuracy 60 safety contour 103
recording the selected p. 335 safety depth 104
selection 141 sailing
position times 59 in coastal approaches 359
switching the display on and off 59 in shallow water 372
position, determination of p. of object 113 on the open sea 359
position-reckoning calculation 380 sailing mode 173
POWER DOWN (button in the Tree) 31 changing the track by changing the sailing mode 233
prediction SAR aircraft 60
display 59 scale bar 58
switching the display on and off 59 scale field 88
pre-planned track 147 Scale Minimum 194, 204
see also track screen
Presentation (menu) 57 printing the content of the s. 77
printer 77 screen division 50
switching on 29, 31 scrolling 40
Profile Speed 175, 225 second position sensor
Programmed Track 22 checking of position accuracy 142
projection 97, 160 display of past plot 60
see also coordinate system selection of 142
protocol prints 333 switching on and off the display of past plot 60
purchase licence 290 SENC 35
set gyro 137
shallow contour 103
R ship's mains failure 32
radar 1000 series 25 slave indicator
radar 9xxx series 25 switching off 31
radius 148, 174 switching on 29
range 86 slave monitor
automatic switch over (raster charts) 90 switching off 31
determining r. between objects 115 switching on 29
determining r. from objects 114 sleeping targets 117, 118
raster charts 88 sliding controller 39
vector charts 86 SOLAS Regulation V20 79
range field 51, 86 specifying the centre of the chart excerpt 133, 134
range for raster charts, see raster chart: selecting r. to be speed sensor 138
displayed recording the selected s. 335
range rings 57 selection of 138
raster charts Speed Sensor (menu) 139, 140
see also ARCS charts speed vector, see course and speed vector
automatically selection of the chart 88 speed, see own speed
chart projection 82 SPEEDPILOT display 53
displaying of existing r. 237 SPEEDPILOT, recording the selected mode 335
displaying/printing general data 74 SRNC 35
displaying/printing notices and diagrams of r. 74 standard display, fast switch-over to 56
horizontal datum 82 status displays of the NACOS components 377
legal aspects 79 stern line 60
limited functionality 82 switching the display on and off 60
name 89 subroutines 78
selection of the r. to be displayed 88 subscription 241
setting of the r. to be displayed 88 subscription expiry date 256, 295
structure 82 subscription licence 290
zooming 89 sunrises and sunsets, determination of 385
RCDS 80 system parameters 337
reckoning 380 system position 143
regions of the ARCS charts 83, 91 System Track
remark about the waypoint 173 checking the S.T. 222
rendezvous point of two ships, calculation of 382 defining of S.T. 222
Reset button 44 deselection of present S.T. 222

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 417

b_cp_eix.fm / 09.07.07
 Index CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

general 221 Track/Control display 69, 376

system version, determination of 340 Track/Schedule display 70, 375
systems with radar 1000 series 25 trackball
systems with radar 9xxx series 25 separate 36
setting the cursor speed 340
TRACKPILOT
T recording the selected mode 335
target recording the switching on and off 335
term 60 TRACKPILOT display 53
target vector, see course and speed vectors of radar tar- Tracks (menu) 151
gets tree of Chart mode 47
text labels 102 tree of Conning mode 358
text notes 185 trial manoeuvre 129
editing 191 true motion 92, 93
Text Pages true motion reset 95
generation, changing of 323 setting the reset area 95
management of 325
texts
editing of 49 U
Tiles 91 UK Hydrographic Office 80
time labels uninterruptible power supply 31
display 59 displays, operating procedures 405, 407, 409
switching the display on and off 59 update
time markers ARCS charts 284
display 64 CM-93/2 chart 306
time schedule, see voyage planning CM-93/3Pro chart 261, 299
time zone 145 ENC (licensed) 259
to track 174 ENC (unlicensed) 263
to waypoint 174 UPS 31
track 61, 147 User Chart Object
administrative data 149 areas 190, 191
check against the electronic chart 177 displaying/printing data 74
checking 175 editing 185
data input methods 151 files 313
direction of t. 148 identifying the U. 105
display 65 lines 190
displaying of existing tracks on world chart 238 saving 185
displaying/printing data of elements of the t. 74 switching the display on and off 105
generation, work steps 152 symbols 188
geometrical check 176 User Code (CM-93/2 Chart) 304
input of administrative data 151 User Permit Number (ENC) 253, 279
loading 156 UTC 145
notes about t. 180 UTM 97, 160
preparation of change 155
printing of data in list form 182
reversing the direction of 167 V
storing 180 variable range marker, see VRM
switching the display on and off 65 vector chart
track alarms 107, 108 see also ENC, CM-93/3Pro chart, CM-93/2 chart
track control mode 174 display of available v. 86
track file displaying of existing v. 237
assigning to a different catalog 312 displaying/printing data relating objects of 74
copying onto the hard disk drive 316 displaying/printing general data 74
data restoration 316 ideal purpose 86
loading 156 legal aspects 79
management 311 measures for the display 99
track limit objects 80
ECDIS monitoring 107 structure 80
programming 175 vector, see course and speed vectors
setting the T. 107 Visibility Groups
track line menu 101
display of the course 65 voyage planning 147
to System Track 223 see also passage plan
track name 180 at constant speed 227, 232
track number 179 changing an activated voyage plan 233
track segment 148 on basis of Planned Speed values 225

418 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eix.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT Index
Operating Instructions

with constant speed 227

voyage preparation 221
voyage recording
execution 327
printing of content 330, 332
recorded data 401
replay 331
voyage time, planning of, see voyage planning
VRM 114
switching off the display 116

W
waypoint 148
alphanumeric generation of 163, 165
copying of 166
defining a w. to be approached 233
defining the w. to be approached 222
deletion of 162, 166
enlarged display of approach 115
generation using electronic chart 161
generation with digitizer 169
generation, methods 151
insertion 161, 166, 170
sequence of w. generation 153
shifting 162
symbol in track display 65
taking over from existing track 162, 167
taking over from waypoint file 162, 167
waypoint approach
setting the alarm limit 107
waypoint data 149
editing of 170
sequence of editing of 153
track 149
waypoint file 168, 183
see also track file
generating 183
loading 155
waypoint list 164
configuring of 163
waypoint name, see remark about the waypoint
waypoint notes 174
waypoint number 172
waypoint position 173
waypoint zoom 115
weather routing 316
wheel over point 107, 148
display 65
WOP, see wheel over point
world chart 237

Z
zone (CM-93/2 chart) 304
zone (CM-93/3Pro chart) 290
zone time 145

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 419

b_cp_eix.fm / 09.07.07
 Index CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions

420 ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05)

b_cp_eix.fm / 09.07.07
CHARTPILOT Notes
Operating Instructions

Notes

Space for your notes:

ED 3032 G 232 / 11 (2007-05) 421

b_cp_eno.fm / 09.07.07